<<

Science

¾ Scientific Validation of the UB

z By Denver Pearson

z By Phil Calabrese

¾ Seraphic Velocities

¾ Astronomy The Scientific Integrity of the Urantia Book by Denver Pearson As scientifically minded readers first peruse the Urantia Book, it soon occurs to them that many of its statements on the natural sciences conflict with currently held data and theories. In the minds of many this gives rise to doubts about the truthfulness of those statements. Wisdom would lead us to realize that nothing short of perfection is perfect, and anything touched by human hands has fingerprints. This should be our guiding thoughts as we contemplate the accuracy of the scientific content of the Urantia Papers. Several ago, at the first scientific symposium, it was implied by one of the speakers that the revelation contains errors. This implication is alarming. More recently, at the second symposium held in Oklahoma, an interesting publication named "The Science Content of The Urantia Book" was made available (this document is obtainable from the Brotherhood of Man Library). In this publication is an article entitled "Time Bombs" in which the author suggests that the revelators planted certain inaccurate scientific statements in the book in order to prevent it from becoming a fetish. He states "...the revelators incorporated safeguards in the papers that would form The Urantia Book to diminish the tendency to regard it as an object of worship. What safeguards did they use? Suppose they decided to make sure that mortals reading it understood that some cosmological statements in the book would be found to be inaccurate". After many years of detailed study in The Urantia Book, I can't honestly recall anytime when any of its concepts contradicted themselves, nor did I feel that I was being told something that was untrue. It's one thing to foolishly claim absolute perfection for the book, but it's quite another to lead other readers to believe that by divine mandate the revelators were forced to use erroneous data, or even worse yet, to intentionally plant inaccurate information for any reason, so-called "time bombs". In my own experience and that of others, I'd say that the problem with the scientific inaccuracies we think we find in the book might really be our own preconceived notion that modern science is infallible; or our hang-ups about literature claiming to have divine origins; or even something as simple as not reading the text carefully. We all know there have been a few typographical errors and minor word changes or corrections (fingerprints), and we are also informed in several places that the revelator's concepts are subject to distortion by the limitations of human language and by the comprehension level of the mortal mind. The typos and word changes don't effect the soundness of the revelation and are almost expected with such a voluminous literary work. The distortions referred to are to be found in sections of the book regarding very high spiritual concepts and in areas discussing aspects of the spiritual realm about which humans know nothing, such as the activities of the celestial artisans. Although unfortunately distorted, these concepts are very helpful in enabling us to catch a glimpse of the magnitude of our Father's eternal realities. But we are not talking now about typos and distortions. These are not the problem. The source of the controversy is in the discussion of the natural sciences, in areas where The Urantia Book and modern scientific theories diverge. In becoming aware of the differences between current science and the revelation, we are forced to come to the conclusion that both can't be right, and somehow we must make a decision between them. At once we grapple with the idea of facing the possibility that something is fishy somewhere. How can we test the two sources? What test would be adequate to resolve this horribly annoying problem? How about using our common sense and the track records of The Urantia Book and of science. As gullible children growing up in the new scientific age of discovery we naturally accepted the no nonsense authority of what we were told. Who were we to question these great minds who were probing all the nooks and crannies of known reality. It has always been easier to accept their information as gospel rather than go looking for it ourselves. I generally still do but with a grain of salt. We are told in the UB "...faith does not maintain an unreasoning prejudice toward the discoveries of scientific investigation". So let us be reasonable. Only recently have I become aware that this thing called science is an extremely imperfect process conducted by extremely imperfect individuals. The word "process" is the key word here. Universal reality is a constant, and science is that hit or miss process whereby we attempt to understand that reality. How do we know if we have a hit or miss? Only time will tell, and the art of scientific discovery is still very young. Our contention with some scientists should be that their theories are spun and cast in gold before all the data is in or regardless of contrary data. Yes, there is usually contrary data opposing any theory, but it is usually ignored during publication, which makes the theory appear, to the casual reader, to be unanimously accepted by the world of science. Two current examples of this are the Big Bang theory, which is now losing support, and a rather new theory that claims that the dinosaurs became extinct due to a meteor hitting the . I predict that this idea itself will become extinct in a few years. Neither of these theories jive with The Urantia Book. Which do you believe? How could someone come to the conclusion, when The Urantia Book and science don't agree, that the book is the one in error? This is particularly interesting due to the fact that the history of science is plagued with contradictory theories, incompleteness and even deception. Part of the answer may be this. We've been conditioned in this century to judge so-called sacred writings of the past by their physical absurdities and lack of factual accuracies in light of current information. This is because much of their science content is metaphysically based. Metaphysics is that method of explaining reality by means of our mental observations as opposed to the more accurate method of discovery and testing. It is very interesting that modern science does both, many times conjecturing (conjuring up) elaborate theories based on one small shred of flimsy evidence. In my astronomy book the author even admits that the measuring of distant is based on the assumption of the uniformity of nature. He also admits that present errors in measuring distances may be fifty percent or larger. Amazing, isn't it? We should have a healthy respect for science but not be afraid to scrutinize its findings either. We are all aware of the great contributions the scientific community has made to our world. For one thing, it has reduced superstition to a point where religionists have had to re-evaluate their beliefs and purge themselves of false teachings. This is still in process. Without modern science and its repercussions we wouldn't have The Urantia Book in our midst today. In fact it was the book that really made me aware of our silly superstitious nature. We can have a genuine love for science but still be concerned with its inaccuracies when used as a ruler to measure the revelation. Now, if someone insists that current scientific opinion is right, and The Urantia Book is in error, then they must justify in their mind why this is the case. Here is where the trouble starts. They begin searching for an explanation in the book itself. They search a supposedly inaccurate book for a statement to prove its own inaccuracies. Once they find an explanation, they can relax having found a mental loophole to slip through when confronted with controversial information. Time and again it is stated that the revelators were mandated to use the science of the times, to give preference to the highest existing human concepts. And now that new discoveries have been made, the revelation appears to be in error. The acknowledgment in the beginning of the book seems to be one of the sources for this idea. It says that in coordinating essential knowledge the authors must give preference to the highest concepts pertaining to the subjects to be presented (p.16). No matter how I read that line, I never get the impression that in coordinating essential knowledge there was the need to purposefully include inaccuracies. (In carefully reading the acknowledgment it seems that it is talking mainly about things of spiritual value.) We've already determined that with high spiritual concepts there is some distortion, but when concerned with the mechanical simplicity of the physical sciences this hardly seems sensible. There are too many instances in the book where the science of the time was not used, or in fact was corrected. Continental drift is one example (p.668), and the calculations for the sun's mass is another (p.459). On page 1109, the so-called "disclaimer", the authors also claim that their statements regarding the physical sciences will stand in need of revision because of new discoveries and developments, and that they were forbidden to include these undiscovered facts in these records. Once again, there is no implication that they had to use untrue statements. Limited yes, but not untrue. Because men and angels alike must search and discover the physical nature of the (it's not inspired), it would be unfair for angels to reveal information to us that we have yet to discover. The thing that will catch the attention of future students of this revelation will be the noticeable omissions of scientific data. These errors of omission will make certain statements outdated and stand in need of revision as the scientific process rolls on. Does this mean we are actually going to receive a revision at some future date? Not necessarily. During the expansion of the United States maps contained only those states that belonged to the Union. The first maps had only thirteen, and as additional states joined the Federation the maps were revised to include these new states. Now that we have maps with fifty states does it make those early maps untrue? No. They are "in need of revision" and are erroneous only in comparison to current data due to omissions, but they are accurate in context. It has been suggested that the revelators purposefully planted erroneous information in the book, "time bombs" that would explode on the page flawing the content of the book thus making it tainted and unattractive to those readers who would make it a fetish. In all my years of study I've never come across anyone with a Urantia Book fetish. In fact, just the contrary. We mark it up, spill things on it, and leave it lying around on the floor. This is like saying Adam and Eve purposely stumbled and fell constantly so they wouldn't be worshipped as Gods. This an is insult to the intelligence of those individuals who are at a level capable of excepting high truth. We do have a healthy reverence for the book though, because it is a beautiful work of literary art. Even opponents of the book recognize its commanding use of English. One such so-called "time bomb" is contained in a complicated paragraph on page 657. It states "The nearest the sun were the first to have their revolutions slowed down by tidal friction. Such gravitational influences also contribute to the stabilization of planetary orbits while acting as a brake on the rate of planetary-axial revolution, causing a to revolve ever slower until axial revolution ceases, leaving one hemisphere of the planet always turned toward the sun or larger body, as is illustrated by the planet Mercury and by the , which always turns the same face toward Urantia." At the time of the revelation the scientific community believed that Mercury showed the same side toward the sun. In 1965 it was proved to the contrary. A casual reading makes it seem as if the writers were expressing the science of the time. It has been suggested that because the revelators knew this, they must have used erroneous material to create flaws in an otherwise near perfect book to prevent fetishism. The real problem seems to be a misreading of this complicated paragraph. It expresses two ideas in two interrelated sentences. The first sentence introduces the main topic which is planets slowing down by tidal friction. The second is a compound-complex one of parallel construction with several dependent clauses explaining what eventually happens to a planet affected by tidal friction. In it we have two ideas and two examples of those ideas; planets revolving ever slower (Mercury) until axial revolution ceases (the moon). It is easy to see how confusion comes from a sentence so structured with multiple dependent clauses. I'd like to address one other suggested "time bomb" that has been addressed in the past without resolution. The Urantia Book says that those mortals achieving the third psychic circle acquire their own personal pair of guardian angels who, upon the death of their ward, proceed to the mansion worlds there to await the resurrection. For these individuals this resurrection takes place "on the third day" or less frequently stated "on the third period". What is a "period" by the way? Because some readers insist on interpreting "on the third day/period" as only meaning a three day time period, such as occurred with the resurrection of Jesus, they are confronted with the problem of how seraphim, who can proceed at no more than three times the speed of light, are able to arrive on the mansion worlds several light years away within a three day time period. This is a very perplexing problem, but must we resort to distorting time and bending space to make it work out? In my opinion the revelation makes it seem clear that transportation through space is a fairly simple go from this place to that place procedure, except for certain personalities like the Messengers who seem to be unconditioned by time and space. There are some readers who feel that there might be a manner of transportation yet unrevealed to us for some reason that would account for this problem of seraphic travel over great distances in a relatively short period of time. The best explanation I have heard for this problem is that "on the third day/period" refers to an indefinite time period that is of a short duration rather than a long one. Something similar to the common Jewish expression of Jesus' time, "on the third day", which signified "presently" or "soon thereafter" (p.1872). This is similar to the way we use "a hop, skip, and a jump" to signify a short distance as opposed to a long one. It doesn't stand to reason that the mandates encouraged the placing of inaccurate science and cosmology in a revelation that was designed to "reduce confusion by authoritative elimination of error" (p1109). The idea of divine deception is repugnant, and I hardly think the Ancients of Days would authorize such mandates. The mandates concerning the physical sciences could have been something as simple as this; 1. If any human mind has conceived anything remotely related to the fact, then the authors could re-state it with more clarity. It didn't have to be a common or published idea. This could give rise to many apparently predictive statements. 2. If a certain line of scientific investigation is proceeding toward a definite discovery in the very near future, then the authors could reveal that discovery before its time knowing that scientists wouldn't be reading the revelation, thus not revealing undiscovered facts. This too would produce predictive statements. 3. If current data is incorrect in any known theory, then it can be corrected complying with the first two mandates. This is just a suggestion as to what some of the mandates may have been. If there are verifiable flaws to be found in the revelation, then, in my opinion, they must be due to recording errors, printing errors or some aspect involving the production of the book itself. But how do we really determine what is in error, if anything? Whose ruler do we use? This is my great concern. I'm only confident that we are not being deceived, pampered, or "time bombed" here, for the only thing we can know for certain is that the truth will prevail. We are currently laying the foundation for the future students of the fifth epochal revelation. But if our foundation becomes attached to the authority of a fallible modern science, then this movement will be just as crippled as Christianity is today, which is dragging around Western civilization like a ball and chain. In order to proceed safely into the truth of this revelation and of today's science, we now need the aid of Spirit led investigators with no other motive than to just discover the truth, beauty, and goodness of our fascinating cosmic home, a home filled with wonders yet to be uncovered. QuickTime™ and a TIFF (LZW) decompressor are needed to see this picture.

Data Synthesis TheThe ComingComing ScientificScientific San Diego, CA ValidationValidation ofof TheThe UrantiaUrantia BookBook Philip Calabrese, Ph.D.

The Urantia Book Fellowship International Conference (IC’ 05) MAKING SPIRIT MATTER: The Next 50 Years

Villanova University Villanova, Pennsylvania

July 30 - August 4, 2005 OverviewOverview ofof PresentationPresentation

1) The Urantia Book has predicted many implausible and subsequently verified scientific facts better than our scientists while also successfully avoiding untenable systematic errors, unlike our scientists; 2) Therefore, on statistical grounds, only superhumans could have written the science and cosmology of The Urantia Book; 3) The cosmology of The Urantia Book while “transient” (a few hundred years in this context) is also of “immense value” in this transition period and beyond; 4) Examples of immensely valuable “instruction in cosmology” from The Urantia Book; 5) Soon-coming scientific predictions of The Urantia Book; 6) The future value of the cosmology of The Urantia Book. WasWas TheThe UrantiaUrantia BookBook WrittenWritten byby HumanHuman Beings?Beings? PotentiallyPotentially DiscreditingDiscrediting PitfallPitfall AvoidedAvoided

ƒ “Piltdown Man” - The 1912 & 1917 “Missing Link” fossils, a hoax finally exposed and discredited after 1950. ƒ Even as late as 1947 the fossils were still generally believed to be real. [Har03]

ƒ Although the evolution of vegetable life can be traced into animal life, and though there have been found graduated series of plants and animals which progressively lead up from the most simple to the most complex and advanced organisms, you will not be able to find such connecting links between the great divisions of the animal kingdom nor between the highest of the prehuman animal types and the dawn men of the human races. These so-called "missing links" will forever remain missing, for the simple reason that they never existed. The Urantia Book, Page-669 Line-24 Para ContinentalContinental DriftDrift

ƒ Pangaea - Alfred Wegener’s 1920’s theory of a single continent that broke apart and “drifted” (largely rejected by 1929, vindicated in the late1950’s and 60’s). [Wag96], [Hug05], [Wei05]

ƒ“750,000,000 years ago the first breaks in the continental land mass began as the great north-and-south cracking, which later admitted the ocean waters and prepared the way for the west-ward drift of the continents of North and South America, including Greenland. The long east-and-west cleavage separated Africa from Europe and severed the land masses of Australia, the Pacific Islands, and Antarctica from the Asiatic continent.” Page-663 Line-3 Para-1 MountainsMountains andand EarthquakesEarthquakes

ƒ Continents float on liquid rock; allowed “continental drift”; collisions cause mountains; shifting now causes earthquakes; periodic submergence continues. ƒ “The outer crust was about forty miles thick. This outer shell was supported by, and rested directly upon, a molten sea of basalt of varying thickness, a mobile layer of molten lava held under high pressure but always tending to flow hither and yon in equalization of shifting planetary pressures, thereby tending to stabilize the earth's crust. Even today the continents continue to float upon this non- crystallized cushiony sea of molten basalt. Were it not for this protective condition, the more severe earthquakes would literally shake the world to pieces. Earthquakes are caused by sliding and shifting of the solid outer crust and not by volcanoes.” Page-668 Line-27 Para-6 & 7 InjuryInjury RepairRepair PredictionPrediction

ƒ “In experimental partial resection in the rat, the remaining liver tissue starts to regenerate within a few hours. …dead liver cells are replaced by proliferation of surviving liver cells. Hepatocytes, Kupffer cells, endothelium, bile ducts, vessels, all proliferate.” “The factor(s) stimulating proliferation of remaining hepatocytes are not known. T(h)ey may be humoral. Indeed: 1) blood from a partially hepatectomized animal induces a proliferative response in the liver of a non-operated animal.” [Orf01] Emilio Orfei, Department of Pathology, Loyola University of Chicago, 2001

ƒ “When a living cell is injured, it possesses the ability to elaborate certain chemical substances which are empowered so to stimulate and activate the neighboring normal cells that they immediately begin the secretion of certain substances which facilitate healing processes in the wound; and at the same time these normal and uninjured cells begin to proliferate-- they actually start to work creating new cells to replace any fellow cells which may have been destroyed by the accident.” Page-735 Line-7 Para-2 TheThe LimitationsLimitations ofof RevelationRevelation ƒIs all or most of The Urantia Book’s science already outdated - merely transient early 20th century cosmology? ƒAre the numerous differences between contemporary science and The Urantia Book’s cosmology “errors on the face” of The Urantia Book evident after “a few short years”? ƒSince the cosmology of The Urantia Book is “not inspired”, and the revelators were not permitted to reveal “unearned” or pre-mature knowledge, how valuable can its cosmological discourses be? ScientificScientific (&(& Spiritual)Spiritual) ValueValue ofof TheThe UrantiaUrantia BookBook ƒ Immense value in reducing confusion by the authoritative elimination of error ƒ Immense value in co-ordination of known or about-to- be-known facts and observations ƒ Immense value in the restoration of important bits of lost knowledge concerning epochal transactions in the distant past ƒ Immense value in supplying information which will fill in vital missing gaps in otherwise earned knowledge ƒ Immense value by presenting cosmic data in such a manner as to illuminate the spiritual teachings contained in the accompanying revelation Page-1109 Line-40 Para-7 AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions FulfilledFulfilled (Billions(Billions ofof )Universes)

ƒ “In the not-distant future, new telescopes will reveal to the wondering gaze of Urantian astronomers no less than 375 million new galaxies in the remote stretches of .” Page-130, Line-47

ƒ “The relatively quiet zones between the space levels, such as the one separating the seven superuniverses from the first outer space level, are enormous elliptical regions of quiescent space activities. These zones separate the vast galaxies which race around Paradise in orderly procession.” Page-125 Line-6 AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions ConfirmedConfirmed (Huge(Huge )Redshifts)

“Although your spectroscopic estimations of astronomic velocities are fairly reliable when applied to the starry realms belonging to your superuniverse and its associate superuniverses, such reckonings with reference to the realms of outer space are wholly unreliable. Spectral lines are displaced from the normal towards the violet by an approaching ; likewise these lines are displaced towards the red by a receding star. Many influences interpose to make it appear that the recessional velocity of the external universes increases at the rate of more than one hundred miles a second for every million light-years increase in distance. By this method of reckoning, subsequent to the perfection of more powerful telescopes, it will appear that these far-distant systems are in flight from this part of the universe at the unbelievable rate of more than thirty thousand miles a second. But this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” Page-134 Line-15 AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions ConfirmedConfirmed (Outer(Outer SpaceSpace Zones)Zones)

ƒ “You may visualize the first outer space level, where untold universes are now in process of formation, as a vast procession of galaxies swinging around Paradise, bounded above and below by the midspace zones of quiescence and bounded on the inner and outer margins by relatively quiet space zones.” Page-125 Para-1 ƒ “The Outer Space Levels. Far out in space, at an enormous distance from the seven inhabited superuniverses, there are assembling vast and unbelievably stupendous circuits of force and materializing energies. Between the energy circuits of the seven superuniverses and this gigantic outer belt of force activity, there is a space zone of comparative quiet, which varies in width but averages about four hundred thousand light-years. These space zones are free from star dust--cosmic fog.” Page-129 Line-45 AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions FulfilledFulfilled (“Walls”(“Walls” andand “Voids”)“Voids”)

ƒ “The first maps, published in 1986, were a great surprise to the astrophysicists. They had expected to find relative uniformity above the scale of the already- familiar clusters. Instead, the first surveys showed--and subsequent surveys have confirmed--that great clusters of galaxies are arranged in thin sheets or long filaments.” Michael Norman, NCSA/Univ. of Illinois ƒ North and South, Sheets and Voids, Margaret J. Geller and Emilio E. Falco, Harvard-Smithsonian Center for Astrophysics.

ƒ The Earth is at the center. Each of 9,325 points in this image represents a galaxy in the northern and E southern galactic hemispheres; unmapped a r regions are inaccessible because the plane of the t obscures them. Note the “ring of h galaxies” centered around a location in the obscured region. Center of predicted ring of galaxies AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions FulfilledFulfilled (Rotational(Rotational SpeedSpeed && DarkDark Matter)Matter)

ƒ Galactic rotational speeds. ƒ As reported in Science Frontiers in 1982, “According to the physical laws governing orbital motion in a central force field, like that of our sun, distant objects should rotate more slowly than those closer to the central mass.” … “Doppler measurements of galaxy rotations made by Vera C. Rubin and her colleagues, at the Carnegie Institution, indicate that most out near the galactic rims rotate just as fast or faster than those closer to the hub.” [Cor82] ƒ . The Urantia Book Predicted the existence of dark matter holding fast spinning galaxies together. (Page-173 Line-3 Para-1) NeutrinosNeutrinos ƒ Neutrinos Exist. • Predicted by W. Pauli in 1931 and incorporated by E. Fermi in 1934 into his theory of atomic decay • First observed in 1959 by Clyde Cowan and Fred Reines. [Bar98] ƒ The 1955 Urantia Book affirmed Fermi’s unproved theory: “The mesotronic disintegration is also accompanied by the emission of certain small uncharged particles.” Page-479 Para-3 (Mesotrons are now called mesons.) ƒ Neutrinos Have Mass. Only in 1998 did our scientists discover that neutrinos have mass, upsetting their “standard theory”: ƒ “A Weighty Discovery in Particle Physics. In June 1998, an international team of Japanese and U.S. physicists unveiled strong evidence that elusive subatomic particles known as neutrinos have mass (or weight).” [Inf05] ƒ “The integrity of the nucleus is maintained by the reciprocal cohering function of the mesotron, which is able to hold charged and uncharged particles together because of superior force-mass power and by the further function of causing protons and neutrons constantly to change places.” Page-479 Line-9 Para-2 ProbabilityProbability ofof HumanHuman AuthorshipAuthorship

What is the probability of human authors guessing correctly that: ƒ No “missing link” exists: Probability estimate ≤ 1/50 ƒ Floating continents drifted; formed mountains: ≤ 1/40 ƒ Injured cells secrete chemicals stimulating repair: ≤ 1/50 ƒ “No less than 375 million” new galaxies will be seen: ≤ 1/100 ƒ “Walls” of galaxies are separated by huge voids: ≤ 1/100 ƒ Stronger telescopes will see huge red shifts: ≤ 1/5 ƒ Galaxies spin fast; dark matter keeps them together: ≤ 1/5 ƒ Neutrinos exist and have mass ≤ 1/4 So the probability of all of these happening by chance is ≤ (1/50)(1/40)(1/50)(1/100)(1/100)(1/5)(1/5)(1/4) ≤ 1/100,000,000,000 = less than 1 chance in 100 billion. Many other examples exist reducing this probability even more. InstructionsInstructions inin CosmologyCosmology • Huge Redshifts - Due to “numerous factors of error” • Space Expansion - Space moves and contains motion • Existence and Universe Location of a Focal Singularity in the Topology of Space - timeless and spaceless Paradise • Local versus Paradise Gravity • The Maturation of Space Potency into Mass Particles • Wavelike Manifestations and the Unqualified Absolute • A Rotating Universe - Einstein and Gödel • Origin • Solar Internal Temperature and Energy Sources • Physics and Chemistry Alone Cannot Evolve into Life • Garden of Eden - 1 mile down in eastern Mediterranean HugeHuge SpectrographicSpectrographic RedshiftsRedshifts •“The present relationship of your sun and its associated planets, while disclosing many relative and absolute motions in space, tends to convey the impression to astronomic observers that you are comparatively stationary in space, and that the surrounding starry clusters and streams are engaged in outward flight at ever-increasing velocities as your calculations proceed outward in space. But such is not the case.” Page-134 Line-1 Para-1 •“… this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” Page-134 Line-15 •“But the greatest of all such distortions arises because the vast universes of outer space in the realms next to the domains of the seven superuniverses seem to be revolving in a direction opposite to that of the grand universe. That is, these myriads of nebulae and their accompanying suns and spheres are at the present time revolving clockwise about the central creation. The seven superuniverses revolve about Paradise in a counterclockwise direction.” Page-134 Para-4 Y (North) Doppler Shift, dS/dt,dS/dt, Doppler Shift, the relative due to Alternating speed of the outer space object with respect to the Rotation position to Earth. Rotating Outer Outer space Space Zone object with combined angular velocity ω R S

θ Center of D Earth X (East) Rotation

Angle θ = ωt, t = time, ωR, RŠ D, ω = angular velocity, Max dS/dt= ± dS/dt = Doppler shift ωD, R D velocity SpaceSpace MotionMotion andand ExpansionExpansion

ƒ Space moves independently of the matter it contains. (1980’s “adjusted” Big Bang Cosmology) • “When the universes expand and contract, the material masses in pervaded space alternately move against and with the pull of Paradise gravity. The work that is done in moving the material energy mass of creation is space work but not power-energy work.” Page-134 Line-11 Para-2 • “Space is, from the human viewpoint, nothing--negative; it exists only as related to something positive and nonspatial. Space is, however, real. It contains and conditions motion. It even moves. Space motions may be roughly classified as follows: 1. motion--space respiration, the motion of space itself. 2. Secondary motion--the alternate directional swings of the successive space levels. 3. Relative motions--relative in the sense that they are not evaluated with Paradise as a base point. Primary and secondary motions are absolute, motion in relation to unmoving Paradise. 4. Compensatory or correlating movement designed to co-ordinate all other motions.” Page-133 Line-33 Para-7 The Existence and Universe Location of Paradise • “Paradise is the actually motionless nucleus of the relatively quiescent zones existing between pervaded and unpervaded space. Geographically these zones appear to be a relative extension of Paradise, but there probably is some motion in them. We know very little about them, but we observe that these zones of lessened space motion separate pervaded and unpervaded space. Similar zones once existed between the levels of pervaded space, but these are now less quiescent.” Page-124 Line-19 Para-4 • “Space does not exist on any of the surfaces of Paradise. … Space does not touch Paradise; only the quiescent midspace zones come in contact with the central Isle.” (Page-124 Para-3) This fixed reference frame has a “universe location but no position in space.” Page-7 Para-4 • These quiescent zones of space exist both within each ultimate unit of matter (quantum) and also macroscopically between the moving galactic space zones. “The ultimaton, the first measurable form of energy, has Paradise as its nucleus.” Page-467 Para-5 Local and Paradise Gravity

• Ultimate units have a common nucleus – Paradise. “The ultimatons are not subject to local gravity, the interplay of material attraction, but they are fully obedient to absolute or Paradise gravity, to the trend, the swing, of the universal and eternal circle of the universe of universes. Ultimatonic energy does not obey the linear or direct gravity attraction of near-by or remote material masses, but it does ever swing true to the circuit of the great ellipse of the far-flung creation.” Page-465 Para-2 • “Universal Gravity. All forms of force-energy--material, mindal, or spiritual--are alike subject to those grasps, those universal presences, which we call gravity. Page-131 Line-34 Para-5 • “These four circuits are not related to the nether Paradise force center; they are neither force, energy, nor power circuits. They are absolute presence circuits and like God are independent of time and space.” Page-131 Line-44 Para-6 The Maturation of Space Potency into Matter • “The force organizers initiate those changes and institute those modifications of space-force which eventuate in energy; the power directors transmute energy into matter; thus the material worlds are born.” Page-468 Para-2 • “Primary Master Force Organizers are the manipulators of the primordial or basic space-forces of the Unqualified Absolute; they are nebulae creators. They are the living instigators of the energy cyclones of space and the early organizers and directionizers of these gigantic manifestations. These force organizers transmute primordial force (pre-energy not responsive to direct Paradise gravity) into primary or puissant energy, energy transmuting from the exclusive grasp of the Unqualified Absolute to the gravity grasp of the Isle of Paradise. They are thereupon succeeded by the associate force organizers, who continue the process of energy transmutation from the primary through the secondary or gravity-energy stage. Page-329 Line-19 Para-3 100 Ultimatons = 1 Electron

Non-moving midspace zones surrounding pervaded space Ultimatons

ƒ100 ultimatons (blue) generate 100 octaves of wavelike energy. ƒEach blue diameter is 1/2 that of the next larger diameter. ƒ3 primary and 7 mixed intermediate diameters exist within each octave allowing for intermediate energy levels - colors or tones. ƒWhite Background is a “force blanket” of energy, capable of very quick (faster than light) quantum wavelike reactions. Wavelike Manifestations • “The quantity of energy taken in or given out when electronic or other positions are shifted is always a "quantum" or some multiple thereof, but the vibratory or wavelike behavior of such units of energy is wholly determined by the dimensions of the material structures concerned. Such wavelike energy ripples are 860 times the diameters of the ultimatons, electrons, atoms, or other units thus performing.” Page-474 Line-15 Para-4 • “The excitation of the content of space produces a wavelike reaction to the passage of rapidly moving particles of matter, just as the passage of a ship through water initiates waves of varying amplitude and interval.” Page-476 Line-4 Para-1 • Wavelike Manifestations, perfectly synchronized with electronic velocity and ultimatonic revolutions, are a “space-force reaction of the Unqualified Absolute”. Universe reactions “appear between an act and its consequences” (proved by quantum mechanical experiments and J. Bell’s Theorem in 1964). AA RotatingRotating UniverseUniverse -- EinsteinEinstein andand GödelGödel • Einstein’s universe: • “Principle of Relativity”: There is no way to say that one object is really at rest and the other is really moving with constant velocity. • The speed of light is constant in all such moving frames • Gödel’s universes: Everything rotates around every position! • The Urantia Book: • The speed of light is constant and E = mc2, but • All energy rotates around the same Center! • The universe has a non-moving geographic Center; there IS a unique position in the universe! Contradicts Einstein’s “principle of relativity”. Solar System Origin

• “Today, your sun has achieved relative stability, but its eleven and one-half sunspot cycles betray that it was a variable star in its youth. In the early days of your sun the continued contraction and consequent gradual increase of temperature initiated tremendous convulsions on its surface. These titanic heaves required three and one-half days to complete a cycle of varying brightness. This variable state, this periodic pulsation, rendered your sun highly responsive to certain outside influences which were to be shortly encountered.” Page-655 Line-32 Para-8 • “As the Angona system drew nearer, the solar extrusions grew larger and larger; more and more matter was drawn from the sun to become independent circulating bodies in surrounding space. This situation developed for about five hundred thousand years until Angona made its closest approach to the sun; whereupon the sun, in conjunction with one of its periodic internal convulsions, experienced a partial disruption; from opposite sides and simultaneously, enormous volumes of matter were disgorged. From the Angona side there was drawn out a vast column of solar gases, rather pointed at both ends and markedly bulging at the center, which became permanently detached from the immediate gravity control of the sun.” Page-656 Line-10 Para-2 Solar System Origin (2)

Evidence for the passing “dark island” scenario - an alternate, now discarded theory: • Retrograde (reverse) orbits prove the solar system has foreign objects; therefore a collision occurred • Average plane of orbits of planets is 5+% off the plane of sun’s equator in the plane defined by the line of Angona’s approach. This would not be true in a strictly condensation model • Extremely elongated orbit of recently discovered planetoid, Sedna, corroborates such a passing heavy object • Three outer planets of Angona captured by sun Solar Internal Temperature and Energy Sources •“The internal temperature of many of the suns, even your own, is much higher than is commonly believed.” “The surface temperature of your sun is almost 6,000 degrees, but it rapidly increases as the interior is penetrated until it attains the unbelievable height of about 35,000,000 degrees in the central regions. (All of these temperatures refer to your Fahrenheit scale.)” Page-463 Para-1 and Para- 2 •“…the sources of solar energy, named in the order of their importance, are: 1. Annihilation of atoms and, eventually, of electrons, …” Page-463 Para-3 •“You might try to visualize 35,000,000 degrees of heat, in association with certain gravity pressures, as the electronic boiling point. Under such pressure and at such temperature all atoms are degraded and broken up into their electronic and other ancestral components; even the electrons and other associations of ultimatons may be broken up, but the suns are not able to degrade the ultimatons.” Page-463 Para-5 TeachableTeachable MindMind -- NecessaryNecessary forfor EvolutionaryEvolutionary LifeLife

“Physics and chemistry alone cannot explain how a human being evolved out of the primeval protoplasm of the early seas. The ability to learn, memory and differential response to environment, is the endowment of mind. The laws of physics are not responsive to training; they are immutable and unchanging. The reactions of chemistry are not modified by education; they are uniform and dependable. Aside from the presence of the Unqualified Absolute, electrical and chemical reactions are predictable. But mind can profit from experience, can learn from reactive habits of behavior in response to repetition of stimuli.” Page-738 Line-1 Para-1

‘In the later evolution of mortal creatures the Life Carrier Sons provide the physical body, fabricated out of the existing organized material of the realm, while the Universe Spirit contributes the "breath of life.” ’ Page-376 Para-2 Soon-Coming Validation

• Scientists only respect confirmed predictions. • Without rather spectacular scientific predictions most scientists would never entertain the possibility of an actual communication from “outer space” in the form of a published book.

•Discovery of Atlantis - the First Garden of Eden Soon-Coming Validation (p.2)

• Scientists will say: • There are several (four) outer space “rings of galaxies” (outer space zones) (<5 years) • The Andromeda Galaxy is “closer than we thought” (by a factor of 3). (On May 30, 2005 scientists announced: “The is three times bigger than we thought”.) • Spectrographic reinterpretation of Hubble’s Law - the to distance linear relationship - does not imply “big bang”. • Overthrow of the big bang cosmology (<15 years) by a rotating universe (<20 years) • Discovery of a world of non-breathing, (electrically powered ?) humanoids “in close proximity” to Earth (Jupiter’s Ganymede, the largest moon in the solar system?) The Future

• Time and Space. Time as the moving image of eternity; space as the fleeting shadow (projection) of Paradise realities • Circular simultaneity of experience replacing the linear “flow of events” • The Bestowal of Life - design of life recognized • The Seven Master Spirits and their Seven Different Superuniverses recognized • The Supreme Being - the unity of the universe known • Supreme and Ultimate experience in eternity known • The Spirit Nucleus - that there is One is known TimeTime andand SpaceSpace

• “It is helpful to man's cosmic orientation to attain all possible comprehension of Deity's relation to the cosmos. While absolute Deity is eternal in nature, the Gods are related to time as an experience in eternity. In the evolutionary universes eternity is temporal everlastingness--the everlasting now.” Page-1295 Line-2 Para-1 • Time is the “moving image of eternity” and space is the “reflected shadow” (projection) of Paradise realities. • “Mankind is slow to perceive that, in all that is personal, matter is the skeleton of morontia, and that both are the reflected shadow of enduring spirit reality. How long before you will regard time as the moving image of eternity and space as the fleeting shadow of Paradise realities?” Page-2021 Para-2 CircularCircular SimultaneitySimultaneity

• From Jesus in The Urantia Book, we read, “Animals do not sense time as does man, and even to man, because of his sectional and circumscribed view, time appears as a succession of events; but as man ascends, as he progresses inward, the enlarging view of this event procession is such that it is discerned more and more in its wholeness. That which formerly appeared as a succession of events then will be viewed as a whole and perfectly related cycle; in this way will circular simultaneity increasingly displace the onetime consciousness of the linear sequence of events.” Page-1439 Line-19 Para-3 TheThe BestowalBestowal ofof EnergyEnergy andand LifeLife

• “Subsequent to even still greater progress and further discoveries, after Urantia has advanced immeasurably in comparison with present knowledge, though you should gain control of the energy revolutions of the electrical units of matter to the extent of modifying their physical manifestations--even after all such possible progress, forever will scientists be powerless to create one atom of matter or to originate one flash of energy or ever to add to matter that which we call life.” Page-468 Line-4 Para-1 • “The force organizers initiate those changes and institute those modifications of space-force which eventuate in energy; the power directors transmute energy into matter; thus the material worlds are born. The Life Carriers initiate those processes in dead matter which we call life, material life. The Morontia Power Supervisors likewise perform throughout the transition realms between the material and the spiritual worlds. The higher spirit Creators inaugurate similar processes in divine forms of energy, and there ensue the higher spirit forms of intelligent life.” Page-468 Line-11 Para-2 SevenSeven AbsolutesAbsolutes ofof InfinityInfinity

• The Seven Absolutes of Infinity, the “premise of reality” • Spiritual-mindal-physical, personal-nonpersonal, potential-actual, … all distinctions are therein contained • The Seven Master Spirits - seven different superuniverses • The 49 Reflective Spirits and Majeston – chief of Reflectivity • The Supreme Being - Supreme and Ultimate experience – the Gods are related to time as an experience in eternity • “Matter and spirit and the state intervening between them are three interrelated and interassociated levels of the true unity of the real universe. Regardless of how divergent the universe phenomena of fact and value may appear to be, they are, after all, unified in the Supreme.” Page-1477 Line-23 Para-4 TheThe SpiritSpirit NucleusNucleus

• “Mortal man has a spirit nucleus. The mind is a personal-energy system existing around a divine spirit nucleus and functioning in a material environment. Such a living relationship of personal mind and spirit constitutes the universe potential of eternal personality.” Page-142 Line-1 Para-1 • “Reality of material existence attaches to unrecognized energy as well as to visible matter. When the energies of the universe are so slowed down that they acquire the requisite degree of motion, then under favorable conditions, these same energies become mass. And forget not, the mind which can alone perceive the presence of apparent realities is itself also real. And the fundamental cause of this universe of energy-mass, mind, and spirit, is eternal--it exists and consists in the nature and reactions of the Universal Father and his absolute co-ordinates.” Page-1477 Line-27 Para-5 References • [Aus04] Charles F. Austerberry, In “Evolution of modern cosmology: A brief history”, Dept. of Biology, Creighton University, http://puffin.creighton.edu/Austerberry/SRP420/SRP420_2004/Cosmology.html • [Bar98] Tomasz Barszczak, “Super-Kamiokande detector”, U. of California Irvine, 1998, http://www.ps.uci.edu/~superk/neutrino.html • [Cor82] William R. Corliss, “The Rims Of Galaxies Spin Too Fast”, Science Frontiers #19, JAN-FEB 1982, http://www.science-frontiers.com/sf019/sf019p03.htm • [Göd49] Kurt Gödel, “An Example of a New Type of Cosmological Solutions of Einstein’s Field Equations of Gravitation”, Reviews of Modern Physics, Vol 21, Number 3, July, 1949. • [Har03] Richard Harter, “Piltdown Man”, 2003, http://home.tiac.net/~cri_a/piltdown/piltdown.html#introduction • [Hug05] Patrick Hughes, “On the Shoulders of Giants”, NASA Earth Observatory, 2005, http://earthobservatory.nasa.gov/Library/Giants/Wegener/ • [Inf05] http://www.infoplease.com/ipa/A0762175.html • [Mul00] Larry Mullins with Dr. Meredith Sprunger, A History of the Urantia Papers, Penumbra Press, Boulder, Co., 2000. • [Orf01] Emilio Orfei, Editor, “Review of Pathology of the Liver”, Department of Pathology, Loyola University of Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Apr 10, 2001. http://www.meddean.luc.edu/lumen/MedEd/orfpath/repair.htm • [Rod05] Rodrigo Ibata, Observatoire Astronomique de Strasbourg in France, Reuters News Release, May 30, 2005, http://www.cnn.com/2005/TECH/space/05/30/space.andromeda.reut/ ReferencesReferences (2)(2) • [Rot99] Carl A. Rotter, Department of Physics, University of Dallas, 1999. http://www.as.wvu.edu/coll03/phys/www/rotter/phys201/2_Matter_Space_Time/Ex panding.html • [Sco05] “Redshift”, Donald E. Scott, http://www.electric-cosmos.org/arp.htm, Important Web site for the alternative red shifts • [Sci90] Science Frontiers #67, JAN-FEB 1990. © 1990-2000 William R. Corliss, http://www.science-frontiers.com/sf067/sf067a08.htm • [Svi96] Egils Sviestins, “Rotating Universes and Time Traveling”, http://www.ettnet.se/~egils/essay/essay.html • [Tal02] Stefan Tallqvist, “The electron model”, 2002 http://www.vtt.fi/tte/samba/staff/st/electron.html • [Wag96] Ben Waggoner, “Alfred Wegener (1880-1930)”, University of California, Berkeley, Museum of Paleontology, http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/history/wegener.html • [Wei05] Anne Weil, “Plate Tectonics: The Rocky History of an Idea”, the University of California Berkeley Museum of Paleontology, 2005, http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/geology/techist.html • [Wik05] “Galaxy”, Wikipedia, 2005 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galaxy • [Wor97] World Book Encyclopedia. Chicago: World Book, 1997: 205. The Coming Scientific Validation of the Urantia Book Philip Calabrese

1. Introduction Although The Urantia Book was first published in 1955, already by 1942 it was “fixed” and by 1946 the final versions of the 1st edition plates were in the vault of printer RR Donnelley & Sons of Chicago, ready to produce 10,000 copies. [Mul00] Without fanfare the book was published and copies sent to prominent people of the time. The reaction was a resounding sound of one hand clapping. And so it has been pretty much ever since except for a few people here and there from all over the world who have found a real value, a great value, even an immense value in the pages of what we recognize to be the “Fifth Epochal Revelation” of scientific facts and spiritual truth to our world, Urantia.

Was The Urantia Book written by human beings? Imagine some people cooperating in the endeavor of quietly putting the Urantia Papers together.

That isn’t a laptop computer they are bending over. It’s a typewriter since there were no computers at that time. Their research team was charged to find the best human writers in astronomy, geology, paleontology, chemistry, physics, biology, botany, and other any other field you can think of, and then selectively use their ideas and sometimes even their phrasing but to avoid all of their blunders.

2. Evidence of Superhuman Authorship How could anyone ever scientifically come to the conclusion that a book has superhuman authorship? There is a way. Many contemporary scientists have imagined that the first extra- terrestrial communication would come from some similar civilization in the universe. Therefore they imagined establishing communication, for example, using the ratio of the length of the circumference of any circle to its radius – the non-repeating, non-algebraic (transcendental) number π.

But another possibility has been overlooked, that we would be contacted by superhuman life, be reintroduced to communication with the universe after a long severing of communication due to a rebellion in this part of the local universe, yes the Lucifer Rebellion. That possibility seems to have completely eluded most human scientists. The Urantia Book is primary evidence that we have indeed been recently visited by superhumans, who must be responsible for the existence of the Urantia Book on the planet.

2.1 Potentially discrediting pitfall avoided. A good example of the Urantia Book’s uncanny ability to avoid pitfalls is the Piltdown man double fossil hoax. As told by Wayne Jackson [Jac01]:

“In December of 1912, Charles Dawson, an amateur archaeologist, and Sir Arthur Smith Woodward of the British Museum of Natural History, announced that they had discovered a man-like skull in a pit near Piltdown, England. Along with the skull was a jawbone that appeared to be very ape-like except for the teeth, which were more flattened, as would be expected in humans. …”

When a second fossil Piltdown II later appeared in 1917 almost all scientists in the field were fooled including earlier skeptics Henry F. Osborn and William Gregory. According to master source-book sleuth and superhuman authorship skeptic Matthew Block [Blo05] it was Osborn who was the main source for the Urantia Book’s material on prehistoric man.

According to the University of California Museum of Paleontology “With few exceptions nobody suggested that the finds were a hoax until the very end.” [Har03] That didn’t come until 1953 at an international conference. Even as late as 1947 the fossils were still generally believed to be real. Over the years hundreds of scholarly articles were written about “Piltdown Man”.

“Eventually, it was discovered that the teeth had been ground down artificially to appear human and that it had been a sloppy job at that. Abrasion marks were still evident, the surfaces were flattened at different angles, etc. Moreover, as a result of chemical tests, it was determined that the jawbone had been stained chemically with potassium bichromate and iron salts for the purpose of making it appear ancient. …” [Jac01]

Consider now that had the authors of the Urantia Book swallowed this fraudulent “Piltdown Man” - “Eanthropus dawsoni” - that one blunder would have completely discredited the Urantia Book as divine revelation. It would have been the proverbial “smoking gun” of evidence to conclude that the Urantia Book was itself a fraud, humanly written.

But instead, while acknowledging and describing Neanderthal, Cro-Magnon, Java and Heidelberg Man, and even while affirming evolutionary theory’s main lines of thought, The Urantia Book nevertheless flatly states that no such “missing link” fossil will be found because none exists. The reference follows:

“Although the evolution of vegetable life can be traced into animal life, and though there have been found graduated series of plants and animals which progressively lead up from the most simple to the most complex and advanced organisms, you will not be able to find such connecting links between the great divisions of the animal kingdom nor between the highest of the prehuman animal types and the dawn men of the human races. These so-called "missing links" will forever remain missing, for the simple reason that they never existed.” [Page-669 Line-24 Para-4]

Between 1917 and 1953 only a very few scientists (< 2%) still questioned the Piltdown “missing link” fossils and the most prominent of them swallowed the double hoax. But while affirming most other elements of evolution, the Urantia Book authors chose to positively deny the existence of the “missing link”, a very minority position at the time rather than the majority opinion of their main source, Henry F. Osborn.

The Urantia Book might have conveniently ignored “Missing link man”, as many did, but virtually none who accepted evolution at the time flatly expressed what is in the Urantia Book already in 1946 and earlier, that there is no such missing link and that none will ever be found. The probability of randomly taking this position before 1946 is less than 1/50 to be generous about it. 2.2 Unpopular Positions and Scientific Predictions Confirmed. Many unpopular scientific positions including predictions that might have discredited the Urantia Book have already been corroborated by subsequent scientific progress. a) Pangaea and Continental Drift. Pangaea (“all lands”) was Alfred Wegener’s 1920’s theory of a single continent that broke apart and whose pieces “drifted” apart to form the present continental arrangement. At the time the orthodox theory to explain similar rock deposits and species of life on opposite shores of continents was somehow with hypothetical land bridges that once connected far away continents.

As pointed out by T. Bishop [Bis82] “Reaction to Wegener's theory was almost uniformly hostile, and often exceptionally harsh and scathing”

The University of California Museum of Paleontology writes: “Alfred Wegener (1880-1930). In 1929, about the time Wegener's ideas began to be dismissed, Arthur Holmes elaborated on one of Wegener's many hypotheses; the idea that the mantle undergoes thermal convection.” “Not until the 1960's did Holmes' idea receive any attention.” [Wei05].

But already by 1946 and earlier, and by 1955 at the latest the Urantia Book was on record saying: “750,000,000 years ago the first breaks in the continental land mass began as the great north-and- south cracking, which later admitted the ocean waters and prepared the way for the west-ward drift of the continents of North and South America, including Greenland. The long east-and-west cleavage separated Africa from Europe and severed the land masses of Australia, the Pacific Islands, and Antarctica from the Asiatic continent.” Page-663 Line-3 Para-1

Only a few geologists (< 5%) defended Wegener’s theory of continental drift until the 1960’s. It was largely rejected by 1929 due to Wegener’s offering too many implausible mechanisms to explain the “drift”. By the time he and Holmes suggested something like continents floating on liquid rock, they were ignored. Only later in the late 1950’s and 60’s was “continental drift” vindicated. b) Plate Tectonics. Continents float on liquid rock; this allowed “continental drift”; collisions cause mountains; shifting now causes earthquakes – all these are now accepted facts but were just unpopular conjectures when the Urantia Book said:

“The outer crust was about forty miles thick. This outer shell was supported by, and rested directly upon, a molten sea of basalt of varying thickness, a mobile layer of molten lava held under high pressure but always tending to flow hither and yon in equalization of shifting planetary pressures, thereby tending to stabilize the earth's crust. Even today the continents continue to float upon this non-crystallized cushiony sea of molten basalt. Were it not for this protective condition, the more severe earthquakes would literally shake the world to pieces. Earthquakes are caused by sliding and shifting of the solid outer crust and not by volcanoes.” Page-668 Line-27 Para-6 & 7 Notice that this “shifting” suggests that the “solid outer crust” can rub up against itself, and shift, something we now know occurs on a moving fault line.

We recently learned something at most hinted at in The Urantia Book - a mid-Atlantic ridge from which over time the ocean floor slowly moves up and spreads out in both directions. This movement or flow appears to have been the specific cause of the westward drift of the American continents.

“The land was periodically going up and down due to the shifting sea level occasioned by activities on the ocean bottoms.” Page-681 Line-28 Para-6 c) Mountain formation. Concerning the western American mountain ranges, the Urantia Book Says: “Near the close of the preceding geologic period much of the continental land was up above water, although as yet there were no mountain peaks. But as the continental land drift continued, it met with the first great obstruction on the deep floor of the Pacific. This contention of geologic forces gave impetus to the formation of the whole vast north and south mountain range extending from Alaska down through Mexico to Cape Horn. Page-689 Line-4 Para-1

Wegener had offered such a scenario to explain the western range of mountains in North and South America. This has now been substantiated and greatly elaborated with knowledge that the Urantia Book did not reveal at the time. One might say that the account could now benefit from revision in view of new scientific information learned since 1955.

Had the Urantia Book authors chosen a basically erroneous account, then that would have discredited it. The probability of randomly choosing Wegener’s position and randomly choosing the proper mechanism of continental drift is much less than 1/20. Lack of a detailed description here is not a disqualifier of super-human authorship.

So randomly choosing correctly in both “Piltdown” and “Wegener” is less than (1/50)(1/20)=1/1000. Factor in another 1/2 for mountain formation, and the probability is 1/2000. You see where this is leading. A sequence of likely pitfalls and unpopular positions and other positions can hardly ALL turn out well without superhuman authorship. Therefore the Urantia Book had superhuman authors. More support for this estimate follows. d) Injury Repair Cell Proliferation. “Many features of human life afford abundant evidence that the phenomenon of mortal existence was intelligently planned, that organic evolution is not a mere cosmic accident. When a living cell is injured, it possesses the ability to elaborate certain chemical substances which are empowered so to stimulate and activate the neighboring normal cells that they immediately begin the secretion of certain substances which facilitate healing processes in the wound; and at the same time these normal and uninjured cells begin to proliferate-- they actually start to work creating new cells to replace any fellow cells which may have been destroyed by the accident. Page-735 Line-7 Para-2

In affirming that “creative design” did have a part in evolution, the Urantia Book offers as an example how an injury causes cells to secrete chemicals that cause nearby healthy cells to start proliferating to repair the injury. This mechanism is just now being described, but our scientists only suspect that the blood carries such repair chemicals. For instance in discussing repair of liver cells in 2001 Dr. Emilio Orfei [Orf01], Department of Pathology, Loyola University of Chicago writes

“Reaction to Injury: Repair. The hepatocyte has a florid regenerative potential. In experimental partial resection in the rat, the remaining liver tissue starts to regenerate within a few hours. In 14- 15 hours DNA replication is seen. In 20-21 hours mitoses appear. In 32 hours mitoses are at the pick. In 2 the remaining liver tissue has reached the weight that had before resection. Cell division takes place in the periportal zone. In pathological conditions, dead liver cells are replaced by proliferation of surviving liver cells. Hepatocytes, Kupffer cells, endothelium, bile ducts, vessels, all proliferate.”

“The factor(s) stimulating proliferation of remaining hepatocytes are not known. T[h]ey may be humoral. Indeed: 1) blood from a partially hepatectomized animal induces a proliferative response in the liver of a non- operated animal. …”

The Urantia Book also mentions that these chemicals could be used to improve treatment for injuries and to control certain dangerous diseases - cancer. Only a few intrepid medical researchers are just now exploring such approaches to cancer treatment.

Do you think maybe that the medical profession could find “immense value” in the cosmic instructions and scientific assertions of the Urantia Book? What is the probability of some medical paper correctly describing this back 1955? Virtually zero has to be the answer because the inflammation reaction and injury repair mechanism was totally unknown back at that time. [Pri05] If we assign another 1/50 to the probability of there being some human description before 1955 chosen by the authors that was correct, that brings the probability we’ve been estimating to less than (1/2000)(1/50) = 1/100000, one out of a hundred thousand, and we’re just getting started. More evidence will be offered below but first let us consider the “limitations of revelation”. Are we expecting too much from the Urantia Book’s cosmology?

2.3 The Limitations of Revelation. Some readers, and even supposed believers, claim over and over again that most of the Urantia Book’s science is already outdated - merely transient early 20th century cosmology. The numerous differences between contemporary science and the Urantia Book’s cosmology they see as “errors on the face” of the Urantia Book evident after “a few short years”. Since the cosmology of The Urantia Book is “not inspired”, since the Revelators were not permitted to reveal “unearned” or pre-mature knowledge, how factual and how valuable are its cosmological discourses?

These questions are being asked over and over again by certain writers who then answer their own questions by quoting a few favorite paragraphs that seem to imply that the Revelators were not permitted to give us accurate far-reaching cosmic instruction. Nothing could be further from the truth. Consider this statement by the relevant Melchizedek, which should always be quoted in this context: “Truth may be but relatively inspired, even though revelation is invariably a spiritual phenomenon. While statements with reference to cosmology are never inspired, such revelations are of immense value in that they at least transiently clarify knowledge by: 1. The reduction of confusion by the authoritative elimination of error. 2. The co-ordination of known or about-to-be-known facts and observations.

3. The restoration of important bits of lost knowledge concerning epochal transactions in the distant past. 4. The supplying of information which will fill in vital missing gaps in otherwise earned knowledge. 5. Presenting cosmic data in such a manner as to illuminate the spiritual teachings contained in the accompanying revelation.” Page-1109 Line-40 Para-7

Here the writer attempts to carefully qualify the previously described ‘limitations of revelation’ by allowing that the Urantia Book can nevertheless be of “immense value” by temporarily clarifying cosmic knowledge via the accomplishment of the five items above.

But these five immensely valuable items have just begun to occur. Presently very few scientists take the Urantia Book seriously, let alone authoritative, so scientific confusion has not yet been reduced by an authoritative elimination of errors; co-ordination of about to be known facts is just now happening and will continue; lost knowledge about past epochal events is just now being further demonstrated; missing gaps supplied by the Urantia Book are still to be considered by most scientists; and finally cosmic data has yet to be accepted by many scientists as a basis for the accompanying spiritual revelation. We are still quite early, but the times are upon us when many more of these things will be fulfilled.

“Mortal man is passing through a great age of expanding horizons and enlarging concepts on Urantia, and his cosmic philosophy must accelerate in evolution to keep pace with the expansion of the intellectual arena of human thought.” Page-1146 Line-22 Para-5

At this time our human cosmic philosophy needs some divine revelation to make adequate progress. This is when we need some help with our thinking about these matters, and the Urantia Book is the universe’s response! It is the long sought communication we’ve been hoping for, but it is much more than we have been hoping for. Yet, considering the plight of our world of wars and rumors of wars, surely if there is a Universe out there, they will send us a life-savor seeing how we are all in danger each day of drowning in a self-made morass of nuclear destruction and suicide bombing.

2.4 Astronomic Predictions Fulfilled (or Partially). Already much has been fulfilled. Many significant scientific predictions have already been confirmed. a) “No less than 375 million new galaxies”. New cosmic maps of the whole universe are now confirming the bold cosmic predictions made by the Urantia Book before 1955:

Speaking about our astronomical observations, The Urantia Book says, “…with photographic technique the larger telescopes penetrate far beyond the borders of the grand universe into the domains of outer space, where untold universes are in process of organization. And there are yet other millions of universes beyond the range of your present instruments.” “In the not-distant future, new telescopes will reveal to the wondering gaze of Urantian astronomers no less than 375 million new galaxies in the remote stretches of outer space.” Page-130, Para-5 & Para-6

About 1990 with the publication of early deep space photos our scientific estimates of the number of galaxies changed from “5 to 10 million” to “at least 50 to 100 million”. By 1997 World Book was saying "Studies of distant space with optical and radio telescopes indicate that there may be about 100 billion galaxies in the universe." [Wor97]

My how quickly scientific estimates change without hardly a look back or an admission of error in the enthusiasm of “new results”, which are just as proudly asserted with the same certainty as the previous beliefs. The Urantia Book has to live with what it said in 1955, and it beat the galactic science of 1986! b) “Walls” of Galaxies Separated by “Voids”. Before 1986 almost all contemporary astronomers and cosmologists fully expected to see a random distribution of galaxies in the universe as a whole. That was the prediction of our best non-Urantia Book reading cosmologists, consistent with their so-called “big bang cosmology”. With 30 or 40 years of hindsight over the Urantia Book, they still were wrong and the Urantia Book is right. What does that say about whose cosmology is obsolete? Consider the following report in Science Frontiers:

“The discovery of the Great Wall of galaxies and the regular clumping of galactic matter has greatly surprised astronomers, who have been emphasizing how uniformly distributed galactic matter should [be] -- according to theory, at least. Now, D.C. Koo, at the University of California at Santa Cruz, says, "The regularity is just mind-boggling." M. Davis, an astrophysicist at Berkeley, admits that if the distribution of galaxies is truly so regular, "...it is safe to say we understand less than zero about the early universe." (Wilford, John Noble; "Unexpected Order in Universe Confuses Scientists," Pittsburgh Post Gazette, May 28, 1990. Cr. E.D.Fegert)” [Sci90] “And from the University of Tennessee we read: “The first maps, published in 1986, were a great surprise to the astrophysicists. They had expected to find relative uniformity above the scale of the already-familiar galaxy clusters. Instead, the first surveys showed--and subsequent surveys have confirmed--that great clusters of galaxies are arranged in thin sheets or long filaments. The longest sheet detected, called the "Great Wall," extends hundreds of millions of light years across the maps.” [Nor05] These maps were first published by Margaret Geller and John Huchra [Huc01].

On the other hand, the 1955 Urantia Book authors predicted the future observation of a “vast procession of galaxies” bounded by relatively empty zones of space:

“You may visualize the first outer space level, where untold universes are now in process of formation, as a vast procession of galaxies swinging around Paradise, bounded above and below by the midspace zones of quiescence and bounded on the inner and outer margins by relatively quiet space zones.” (Page-125 Para-1)

“The relatively quiet zones between the space levels, such as the one separating the seven superuniverses from the first outer space level, are enormous elliptical regions of quiescent space activities. These zones separate the vast galaxies which race around Paradise in orderly procession.” (Page-125 Line-6)

“The Outer Space Levels. Far out in space, at an enormous distance from the seven inhabited superuniverses, there are assembling vast and unbelievably stupendous circuits of force and materializing energies. Between the energy circuits of the seven superuniverses and this gigantic outer belt of force activity, there is a space zone of comparative quiet, which varies in width but averages about four hundred thousand light-years. These space zones are free from star dust-- cosmic fog.” (Page-129 Line-45 )

“… the vast universes of outer space in the realms next to the domains of the seven superuniverses seem to be revolving in a direction opposite to that of the grand universe. That is, these myriads of nebulae and their accompanying suns and spheres are at the present time revolving clockwise about the central creation. The seven superuniverses revolve about Paradise in a counterclockwise direction. It appears that the second outer universe of galaxies, like the seven superuniverses, revolves counter-clockwise about Paradise. And the astronomic observers of Uversa think they detect evidence of revolutionary movements in a third outer belt of far-distant space which are beginning to exhibit directional tendencies of a clockwise nature.” Page-134 Line-28 Para-4

The Dept. Physics & Astronomy at University of Tennessee in its Stars, Galaxies, and Cosmology lecture notes in Astronomy writing a “The Great Wall” writes

“Redshift surveys have revealed the largest structures yet observed in the Universe. The prominent concentration of galaxies running diagonally across the northern (that is, upper) portion of the adjacent image has been termed the Great Wall. It appears that (Center of Galactic Ring) * It covers at least 85 Mpc in and 215 Mpc in right ascension. It is likely to be even larger because it is obscured by dust in the plane of our galaxy on one end and hasn't yet been mapped on the other. * It is less than 7 Mpc thick. * There is a corresponding structure in the southern sky termed the Southern Wall. Because neither the Northern Wall nor the Southern Wall have been mapped fully, it is even possible that the two join each other in the parts of the sky that have not been examined yet and are part of one much larger structure.”

“Preliminary deep space redshift surveys along narrow pencils of direction indicate a periodic structure suggesting that there may be additional Great Wall type structures out there, but we have insufficient information at this point to map them extensively.” [Ten05]. One Mpc = 3.26 million light years. See [Gel93 ] for picture.

These are striking initial confirmations of the very kinds of large-scale galactic structures that the Urantia Book predicted before 1955. But our most prominent contemporary cosmologists prior to recent observations predicted random distributions of galaxies consistent with their “Big Bang” theory of an exploding universe, a theory upon which they have built their reputations and research programs.

These folks will not easily give up their theory of an exploding universe, which is also how they conclude the age of the universe to be less than 15 billion years. They have and will continue to offer a sequence of possible defenses as new information continues to disagree with their theory. Already many claim that the background radiation proves the Big Bang explosion occurred, but there are other possible explanations for the background radiation, including perhaps diffuse matter throughout pervaded space equivalent to 1 electron per cubic inch.

An earlier example of this running adjustment of the Big Bang theory concerns hydrogen: “The relative amounts of hydrogen and helium (and much smaller amounts of and lithium) in the universe are not in good agreement with those predicted by the Standard Model, unless it is modified by an auxiliary hypothesis called “inflation”, which proposes that the universe expanded at a velocity beyond the speed of light for a short time. Alan Guth, a particle accelerator physicist at Stanford, proposed the inflation hypothesis in 1979.” See The American Physical Society [APS99], National Center for Supercomputing Applications [NCS95], for more information on these “walls”. c) Huge Redshifts. Before they were observed the Urantia Book predicted huge redshifts equivalent to recessional speeds of “more than thirty thousand miles a second”, but it also instructs that this does not mean the universe is flying apart.

“The present relationship of your sun and its associated planets, while disclosing many relative and absolute motions in space, tends to convey the impression to astronomic observers that you are comparatively stationary in space, and that the surrounding starry clusters and streams are engaged in outward flight at ever-increasing velocities as your calculations proceed outward in space. But such is not the case.” Page-134 Line-1 Para-1

“Although your spectroscopic estimations of astronomic velocities are fairly reliable when applied to the starry realms belonging to your superuniverse and its associate superuniverses, such reckonings with reference to the realms of outer space are wholly unreliable. Spectral lines are displaced from the normal towards the violet by an approaching star; likewise these lines are displaced towards the red by a receding star. Many influences interpose to make it appear that the recessional velocity of the external universes increases at the rate of more than one hundred miles a second for every million light-years increase in distance. By this method of reckoning, subsequent to the perfection of more powerful telescopes, it will appear that these far-distant systems are in flight from this part of the universe at the unbelievable rate of more than thirty thousand miles a second. But this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” Page-134 Line-15 Para-3

Notice in the following table of data [Rot99] provided by Allan Sandage at Mt. Wilson and Las Campanas Observatories that the galaxy is now estimated to be receding from us at more than 30,000 miles/sec, just as the Urantia Book predicted such would be seen after larger telescopes were built. The recessional speed of Hydra is listed as 61,000 km/sec = (61,000 /1.609) miles/sec = 37,900 miles/sec, which is more than 1/5 the speed of light!

Galaxy Distance from Earth Speed (km/s) (Millions of Light Years- MLY) Milky Way 0 0 Virgo 78 1200 980 15000 Corona Borealis 1400 21600 Bootes 2500 39000 Hydra 4000 61000 Perseus 350 5400 650 10000 Ursa Major II 2700 41000 d) Dark Matter Holds the Universe Together. That dark matter holds luminous bodies together was first noticed in 1970’s. Wikipedia [Wik05], the free encyclopedia tells us, “In the 1970s it was realized that the total visible mass of galaxies (from stars and gas) does not properly account for the speed of the rotating gas, thus leading to the postulation of dark matter.” Similarly, Austerberry [Aus04] says, “The rotation of stars in our galaxy is inconsistent with the gravitational effects predicted for detectable masses in the galaxy. The same anomaly appears in galaxies other than our own. Where is the missing matter? … ”

But already in 1955 The Urantia Book was saying to anyone willing to read it: “The Dark Islands of Space. These are the dead suns and other large aggregations of matter devoid of light and heat. The dark islands are sometimes enormous in mass and exert a powerful influence in universe equilibrium and energy manipulation. The density of some of these large masses is well-nigh unbelievable. And this great concentration of mass enables these dark islands to function as powerful balance wheels, holding large neighboring systems in effective leash. They hold the gravity balance of power in many ; many physical systems which would otherwise speedily dive to destruction in near-by suns are held securely in the gravity grasp of these guardian dark islands. It is because of this function that we can locate them accurately. We have measured the gravity pull of the luminous bodies, and we can therefore calculate the exact size and location of the dark islands of space which so effectively function to hold a given system steady in its course.” Page-173 Line-3 Para-1

2.5 Neutrinos. There are many other examples of scientific statements in the Urantia Book that exhibit superhuman knowledge, too numerous to list. Another example is the existence and character of tiny charge-less particles – the so-called neutrinos.

While W. Pauli predicted neutrinos in 1931 and E. Fermi incorporated them into his 1934 theory of atomic decay, they were not actually observed until 1959. [Bar98]

The Urantia Book boldly affirms their existence as “certain small uncharged particles” and their role: “The integrity of the nucleus is maintained by the reciprocal cohering function of the mesotron, which is able to hold charged and uncharged particles together because of superior force-mass power and by the further function of causing protons and neutrons constantly to change places.” Page-479 Line-9 Para-2

“The presence and function of the mesotron also explains another atomic riddle. When atoms perform radioactively, they emit far more energy than would be expected. This excess of radiation is derived from the breaking up of the mesotron "energy carrier," which thereby becomes a mere electron. The mesotronic disintegration is also accompanied by the emission of certain small uncharged particles.” (Mesotrons are now called mesons.) Page-479 Line-21 Para-3

The Urantia Book said in 1955 that neutrinos are held by the “superior force-mass power” of the mesotron and that all energy particles have mass and proceed in straight processional lines. “Energy, whether as light or in other forms, in its flight through space moves straight forward. The actual particles of material existence traverse space like a fusillade. They go in a straight and unbroken line or procession except as they are acted on by superior forces, and except as they ever obey the linear-gravity pull inherent in material mass and the circular-gravity presence of the Isle of Paradise.” Page-461 Line-9 Para-2

But only in 1998 did our scientists discover that neutrinos have mass, and it has upset their “Standard theory”. “A Weighty Discovery in Particle Physics. In June 1998, an international team of Japanese and U.S. physicists unveiled strong evidence that elusive subatomic particles known as neutrinos have mass (or weight). These findings run counter to the standard model of particle physics—the basic theory about the structure of matter—which holds that these electrically neutral, weakly interacting particles have no mass. The discovery means that existing theoretical models of matter must now be revised to include neutrinos with mass.” [Inf05]

2.6 Probability of Human Authorship. While taking all of these unpopular or completely prophetic scientific positions with still no clearly obvious scientific blunders (unlike old science texts and human authors), what is the probability of such a sequence due to correct guesses? What is the probability of a human astronomer in 1955 predicting “no less than 375 million galaxies” in the far reaches of outer space when at the time a few hundred were known and as late as 1985 the estimate was 5 to 10 million? Let’s say 1/100 to be generous. Factor in the probability of predicting the large-scale structures now being seen - the “walls” separated by great “voids” - which until 1987 our scientists expected to be distributed randomly and sparsely. That’s another very low probability event, another 1/100 at best. Then there are the predictions of the huge redshifts now seen and the prediction of dark matter being a balance wheel for luminous bodies, which has now been observed as well. Each of those two have perhaps 1/5 probability to be generous, or 1/25 together. So all four together have probability less than (1/100)(1/100)(1/25) = 1/250,000. Successfully guessing these four and the earlier four with 1/100000 probability yields 1/25,000,000,000 or less than 1 chance in 25 billion.

Some of these may be larger and some smaller than estimated, but they each contribute more or less to make a very small probability of occurrence given The Urantia Book was written by humans. Therefore on statistical grounds I infer that super-humans must have written the Urantia Book and none of these predictions were random or lucky guesses.

These predictions have not been “cherry-picked” while other misses ignored. They have been chosen because they have been subsequently established by human science. Examples that are still open to question due to unreliable data have been left for a later date of evaluation. Some of them such as the time of light travel from Andromeda will come up as part of cosmic instruction from superhumans.

2.7 Scientific Credibility. If The Urantia Book is what it purports to be then the present lack of contemporary scientific interest will not always be the case. What would make scientists sit up and take notice of this “communication from outer space”, this revelatory gift from higher universe life? Only scientific evidence in a book of philosophy can impress a real scientist of the book’s worth when discussing the scientific aspects of the cosmos, not some re-warmed 20th century science ill- suited for the presentation of the spiritual truths of the next 1000 years. No, The Urantia Book must present truly impressive, albeit transient, science alongside of ageless spiritual truth.

The Urantia Book does make many such predictions and when they are scientifically observed they will be a mighty powerful attraction to scientists and others to take The Urantia Book seriously. So far that hasn’t happened, but even now events are gathering for such a spectacular corroboration in the recent explorations in the eastern Mediterranean for Plato’s Atlantis, which due to Robert Sarmast, we now know was also the Garden of Eden. (I know of one famous scientist and there are probably many other “closet UB readers” among professional scientists, who read and utilize the book, but who for obvious reasons prefer to keep that their secret.) But what will happen if Robert’s next expedition brings up sensational evidence just where The Urantia Book says it is? Will most scientists ignore that too? We may soon see. When will prominent scientists publicly give The Urantia Book credit for its scientific predictions?

My own personal favorite in this category is the sensational prediction that there is a non-breathing form of life on a sphere in close proximity to our world. As such we might be looking for the wrong kind of life in our solar system, entertaining too narrow a concept of life. If The Urantia Book is what it says it is, then there must be such a world in close proximity. Some readers think that implies the world must be in our solar system, but I suppose being within easy communication range, like a few light years away, might also be in close proximity in astronomical terms because we could become aware of each other by interstellar communication. Even that would be exciting. More on this later.

Why believe The Urantia Book’s science? Certainly it is not only because The Urantia Book states many spiritual truths. Rather, The Urantia Book’s science must stand on its own as well, at least for a while, during these times when it has yet to be taken seriously by most of the world. The real reason that I believe in the science of The Urantia Book and the authenticity of The Urantia Book as divine revelation to our world is because of its humanly improbable avoidance of error and the meandering convergence over the years of contemporary science to positions taken by the Urantia Book authors.

Summary of Evidence of Superhuman Knowledge. a) Not referencing paleontology fossils later found to be frauds while mentioning most others and asserting that no “missing link” fossil (nickname for the fraudulent fossil) would be found, b). Describing Pangaea, continental drift on molten basalt, and formation of mountains, c) Describing the injury repair chemistry, d) Predicting the existence and large-scale ring shapes of hundreds of millions of star systems, then unknown and unexpected before 1987, e). Predicting the extent of the “Big Bang” cosmic redshifts observed by contemporary science, even while saying that the supposed rapid expansion is due to many factors of error, f) Even before the problem of rapidly spinning galaxies was noticed predicting that dark matter keeps the rapidly spinning galaxies from flying apart and prevents many bodies from plunging into nearby stars, and g) Affirming the existence (before actual discovery) of Neutrinos, including that they have mass.

3. Instruction in Science and Cosmology Still to be Received by Urantia Scientists Given that super-humans wrote the Urantia Book, what were they trying to accomplish? As listed before the authors of the Urantia Book provided “instruction in cosmology” in order to facilitate the human understanding of the accompanying spiritual revelation. The authors were also permitted to reveal some information not otherwise mandated.

3.1 Huge Spectrographic Redshifts Due to “Numerous Factors of Error”.

a) Greatest Spectrographic Distortion. “But the greatest of all such distortions arises because the vast universes of outer space in the realms next to the domains of the seven superuniverses seem to be revolving in a direction opposite to that of the grand universe. That is, these myriads of nebulae and their accompanying suns and spheres are at the present time revolving clockwise about the central creation. The seven superuniverses revolve about Paradise in a counterclockwise direction.” Page-134 Para-4

Being a mathematician, I decided to investigate this possibility analytically. I was able to prove an interesting result. Apparently, such a situation as The Urantia Book describes with galaxies proceeding in orderly fashion in the first outer space zone adds up to a constant red (or blue) shift (depending on the angle of observation) to any object whose distance from the postulated center of rotation is greater than earth’s distance to that center of rotation. (That constant turns out to be the distance from earth to the center of rotation times the difference between the angular velocities of the Earth versus the first outer space object. See [Cal05A] for details.

Looking in directions relatively close to the plane of the Milky Way but far away from its center, no matter how far into an almost uniformly spinning ring of galaxies in the first outer space zone, the maximum redshift on one side would be larger by a constant while on the other side the maximum blue shift would be larger by the same amount. Other angles of observation have intermediate red or blue shifts. A test of this conjecture would involve observing this difference in the frequency shifts in the distant galaxies in the direction of Galactic latitudes on opposite edges of the Milky Way.

“From the outermost system of inhabited worlds to the center of the superuniverse is a trifle less than two hundred and fifty thousand light-years.” (32:2.11) Page-168 Line-6 Para-2

b) Galaxies Not Really Flying Apart - No Big Bang. While predicting the huge redshifts the Urantia Book also instructs: “But this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” Page-134 Para-3

Since the redshift is linear with distance, the huge redshifts might be due to the existence of some “reddening influence” in the intervening space. This is the “tired light” theory of redshift, but the light from distant galaxies looks just as clear as that from nearby ones, which presumably would not be the case were the light being changed. Therefore this possibility is downgraded. [Bal] “Time- space distortions” could easily include “tired light”, but it also allows for other distortions like unknown rotational motions and angles of observation. Only a very few poorly-funded and mostly ignored astronomers are courageous enough (and independent enough) to dispute the receding motion interpretation of the huge redshifts of the external galaxies - those beyond the so-called of galaxies, which The Urantia Book calls the seven superuniverses. One such astronomer is Halton Arp, who was Hubble’s assistant. Apparently Arp has evidence of gravitationally connected objects in close proximity but with very different redshifts. [Sco05]

Charles Austerberry [Aus04], Creighton University, outlines the history of the universe according to the Standard Model, Big Bang theory as follows:

“t = 0 a singularity 15 b. yrs. Ago - Universe began from a "singularity" The 4 (or 3) basic forces emerge. Before a millionth of a second, fundamental particles emerge & stabilize. Radiation (light and radio waves, and so forth) cannot move far. The universe is quite foggy (opaque) mostly due to the free electrons. Before a thousandth of a second, protons and neutrons form. In a few minutes, primal nuclei form. It takes almost a million years (at least 300,000 )for the universe to cool to 3,000 degrees Kelvin, enough for atoms to form (mostly hydrogen and helium). The universe's opacity dropped abruptly. 10-14 b. yrs. ago - primal stars emerge; giant galaxies evolve; heavier elements are formed in stars, and in supernova explosions. 4.5 b. yrs ago - our sun, planets, & earth are born 4 b. yrs ago - the first prokaryotic cells emerge 2 b. yrs ago - the first eukaryotic cells emerge 5 m. yrs ago - hominids evolve 200,000 yrs ago - archaic Homo sapiens 40,000 yrs ago - modern Homo sapiens” [Aus04]

Hubble’s constant H0 is estimated to be 72 km/s for each Mpc distance from earth. 1 Mpc = 3.086*1019 km, and 1 yr = 3.16*107 seconds.

Therefore the age of the universe = 1/ H0 = 13.6 billion years. [Dod05]

As a scientist and a religionist I can only say that I find this story even harder to believe than the creation story in the Book of Genesis. c) Galactic Rotations Imparted by Living Force Organizers. The Urantia Book instructs that nebular revolutions are added by living force organizers not simply the result of evolution. This answers the nagging question in cosmology and physics of where all the spin in the universe came from. Here the nebular mother of our sun is described:

“875,000,000,000 years ago the enormous Andronover number 876,926 was duly initiated. Only the presence of the force organizer and the liaison staff was required to inaugurate the energy whirl which eventually grew into this vast cyclone of space. Subsequent to the initiation of such nebular revolutions, the living force organizers simply withdraw at right angles to the plane of the revolutionary disk, and from that time forward, the inherent qualities of energy insure the progressive and orderly evolution of such a new physical system.” Page-652 Line-9 Para-2

3.2 Motion of Space Versus Motion of Matter in Space. The Big Bang idea forced contemporary scientists to imagine how the distant galaxies could so quickly start sending light toward us almost 15 billion years ago from a place in space so far away from the “singularity” in space. Their answer is that at first the space itself was quickly moving out there, and that could happen effectively at apparently faster than light speed, almost instantaneously. One might respond ‘in what reference frame does the space move, compared to what? It’s as though all space just blinks into existence in one instant. But The Urantia Book is way ahead of our scientists on this idea of space motion:

“Space is, from the human viewpoint, nothing--negative; it exists only as related to something positive and nonspatial. Space is, however, real. It contains and conditions motion. It even moves. Space motions may be roughly classified as follows: 1. Primary motion--space respiration, the motion of space itself. 2. Secondary motion--the alternate directional swings of the successive space levels.

3. Relative motions--relative in the sense that they are not evaluated with Paradise as a base point. Primary and secondary motions are absolute, motion in relation to unmoving Paradise.

4. Compensatory or correlating movement designed to co-ordinate all other motions.” Page-133 Line-33 Para-7 “When the universes expand and contract, the material masses in pervaded space alternately move against and with the pull of Paradise gravity. The work that is done in moving the material energy mass of creation is space work but not power-energy work.” Page-134 Line-11 Para-2

By contrast contemporary cosmology measures motion in terms of the average redshift of intergalactic hydrogen. “We now use 21 cm emission from neutral atomic Hydrogen to map the motion of the disk.” [Str05]

3.3 The Existence and Universe Location of a Focal Singularity in the Topology of Space - Paradise. Not only does The Urantia Book describe space motion it also defines a non-moving reference frame in terms of which space motion can be measured, something that contemporary cosmologists can hardly do because they admit no such fixed reference frame to measure the motion of space as a whole. According to The Urantia Book this fixed reference frame is the center of rotation of the whole universe, a place called Paradise:

“Paradise is the actually motionless nucleus of the relatively quiescent zones existing between pervaded and unpervaded space. Geographically these zones appear to be a relative extension of Paradise, but there probably is some motion in them. We know very little about them, but we observe that these zones of lessened space motion separate pervaded and unpervaded space. Similar zones once existed between the levels of pervaded space, but these are now less quiescent.” Page-124 Line-19 Para-4

“Space does not exist on any of the surfaces of Paradise. … Space does not touch Paradise; only the quiescent midspace zones come in contact with the central Isle.” [Page-124 Para-3] This fixed reference frame has a “universe location but no position in space.” [Page-7 Para-4] These quiescent zones of space exist both within each ultimate unit of matter (quantum) and also macroscopically between the moving galactic space zones. “The ultimaton, the first measurable form of energy, has Paradise as its nucleus.” Page-467 Para-5. These ultimatons also swing around Paradise macroscopically. Paradise is the “the most gigantic organized body of cosmic reality in all the master universe”. Page-118 Line-3 Para-1

3.4 Local and Paradise Gravity. Ultimate units have a common nucleus – Paradise. “The ultimatons are not subject to local gravity, the interplay of material attraction, but they are fully obedient to absolute or Paradise gravity, to the trend, the swing, of the universal and eternal circle of the universe of universes. Ultimatonic energy does not obey the linear or direct gravity attraction of near-by or remote material masses, but it does ever swing true to the circuit of the great ellipse of the far-flung creation.” Page-465 Para-2

“Universal Gravity. All forms of force-energy--material, mindal, or spiritual--are alike subject to those grasps, those universal presences, which we call gravity.” Page-131 Line-34 Para-5 “These four circuits are not related to the nether Paradise force center; they are neither force, energy, nor power circuits. They are absolute presence circuits and like God are independent of time and space.” Page-131 Line-44 Para-6

3.5 The Maturation of Space Potency into Matter. “It is indeed difficult to find suitable words in the English language whereby to designate and wherewith to describe the various levels of force and energy--physical, mindal, or spiritual. These narratives cannot altogether follow your accepted definitions of force, energy, and power. There is such paucity of language that we must use these terms in multiple meanings. In this paper, for example, the word energy is used to denote all phases and forms of phenomenal motion, action, and potential, while force is applied to the pregravity, and power to the postgravity, stages of energy.” Page-469 Line-3 Para-1 a) Ultimatons. “The force organizers initiate those changes and institute those modifications of space-force which eventuate in energy; the power directors transmute energy into matter; thus the material worlds are born.” Page-468 Para-2

Not only does The Urantia Book describe the initiation of nebular rotations, it explicitly rejects contemporary definitions of force, energy and power declaring that we need more language. The Urantia Book describes the maturation of the space potency of the Unqualified Absolute (pervading all space) by two orders of living “force organizers” through stages from primordial force, through emergent energy, and finally to the assembly of ultimate material units and atomic systems. All of this is still to be discovered. Skeptics may hold that these are unproved, or that “there is no evidence” of them but not that they are re-warmed 20th century cosmology.

“Primary Master Force Organizers are the manipulators of the primordial or basic space-forces of the Unqualified Absolute; they are nebulae creators. They are the living instigators of the energy cyclones of space and the early organizers and directionizers of these gigantic manifestations. These force organizers transmute primordial force (pre-energy not responsive to direct Paradise gravity) into primary or puissant energy, energy transmuting from the exclusive grasp of the Unqualified Absolute to the gravity grasp of the Isle of Paradise. They are thereupon succeeded by the associate force organizers, who continue the process of energy transmutation from the primary through the secondary or gravity-energy stage. Page-329 Line-19 Para-3 b) Constructing Electrons from Ultimatons. In an early paper presented in 1973 I offered an idea of what an ultimatum looks like, how 100 concentrically arranged ultimatons make up an electron as I had gleaned from my reading of the Urantia Book. Since then Stefan Tallqvist [Tal02] has offered an alternative concept for how 100 ultimatons might aggregate into an electron as a compact stacked arrangement.

However, “The ultimatons are not subject to local gravity, the interplay of material attraction, but they are fully obedient to absolute or Paradise gravity, to the trend, the swing, of the universal and eternal circle of the universe of universes. Ultimatonic energy does not obey the linear or direct gravity attraction of near-by or remote material masses, but it does ever swing true to the circuit of the great ellipse of the far-flung creation. Page-465 Line-11 Para-2

“Ultimatons do not describe orbits or whirl about in circuits within the electrons, but they do spread or cluster in accordance with their axial revolutionary velocities, thus determining the differential electronic dimensions. This same ultimatonic velocity of axial revolution also determines the negative or positive reactions of the several types of electronic units. The entire segregation and grouping of electronic matter, together with the electric differentiation of negative and positive bodies of energy-matter, result from these various functions of the component ultimatonic interassociation.” Page-476 Line-42

Since ultimatons do not describe orbits and are not attracted by near-by matter but respond only to Paradise “circular” gravity, I conceived the 100 ultimatons of an electron arranged concentrically, with Paradise as their common nucleus. This still seems to me to be the right way. However, it may be easier to think of the 100 concentric spheres as 100 concentric donut-shaped rings of rotating space around a common Paradise center of gravity. The rings can slip past each other in 3 dimensions without collision, and by flipping motions can also be a sphere of rotating space. It also seems right to alternate the direction of rotations so that the energy is more balanced and can potentially be explosive.

While commenting on the waves always associated with the individuation of an ultimaton The Urantia Book makes it clear that an ultimaton is a “minute sphere”, not a wave: “The assembly of energy into the minute spheres of the ultimatons occasions vibrations in the content of space which are discernible and measurable. And long before physicists ever discover the ultimaton, they will undoubtedly detect the phenomena of these rays as they shower in upon Urantia. These short and powerful rays represent the initial activity of the ultimatons as they are slowed down to that point where they veer towards the electronic organization of matter.” Paper-42 Section-5 Para-2

“In the superuniverse of Orvonton there are one hundred octaves of wave energy. Of these one hundred groups of energy manifestations, sixty-four are wholly or partially recognized on Urantia. The sun's rays constitute four octaves in the superuniverse scale, the visible rays embracing a single octave, number forty-six in this series. The ultraviolet group comes next, while ten octaves up are the X rays, followed by the gamma rays of radium. Thirty-two octaves above the visible light of the sun are the outer-space energy rays so frequently commingled with their associated highly energized minute particles of matter. Next downward from visible sunlight appear the infrared rays, and thirty octaves below are the radio transmission group.” Page-474 Line-25 Para-6

Since there are 100 octaves of wave energy in the superuniverse and 100 ultimatons in an electron and ultimatonic motions result in waves of different length, but always 860 times the diameter of the particle, I imagine that the 100 concentric ultimatons give rise to 100 octaves of wave energy, and that the ultimatons can attain discrete energy levels between those octaves to expand or contract into, thus giving rise to waves of intermediate length and energy within the octave.

“Matter--energy--for they are but diverse manifestations of the same cosmic reality, as a universe phenomenon is inherent in the Universal Father. "In him all things consist." Matter may appear to manifest inherent energy and to exhibit self-contained powers, but the lines of gravity involved in the energies concerned in all these physical phenomena are derived from, and are dependent on, Paradise. The ultimaton, the first measurable form of energy, has Paradise as its nucleus.” Page-467 Line-26 Para-5

3.6 Wavelike Manifestations. Another area of confusion for Urantia scientists is the issue in quantum mechanics of “wave-particle duality”. In the late 1800’s Clark Maxwell unified electrodynamics with his famous equations that implied that light was always measured to have the same speed in a vacuum no matter the motions of the light emitting objects. Then Max Plank found the need to postulate a quantum for a property called “action”. Albert Einstein used this idea to show that light behaved like quanta in the photoelectric affect. Since then there has been almost continuous controversy about whether light is one or the other, or both a particle and a wave – a “wavicle”.

Later in the 20th century John Bell [Bel1964] proved that experiments already done proved that a measurement of either particle of a pair of widely separated but somehow “entangled particles” affects the state of the other particle at faster than light speeds. This is the “spooky action at a distance” that Einstein railed against to no avail.

The interpretation of these phenomena is still an active controversy in quantum mechanics to this day. It is often confused with the indeterminacy principle of quantum mechanics, which is that any measurement of the position of a particle changes its velocity and vice versa; therefore the position and velocity cannot be directly measured beyond a certain precision. This principle is affirmed by The Urantia Book: “It is impossible accurately to determine, simultaneously, the exact location and the velocity of a moving object; any attempt at measurement of either inevitably involves change in the other.” (Page-737 Line-2 Para-1.) However, this is a problem having to do with the conditions for measurement of position versus velocity, which partially conflict. This indeterminacy can be incorporated into quantum logic by using Boolean fractions to represent conditional quantum measurements and events. [Cal05]

The Urantia Book also throws light onto the “entangled particles”, “wave-particle duality” phenomena of quantum mechanics: “Primordial-force behavior does give rise to phenomena which are in many ways analogous to your postulated ether. Space is not empty; the spheres of all space whirl and plunge on through a vast ocean of outspread force-energy; neither is the space content of an atom empty. Nevertheless there is no ether, and the very absence of this hypothetical ether enables the inhabited planet to escape falling into the sun and the encircling electron to resist falling into the nucleus.” Page-476 Line-7 Para-2

“The excitation of the content of space produces a wavelike reaction to the passage of rapidly moving particles of matter, just as the passage of a ship through water initiates waves of varying amplitude and interval.” Page-476 Line-4 Para-1

The interelectronic space of an atom is not empty. Throughout an atom this interelectronic space is activated by wavelike manifestations which are perfectly synchronized with electronic velocity and ultimatonic revolutions. This force is not wholly dominated by your recognized laws of positive and negative attraction; its behavior is therefore sometimes unpredictable. This unnamed influence seems to be a space-force reaction of the Unqualified Absolute. Page-478 Line-46 Para-7

“The quantity of energy taken in or given out when electronic or other positions are shifted is always a "quantum" or some multiple thereof, but the vibratory or wavelike behavior of such units of energy is wholly determined by the dimensions of the material structures concerned. Such wavelike energy ripples are 860 times the diameters of the ultimatons, electrons, atoms, or other units thus performing.” Page-474 Line-15 Para-4

“The so-called ether is merely a collective name to designate a group of force and energy activities occurring in space. Ultimatons, electrons, and other mass aggregations of energy are uniform particles of matter, and in their transit through space they really proceed in direct lines. Light and all other forms of recognizable energy manifestations consist of a succession of definite energy particles which proceed in direct lines except as modified by gravity and other intervening forces. That these processions of energy due to the resistance of the undifferentiated force blanket of all space, the hypothetical ether, and to the intergravity tension of the associated aggregations of matter. The spacing of the particle-intervals of matter, together with the initial velocity of the energy beams, establishes the undulatory appearance of many forms of energy-matter.” Page-475 Line-38 Para-2

So the Urantia Book says that matter is composed of particles, not waves, but that waves are always generated in the unrecognized force content of space, apparently at faster than light speed. “Human beings are only just beginning to realize that the reactions of existence appear between acts and their consequences.” Page-951 Para-6 3.7 G$del’s “Rotating Universe” Solutions to Einstein’s Field Equations. In the early 20th century scientists were trying hard to interpret the famous Mickleson-Morley interferometer light experiments [Nav04], which looked for evidence of a medium in which light vibrated using the Earth’s motion around the sun. Unlike sound waves, light did not appear to be carried by some medium, some “ether” that did the vibrating and which would serve a fixed reference frame. In 1905 Albert Einstein published his first paper on “special relativity “, which started from scratch concerning the measurement of time and space in relatively moving reference frames.

Einstein based his theory on just two principles: “1) The laws by which the states of physical systems undergo change are not affected, whether these changes of state be referred to the one or the other of two systems of coordinates in uniform translatory (sic) motion. 2) Any ray of light moves in the ‘stationary’ system of co-ordinates with the determined velocity c, whether the ray be emitted by a stationary or a moving body.” [Ein05]

The first law implies that there is no preferred reference frame because they all give the same physical laws. There is no way to say that one object is really at rest and other moving. It could be the other way. Or they are both moving with respect to some other reference frame.

The second law was the experimentally verified fact that speed of light will be the same value when measured in either of two reference frames that are moving with constant velocity with respect to one another.

The Urantia Book seems to affirm the second law but definitely not the first. The Urantia Book affirms the famous equation E = mc2 proved by Einstein in a second short paper in 1905: “The increase of mass in matter is equal to the increase of energy divided by the square of the velocity of light.” [Page-474 Line-1] But it does not follow Einstein’s “principle of relativity”, which holds that there is no fixed reference frame. Instead, The Urantia Book affirms that there is such a fixed reference frame. The Urantia Book points to a “focus of space” that is not in space but located at the limiting surface of the relatively non-moving midspace zones existing between the zones of matter-pervaded space. These midspace zones converge on a non-moving non-spatial location, which can be taken as the fixed frame of reference for the universe. Even the motion of space can be measured relative to this fixed reference frame.

Einstein knew that there were other solutions to his equations that had a center, but he specifically discarded them on the grounds of aesthetics. However another scientist, a mathematical one, the great logician Kurt G$del, as part of a tribute to his friend Einstein, produced a paper [G$d49] showing that there was a class of “rotating universe” solutions to Einstein’s general field equations for his “relativity theory”.

These rotating universe solutions to Einstein’s equations have a peculiar characteristic, everything rotates, and because of the insistence that all positions are equivalent to each other as reference frames, the universe rotates about every position! [Svi96]

Now this sounds suspiciously like The Urantia Book’s claim that everything rotates around Paradise, not just macroscopically, but microscopically as well. By identifying all of the positions around which the universe rotates as being a single fixed place, Paradise becomes the “most gigantic organized body of cosmic reality in all the master universe”. [Page-118 Para-1] If everything rotates around the “focus of space” then Einstein’s equations can be satisfied with a Center. And if light is emitted from this non-moving focus within matter then it will not be affected by the motion of the emitting body.

3.8 Solar System Origin. The contemporary theory of the solar system’s birth starts with a rotating gaseous nebula, which then contracted by gravity, increased its spin, and evolved into the sun and planets. While allowing for this type of solar system birth, the Urantia Book makes a strong case for an alternate but now mostly discarded theory:

“Gravity-explosion Planets. When a sun is born of a spiral or of a barred nebula, not infrequently it is thrown out a considerable distance. Such a sun is highly gaseous, and subsequently, after it has somewhat cooled and condensed, it may chance to swing near some enormous mass of matter, a gigantic sun or a dark island of space. Such an approach may not be near enough to result in collision but still near enough to allow the gravity pull of the greater body to start tidal convulsions in the lesser, thus initiating a series of tidal upheavals which occur simultaneously on opposite sides of the convulsed sun. At their height these explosive eruptions produce a series of varying-sized aggregations of matter which may be projected beyond the gravity-reclamation zone of the erupting sun, thus becoming stabilized in orbits of their own around one of the two bodies concerned in this episode. Later on the larger collections of matter unite and gradually draw the smaller bodies to themselves. In this way many of the solid planets of the lesser systems are brought into existence. Your own solar system had just such an origin.” Page-170 Line-29 Para-6

Scientists are presently reluctant to accept such an origin because 99% of the angular momentum calculated for our solar system seems to reside in the spinning planets rather than in the sun, and that fact is taken as counter to the “passing star” theory, as it is called. They also dispute the possibility of drawing off sufficient matter from the sun by a near pass. This assertion seems unfounded because a tidal disruption of the sun could have fragmented it completely; therefore a partial disruption could have separated a lesser amount from the main solar body.

On the other hand, the Urantia Book states that retrograde motion as observed (and confirmed) in our solar system in some of the of Saturn and Jupiter never occurs unless foreign bodies have been introduced into the system. That appears to be a mathematically verifiable assertion, but I have not found mention of it anywhere else. Other evidence cited is that the average plane of orbits of the planets is more than 5% off the plane of our sun’s equator. Instead it is in the plane defined by the line of Angona’s approach.

The extremely elongated orbit of the new planetoid, Sedna, corroborates such a passing heavy object theory. (“a passing star” is now being offered by contemporary scientists to explain how Sedna got such an elongated orbit!) The Urantia Book also says there were three outer planets of Angona captured by our sun with the help of the sun’s nebular mother. Existence of such “foreign matter” has still to be determined, but there is such variation in the character of the solar system bodies that it is not hard to believe. Yet I never read this idea anywhere other than in the Urantia Book.

“Today, your sun has achieved relative stability, but its eleven and one-half year sunspot cycles betray that it was a variable star in its youth. In the early days of your sun the continued contraction and consequent gradual increase of temperature initiated tremendous convulsions on its surface. These titanic heaves required three and one-half days to complete a cycle of varying brightness. This variable state, this periodic pulsation, rendered your sun highly responsive to certain outside influences which were to be shortly encountered.” Page-655 Line-32 Para-8

The scientific jury is still out on the solar system origin, but the Urantia Book poses a scenario that deserves further examination. The Urantia Book asserts that our sun was then a variable star with a 3.5-day period and that the 11.5-year sun spot cycle is a remnant of that state. Variable stars are known to expand and contract periodically making them brighter or less bright accordingly. Add a passing dark gravity body that caused a “partial disruption”, that is, pulled the sun apart by tidal- gravity action. Page-656 Line-10 Para-2

During the maximum expansion period our then variable sun disgorged a huge column of mass on the near side and equal amounts of material on the other side thereby perhaps ridding itself of the angular momentum found now in the large planets and thereby avoiding complete fragmentation. In effect, by stretching out planetary arms the sun was able to reduce its angular momentum like a ballet dancer slows her spinning by stretching out her arms. The sun was thus able to avoid complete disruption, and the “arms” could immediately start circling the sun. The result is a more stable star with much less angular momentum than before, which is now represented in the swing of the planets around the sun and in their orbital spins. This scenario still fits the evidence.

“As the Angona system drew nearer, the solar extrusions grew larger and larger; more and more matter was drawn from the sun to become independent circulating bodies in surrounding space. This situation developed for about five hundred thousand years until Angona made its closest approach to the sun; whereupon the sun, in conjunction with one of its periodic internal convulsions, experienced a partial disruption; from opposite sides and simultaneously, enormous volumes of matter were disgorged. From the Angona side there was drawn out a vast column of solar gases, rather pointed at both ends and markedly bulging at the center, which became permanently detached from the immediate gravity control of the sun.” Page-656 Line-10 Para-2

“The nucleus of the physical system to which your sun and its associated planets belong is the center of the onetime Andronover nebula. This former spiral nebula was slightly distorted by the gravity disruptions associated with the events which were attendant upon the birth of your solar system, and which were occasioned by the near approach of a large neighboring nebula. This near collision changed Andronover into a somewhat globular aggregation but did not wholly destroy the two-way procession of the suns and their associated physical groups. Your solar system now occupies a fairly central position in one of the arms of this distorted spiral, situated about halfway from the center out towards the edge of the star stream.” Page-168 Line-6 Para-2

3.9 Solar Internal Temperature and Energy Sources. The Urantia Book states that the internal temperature of the sun is much higher than is presently thought and indicates that we are missing the most important energy source of the sun. (That might explain why our scientists have been observing only 1/3 as many neutrinos as they expect to account for the sun’s energy expenditures. However in 2002 additional experiments have shone that electron neutrinos change into another type of neutrino en route from the sun and that total is consistent with theory.)

“The internal temperature of many of the suns, even your own, is much higher than is commonly believed.” [Page-463 Para-1] “The surface temperature of your sun is almost 6,000 degrees, but it rapidly increases as the interior is penetrated until it attains the unbelievable height of about 35,000,000 degrees in the central regions. (All of these temperatures refer to your Fahrenheit scale.) “ [Page-463 Para-2] “… the sources of solar energy, named in the order of their importance, are: 1. Annihilation of atoms and, eventually, of electrons, …” Only second does The Urantia Book list “Transmutation of elements, including the radioactive group of energies thus liberated.” Page-463 Para-3

“You might try to visualize 35,000,000 degrees of heat, in association with certain gravity pressures, as the electronic boiling point. Under such pressure and at such temperature all atoms are degraded and broken up into their electronic and other ancestral components; even the electrons and other associations of ultimatons may be broken up, but the suns are not able to degrade the ultimatons.” Page-463 Line-32 Para-5

3.10 Physics and Chemistry Alone Cannot Evolve into Life. “Physics and chemistry alone cannot explain how a human being evolved out of the primeval protoplasm of the early seas. The ability to learn, memory and differential response to environment, is the endowment of mind. The laws of physics are not responsive to training; they are immutable and unchanging. The reactions of chemistry are not modified by education; they are uniform and dependable. Aside from the presence of the Unqualified Absolute, electrical and chemical reactions are predictable. But mind can profit from experience, can learn from reactive habits of behavior in response to repetition of stimuli. Page-738 Line-1 Para-1

This cosmic instruction should not really be necessary, but we are bombarded by mechanists who use their minds to deny that mind and life is anything more than matter and energy. They seek to teach computers how to learn like humans and even attain consciousness; they fail to notice that teachable mind is more than physics and chemistry.

‘In the later evolution of mortal creatures the Life Carrier Sons provide the physical body, fabricated out of the existing organized material of the realm, while the Universe Spirit contributes the "breath of life.” ’ Page-376 Para-2

4. Soon-Coming Scientific Validation of the Urantia Book’s Cosmology. If The Urantia Book is what it purports to be then the present lack of contemporary scientific interest will not always be the case. What would make scientists sit up and take notice of this “communication from outer space”, this revelatory gift from higher universe life? Only scientific evidence in a book of philosophy can impress a real scientist of the book’s worth when discussing the scientific aspects of the cosmos, not some re-warmed 20th century science ill-suited for the presentation of the spiritual truths of the next 1000 years. No, The Urantia Book must present truly impressive, albeit transient, science alongside of ageless truth.

The Urantia Book has made many predictions and when they are scientifically observed that will be a mighty powerful attraction to scientists and others to take The Urantia Book seriously, and not just scientifically.

However without a very spectacular prediction most scientists will never entertain the possibility of an actual communication from higher order beings via a published book. Scientists respect confirmed predictions. But typically they wouldn’t take a serious look at a “book of revelation” without some very dramatic fulfilled prediction.

So far that hasn’t happened, but even now events are gathering for such a spectacular corroboration. I refer to the recent explorations in the eastern Mediterranean for Plato’s Atlantis, which due to research scientist Robert Sarmast, we now know was also the first Garden of Eden! That is quite a nice “co-ordination of known or about-to-be-known facts and observations”. What will happen if Robert’s next expedition brings up sensational evidence just where The Urantia Book says it is? Will scientists ignore that too? We may soon see. (I know of one, and there may be many other “closet UB readers” among professional scientists, who read and utilize the book, but who for obvious reasons prefer to keep that their secret.)

My own personal candidate in this category is the Urantia Book’s prediction that there is a rare type of non-breathing humanoid life on a sphere in close proximity to our world. [ As such we might be looking for the wrong kind of life in our solar system, entertaining too narrow a concept of life. If The Urantia Book is what it says it is, then there must be such a world in close proximity. Some people think that implies the world must be in our solar system, but I suppose being within easy communication range, like a few light years away, might also be in close proximity in astronomical terms because we could become aware of each other by interstellar communication. Even that would be exciting.

Why believe The Urantia Book’s science? Certainly it is not only because The Urantia Book states many spiritual truths. Rather, The Urantia Book’s science must stand on its own as well, at least for a while, during these times when it has yet to be taken seriously by most of the world. The real reason that I believe in the science of The Urantia Book and the authenticity of The Urantia Book as divine revelation to our world is because of its humanly improbable avoidance of error and the meandering convergence over the years of contemporary science to positions taken by the Urantia Book authors.

4.1 Discovery of Atlantis - the First Garden of Eden. Already Robert Sarmast [Sar03] has made on-site discoveries a mile under water near Cyprus. Expect more headlines at any time.

4.2 The Andromeda Galaxy is “Closer than Scientists Thought”. The Andromeda galaxy being visible with the naked eye was designated M31 by . Unlike so many other galaxies found by Hubble, it is blue shifted.

a) Distance Measurements. Many people, especially skeptics, but some believers as well, have pointed to The Urantia Book’s statement about the time of light travel from Andromeda being “almost one million years” [Page-170 Para-1] as an error on the face of the cosmology. They assume that the current distance estimate of 2.7 light years is accurate and reliable enough to base further conclusions on it even conclusions about the motivation of the superhuman authors for putting into the Urantia Book what they supposedly knew to be inaccurate! Skeptics have pointed to it as strong evidence of human authorship.

However, the accuracy of distance measurements to celestial objects is still a controversial topic in the scientific community. “While it is well established that M31 is about 15-16 times further away than the (LMC), the absolute value of this measure is still uncertain, and in current sources, usually given between 2.4 and 2.9 million light-years - a consequence of the uncertainty in the LMC distance and thus the overall intergalactic distance scale. E.g., the semi- recent correction from data by ESA's astrometrical satellite Hipparcos has pushed this value up by more than 10 percent, from about 2.4-2.5 to the about 2.9 million light-years we use here.” [SED98]

One of the most dependable methods to estimate relative distance utilizes so-called variable stars. These stars expand and contract in regular periods. The longer the period and expansion the brighter the star becomes. Shorter period variable stars are dimmer in all phases than longer period ones. For instance, stars in the LMG are all about the same distance from us and those with equal periods are observed to have equal luminosity. Therefore by determining the period of such a variable star its relative distance can be estimated using the inverse square law. If a star with the same period as another star is 4 times dimmer, then it must be twice as far away as the brighter star.

Although this is an accurate measure of relative distances, the accuracy of the calibration of this technique is still uncertain and unreliable. That is, we have an accurate measuring stick with the Cepheid variable stars but we still don’t know with much reliability the length of the distance unit on our measuring stick. Consequently we know more accurately that the Andromeda galaxy is about 15 to 16 times as far away as the LMG than we know the actual distance to LMG.

The reason for this is that there are no variable stars close enough on which we can do some relatively accurate and independent distance measurements. If we could independently and reliably measure the distance to even one of these variable stars then we would have a reliable estimate of the actual distance associated with that period and so all periods. But the LMC is too far away to measure distances by the parallax method.

In the parallax method the earth’s orbit around our sun functions as the base of a narrow triangle with the target star at the far away vertex. Seeing the shift of the target against the background stars allows an estimate of the angle between the viewpoints. Unfortunately other methods must be used to estimate the distance to LMG but they too have reliability problems.

In “Astronomy and the Superuniverse”, Troy Bishop [Bis82], documents with references that astronomy has calculated the distance to Andromeda, in 1907 at 19 light years, by in 1911 at over 1600 light years, by observation of novae in the mid-1920's at 800,000 light years, by Cepheid variables in the mid-1950's at 2.7 million light years. See Isaac Asimov’s The Universe From Flat Earth to Black Holes--and Beyond, Walker and Company, New York, 1980, for an account of the early evolution of our Andromeda distance measurements. Recently the distance estimate to Andromeda was changed upward again by 10% due to slight refinements in another distance measuring method used to calibrate the measuring stick. The bottom line is that as scientists we still do not know for sure what unit of distance is on our variable star measuring stick. In this context adjusting by a factor of 3 would not be shocking. There is always a ready explanation making everything reasonable!

But considering such variability even in recent measurements, the actual light from Andromeda still might take “almost 1 million years” to reach Urantia as The Urantia Book says, not from 2.4 to 2.9 million years as presently estimated by our science. Our scientists are still learning about large-scale motions that will change subsequent estimates. The Urantia Book is attempting to provide some cosmic instruction, but most of our scientists don’t yet think it is worth reading. Extra-terrestrial, super-human instruction on science and cosmology by way of The Urantia Book is not yet on the agenda of our scientists.

b) News on Size of Andromeda. On Monday, May 30 2005, while I was preparing this paper, Reuters released the news from astronomers that the Andromeda galaxy “just got bigger -- three times bigger”. A sprinkle of stars once thought to be part of the central halo were measured to be moving in a way only consistent with their being part of the main arms of the circling star cloud. That means the diameter of the disk is 3 times what was thought last year.

"This giant disk discovery will be very hard to reconcile with computer simulations of forming galaxies. You just don't get giant rotating disks from the of small galaxy fragments," Rodrigo Ibata [Rod05] said in a statement. No, you get them from the initiating actions of living force organizers as detailed earlier.

“The seven superuniverses are still growing; the periphery of each is gradually expanding; new nebulae are constantly being stabilized and organized; and some of the nebulae which Urantian astronomers regard as extragalactic are actually on the fringe of Orvonton and are traveling along with us. Page-130 Para-6

If in 2005 the estimated size of Andromeda can be discovered to be in error by a factor of three, is it hard to believe that there can be a similar error in the estimates of the distance to Andromeda? In deed, if Andromeda is actually 3 times closer than thought, that would mean it is 3 times smaller in each dimension than was thought, which would make the size estimate back shift again. But that is the nature of science, to correct its previous errors with the scientific method – the technique of experiment. A mathematical scientist conducts his experiments purely in the mind.

4.3 The Fourth and Last Outer Space Zone. Expect to hear about four distinct rings, “walls” or concentric rings of galaxies separated by relative empty space. These huge rings of billions of galaxies will also be found to be rotating in alternating directions. The center of these common rotations will be found to be the same center around which travel the “local group”, the 7 great super-galactic elongated elliptical arms of the grand universe circling the same macroscopic Center.

“The Quartan Space Level. This, the final and largest corps, consists of 24,010 Master Architects, and if our former conjectures are valid, it must be related to the fourth and last of the ever- increasing-sized universes of outer space.” Page-351 Line-17 Para-4 These Master Architects are eternal beings working on the ultimate (transcendental) level of reality, prior to all finite beginnings and after all finite endings, thereby joining the finite realms with the eternal realms of eternal Havona. Unifying all of this finite reality with eternal reality is the transcendental job of the Supreme Being and numerous Associates. These outer space universes were begun prior to the present “Local Group” (Grand Universe) of galaxies, not in a Big Bang explosion.

4.4 Spectrographic reinterpretation of the distance & redshift linear relationship.

Numerous “factors of error” in present day spectrographic interpretations will be identified. Look for errors due to: Earth’s angles of observation, Newly recognized rotations within our local group of galaxies (and associated Doppler shift corrections), alternating rotation of the local group (grand universe) and the first outer space zone of galaxies (the largest distortion), and still other space influences that shift light toward the red. The overall picture of the Master Universe of Central Paradise, Surrounding eternal Havona, 7 finite time-space Superuniverses (the local group), and four outer space zones full of billions of galaxies.

Beyond matter there is midspace, and beyond midspace there is the concept periphery of the mind, and beyond mind we are face to face with the Spirit of the Persons of the Eternal Son and our Paradise Father.

4.5 Overthrow of the big bang cosmology. Along with the overthrow of the Big Bang we will hear that the universe is ‘smaller than we thought’, and what seemed like rapid expansion now looks like orderly rotation, not explosive expansion.

“The successive space levels of the master universe constitute the major divisions of pervaded space--total creation, organized and partially inhabited or yet to be organized and inhabited. If the master universe were not a series of elliptical space levels of lessened resistance to motion, alternating with zones of relative quiescence, we conceive that some of the cosmic energies would be observed to shoot off on an infinite range, off on a straight-line path into trackless space; but we never find force, energy, or matter thus behaving; ever they whirl, always swinging onward in the tracks of the great space circuits.” Page-128 Line-34 Para-6

4.6 Discovery of non-breathing, electrically powered humanoids “in close proximity” to Earth

The Urantia Book predicts a non-breathing, intelligent race of people on a sphere close to Earth. Judging by characteristics of such worlds, Ganymede, Jupiter’s largest satellite in the solar system, is a candidate to be the world of the non-breathers. It is also possible that our moon harbors such a race still unnoticed by our still cursory exploration, but this seems less likely than Ganymede.

“Life on the worlds of the nonbreathers is radically different from what it is on Urantia. The nonbreathers do not eat food or drink water as do the Urantia races. The reactions of the nervous system, the heat-regulating mechanism, and the metabolism of these specialized peoples are radically different from such functions of Urantia mortals. Almost every act of living, aside from reproduction, differs, and even the methods of procreation are somewhat different.” Page-563 Line-43 Para-7

“You would be more than interested in the planetary conduct of this type of mortal because such a race of beings inhabits a sphere in close proximity to Urantia.” Page-564 Line-10 Para-2

Ganymede is a moon of Jupiter, the largest moon in our solar system with a diameter of 5,262 km (3,280 miles). It has no known atmosphere.

“The Galileo orbiter's first flyby of Ganymede discovered that Ganymede has its own magnetosphere field embedded inside Jupiter's huge one. This is probably generated in a similar fashion to the Earth's: as a result of motion of conducting material in the interior. It is thought that this conductive material may be a layer of liquid water with a high salt concentration, or it may originate in Ganymede's metallic core. Ganymede is the only moon known to have a magnetosphere.” [WikJ05]

It seems likely that energy intake for non-breathers is similar to the electrical energy intake of the humanoid midwayers elsewhere described. In 1990 Joe Pope [Pop90] published evidence of Ganymede being the likely sphere of the non-breathers.

4.7 Summary. So the soon-coming scientific verifications are:

a) Discovery of Atlantis- the First Garden of Eden (<2 years) b) The Andromeda galaxy is closer than once thought and light from there requires “almost one million years”, not almost 3 million years as is presently believed (<10 years) c) Forth and last outer space zone (<10 years) d) Spectrographic reinterpretation of the distance-redshift linear relationship (<10 yrs) e) Overthrow of “big bang” cosmology; universe is ‘smaller than we thought’ (<15 years) f) Discovery of non-breathing, electrically powered humanoids “in close proximity” to Earth – Ganymede, Jupiter’s satellite largest in the solar system, is candidate (Anytime we look for them, the sooner the better.)

5. The Future. The Urantia Book has much to say about the far distant future, not only the immediate future. Some revelatory information was mandated, and some lost knowledge is resurrected.

Scientists must reminded that not only religion has unproved assumptions: “All divisions of human thought are predicated on certain assumptions which are accepted, though unproved, by the constitutive reality sensitivity of the mind endowment of man. Science starts out on its vaunted career of reasoning by assuming the reality of three things: matter, motion, and life. Religion starts out with the assumption of the validity of three things: mind, spirit, and the universe–the Supreme Being.” Page-1139 Para-3

5.1 Time and Space. “It is helpful to man's cosmic orientation to attain all possible comprehension of Deity's relation to the cosmos. While absolute Deity is eternal in nature, the Gods are related to time as an experience in eternity. In the evolutionary universes eternity is temporal everlastingness-- the everlasting now.” Page-1295 Line-2 Para-1

Time is the “moving image of eternity” and space is the “reflected shadow” (projection) of Paradise realities. “Mankind is slow to perceive that, in all that is personal, matter is the skeleton of morontia, and that both are the reflected shadow of enduring spirit reality. How long before you will regard time as the moving image of eternity and space as the fleeting shadow of Paradise realities?” Page-2021 Para-2

“Throughout the first centuries of the Christian propaganda, the idea of the kingdom of heaven was tremendously influenced by the then rapidly spreading notions of Greek idealism, the idea of the natural as the shadow of the spiritual--the temporal as the time shadow of the eternal.” Page-1864 Line-8 Para-2

“Human personality is the time-space image-shadow cast by the divine Creator personality. And no actuality can ever be adequately comprehended by an examination of its shadow. Shadows should be interpreted in terms of the true substance.” Page-29 Line-44 Para-8

“The brighter the shining of the spiritualized personality (the Father in the universe, the fragment of potential spirit personality in the individual creature), the greater the shadow cast by the intervening mind upon its material investment. In time, man's body is just as real as mind or spirit, but in death, both mind (identity) and spirit survive while the body does not. A cosmic reality can be nonexistent in personality experience. And so your Greek figure of speech-- the material as the shadow of the more real spirit substance--does have a philosophic significance.” Page-141 Line-4 Para-1

If the universe is circular, ever moving around motionless Paradise at the focus of space, ever moving around Paradise in microscopic and macroscopic ways, then the motions we see may just be reflected images of time-less sequentiality on the space-less surfaces of Paradise.

The topology of matter and space is such that there is a (potentially dense) set of foci at the limit of the midspace zones existing within, between, and completely enveloping all moving matter. All of these midspace zones converge on a timeless, spaceless realm – Paradise, at the center of Infinity.

Although the midspace zones are potentially infinite, beyond the boundaries of matter-pervaded space they too end. But like Paradise the Unqualified Absolute and Universal Absolute have no limits. 5.2 Circular Simultaneity. An experience of circular simultaneity will replace the one-time linear “flow of events”. We all recognize that time is more than a moving point; our experience of time always includes an interval of it, a fragment of the never-beginning, never-ending eternal “now”.

“Time, space, and experience constitute barriers to creature concept; and yet, without time, apart from space, and except for experience, no creature could achieve even a limited comprehension of universe reality. Without time sensitivity, no evolutionary creature could possibly perceive the relations of sequence. Without space perception, no creature could fathom the relations of simultaneity. Without experience, no evolutionary creature could even exist; only the Seven Absolutes of Infinity really transcend experience, and even these may be experiential in certain phases. Page-1173 Line-30 Para-4

From Jesus in the Urantia Book, we read, “Animals do not sense time as does man, and even to man, because of his sectional and circumscribed view, time appears as a succession of events; but as man ascends, as he progresses inward, the enlarging view of this event procession is such that it is discerned more and more in its wholeness. That which formerly appeared as a succession of events then will be viewed as a whole and perfectly related cycle; in this way will circular simultaneity increasingly displace the onetime consciousness of the linear sequence of events.” Page-1439 Line- 19 Para-3

How you may ask can we ever imagine that time is not linear? Is it not true that the past is different from the future? Yes, it is different. For instance, we can change the future but not the past by deciding to act in the present. But every “moment” is already a time interval of longer or shorter duration. The theoretically infinitesimal instant has zero duration and the union of all such zero duration instants still has zero duration. There must be something more to a “time line” than points with no length.

Time always comes in intervals that include “now”, the eternally present. Without fragmentation, a time interval includes both the infinite past and also the infinite future. These time intervals also convey logical sequentiality, something that can also be conveyed by “circular simultaneity”.

“Time comes by virtue of motion.” Motion is more basic than time; all measurements of time are done by counting relative motions. One day is one revolution (motion) of the earth on its axis. Time is therefore the experience of periodic motion, and motion appears to be the change of an object from one of position in space to another. Motion in space has logical meaning, but that meaning can be gleaned without the necessity of linear motion.

The Absolutes of Infinity. “The seven prime relationships within the I AM eternalize as the Seven Absolutes of Infinity. But though we may portray reality origins and infinity differentiation by a sequential narrative, in fact all seven Absolutes are unqualifiedly and co-ordinately eternal. It may be necessary for mortal minds to conceive of their beginnings, but always should this conception be overshadowed by the realization that the seven Absolutes had no beginning; they are eternal and as such have always been. The seven Absolutes are the premise of reality.” Page-1155 Line-26 Para-1 Time gives us the intricacies of sequentiality and space gives us the relationships of simultaneity, but they are inseparable in wholeness of human experience.

5.3 The Bestowal of Life. “The force organizers initiate those changes and institute those modifications of space-force which eventuate in energy; the power directors transmute energy into matter; thus the material worlds are born. The Life Carriers initiate those processes in dead matter which we call life, material life. The Morontia Power Supervisors likewise perform throughout the transition realms between the material and the spiritual worlds. The higher spirit Creators inaugurate similar processes in divine forms of energy, and there ensue the higher spirit forms of intelligent life. Page-468 Line-11 Para-2

5.4 The Seven Master Spirits and their Seven Different Superuniverses. “Early in the projection of the superuniverse scheme of creation, the Master Spirits joined with the ancestral Trinity in the cocreation of the forty-nine Reflective Spirits, and concomitantly the Supreme Being functioned creatively as the culminator of the conjoined acts of the Paradise Trinity and the creative children of Paradise Deity. Majeston appeared and ever since has focalized the cosmic presence of the Supreme Mind, while the Master Spirits continue as source-centers for the far-flung ministry of the cosmic mind.” Page-1272 Line-11 Para-2

Each Master spirit has his own superuniverse. We belong to the 7th Superuniverse, Orvonton, while the whole 5th superuniverse among the seven is devoted to the power control beings. “Master Spirit Number Five. This divine personality who exquisitely blends the character of the Universal Father and the Infinite Spirit is the adviser of that enormous group of beings known as the power directors, power centers, and physical controllers. This Spirit also fosters all personalities taking origin in the Father and the Conjoint Actor. In the councils of the Seven Master Spirits, when the Father-Spirit attitude is in question, it is always Master Spirit Number Five who speaks. Page-187 Line-32 Para-4

5.5 The Spirit Nucleus. “Mortal man has a spirit nucleus. The mind is a personal-energy system existing around a divine spirit nucleus and functioning in a material environment. Such a living relationship of personal mind and spirit constitutes the universe potential of eternal personality.” Page-142 Line-1 Para-1 6. References

[APS99] American Physical Society, A Century of Physics Timeline, “The Great Wall of galaxies is found”, http://timeline.aps.org/APS/Timeline/Middle.cfm?EventID=150

[Aus04] Charles F. Austerberry, In “Evolution of modern cosmology: A brief history”, Dept. of Biology, Creighton University, http://puffin.creighton.edu/Austerberry/SRP420/SRP420_2004/Cosmology.html

[Bal05] “Redshifts and the Hubble Law”, Paul Ballard, The Heretical Press, Feb 3, 2005, http://www.heretical.com/science/redshift.html

[Bar98] Tomasz Barszczak, “Super-Kamiokande detector”, U. of California Irvine, 1998, http://www.ps.uci.edu/~superk/neutrino.html

[Bis82] Troy R. Bishop, “Astronomy and the Superuniverse”, http://www.starspring.com/ascender/astron/astron.html

[Blo05] Personal e-mail communication from Mathew Block in 2005

[Cal05] Philip Calabrese, “Toward a More Natural Expression of Quantum Logic with Boolean Fractions”, J. of Philosophical Logic, accepted for publication, 2005

[Cal05A] Philip Calabrese, “Doppler Shifts Due to Alternating Rotations”, 2005

[Dod05] “The Hubble Constant (H0) and the Age of the Universe”, Lecture Notes, Ana V. Dodgen, Department of Physics, California State University, Stanislaus, 2005, http://physics.csustan.edu/Ana/hubblconst.htm

[Ein05] “On the Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies”, Albert Einstein, Annalen der Physik. 17:891, 1905, reprinted in The Principle of Relativity, translated by W. Perrett and G.B. Jeffery, Dover Publications, Inc., 1952. http://www.fourmilab.ch/etexts/einstein/specrel/www/

[Gel93] (Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, 1993. Northern data (top)--Margaret Geller and John Huchra, Southern data (bottom)--Luiz da Costa et al. Quoted in Cosmology, a Research Briefing, National Academy of Sciences.) http://csep10.phys.utk.edu/astr162/lect/gclusters/soapbubbles-large.gif

[G$d49] “An Example of a New Type of Cosmological Solutions of Einstein’s Field Equations of Gravitation”, Kurt G$del, Reviews of Modern Physics, Vol. 21, Number 3, July, 1949.

[Har03] “Piltdown Man”, Richard Harter, November 16, 2003, URL = http://home.tiac.net/~cri_a/piltdown/piltdown.html#introduction

[Huc01] “The CfA Redshift Survey”, John Huchra, Harvard University, http://cfa- www.harvard.edu/~huchra/zcat/ [Inf05] http://www.infoplease.com/ipa/A0762175.html

[Jac01] “Frauds in Science”, Wayne Jackson, Christian Courier: Archives, October 3, 2001. http://www.christiancourier.com/archives/scienceFrauds.htm

[Mul00] Larry Mullins with Dr. Meredith Sprunger, A History of the Urantia Papers, Penumbra Press, Boulder, Co., 2000. (Appendix 4 is Merritt Horn’s exhaustive “Changes in the text of Urantia Foundation’s printings of The Urantia Book”.)

[Nav04] “Michelson Interferometer”, Carl R. Nave, Department of Physics and Astronomy, Georgia State University, http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/phyopt/michel.html

[NCS95 ] “Science for the Millennium”, National Center for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA), http://archive.ncsa.uiuc.edu/Cyberia/Expo/cosmos_nav.html

[Nor05] “Walls within Voids”, Michael Norman, NCSA/Univ. of Illinois. http://archive.ncsa.uiuc.edu/Cyberia/Cosmos/WallsVoids.html#SheetsVoids

[Orf01] “Review of Pathology of the Liver”, Edited by Dr. Emilio Orfei, Department of Pathology, Loyola University of Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Apr 10, 2001. http://www.meddean.luc.edu/lumen/MedEd/orfpath/repair.htm

[Pop90] Joe Pope, Notes, 1990, e-mail communications to Norm Du Val, personal e-mail from Norm Du Val, 2005

[Pri05] Dr. Richard Prince, ER physician, personal communication, 2005.

[Rot99] Carl A. Rotter, Department of Physics, University of Dallas, 1999. http://www.as.wvu.edu/coll03/phys/www/rotter/phys201/2_Matter_Space_Time/Expanding.html

[Rod05] Rodrigo Ibata, Observatoire Astronomique de Strasbourg in France, Reuters News Release, May 30, 2005, http://www.cnn.com/2005/TECH/space/05/30/space.andromeda.reut/

[Sar03] Discovery of Atlantis, Robert Sarmast, Origin Press, 2003, www.discoveryofatlantis.com

[Sci90] Science Frontiers #67, JAN-FEB 1990. © 1990-2000 William R. Corliss, http://www.science-frontiers.com/sf067/sf067a08.htm

[Sco05] “Redshift”, Donald E. Scott, http://www.electric-cosmos.org/arp.htm, Important Web site for the alternative redshifts

[SED98] University of Arizona, Students for the Exploration and Development of Space (SEDS), 1998, http://www.seds.org/messier/m/m031.html.

[Str05] Nick Strobel, “The Milky Way and Other Galaxies”, University of Washington, Astronomy, 17 Nov 95, http://www.maa.mhn.de/Scholar/galaxies.html

[Svi96] Egils Sviestins, “Rotating Universes and Time Traveling”, http://www.ettnet.se/~egils/essay/essay.html

[Tal02] Stefan Tallqvist, “The electron model”, 2002 http://www.vtt.fi/tte/samba/staff/st/electron.html

[Ten05] “Lecture notes in Astronomy”, Dept. Physics & Astronomy, University of Tennessee, http://csep10.phys.utk.edu/astr162/lect/gclusters/gwall.html

[Wag96] “Alfred Wegener (1880-1930)”, Ben Waggoner, University of California, Berkeley, Museum of Paleontology. http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/history/wegener.html

[Wei05] “Plate Tectonics: The Rocky History of an Idea “, Anne Weil, the University of California Berkeley Museum of Paleontology, http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/geology/techist.html

[Wik05] “Galaxy”, Wikipedia, 2005 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galaxy

[WikJ05] “Ganymede (moon)”, Wikipedia, June 2005, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ganymede_(moon)

[Wor97] World Book Encyclopedia. Chicago: World Book, 1997: 205. Seraphic Velocity

¾ By Troy Bishop

¾ By Merritt Horn

¾ By Bob Hunt Seraphic Velocity

Riddle of the Missing Light Years

by Troy R. Bishop

The Urantia Book description of seraphic velocity has led a number of readers to what could seem like an inconsistency in a book which many of them have embraced chiefly because of its amazing consistency. The problem is that the distances traversed by seraphim, as described in The Urantia Book, do not seem to consume the time that they should, given the velocity of seraphic travel that is also described in The Urantia Book.

The Urantia Book teaches that seraphim can travel at triple velocity: three times the speed of light, or 558,840 miles per second, averaging about 550,000 miles per second (23:2.15; 23:3.2; 39:3.8). This speed, in and of itself, presents no problem, even in view of the theory of relativity, which teaches that the speed of light (186,280 miles per second) is the limit of speed for any object. The Urantia Book also teaches that the speed of light is a limiting speed – for most non-enseraphimed beings (23:3.2). As nonmaterial beings, seraphim might be expected to be exempt from the material speed limit of relativity.

Expected transit times

The seraphim seem to perform activities throughout the confines of the local universe, and even beyond, with an ability that transcends their apparent velocity of transit. The setting for most of these activities is the local universe, composed of one hundred constellations, each composed of one hundred local systems. (The star cloud that is our local universe was organized from components of more than one nebula, which have been adjusted over a period of time to travel as a unit through space) (41:0.3). Our local system, Satania, contains 619 inhabited worlds, in over 500 different physical systems (32:2.10), and over two thousand brilliant suns, of which our sun is average (41:3.1).

Sun is another word for star. According to astronomy, the star nearest our sun is Proxima Centauri, located about four light years away. To traverse this distance – to get from here to the nearest star – would take a seraphim one-third of four, or over one year. Drawing a line around any 2000-star group that includes our sun, in an attempt roughly to outline our system, is sure to set off a distance that would require scores or hundreds of years for a seraphim to traverse at triple velocity. It would seem reasonable that it should take this same amount of time for seraphim to journey between our planet, Urantia, and our system headquarters, Jerusem (and its circling, attendant mansion-world satellites).

The possibility might be raised that regardless of how big the system is, Urantia and Jerusem could be close neighbors inside it, situated only a relatively short journey apart. But The Urantia Book teaches that our solar system is the second-farthest in our local system from Jerusem (41:10.5), and that Urantia is on the outskirts of our system, Satania, (41:10.5), while Jerusem is very close to the astronomical center of Satania, which is occupied by an enormous dark island of space (41:2.2) (not a black hole).

A seraphic journey between Urantia and Jerusem should occupy scores – perhaps hundreds – of years at seraphic triple velocity. And seraphic travel between Jerusem and its constellation capital, Edentia – headquarters world for one hundred systems – should take hundreds or thousands of years.

Third-day question

A question asked by some Urantia Book readers is: how can the Urantia Book teaching that mortals are sometimes resurrected on Jerusem's Mansion World Number 1 on the third day following physical death, after being transported there by guardian seraphim, be reconciled with the fact that thirty years – or maybe three hundred years – would seem the minimum reasonable time for such a journey?

The suggestion is sometimes offered that the exact term is third period, not third day (112:4.6; 112:5.15); and period can denote any amount of time. This makes a little sense to me, although it leaves entirely too many vaguely unexplained activities going on in the economy of the realm for me to feel easy with it.

The argument fell completely apart for me a few years back when Dan Massey kindly sent me a copy of a letter he had written to a Urantia Book reader in France who had inquired into the apparent contradiction involving seraphic velocity and been referred to Dan. In the letter, Dan identified a direct Urantia Book referral to resurrection on the mansion world on the third day following physical death; and since that time, I have seen other such references (49:6.9; 47:8.4; 76:6.2).

With travel to Jerusem identified as definitely occupying no more than three days, the next question often raised is: What is a day? Is it a Urantia day? A Jerusem day? Some other day?

Unless it's a Paradise-Havona day, which is about a thousand years (humor intended: this type of day is not applicable to the superuniverses of time), it couldn't make much difference to the question, for the days in question don't differ much – not nearly enough to explain the discrepancies being examined.

Some information can be gleaned from The Urantia Book about specific instances.

Specific instances

Thirty-seven thousand years ago, Adam and Eve were delivered by seraphic transport to Urantia from Jerusem, in dematerialized form (a combustion body of flesh and blood cannot be transported by seraphim). Ten days later, when their rematerialization into dual human form was completed, they regained consciousness simultaneously (74:0.1).

Soon after their awakening on Urantia, at high noon on their first Urantia day as conscious, functioning beings, they were installed as the custodians and rulers of Urantia (74:2.6).

On their seventh day on Urantia, just before noon – exactly six days after their installation on Urantia – a seraphic messenger brought to Urantia the Jerusem acknowledgment of this installation (74:4.5).

Jerusem could not have used the system circuits to receive news of the planetary installation, for the system circuits were in a severed status due to the rebellion (74:3.1); communication within the system and between the system headquarters and constellation headquarters had to be by messenger (53:6.5; 53:7.3).

Under some conditions, Solitary Messengers, who can travel at speeds of over 800 billion miles per second (23:3.3), are available at the system level (23:3.3; 53:7.3).

Even if a Solitary Messenger bore the news of the Urantia installation to Jerusem, the seraphim traveling from Jerusem could have had six Urantia – earth! – days at most to reach Urantia. Since, from above, this journey should have required scores or hundreds of years for a seraphim to complete, this is a definite instance of an apparent conflict between Urantia Book descriptions of distance, seraphic velocity, and time of travel.

The Melchizedek receivers returned from Jerusem seventy days after the default of Adam and Eve (75:5.8); since the Melchizedek receivers travel by seraphic transport (74:5.2), this is another case of too-rapid seraphic travel.

The Adamic couple left the garden shortly after the Melchizedeks arrived and were met on the third day out (no significance to this figure) by the arrival of seraphic transports who had come from Jerusem for certain of the Adamic offspring (75:6.3). This seraphic journey from Jerusem, after the default of Adam and Eve, took a matter of days – not scores or hundreds of years – to complete (since the seraphim couldn't have begun the journey until the default, the reason for their trip) – a third instance of mysteriously enhanced seraphic travel.

Before the arrival of Adam and Eve on Urantia, in the times of the Planetary Prince, when the rebellion occurred 200,000 years ago, Van and the Loyalists awaited confirmation of their actions in defying the rebels, which came seven years later with the arrival of a Most High of Edentia with the emergency Melchizedeks (67:2.6; 67:3.10) (who travel by seraphic transport – see above – 74:5.2).

This delay of seven years – not seven score or seven hundred – was primarily for the purpose of allowing each personality on Urantia affected by the rebellion to make up his mind on his position (67:3.10).

Note that the Most High was a Most High of Edentia, who, if he came to Urantia from Edentia, should have traveled for probably thousands of years, as stated above. (So few literal facts are available about the Vorondadek order of Sonship, which also includes the Most Highs, that it 's of interest to note that this order of sonship – traveling with the enseraphimed Melchizedeks above – also relies on seraphim for transport.)

Consistent contradiction

Events of similar significance occur elsewhere in The Urantia Book, such as a Most High coming to the planet during Michael's bestowal here as Jesus of Nazareth. A stunning example of the consistency of the apparent contradiction in The Urantia Book between the familiar formulas relating speed, distance, and time is the Urantia Book narration that Solitary Messengers, who travel at incredible speeds (at least 841,621,642,000 miles per second) (23:3.3), sometimes travel as temporary ambassadors from established local universes to newly inhabited local universes until regular ambassadors can arrive (23:2.15).

The reason given for this is that regular ambassadors, who travel by means of seraphic transport, could be required to travel for long periods of time to reach such far-distant local universes (23:2.15). This ambassadorial outreach can span an entire superuniverse, not just the containing minor sector (23:2.14).

Since our superuniverse, Orvonton, is half-a-million light years across (250,000 light year radius) (32:2.11), it should require one-half million years for light to travel between two local universes at opposite ends of the super-universe: the time required for enseraphimed ambassadors to make this same journey should be one- third of that, or one hundred sixty-six thousand years – one-sixth of a million years! In keeping with its consistent contradiction, The Urantia Book refers to this maximum time as hundreds of years (23:2.16).

The writers of The Urantia Book, with its amazing consistency and their incredible intelligence, are undoubtedly aware of this apparent contradiction. They have coped in other areas with (then) impending advances in human knowledge by using wording which seemed innocuous before the new discovery, yet later was seen to contain previously unnoticed ambiguities allowing either the pre- or post -discovery interpretation. (The revelators are forbidden to anticipate the human discoveries of a thousand years) (101:4.2).

Something to learn

It would seem to me that there is a factor yet to be learned, in light of which this "brazen" contradiction will be most acceptable. Until then, the consistent contradiction is a part of The Urantia Book landscape, as the Easter Island statues are a part of the earth’s archeological landscape: conspicuous, challenging – and not explained.

[The Easter Island statues – or rather the people of this island and its use as an Andite religious and administrative center – do happen to be explained in the Urantia Book (74:8.4)]. The idea of a new factor first came to me, again, from Dan Massey, who, during a personal conversation, responded to one of my observations / questions about the problem of seraphic velocity with the view that perhaps that things change in ways other than currently envisioned by science during travel involving speeds very near to – or in this case several times greater than – the speed of light.

Perhaps time, or distance, change in ways other than the commonly envisioned time shift and length contraction of relativity. Einstein’s Theory of Relativity is perhaps too often viewed as "correct" and exempt from the fallibilities of humankind, never needing correction, further development, or interpretation.

The writers of The Urantia Book have possibly left us a hint of the problem – and what is to come – with a little smile. In a discussion of the vulnerability of materialism, near the end of the book, they address the theory of relativity, humankind’s most impressive monument to its greatness, as "dabblings with the faintly glimpsed findings of ‘relativity’" (195:7.5).

The consistent contradiction doesn’t seem to fit the category of statements in accordance with existing scientific knowledge which will later be proven wrong as scientific knowledge advances (101:4.2). It flatly defies present scientific knowledge – just as did other statements in The Urantia Book with which science later has come to concur. It will be interesting to see what new findings will develop in science to show once again that The Urantia Book was right. References for Seraphic Velocity:

23:2.15 (260¶2) 6. Ambassadors and Emissaries of Special Assignment. Local universes situated within the same superuniverse customarily exchange ambassadors selected from their native orders of sonship. But to avoid delay, Solitary Messengers are frequently asked to go as ambassadors from one local creation to another, to represent and interpret one realm to another. For example: When a newly inhabited realm is discovered, it may prove to be so remote in space that a long time will pass before an enseraphimed ambassador can reach this far- distant universe. An enseraphimed being cannot possibly exceed the velocity of 558,840 Urantia miles in one second of your time. Massive stars, crosscurrents, and detours, as well as attraction tangents, will all tend to retard such speed so that on a long journey the velocity will average about 550,000 miles per second.

23:2.16 (260¶3) When it develops that it will require hundreds of years for a native ambassador to reach a far-distant local universe, a Solitary Messenger is often asked to proceed there immediately to act as ambassador ad interim. Solitary Messengers can go in very short order, not independently of time and space as do the Gravity Messengers, but nearly so. They also serve in other circumstances as emissaries of special assignment.

23:3.2 (260¶6) The universe is well supplied with spirits who utilize gravity for purposes of transit; they can go anywhere any time—instanter—but they are not persons. Certain other gravity traversers are personal beings, such as Gravity Messengers and Transcendental Recorders, but they are not available to the super- and the local universe administrators. The worlds teem with angels and men and other highly personal beings, but they are handicapped by time and space: The limit of velocity for most nonenseraphimed beings is 186,280 miles of your world per second of your time; the midway creatures and certain others can, often do, attain double velocity —372,560 miles per second—while the seraphim and others can traverse space at triple velocity, about 558,840 miles per second. There are, however, no transit or messenger personalities who function between the instantaneous velocities of the gravity traversers and the comparatively slow speeds of the seraphim, except the Solitary Messengers.

39:3.8 (433¶2) 5. The Transporters. The fifth group of supervisor seraphim operate as personality transporters, carrying beings to and from the headquarters of the constellations. Such transport seraphim, while in flight from one sphere to another, are fully conscious of their velocity, direction, and astronomic whereabouts. They are not traversing space as would an inanimate projectile. They may pass near one another during space flight without the least danger of collision. They are fully able to vary speed of progression and to alter direction of flight, even to change destinations if their directors should so instruct them at any space junction of the universe intelligence circuits. 39:3.9 (433¶3) These transit personalities are so organized that they can simultaneously utilize all three of the universally distributed lines of energy, each having a clear space velocity of 186,280 miles per second. These transporters are thus able to superimpose velocity of energy upon velocity of power until they attain an average speed on their long journeys varying anywhere from 555,000 to almost 559,000 of your miles per second of your time. The velocity is affected by the mass and proximity of neighboring matter and by the strength and direction of the near-by main circuits of universe power. There are numerous types of beings, similar to the seraphim, who are able to traverse space, and who also are able to transport other beings who have been properly prepared.

23:3.2 (260¶6) The universe is well supplied with spirits who utilize gravity for purposes of transit; they can go anywhere any time—instanter—but they are not persons. Certain other gravity traversers are personal beings, such as Gravity Messengers and Transcendental Recorders, but they are not available to the super- and the local universe administrators. The worlds teem with angels and men and other highly personal beings, but they are handicapped by time and space: The limit of velocity for most nonenseraphimed beings is 186,280 miles of your world per second of your time; the midway creatures and certain others can, often do, attain double velocity —372,560 miles per second—while the seraphim and others can traverse space at triple velocity, about 558,840 miles per second. There are, however, no transit or messenger personalities who function between the instantaneous velocities of the gravity traversers and the comparatively slow speeds of the seraphim, except the Solitary Messengers.

41:0.3 (455¶3) One or more—even many—such nebulae may be encompassed within the domain of a single local universe even as Nebadon was physically assembled out of the stellar and planetary progeny of Andronover and other nebulae. The spheres of Nebadon are of diverse nebular ancestry, but they all had a certain minimum commonness of space motion which was so adjusted by the intelligent efforts of the power directors as to produce our present aggregation of space bodies, which travel along together as a contiguous unit over the orbits of the superuniverse.

32:2.10 (359¶7) Satania is not a uniform physical system, a single astronomic unit or organization. Its 619 inhabited worlds are located in over five hundred different physical systems. Only five have more than two inhabited worlds, and of these only one has four peopled planets, while there are forty-six having two inhabited worlds.

41:3.1 (458¶1) There are upward of two thousand brilliant suns pouring forth light and energy in Satania, and your own sun is an average blazing orb. Of the thirty suns nearest yours, only three are brighter. The Universe Power Directors initiate the specialized currents of energy which play between the individual stars and their respective systems. These solar furnaces, together with the dark giants of space, serve the power centers and physical controllers as way stations for the effective concentrating and directionizing of the energy circuits of the material creations. 41:3.2 (458¶2) The suns of Nebadon are not unlike those of other universes. The material composition of all suns, dark islands, planets, and satellites, even meteors, is quite identical. These suns have an average diameter of about one million miles, that of your own solar orb being slightly less. The largest star in the universe, the stellar cloud Antares, is four hundred and fifty times the diameter of your sun and is sixty million times its volume. But there is abundant space to accommodate all of these enormous suns. They have just as much comparative elbow room in space as one dozen oranges would have if they were circulating about throughout the interior of Urantia, and were the planet a hollow globe.

41:10.5 (466¶4) Urantia is comparatively isolated on the outskirts of Satania, your solar system, with one exception, being the farthest removed from Jerusem, while Satania itself is next to the outermost system of Norlatiadek, and this constellation is now traversing the outer fringe of Nebadon. You were truly among the least of all creation until Michael's bestowal elevated your planet to a position of honor and great universe interest. Sometimes the last is first, while truly the least becomes greatest.

41:2.2 (457¶1) Satania itself is composed of over seven thousand astronomical groups, or physical systems, few of which had an origin similar to that of your solar system. The astronomic center of Satania is an enormous dark island of space which, with its attendant spheres, is situated not far from the headquarters of the system government.

112:4.6 (1232¶1) If the human individual survives without delay, the Adjuster, so I am instructed, registers at Divinington, proceeds to the Paradise presence of the Universal Father, returns immediately and is embraced by the Personalized Adjusters of the superuniverse and local universe of assignment, receives the recognition of the chief Personalized Monitor of Divinington, and then, at once, passes into the "realization of identity transition," being summoned therefrom on the third period and on the mansion world in the actual personality form made ready for the reception of the surviving soul of the earth mortal as that form has been projected by the guardian of destiny.

112:5.15 (1234¶4) During the transit of surviving mortals from the world of origin to the mansion worlds, whether they experience personality reassembly on the third period or ascend at the time of a group resurrection, the record of personality constitution is faithfully preserved by the archangels on their worlds of special activities. These beings are not the custodians of personality (as the guardian seraphim are of the soul), but it is nonetheless true that every identifiable factor of personality is effectually safeguarded in the custody of these dependable trustees of mortal survival. As to the exact whereabouts of mortal personality during the time intervening between death and survival, we do not know.

49:6.9 (569¶4) Throughout the earlier ages of an evolutionary world, few mortals go to judgment on the third day. But as the ages pass, more and more the personal guardians of destiny are assigned to the advancing mortals, and thus increasing numbers of these evolving creatures are repersonalized on the first mansion world on the third day after natural death. On such occasions the return of the Adjuster signalizes the awakening of the human soul, and this is the repersonalization of the dead just as literally as when the en masse roll is called at the end of a dispensation on the evolutionary worlds.

47:8.4 (538¶2) The union of the evolving immortal soul with the eternal and divine Adjuster is signalized by the seraphic summoning of the supervising superangel for resurrected survivors and of the archangel of record for those going to judgment on the third day; and then, in the presence of such a survivor's morontia associates, these messengers of confirmation speak: "This is a beloved son in whom I am well pleased." This simple ceremony marks the entrance of an ascending mortal upon the eternal career of Paradise service.

76:6.2 (853¶3) They did not long rest in the oblivion of the unconscious sleep of the mortals of the realm. On the third day after Adam's death, the second following his reverent burial, the orders of Lanaforge, sustained by the acting Most High of Edentia and concurred in by the Union of Days on Salvington, acting for Michael, were placed in Gabriel's hands, directing the special roll call of the distinguished survivors of the Adamic default on Urantia. And in accordance with this mandate of special resurrection, number twenty-six of the Urantia series, Adam and Eve were repersonalized and reassembled in the resurrection halls of the mansion worlds of Satania together with 1,316 of their associates in the experience of the first garden. Many other loyal souls had already been translated at the time of Adam's arrival, which was attended by a dispensational adjudication of both the sleeping survivors and of the living qualified ascenders.

74:0.1 (828¶1) ADAM AND EVE arrived on Urantia, from the year A.D. 1934, 37,848 years ago. It was in midseason when the Garden was in the height of bloom that they arrived. At high noon and unannounced, the two seraphic transports, accompanied by the Jerusem personnel intrusted with the transportation of the biologic uplifters to Urantia, settled slowly to the surface of the revolving planet in the vicinity of the temple of the Universal Father. All the work of rematerializing the bodies of Adam and Eve was carried on within the precincts of this newly created shrine. And from the time of their arrival ten days passed before they were re-created in dual human form for presentation as the world's new rulers. They regained consciousness simultaneously. The Material Sons and Daughters always serve together. It is the essence of their service at all times and in all places never to be separated. They are designed to work in pairs; seldom do they function alone.

74:2.6 (830¶1) The next act was the delivery of the charge of planetary custody to Adam and Eve by the senior Melchizedek, chief of the council of receivership on Urantia. The Material Son and Daughter took the oath of allegiance to the Most Highs of Norlatiadek and to Michael of Nebadon and were proclaimed rulers of Urantia by Van, who thereby relinquished the titular authority which for over one hundred and fifty thousand years he had held by virtue of the action of the Melchizedek receivers.

74:4.5 (832¶5) It was a momentous day, and just before noon, about the time of the arrival of the seraphic messenger bearing the Jerusem acknowledgment of the installation of the world's rulers, Adam and Eve, moving apart from the throng, pointed to the Father's temple and said: "Go you now to the material emblem of the Father's invisible presence and bow down in worship of him who made us all and who keeps us living. And let this act be the sincere pledge that you never will again be tempted to worship anyone but God." They all did as Adam directed. The Material Son and Daughter stood alone on the mount with bowed heads while the people prostrated themselves about the temple.

74:3.1 (830¶4) And now, after their formal installation, Adam and Eve became painfully aware of their planetary isolation. Silent were the familiar broadcasts, and absent were all the circuits of extraplanetary communication. Their Jerusem fellows had gone to worlds running along smoothly with a well-established Planetary Prince and an experienced staff ready to receive them and competent to co-operate with them during their early experience on such worlds. But on Urantia rebellion had changed everything. Here the Planetary Prince was very much present, and though shorn of most of his power to work evil, he was still able to make the task of Adam and Eve difficult and to some extent hazardous. It was a serious and disillusioned Son and Daughter of Jerusem who walked that night through the Garden under the shining of the , discussing plans for the next day.

53:6.5 (606¶8) Manota: "Having been automatically thrown out of the constellation circuits by the secession of Lucifer, we were dependent on the loyalty of our intelligence corps, who forwarded calls for help to Edentia from the near-by system of Rantulia; and we found that the kingdom of order, the intellect of loyalty, and the spirit of truth were inherently triumphant over rebellion, self-assertion, and so- called personal liberty; we were able to carry on until the arrival of the new System Sovereign, the worthy successor of Lucifer. And immediately thereafter I was assigned to the corps of the Melchizedek receivership of Urantia, assuming jurisdiction over the loyal seraphic orders on the world of the traitorous Caligastia, who had proclaimed his sphere a member of the newly projected system of `liberated worlds and emancipated personalities' proposed in the infamous Declaration of Liberty issued by Lucifer in his call to the `libertyloving, free- thinking, and forward-looking intelligences of the misruled and maladministered worlds of Satania.'"

53:7.3 (607¶4) All secession propaganda had to be carried on by personal effort because the broadcast service and all other avenues of interplanetary communication were suspended by the action of the system circuit supervisors. Upon the actual outbreak of the insurrection the entire system of Satania was isolated in both the constellation and the universe circuits. During this time all incoming and outgoing messages were dispatched by seraphic agents and Solitary Messengers. The circuits to the fallen worlds were also cut off, so that Lucifer could not utilize this avenue for the furtherance of his nefarious scheme. And these circuits will not be restored so long as the archrebel lives within the confines of Satania.

23:3.3 (261¶1) Solitary Messengers are, therefore, generally used for dispatch and service in those situations where personality is essential to the achievement of the assignment, and where it is desired to avoid the loss of time which would be occasioned by the sending of any other readily available type of personal messenger. They are the only definitely personalized beings who can synchronize with the combined universal currents of the grand universe. Their velocity in traversing space is variable, depending on a great variety of interfering influences, but the record shows that on the journey to fulfill this mission my associate messenger proceeded at the rate of 841,621,642,000 of your miles per second of your time.

75:5.8 (844¶1) Time passed, but Adam was not certain of the nature of their offense until seventy days after the default of Eve, when the Melchizedek receivers returned to Urantia and assumed jurisdiction over world affairs. And then he knew they had failed.

74:5.2 (833¶2) The farewell of the receivers occupied the whole of a day, and during the evening the individual Melchizedeks gave Adam and Eve their parting advice and best wishes. Adam had several times requested his advisers to remain on earth with him, but always were these petitions denied. The time had come when the Material Sons must assume full responsibility for the conduct of world affairs. And so, at midnight, the seraphic transports of Satania left the planet with fourteen beings for Jerusem, the translation of Van and Amadon occurring simultaneously with the departure of the twelve Melchizedeks.

75:6.3 (844¶5) The Edenic caravan was halted on the third day out from the Garden by the arrival of the seraphic transports from Jerusem. And for the first time Adam and Eve were informed of what was to become of their children. While the transports stood by, those children who had arrived at the age of choice (twenty years) were given the option of remaining on Urantia with their parents or of becoming wards of the Most Highs of Norlatiadek. Two thirds chose to go to Edentia; about one third elected to remain with their parents. All children of prechoice age were taken to Edentia. No one could have beheld the sorrowful parting of this Material Son and Daughter and their children without realizing that the way of the transgressor is hard. These offspring of Adam and Eve are now on Edentia; we do not know what disposition is to be made of them.

67:2.6 (756¶1) For more than seven years this struggle continued. Not until every personality concerned had made a final decision, would or did the authorities of Edentia interfere or intervene. Not until then did Van and his loyal associates receive vindication and release from their prolonged anxiety and intolerable suspense.

67:3.10 (757¶3) There is no end to the recital of the stirring events of these tragic days. But at last the final decision of the last personality was made, and then, but only then, did a Most High of Edentia arrive with the emergency Melchizedeks to seize authority on Urantia. The Caligastia panoramic reign-records on Jerusem were obliterated, and the probationary era of planetary rehabilitation was inaugurated.

23:3.3 (261¶1) Solitary Messengers are, therefore, generally used for dispatch and service in those situations where personality is essential to the achievement of the assignment, and where it is desired to avoid the loss of time which would be occasioned by the sending of any other readily available type of personal messenger. They are the only definitely personalized beings who can synchronize with the combined universal currents of the grand universe. Their velocity in traversing space is variable, depending on a great variety of interfering influences, but the record shows that on the journey to fulfill this mission my associate messenger proceeded at the rate of 841,621,642,000 of your miles per second of your time.

23:2.15 (260¶2) 6. Ambassadors and Emissaries of Special Assignment. Local universes situated within the same superuniverse customarily exchange ambassadors selected from their native orders of sonship. But to avoid delay, Solitary Messengers are frequently asked to go as ambassadors from one local creation to another, to represent and interpret one realm to another. For example: When a newly inhabited realm is discovered, it may prove to be so remote in space that a long time will pass before an enseraphimed ambassador can reach this far- distant universe. An enseraphimed being cannot possibly exceed the velocity of 558,840 Urantia miles in one second of your time. Massive stars, crosscurrents, and detours, as well as attraction tangents, will all tend to retard such speed so that on a long journey the velocity will average about 550,000 miles per second.

23:2.12 (259¶5) 5. Explorers of Undirected Assignment. When the reserve corps of the Solitary Messengers is overrecruited, there issues from one of the Seven Supreme Power Directors a call for exploration volunteers; and there is never a lack of volunteers, for they delight to be dispatched as free and untrammeled explorers, to experience the thrill of finding the organizing nucleuses of new worlds and universes. 23:2.13 (259¶6) They go forth to investigate the clues furnished by the space contemplators of the realms. Undoubtedly the Paradise Deities know of the existence of these undiscovered energy systems of space, but they never divulge such information. If the Solitary Messengers did not explore and chart these newly organizing energy centers, such phenomena would long remain unnoticed even by the intelligences of adjacent realms. Solitary Messengers, as a class, are highly sensitive to gravity; accordingly they can sometimes detect the probable presence of very small dark planets, the very worlds which are best adapted to life experiments.

23:2.14 (260¶1) These messenger-explorers of undirected assignment patrol the master universe. They are constantly out on exploring expeditions to the uncharted regions of all outer space. Very much of the information which we possess of transactions in the realms of outer space, we owe to the explorations of the Solitary Messengers as they often work and study with the celestial astronomers.

32:2.11 (359¶8) The Satania system of inhabited worlds is far removed from Uversa and that great sun cluster which functions as the physical or astronomic center of the seventh superuniverse. From Jerusem, the headquarters of Satania, it is over two hundred thousand light-years to the physical center of the superuniverse of Orvonton, far, far away in the dense diameter of the Milky Way. Satania is on the periphery of the local universe, and Nebadon is now well out towards the edge of Orvonton. From the outermost system of inhabited worlds to the center of the superuniverse is a trifle less than two hundred and fifty thousand light-years.

23:2.16 (260¶3) When it develops that it will require hundreds of years for a native ambassador to reach a far-distant local universe, a Solitary Messenger is often asked to proceed there immediately to act as ambassador ad interim. Solitary Messengers can go in very short order, not independently of time and space as do the Gravity Messengers, but nearly so. They also serve in other circumstances as emissaries of special assignment.

101:4.2 (1109¶3) Mankind should understand that we who participate in the revelation of truth are very rigorously limited by the instructions of our superiors. We are not at liberty to anticipate the scientific discoveries of a thousand years. Revelators must act in accordance with the instructions which form a part of the revelation mandate. We see no way of overcoming this difficulty, either now or at any future time. We full well know that, while the historic facts and religious truths of this series of revelatory presentations will stand on the records of the ages to come, within a few short years many of our statements regarding the physical sciences will stand in need of revision in consequence of additional scientific developments and new discoveries. These new developments we even now foresee, but we are forbidden to include such humanly undiscovered facts in the revelatory records. Let it be made clear that revelations are not necessarily inspired. The cosmology of these revelations is not inspired. It is limited by our permission for the co-ordination and sorting of present-day knowledge. While divine or spiritual insight is a gift, human wisdom must evolve. 195:7.5 (2078¶8) The realities and values of spiritual progress are not a "psychologic projection"—a mere glorified daydream of the material mind. Such things are the spiritual forecasts of the indwelling Adjuster, the spirit of God living in the mind of man. And let not your dabblings with the faintly glimpsed findings of "relativity" disturb your concepts of the eternity and infinity of God. And in all your solicitation concerning the necessity for self-expression do not make the mistake of failing to provide for Adjuster-expression, the manifestation of your real and better self. SERAPIllC VELOCITIES and Other Related Problems

by

Merritt C. Horn, Academic Officer The Boulder School for Students of The URANTIA Book

There has been much discussion recently of certain problems regarding the velocities of spiritual beings as revealed in The URANTIA Book. In this article, these problems will be summarized and a solution will be suggested.

A Note on Symbols: In the interest of brevity, the following symbols will be used in this article: 0:.1

C = the speed of light Cy = light-year UD= Urantia day UY = Urantia year JD = .J erusem day JY = Jerusem year Yt = theoretical velocity: N x C Yo = observed velocity in C D = distance in Cy N = a variable, multiple of C T = elapsed time -: Problem #1: How do guardian seraphim on death duty reach Jerusem in three days if they can travel only three times the speed of light, as -Jerusern must be more than 9 (or 27) light-days away from Urantia? . Before we can begin to solve this problem we must first determine the length of the "days" referred to, and second, estimate the distance to Jerusem.

Length of Day: . It should be noted that while we do not know what "day" or "period" refers to,l the revelators could have refrained-rrom using "day" if it 'was misleading; Therefore it must have some recognizable meaning, though the use oi " "period" may indicate that the: day referred to is not the UD. The most likely day would be the JD which is almost exactly (99% of) 3 days of Urantia time.2 (This leads to the 27 light-day figure suggested above: 3C x 3JD = 27 Urantia light days.) It will be assumed, for reasons that will be made clear later, that the "day" referred to in this connection is the Jerusem Day.

Distance to Jerusem: The distance to Jerusem is not revealed to us, but using some clues that are' revealed, and current scientific knowledge, we can make a reasonable estimate: . . We are told 't ha t there are about 2,000 . suns in Satania. 3 .The star population density in our local area of the universe is about one star per 300 cubic light-years.4 The volume of space required for 2000 stars is thus about 600,000 cubic light-years. If Satania is roughly spherical it would therefore be about 104.2Cy in diameter. Jerusem is near the center of Satania 5 and is therefore about 50Cy from planets at the outskirts of the system, and Urantia's solar system is, with one exception, the farthest removed from J erusem in Satania.f The distance from Jerusem to Urantia is thus about 50Cy, though 30Cy to 70Cy would be a reasonable range.

Problem #2: The Mel chizedek receivers arrived on Urantia 70 days after Adam and Eve defaulted. There is no question here about the meaning of "days''." Since the Melchizedeks returned to Jerusem about 7 years after Adam and Eve arrived, we have no reason to suspect that they would return from any other place-at least not from any nearer location. 70 x 3C = 210 light-days which is far less than the 50Cy distance to Jerusem. We do not know if the Melchizedeks departed immediately upon learning of the default; they might have deliberated for some time before leaving Jerusem, but they had no more than 70UD to make the trip.

Problem #3: Six Urantia Days after Adam and Eve were installed, a messenger seraphim arrived from Jerusem bearing acknowledgement of the installation.S We do not know how or when the Jerusem authorities received notice of this action (more on this later), but it must be possible to travel to Jeruseni in 6UD or less at a velocity of 3C.9

Problem #4: Weare told that Solitary Messengers sometimes serve as ambassadors ad-interim for a Local Universe "when it develops that it will require hundreds of years for a native ambassador to reach a far-distant universe.FThese ambassadors travel by serap'ric transport at ~C,10 We do pot know what "year" the:r~!'e referring to, but usually if they. are referring to other than Urantia standards of measurement they give us some indication to that effect. We will assume UY because the velocities are also given in Urantian time. units, . The' superuniverse is approximately 500,000Cyin diameter.llTherefore a being travelling at 3C should take 166,000 years to cross it. This, is 200 to 1,000 times the length of time that "hundreds" of years would seem to indicate. (Again, we must assume that the revelators said "hundreds" because they meant "hundreds".)

Problem #5: The Divine Counselor writing Paper 19 tells us that he travelled from Uversa to Urantia in 109 days of Urantia time.12 This distance is approximately 200,000Cy.13 If you calculate the velocity that this Divine Counselor attained in his flight, you will find that it was about 671;141C. This velocity, while astounding, is not of itself a problem as the Diyine Counselor tell us that he is able to move about "fr-eely and quickly".14 ' . . A problem does arise, however, when that velocity is compared to that recorded for a Solitary Messenger: 841,621,642,000 miles per second.If This velocity is approximately 4.5 million ' times C, or only about 6.7 times · the speed of the Divine Counselor. This difference-s-analogous to a car moving 10 miles per hour being passed by another going 67-While great, is not of an order that would .evoke the Divine Counselor's musings in Paper 23 as to how a being can move as fast as the Solitary Messenger and still remain personal. The Divine Counselor's attitude implies a relative difference of a far higher magnitude,

Problem #6: We are told that Lucifer expressed open disloyalty to Michael's rule to Gabriel just a few "days" (presumably JD) prior to open rebellion and that Gabriel therefore went directly to Edentia to confer with the Most Highs "regarding the measures to be employed in case of open rebellion".16 This statement leads us to believe that Gabriel was able to travel to Edentia in less than "a few days" or at least that he believed he could reach Edentia before the outbreak of the rebellion which he regarded as certain and "impending". We do not know how fast Gabriel can travel through space, though we can assume that his velocity is no less than that of a seraphim and perhaps more, though probably less than that of the Divine Counselor. How far is Edentia from J erusem? Using the same star density figures referred to above, and assuming that the proportion. of stars to inhabited planets is about the same in Norlatiadek as in Satania, Norlatiadek in volume would be equivalent to a sphere with a radius of about 241C. Because Satania is near the outskirts of Norlatiadek, we will use 250Cy as the distance rr orn Jerusem to Edentia. This is admittedly a gross .est imate , but .it is probably of the correct magnitude. If we calculate the length of time that we would expect a seraphim to take to make this journey, we obtain 83.3UY or 101.4JY! A Divine Counselor could make the sam e journey in .14JD which is ' quite fast enough to satisfy our requirements except for the problem noted above that this speed appears to be much too close to that of a Solitary Messenger to be correct. If we simply calculate the velocity required to travel between Jerusem and Edentia in 3JD we get 10,145.8C which is 0.2% of the Solitary Messenger's speed-a very high number.

Problem Summary: Revealed As Calculate·s as Being

1) Death-duty seraphim 3JD or 3UD 16.7UY 2)· Melchizedeks from J erusem 70UD 16.7UY 3) Messenger from Jerusem 6UD 16-32UY 4) Transport 'across Orvonton "hundreds of years" up to 166,000UY 5) a) Divine Counselor not revealed 671,141C b) Solitary Messenger not revealed 4.5 million C 6) Gabriel Jerusem to Edentia not revealed 10,145.8C

Interptetation:

These problems apparently have in common a misunderstanding of the relation between velocity and time when travelling faster than the speed of light. Science gives us little assistance here, as our only source of information is the activity of light itself under certain conditions. The velocity of light appears to remain constant no matter what the velocity of its source-even as the source velocity approaches C. We cannot therefore project what the .result of the superimposition of two, three, or more of these constant velocities will be. The way that these velocities are presented in The URANTIA Book: leads us to believe that they can be simply added together, :probably because this . addition gives a fairly clear idea of the nature ' of seraphic propulsion without -, ' getting into the problems of time and velocity relativity that are involved in travel beyond the speed of light. The numbers presented to us must be related to observed velocity in some way, and the revelators give enough clues for us to formulate a predictive theory about such relationships. Solution:

It will be suggested here that velocities which are faster than C can be measured in miles per second only theoretically, that is, instantaneously. If you could measure the velocity 3C without the traveller moving any distance during that measurement, you would describe the velocity as about 558,000 miles per second. But if you attempt to calculate the time actually required to cover a specified distance at this speed, you run into serious trouble, as found in the problems outlined above. Therefore, the velocities presented in The URANTIA Book will be described as lItheoreticalll .velocities (Vt) based on the velocity of certain basic currents in space which are to be contrasted with observed velocities (Vo) which predict the time required to make a journey between two points. There must be a relation between Vt and Yo and I suggest that a serviceable formula is this (where Vt = N x C by definition): -N)

. 1) Yo = N(lO(N-{l/NN)))C,. ·· ~ /tic. (/0 /f}- N

By definition, Vo = D/T, and from these formulae, we can solve for the other variables:

2) T = DIVo

3) Vt = Vo(lO-(N-(l/NN)))

Unfortunately, equation #3 has the variable N on both sides so it is not actually serviceable. A direct solution for N has eluded me though it is fairly easy to : _ - ~ ~ ,,",",,"::)"'L.- .• J ljCLl.~ (1."",u.accurat.... c'v";;. . .,,. (<::M>L"l - - GrR'1h... -L in_ _ ,

Vo is constant for each Vt as shown here:

When Vt = Ie, Vo = IC When Vt = 4C, Vo = 39,642C When Vt = ·2C, Vo = 112.47C When Vt = 5C,, Vo = 499,632C When vr = 3C, Vo = 2754.8C

If we use these equations to solve the problems listed earlier, we obtain some interesting results:

#1: "l'he travel time for seraphim from Urantia to Jerusem.

T = DIVo T = 50Cy/2754.8C = .OI82UY = 6.64 UD = 2.24JD This answer is well within our parameters.

#2: Melchizedek travel from Jerusem to Urantia. - This journey would, presumably, also take 2.24 Jerusem Days .which .means that the Melchizedeks did not leave Jerusem immediately upon receiving news of the default, but delayed departure for some reason-probably in order to consider the various courses of action available to them. #3: The seraphic messenger from Jerusem. The velocity of seraphim allows them to travel between Jerusem and Urantia in 2.24JD or 6.64 Urantia days. This calculated interval is almost exactly equal to the the time which elapsed between the installation of Adam and Eve and the arrival of the messenger. . While a small modification of the formula would allow for a round trip in that time, it is not necessary to do so based on .t he information available to us. Though it is true that the system circuits of intercommunication were cut at' the time of the Lucifer Rebellion, .and that communication could only be had within the system by seraphic messengers for that reason (suggesting the need for a round trip by seraphim to inform J erusem of the installati on and to return with the acknowledgement), it was possible for Gabriel to broadcast to Urantia his decree ending the Prince's dispensation and beginning the Adarnie age.17 It would seem reasonable that if the Gabriel broadcast could be received on Urantia, it could also be received on Jerusem. Thus, the news of the installation of Adam and Eve probably came by way of this broadcast to J erusern,' and-no messenger was require d to travel to J erusem from Urantia to so inform the System:,Sovereign.' If the Sovereign sent his acknowledgement upon receipt offhe broadcast, ' the messenger bearing that acknowledgement would arrive on Urantia about 6 Urantia, days later-the interval revealed in The URANTIA Book. '

#4: Seraphic travel across Orvonton, - Because we are told that on very long journeys ' the seraphic velocity drops to about 550,000mps,18 we will change the value for Yo , accordingly:

T = DIVa

T = 500,000Cy/2412C = 207.3UY or 252.4JY

This magnitude is now also correct: hundreds of years rather than hundreds of thousands of years.

#5: The Divine Counselor and Solitary Messenger velocities. - The Divine Counselor's Vt can be, estimated from his Vousing Graph ttl. An accurate estimate is 5.12C. ,This velocity could 'certainly .be decribed as "quickly", and is now far below the Solitary Messenger'sYt which is 4.5 million C. The Solitary Messenger's Vo is of an incomprehensible magnitude (8.3 x 10 to the 10,000,000th power x C), but he would still not be classified as an instantaneous space traverser. At this velocity a Solitary Messenger would begin to be hampered by space only in the inconceivable reaches of the Cosmos Infinite.

#6: Gabriel's velocity from Jerusem to Edentia. In order to reach Bdentla in exactly the required' 3JD, Gabriel would have to .tra vel at 3.48C-only slightly' faster thanjransporfseraphlrn• .Hemay well travel even faster, but probably not quite so fast as the 5.12C· of the Divine ' Counselor, If we assign a velocity of 4C to him arbitrarily" . we find that he , would -b e able to travel from Jerusem to Edentia in about.77JD-a. ' very reasonable number. Conclusion: The suggested formula thus seems to solve, in a consistent manner, all of the .problems which were presented at the beginning of the article, showing that all of the problems grew from a single misunderstanding; and that if this misinterpretation is accounted for, The URANTIA Book velocities which had seemed so confusing and conflicting are shown to be mutuauy consistent and intelligible.

It is not possible to explore here the implications of this solution, but I will suggest an explanation: Apparently, in a certain sense, time itself travels at the speed of light, so that when a being's velocity exceeds that of light, the relationship of that velocity to time changes, so that miles per second of velocity does not convert directly into elapsed time of travel over some distance. It appears from the predictive accuracy of the formula herein presented, that no longer is elapsed time inversely proportional to the velocity, but inversely proportional to the velocity multipled by a variable which is dependent on ' the ' multiple of the speed of light at which that being is travelling. . '.

As to Why this may be true, .we can only 'conjecture, but it .appears to be so, and we can now predict with reasonable accuracy certain time and velocity. magnitudes which previously eluded us. It should.benoted In this connection that the accuracy of the formula is very likely thegr-eatest .a t Vt 'values .of about 3C because tha t is the velocity from which mostLofitha evidenceiused in, the derivation of the formula was taken. To what extent; 'and. how quickly .the formula's predictive capabilities are exhausted as the magnitudeiof.ivelocity departs .from this value are not known. For all practical purposes, howeve.r,;it is probably. accurate fer any velocity below that of the Solitary Messenger, and can only be Romp-what suggestive of the magnitude of that being's ability to nearly transcend time.

Graph #1: vt-Vo Conversion

This graph may be used to estimate either .Yt or Vo if the other is. known, but because the Vo scale is calibrated to the log of. Vo, . estimation of Vo from known Vt values is rather difficult. The reverse procedure can be accomplished'with . greater accuracy. " . ,

: . , " (See attached sheet) :.. .

#2: Travel Time at Various Velocities

This graph may be used' to compare the time it :would take' beings travelling at various Vt's to go any distance from 1 :t o 100,000 'light -:- ye ar s. As .this graph also uses logarithmic scales, it is difficult to .estimate .. accurately ' from it, but you can get an idea of the magnitudes involved. ..'

(See attached sheet) Footnotes: 1. The VRANTIA Book, URANTIA Foundation, Chicago, .n., 1955, (to ,be hereinafter abbreviated as VB), pp. 569:4, 1232:1, 1234:'4. 2. VB p. 519:3. 3. VB p. 458:2. 4. Astronomy, August 1980, p. 15. (Thanks to St8nH~t:man for this . reference.) . 5. VB p. 457:l. 6. VB p. 466:4. 7. VB p. 844:l. 8. VB p, 832:5. 9. Thanks to Troy Bishop for bringing this problem to my attention.' . 10. VB p. 260:2&3. 11. VB p. 360:0. 12. VB p. 222:5. 13. VB p. 359:8. 14. VB p. ' 222:5. 15. VB p. 261:l. 16. VB p. 602:7. 17. VB p. 830:3. 18. VB p. 260:2. 7 ..... "1 lei

6 U 10~ , ~ .5" ID3 ~ \It v 'I / ~ t /00 I-.. 3 ~ /0

1 /

1 2. L' ' J 'v S. 6 r ,otJ/ ', 01. C.I. I /0 , ItJO NPO ~ {/y~ /O5/~ " Y{, , , n«,Jt,"'~J. rrr//M. IN ..

~4'p// ~ "

- .,.-- ~ ~/:;p;:. ~~~/TT C ~~ Time and Space

Time and Space

by Bob Hunt, Ph.D.

I have always been intrigued and challenged by The URANTIA Book discussions of time and space. These presentations have motivated me to seek out books and articles on these subjects. Many of these are consistent with the information in The URANTIA Book and offer examples or theories that provide further insight into the sometimes tantalizing possibilities suggested in various places in The URANTIA Book. I have selected some examples that illustrate this as the basis for this presentation.

I will juxtapose URANTIA Book quotations with related discussions from a variety of recent sources, most of which are on the accompanying bibliography. At the same time, I am attempting here to better understand the associated concepts by the selection and organization of the material. I will begin by examining some descriptions of time and space from The URANTIA Book and elsewhere. Please note that all quotations with a page number indicated and no other attribution are from The URANTIA Book. In some instances, these are not complete sentences, only phrases.

TIME--the moving image of eternity (*2021)

SPACE--the fleeting shadow of Paradise realities (*2021)

These are poetic, but lacking in specificity.

TIME--a succession of instants (*1297)

SPACE--a system of associated points (*1297)

These are more specific but still in need of development.

TIME--the succession-arrangement whereby events are recognized and segregated (*1439)

SPACE--a property of all material bodies when a body moves through space, it also takes all its properties with it, even the space which is in and of such a moving body (*1297)

Suppose we travel back in time about three centuries and note what the 17th century German mathematician Leibniz wrote:

SPACE is the order of coexistence whereas TIME is the order of successive existence. (Gottfried Wilhelm Leibniz, 1646-1716)

Two URANTIA Book references deal with the combination of time and space. From Paper 106, Universe Levels of Reality, it states:

Time and space (are) man's greatest aids to relative reality perception and yet his most formidable obstacles to complete reality perception. (*1173)

From Paper 118, Supreme and Ultimate--Time and Space:

Time and Space--a conjoined mechanism of the master universethe devices whereby finite creatures are enabled to coexist in the cosmos with the Infinite. Finite creatures are effectively insulated from the absolute levels by time and space. (*1303)

Let's focus briefly on "time" and some recent writings from physicists. Fred Wolf, in his 1984 book Star Wave, which is subtitled Mind, Consciousness and Quantum Physics, writes:

There has never been an adequate definition, a clear metaphor, or even a good physical picture of what time is.

He goes on to say, "In quantum mechanics, time is not an observable phenomenon; it is only an extraneous ordering parameter."

Paul Davies in his book, The Cosmic Blueprint, published this year, in a section called "Whatever happened to time?" observes:

Time exists merely as a parameter for gauging the interval between events.

David R. Griffin, in the Preface to Physics and the Ultimate Significance of Time, a 1986 publication of essays and discussion, states:

The notion that physics is in some fundamental sense `timeless' has been widely accepted.

It may be helpful before moving on to space to mention a time interval of significance in quantum physics.

Shortest meaningful lapse of time:

Planck Time = 5.36 x 10-44sec

Chronon = 10-23sec

The time required for light to travel the radius of an electron

Suppose we turn for a brief, but somewhat longer, time interval to space. First, another statement from Fred Wolf and then one from Paper 12, The Universe of Universes:

In quantum mechanics, space is an observable. To observe space, we need the observer and the observed. Their separation is `space.'

Space is, from the human viewpoint, nothing--negative; it exists only as related to something positive and nonspatial. Space is, however, real. (*133)

In his discourse at Carthage on time and space, Jesus stated:

Space is not merely an intellectual concept of the variation in relatedness of universe objects. (*1439)

Then, from Paper 118, Supreme and Ultimate --Time and Space:

The real difficulty we have in understanding space on the material level is due to the fact that, while material bodies exist in space, space also exists in these same material bodies. (*1297)

The concept of space includes extension and measure. For the quantum level, we should know this:

Shortest meaningful space measurement:

Planck Length = 1.61 x 1033 cm

(21 powers of 10 smaller than the diameter of an atomic nucleus)

Planck, by the way, is Max Planck who, in 1899, discovered Planck's constant which, when combined with the velocity of light and Newton's gravitational constant, establishes a system of units that sets the scale for quantum gravity.

Planck's Constant, /h

Newton's Gravitational Constant, g

Velocity of Light, c

System of units for Quantum Gravity

In reference to this scale, Bryce DeWitt makes this observation in an article entitled "Quantum Gravity" that appeared in Scientific American in December, 1983:

To probe these scales of distance and time experimentally, using instruments built with present technology, one would need a particle accelerator the size of the galaxy!

In his 1980 book, Quantum Theory and Gravitation, John Wheeler writes:

At Planck length, the effects of quantum gravity make our notions of `before' and `after' meaningless.

At Planck length, all geometric concepts break down, including connectedness, containment, locality, and especially order, and one is therefore forced into a set of assumptions prior to any kind of geometry.

Now let's explore some connections between time and space. In Paper 196, Universe Levels of Reality, we read:

Without time sensitivity, no evolutionary creature could possibly perceive the relations of sequence. (*1173) and

Without space sensitivity, no creature could fathom the relations of simultaneity. (*1173)

This is a puzzling statement since "simultaneity" means, basically, "at the same time." A quotation from Fred Wolf is helpful. "When we say we are measuring space, we are simultaneously measuring two or more locations. It would not make sense to measure the distance between a point where one end of an object is at noon and a point where the other end is at midnight. Thus, the measure of space implies the single instant. It implies what we call `now.'" Then, Wolf makes these connections:

NOW = SPACE = THE OBSERVED

HERE = TIME = THE OBSERVER

He also offers this geometrical analogy:

NOW is a line, surface or solid

HERE is a point.

All lines, surfaces and solids can be generated from a point. Thus:

SPACE IS GENERATABLE FROM TIME.

The latter statement is consistent with one made by Jesus in his discourse on time and space:

Space is measured by time, not time by space. (*1439)

Jesus goes on to say:

The confusion of the scientist grows out of failure to recognize the reality of space. (*1439)

The concept of motion is a link between time and space. From Paper 12:

Time comes by virtue of motion and because mind is inherently aware of sequentiality. (*134)

Wolf writes that "We do not observe time we observe motionwe infer time by comparing movementsthe sweep second hand does not sweep time; it sweeps space periodically." He goes on to say:

When we say we are observing the passing of timewe are observing the 'movement' of our own thought processes.

Two additional quotations from Paper 12 are helpful here:

Relationships to time do not exist without motion in space, but consciousness of time does. Sequentiality can consciousize time even in the absence of motion. (*135)

Man's mind is less time-bound than space-bound because of the inherent nature of mind. (*135)

Some of the difficulties associated with analysis of time are discussed by physicist David Bohm in his book Wholeness and the Implicate Order and in a recent paper, "Time, the Implicate Order, and Pre-Space." I regard Bohm as the leading theorist on this and related topics. His ideas are consistent with information and suggestions in The URANTIA Book.

Consider the distinction of past, present, and future. In general, what we are conscious of as now is already past, even if only by a fraction of a second. The conscious content of the moment is therefore of that which is past and gone. The future is not yet. The present is but it cannot be specified in words or thoughts, without its slipping into the past. When a future moment comes a similar situation will prevail. Therefore, from the past of the present we may be able to predict, at most, the past of the future. The actual immediate present is always the unknown.

All possibilities of prediction evidently depend on the assumption that the movement is sufficiently slow, regular, and unambiguously related to what comes next, that the difference between the time to which our perceptions and knowledge actually refer and the present makes no significant difference.

[However] according to modern physics, microprocesses are very fast, irregular, and ambiguously related to what comes next. Indeed, it is not in general possible to relate the specifiable information content unambiguously to succeeding events (this is just the essential meaning of the Heisenberg uncertainty relations). The relevance of the usual motions of time may be questioned. What seems to be called for is that we recognize the "point event" of relativity theory cannot in general have an unambiguous meaning.

To expand on both the concept and the experience of time, consider this excerpt from Jesus' discourse: to mantime appears as a succession of events; but as man ascends, as he progresses inward, the enlarging view of this event procession is such that it is discerned more and more in its wholeness. That which formerly appeared as a succession of events then will be viewed as a whole and perfectly related cycle; in this way will circular simultaneity increasingly displace the onetime consciousness of the linear sequence of events. (*1439)

This ties in with the following statement from Paper 118:

"The Gods are related to time as an experience in eternity. In the evolutionary universes eternity is temporal everlastingness--the everlasting now." (*1295)

Fred Wolf writes that "The closest we come to observing time is observing what Buddhists call 'being-time.' Everything that is, is, was and will be. Every moment remains motionless and frozen. Past, present and future represent a map for the perusal of the all-seeing being-time."

When I mentioned to a friend that I was preparing this talk, he gave me this definition of time:

TIME IS THE STUFF THAT KEEPS EVERYTHING FROM HAPPENING AT ONCE. --Anonymous

Returning to the observations of David Bohm, he writes, in comparing the points of view of relativity theory and quantum theory:

Relativity theory describes time-space as completely analyzable down to dimensionless points related by absolute causal lawsthere is no possibility of giving meaning to a moment 'now'.

However, quantum theory suggests a concept of overlapping moments with extension and duration in space and time, embedded in a broader context, and governed by the quantum-mechanical wave function.

Thus, as with a motion picture, our experience has a sense of movement, or becoming. Bohm states that:

In the time aspect, [we comprehend] the BECOMING OF BEING, while in the 'timeless' aspect, [we comprehend] the BEING OF BECOMING.

Going back to Paper 118, we are told by a Mighty Messenger that we: perceive time by analysis. (*1297)

[perceive] space by synthesis. (*1297)

Briefly, these words may be interpreted with these meanings:

● ANALYSIS--separating the whole into parts to find out the nature of the whole; working from the unknown to the known.

● SYNTHESIS--putting parts together to form the whole; working from the known to the unknown.

Suppose we now consider some more advanced concepts and ideas associated with transcending time and space. From Paper 106:

Mortals and other creatures find it necessary to think of potentials as being actualized in space and evolving to fruition in time, but this entire process is a time-space phenomenon which does not actually take place on Paradise and in eternity. On the absolute level there is neither time nor space; all potentials may be perceived as actuals. (*1173)

With this information about Paradise, recall this statement, to me one of the most intriguing in The URANTIA Book:

The ultimaton, the first measurable form of energy, has Paradise as its nucleus. (*467)

Then, of course, we know from the Foreword that:

The Isle of Paradise has a universe location but no position in space. (*7)

And from Paper 11, The Eternal Isle of Paradise:

Paradise exists without time and has no location in space. (*120)

Consider how David Bohm may be making some discoveries that support this UB information. He writes that, in physics, we find that: atomic structure dissolves into electrons, protons, neutrons, quarks, subquarks, etc., and eventually into dynamically changing forms in an all- pervasive and universal set of fields. When these fields are treated quantum-mechanically, we find that even in what is called a vacuum there are 'zero-point' fluctuations, giving 'empty space' an energy that is immensely beyond that contained in what is recognized as matter.

Also, In the vacuum state the 'state function' (which represents the whole of space and time) oscillates uniformly at a frequency so high that it is utterly beyond any known physical interpretation. Further, "we would be justified in saying that the vacuum state is, in a certain sense, 'timeless' or 'beyond time,' at least as time is now known, measured and experienced."

With this in mind, it is less than surprising that science is confused about what occurs at the quantum level. For example, L. Beynam, in a paper called "The Emergent Paradigm in Science" that appeared in Revision in 1978, gave a formulation of the well-known Bell's Theorem:

Basic principles of quantum theory spatially separated parts of reality cannot be independent

He goes on to say that this "opens up avenues of scientific development for which the classical constructs of space and time prove almost totally useless and meaningless."

Paul Davies in God and the New Physics reports on a 1982 experiment by Aspect, Dalibard, and Roger at the Institute of Theoretical and Applied Optics in Paris. From this experiment, this conclusion is drawn:

Either objective reality does not exist and it is meaningless for us to speak of things or objects as having any reality above and beyond the mind of an observer OR faster-than-light communication with the future and the past is possible.

In a recent book called Time--The Familiar Stranger, J.T. Fraser writes:

For a photon traveling at the speed of light, the passage of time has no reality. In the "life" of a photon, all events happen at onceand all distances shrink to zero.

Returning briefly to Paradise, we read in Paper 11:

The eternal Isle is composed of a single form of materialization--stationary systems of reality. This literal substance of Paradise is a homogeneous organization of space potency(called) absolutum. (*120)

Space potency is a term difficult to define -- its meaning should convey the idea of potencies and potentials existent within space. (*126)

David Bohm seems to be coming up with theories along these lines when he states this:

The implicate order leads to the notion of a pre-space expressed in terms of algebraic relationships, out of which ordinary space-time emerges as a special case.

A few other glimpses into the mysteries of space and time should be mentioned here. From Paper 9, Relation of the Infinite Spirit to the Universe, we have this:

Infinite mind ignores time, ultimate mind transcends time, cosmic mind is conditioned by time. And so with space: the Infinite Mind is independent of space, but as descent is made from the infinite to the Adjutant levels of mind, intellect must increasingly reckon with the fact and limitations of space. (*102)

And from Paper 12:

Time and space are inseparable only in the time-space creations, the seven superuniverses. Nontemporal space (space without time) theoretically exists, but the only truly nontemporal place is Paradise area. Nonspatial time (time without space) exists in mind of the Paradise level of function. (*135)

During our time-space careers, there are many areas ripe for exploration. Perhaps time is the concept most closely related to personal experience. For example, in Paper 12, we are presented with the "three levels of time cognizance."

● 1. Mind-perceived time consciousness of sequence, motion, and a sense of duration.

● 2. Spirit-perceived time insight into motion Godward and the awareness of the motion of ascent to levels of increasing divinity.

● 3. Personality creates a unique time sense out of insight into Reality plus a consciousness of presence and an awareness of duration. (*135)

As you know, The URANTIA Book often refers to advancement as being "inward" and "upward." In the light of this discussion of time and space, here is an interpretation of one meaning of these terms:

Inward/Inner Space Transcendence of Time

Upward/Outer Space Transcendence of Space

Now, consider this statement from Jesus' discourse:

There are seven different conceptions of space as it is conditioned by time. (*1439)

I will close with this conjecture: Perhaps "inward" and "upward" are higher space dimensions; and each of us has an independent, personal time scale for these dimensions.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1. Beynam, Laurence M. "The Emergent Paradigm in Science," Revision, Spring, 1978.

2. Bohm, David. Wholeness and the Implicate Order. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1980.

3. Davies, Paul. The Cosmic Blueprint. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1988.

4. Flood, Raymond and Lockwood, Michael (Editors). The Nature of Time. New York: Basil Blackwell, Inc., 1986.

5. Fraser, J.T. Time, The Familiar Stranger. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1987.

6. Griffin, David R. (Editor). Physics and the Ultimate Significance of Time. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1986.

7. Ramsey, Norman F. "Precise Measurement of Time," American Scientist, Vol. 76, pages 42-49, January-February, 1988.

8. Talbot, Michael. Beyond the Quantum. New York: Macmillan, 1986.

9. The URANTIA Book. Uversa Press, Chicago, 1996.

10. Wolf, Fred Alan. Star Wave. New York: Macmillan, 1984. AstronomyAstronomy

¾¾ Space Respiration, by Dane Hartman

zz (this is an animated AVI file he did at age 14!) ¾¾ 7E7 Evo lv ing Un iverses ¾¾ Time & Space

zz by Bob Hunt ¾¾ CallistoCallisto

zz bCiCby Craig Carm ihlichael ¾¾ MonmatiaMonmatia

zz by Craig Carmichael ¾¾ Stars, Galaxies, & Superuniverses

zz by Fred FredbyFred BecknerBeckner ¾¾ The Big Bang Never Happened

zz by Michael Wisenbaker ¾¾ How Large is OrvontonOrvonton,, ReallyReally??

zz by Norm Du Val ¾¾ EarthEarth--MoonMoon Evolution

zz by Phil Calabrese ¾¾ Dynamics of the Ultimaton

zz by Stua r t K err ¾¾ Astronomy & the Superuniverse

zz by Troy Bishop Astronomy Places Named in the Urantia Papers

Andromeda (nebula) ...... (15:4.7) (41:8.3) Antares (largest stellar cloud in Nebadon) ...... (41:3.2) asteroids ...... (57:6.5)

+(not mentioned) Callisto (moon of Jupiter) ...... comets ...... (15:6.1) constellations ...... (Paper 43) Crab nebula ...... (41:8.4) galaxies ...... (11:7.7) Jupiter (planet) ...... (57:5.9) (57:5.10) Magellanic Cloud ( in Milky Way galaxy) ...... (15:4.8) (planet) ...... (49:2.6) Mercury (planet) ...... (57:6.2) meteors ...... (15:5.10) (57:4.2) Milky Way (galaxy) ...... (15:3.1–3) (42:5.5) moon (Urantia's) ...... (57:6.2) nebulae ...... (57:1.1) Pisces (constellation) ...... (122:8.7) planets ...... (49:0sec) Pole Star (North Star) ...... (95:2.7) Sagittarius (constellation center of our minor sector, Ensa) ...... (15:3.5–7) (41:0.4) Saturn (planet) ...... (41:10.1) (57:5.9–10) stars ...... (41:0.4) sun (Urantia's) ...... (57:1.1) Urantia (earth, our planet) ...... (15:7.8) (15:14.7) Uranus (planet) ...... (57:5.13–14) Venus (planet) ...... (57:5.13–14) (* means term is not used outside the Urantia Papers)

*Alvoring (neighboring universe) ...... (32:2.12) *Andronover (nebula) ...... (57:1sec) *Angona (system) ...... (41:10.1) (57:5.4–14) *Anova (world in Satania) ...... (49:0.5) *Ascendington (Paradise satellite sphere) ...... (13:1.21) *Assuntia (local system in the constellation of Norlatiadek) ...... (41:2.1) *Avalon (neighboring universe) ...... (32:2.12) *dark gravity bodies (belt of) ...... (14:1.8) *Divington ...... (13:1.2) (13:2.7–8) (107:3.1,3–5) *Edentia (headquarters of constellation) ...... (43:1sec) *Endantum ...... (119:6.3,6) *Ensa ...... (15:7.8) *Fanoving ...... (32:2.12) *Glantonia (neighboring system) ...... (41:2.1) *Havona (see Paradise Isle) ...... (14:3sec) *Henselon ...... (32:2.12) *Jerusem ...... (46:5.22) *Mansion worlds ...... (45:0.2) *Mansonia ...... (47:3.5) *Monmatia ...... (57:5sec) *morontia worlds ...... (45:1.3–4) *Nebadon ...... (34:4.9–10) *Norlatiadek ...... (15:14.6) *Orvonton ...... (17:1.5) *Palonia (system) ...... (119:2.5–6) *Panoptia (world) ...... (53:7.1) *Paradise Isle (Havona) ...... (14:1sec) *Porogia (system) ...... (41:2.1) *Portalon (neighboring universe) ...... (32:2.12) *Rantulia (system) ...... (41:2.1) (53:6.5) *Salvington (headquarters of Nebadon) ...... (15:7.7) *Sandmatia (neighboring system) ...... (41:2.1) *Sanselon (neighboring universe) ...... (32:2.12) *Satania (system) ...... (15:14.5) *Seraphington (sphere orbiting Paradise) ...... (13:1.19) *Solitarington (sphere orbiting Paradise) ...... (13:1.16) *Sonarington (sphere orbiting Paradise) ...... (13:1.7) *Sortoria (system) ...... (41:2.1) *Spiritington (sphere orbiting Paradise) ...... (13:1.9) *Splandon (major sector of Orvonton) ...... (15:14.7) (18:4.7) *Umajor the fifth (headquarters of major sector) ...... (15:7.9) (15:13.3) (15:14.7) *Uminor the third (headquarters of minor sector) ...... (15:7.8) (15:14.7) *Uversa (headquarters world of Orvonton) ...... (18:3.6) *Veluntia (a sun) ...... (41:4.6) *Vicegerington (sphere orbiting Paradise) ...... (13:1.11) *Wolvering (neighboring universe) ...... (32:2.12) The Seven Evolving Universes ofTime and Space That exist within the Grand Universe, Within the Master Universe! Where life begins!

The 7 Superuniverses revolve around Paradise Isle in the gigantic "space path" within "unpervaded or quiescent" space that surrounds the great Isle.

They travel at a speed, whirling around at a speed, as they travel in the space path that is not comprehensible to humans!

Our Superuniverse, number 7, named "Orvonton" contains; • 10 Major Sectors, • 1,000 Minor Sectors, • 100,000 Local Universes, • 10,000,000 Constellations, • 1,000,000,000 (one billion} Systems, • 1,000,000,000,000 (one trillion) inhabited • Or habitable Worlds to be inhabited.

• Ifwe somehow back offinto space and could see the whole Superuniverse with its alternate clockwise and counter- clockwise flow of galaxies all at one time the following is how it would look:

At our level of reality, there are the one trillion inhabitable worlds whirling in perfectly kept control within their Systems by the Power Directors and beings who control the force and energy in our gigantic Superuniverse. And countless suns and stars and black holes!

If we could see the whole Superuniverse at a time, we would only see the worlds whirling in their assigned orbits along with the suns, stars, and various other aggregations of matter. (Our world is number 606 in the System of Satania and number 5,342,482,337,666 as registered in the Grand Universe records.) • Now we move to another level of reality and look at the Systems:

At the System level of reality we would see the Systems-as systems, one billion, whirling in formation around each architectural headquarters world in the center, like tiny whirling dots on the massive panorama of our superuniverse, each system containing the 1,000 inhabited worlds that whirl in formation around each system headquarter world-s-our system is Jerusem of the System Satania, number 24 of 100 in the constellation ofNorlatiadek. These are administrative domains under the direction of their Creator, Michael ofNebadon and Gabriel the chiefexecutive officer ofthis Local Universe.

• Now we move to another level of reality to look at the Constellations:

At the Constellation level of realitv we would see the massive Constellations, ten million in number all whirling around their architectural headquarters worlds in the center of each constellation. Our Constellation is number 70 of 100 in "our Local Universe of Nebadon" and our constellation's name is Norlatiadek. Again these are administrative domains under the supervision of their Creator, Michael of Nebadon and answering to Gabriel the CEO with Paradise Ambassadors in each called the Faithfuls ofDays.

• Now we move to the most interesting level ofreality to the Local Universes where all creation takes place and look at the overall magnificent creations that comprise the superuniverses:

At the Local Universe level ofrealitv we would see one hundred thousand aggregations of whirling galaxies whirling in perfect orbits within the superuniverse confmes. This is the actual "creation, construction" level of a superuniverse as to matter, worlds, suns, stars, and architectural worlds---at no other level is there "creation" of worlds, systems, or constellations, or humans. This is where the Michael Sons build their Universes per the patterns of Paradise Isle with the help of the powerful beings that manipulate and control the energies of space. This level of reality is where the Creator Sons and Creative Mother Spirits reside and create the "Garden of God"---in which the worlds, humans and life that we know and much more that we do not know offlourish.

Our Local Universe is called Nebadon and our Creator Son is called Michael, but to the world he is known as Jesus Christ. Our Local Universe is number 84 of 100 in our minor sector, in our superuniverse and its headquarters world is called Salvington. It contains 10,000,000 potential inhabited worlds with only approximately 3.8 million currently inhabited. We are a young universe ofthe Local order.

• Now we move into the "administrative Domains"-- levels ofreality, the Minor Sectors:

At the Minor Sector Level of reality, of which there are there are 1,000 in our Superuniverse, we would see 1,000 huge whirling aggregations of Local Universes whirling around their central architectural headquarters worlds. Our Minor Sector is Ensa, and its headquarters world is called "U Minor the Td 3 ." It is number 3 of 100 in our Minor Sector, Ensa. Each minor sector contains 100 Local Universes.

It is at this level of reality that a large majority of the "control and manipulation" of energies and force and the beings that control these are administered as well as many other administrative and control factors-----­ and each individual only has to achieve one of these great administrative centers instead of all 1,000 on our way to Paradise, because all Minor Sectors administer the same forces and energies throughout their domain. These are "domains" of control and administration only, not creating worlds and systems and local universes. This has already been accomplished or is being accomplished by the Creator Sons in the Local Universes.

• Now we move to the 10 Major Sectors, their levels of reality, and view the scope of/heir domain in the superuniverse: At the Major Sector Level of reality, of which there are 10 in our Superuniverse, again we enter a "Domain" of control and administration in which each Major Sector contains 100 Minor Sectors.

Each of these Minor Sectors appears as enormous whirling galaxies spinning around the central architectural world of the Major Sector. Our Major Sector is called Splandon and its headquarters world is called U th Major the 5 . It is number 5 of the 10 Major Sectors in our superuniverse of Orvonton, number 7 of7.

• And finally, at the Superuniverse level of reality, we see our beautiful superuniverse Orvonton as we leave for Havona:

At the Superuniverse Level of reality, of which there are 7 and in which we are contained within our number 7, Orvonton. These superuniverses would appear as seven unbelievably huge galaxy-appearing aggregations of worlds, systems, constellations, local universes, minor sectors, major sectors all in constant controlled whirling opposite movements at speeds which we cannot comprehend as they whirl in the space path around the great Isle of Paradise. All we could see would be these seven huge galaxies speeding around Paradise Isle.

• All ofthe above are within the confines ofGod the Supreme to become the perfected "Supreme Being" ofthe future.

• The following are levels ofreality • Mostly beyond our comprehension • And certainly not described in detailfor us. • Getting through the Supreme is our current challenge • Andthen these will unfold.

• God the Ultimate Level of reality is a level of reality in the Four Outer Space Levels and is existent in supertime and absonite reality, of which we have little information. The worlds are already forming out here and can be seen by astronomers. They are each level twice as large as the previous and here we would see nothing except vague images of galaxies. • At the Havona Level of reality, of which there are seven circuits in concentric formation around the Isle of Paradise in a level of reality we cannot know of containing one billion perfect worlds, the outer containing 245,000,000 worlds or levels within levels of reality, and the inner circuit containing 35,000.000 worlds, each of which we must traverse and adjust and absorb as a degree or level of reality prior to achieving Paradise Isle. This is a level of reality all its own called triata but does contain some absonite levels. If we could see this level­ ---it would be incrediblely beautiful and perfect! Havona is the exhibit ofthe potentials actualized.

• The 21 Worlds of the Father, Son, and Spirit level of reality is near Paradise Isle constitution level or is Paradise level-we do not know more. Cannot be described except as in your book.

• At the Paradise Isle Levels of reality, which we know almost nothing about, there are infinite numbers of levels of reality here because it is the fulcrum between the Infmite-I AM and the fmite­ eternity, and the Infmite is without limitations. Here we are told that Paradise Isle is one sixth longer in the north-south than east-west there fore slightly-egg shaped. Not much else is given to us as real descriptions that we could understand that would be important here.

• At the "God the Absolute" Level of reality, all eternities are existent but accessible only to those beings that have achieved levels of experience, eventuation, trinitization and completion of specifics, See Levels of Reality paper attached. This is our fmal goal and never ends! Time and Space

Time and Space

by Bob Hunt, Ph.D.

I have always been intrigued and challenged by the Urantia book discussions of time and space. These presentations have motivated me to seek out books and articles on these subjects. Many of these are consistent with the information in the Urantia book and offer examples or theories that provide further insight into the sometimes tantalizing possibilities suggested in various places in the Urantia book. I have selected some examples that illustrate this as the basis for this presentation.

I will juxtapose Urantia book quotations with related discussions from a variety of recent sources, most of which are on the accompanying bibliography. At the same time, I am attempting here to better understand the associated concepts by the selection and organization of the material. I will begin by examining some descriptions of time and space from the Urantia book and elsewhere. Please note that all quotations with a page number indicated and no other attribution are from the Urantia book. In some instances, these are not complete sentences, only phrases.

TIME--the moving image of eternity (*2021; 189:1.3)

SPACE--the fleeting shadow of Paradise realities (*2021; 189:1.3)

These are poetic, but lacking in specificity.

TIME--a succession of instants (*1297; 118:3.1)

SPACE--a system of associated points (*1297; 118:3.1)

These are more specific but still in need of development.

TIME--the succession-arrangement whereby events are recognized and segregated (*1439; 130:7.4)

SPACE--a property of all material bodies when a body moves through space, it also takes all its properties with it, even the space which is in and of such a moving body (*1297; 118:3.6)

Suppose we travel back in time about three centuries and note what the 17th century German mathematician Leibniz wrote:

SPACE is the order of coexistence whereas TIME is the order of successive existence. (Gottfried Wilhelm Leibniz, 1646-1716)

Two URANTIA Book references deal with the combination of time and space. From Paper 106, Universe Levels of Reality, it states:

Time and space (are) man's greatest aids to relative reality perception and yet his most formidable obstacles to complete reality perception. (*1173; 106:9.3)

From Paper 118, Supreme and Ultimate--Time and Space:

Time and Space--a conjoined mechanism of the master universe, the devices whereby finite creatures are enabled to coexist in the cosmos with the Infinite. Finite creatures are effectively insulated from the absolute levels by time and space. (*1303; 118:9.1)

Let's focus briefly on "time" and some recent writings from physicists. Fred Wolf, in his 1984 book Star Wave, which is subtitled Mind, Consciousness and Quantum Physics, writes:

"There has never been an adequate definition, a clear metaphor, or even a good physical picture of what time is."

He goes on to say, "In quantum mechanics, time is not an observable phenomenon; it is only an extraneous ordering parameter."

Paul Davies in his book, The Cosmic Blueprint, published this year, in a section called "Whatever happened to time?" observes:

"Time exists merely as a parameter for gauging the interval between events."

David R. Griffin, in the Preface to Physics and the Ultimate Significance of Time, a 1986 publication of essays and discussion, states:

"The notion that physics is in some fundamental sense `timeless' has been widely accepted."

It may be helpful before moving on to space to mention a time interval of significance in quantum physics.

Shortest meaningful lapse of time:

Planck Time = 5.36 x 10-44sec

Chronon = 10-23sec

The time required for light to travel the radius of an electron

Suppose we turn for a brief, but somewhat longer, time interval to space. First, another statement from Fred Wolf and then one from Paper 12, The Universe of Universes:

"In quantum mechanics, space is an observable. To observe space, we need the observer and the observed. Their separation is `space.'"

Space is, from the human viewpoint, nothing--negative; it exists only as related to something positive and nonspatial. Space is, however, real. (*133; 12:4.7)

In his discourse at Carthage on time and space, Jesus stated:

Space is not merely an intellectual concept of the variation in relatedness of universe objects. (*1439; 130:7.6)

Then, from Paper 118, Supreme and Ultimate --Time and Space:

The real difficulty we have in understanding space on the material level is due to the fact that, while material bodies exist in space, space also exists in these same material bodies. (*1297; 118:3.5)

The concept of space includes extension and measure. For the quantum level, we should know this:

Shortest meaningful space measurement:

Planck Length = 1.61 x 1033 cm

(21 powers of 10 smaller than the diameter of an atomic nucleus)

Planck, by the way, is Max Planck who, in 1899, discovered Planck's constant which, when combined with the velocity of light and Newton's gravitational constant, establishes a system of units that sets the scale for quantum gravity.

Planck's Constant, /h

Newton's Gravitational Constant, g

Velocity of Light, c

System of units for Quantum Gravity

In reference to this scale, Bryce DeWitt makes this observation in an article entitled "Quantum Gravity" that appeared in Scientific American in December, 1983:

"To probe these scales of distance and time experimentally, using instruments built with present technology, one would need a particle accelerator the size of the galaxy!"

In his 1980 book, Quantum Theory and Gravitation, John Wheeler writes:

At Planck length, the effects of quantum gravity make our notions of `before' and `after' meaningless.

At Planck length, all geometric concepts break down, including connectedness, containment, locality, and especially order, and one is therefore forced into a set of assumptions prior to any kind of geometry.

Now let's explore some connections between time and space. In Paper 196, Universe Levels of Reality, we read:

Without time sensitivity, no evolutionary creature could possibly perceive the relations of sequence. (*1173; 106:9.2) and

Without space sensitivity, no creature could fathom the relations of simultaneity. (*1173: 106:9.2)

This is a puzzling statement since "simultaneity" means, basically, "at the same time." A quotation from Fred Wolf is helpful. "When we say we are measuring space, we are simultaneously measuring two or more locations. It would not make sense to measure the distance between a point where one end of an object is at noon and a point where the other end is at midnight. Thus, the measure of space implies the single instant. It implies what we call `now.'" Then, Wolf makes these connections:

NOW = SPACE = THE OBSERVED

HERE = TIME = THE OBSERVER

He also offers this geometrical analogy:

NOW is a line, surface or solid

HERE is a point.

All lines, surfaces and solids can be generated from a point. Thus:

SPACE IS GENERATABLE FROM TIME.

The latter statement is consistent with one made by Jesus in his discourse on time and space:

Space is measured by time, not time by space. (*1439; 130:7.6)

Jesus goes on to say:

The confusion of the scientist grows out of failure to recognize the reality of space. (*1439: 130:7.6)

The concept of motion is a link between time and space. From Paper 12:

Time comes by virtue of motion and because mind is inherently aware of sequentiality. (*134; 12:5.1)

Wolf writes that "We do not observe time, we observe motion--we infer time by comparing movements--the sweep second hand does not sweep time; it sweeps space periodically." He goes on to say:

"When we say we are observing the passing of time, we are observing the 'movement' of our own thought processes."

Two additional quotations from Paper 12 are helpful here:

Relationships to time do not exist without motion in space, but consciousness of time does. Sequentiality can consciousize time even in the absence of motion. (*135: 12:5.5)

Man's mind is less time-bound than space-bound because of the inherent nature of mind. (*135: 12:5.5)

Some of the difficulties associated with analysis of time are discussed by physicist David Bohm in his book Wholeness and the Implicate Order and in a recent paper, "Time, the Implicate Order, and Pre-Space." I regard Bohm as the leading theorist on this and related topics. His ideas are consistent with information and suggestions in the Urantia book.

"Consider the distinction of past, present, and future. In general, what we are conscious of as now is already past, even if only by a fraction of a second. The conscious content of the moment is therefore of that which is past and gone. The future is not yet. The present is but it cannot be specified in words or thoughts, without its slipping into the past. When a future moment comes a similar situation will prevail. Therefore, from the past of the present we may be able to predict, at most, the past of the future. The actual immediate present is always the unknown.

"All possibilities of prediction evidently depend on the assumption that the movement is sufficiently slow, regular, and unambiguously related to what comes next, that the difference between the time to which our perceptions and knowledge actually refer and the present makes no significant difference.

"[However] according to modern physics, microprocesses are very fast, irregular, and ambiguously related to what comes next. Indeed, it is not in general possible to relate the specifiable information content unambiguously to succeeding events (this is just the essential meaning of the Heisenberg uncertainty relations). The relevance of the usual motions of time may be questioned. What seems to be called for is that we recognize the "point event" of relativity theory cannot in general have an unambiguous meaning."

To expand on both the concept and the experience of time, consider this excerpt from Jesus' discourse:

To man, time appears as a succession of events; but as man ascends, as he progresses inward, the enlarging view of this event procession is such that it is discerned more and more in its wholeness. That which formerly appeared as a succession of events then will be viewed as a whole and perfectly related cycle; in this way will circular simultaneity increasingly displace the onetime consciousness of the linear sequence of events. (*1439; 130:7.5)

This ties in with the following statement from Paper 118:

"The Gods are related to time as an experience in eternity. In the evolutionary universes eternity is temporal everlastingness--the everlasting now." (*1295: 118:1.1)

Fred Wolf writes that "The closest we come to observing time is observing what Buddhists call 'being-time.' Everything that is, is, was and will be. Every moment remains motionless and frozen. Past, present and future represent a map for the perusal of the all-seeing being-time."

When I mentioned to a friend that I was preparing this talk, he gave me this definition of time:

TIME IS THE STUFF THAT KEEPS EVERYTHING FROM HAPPENING AT ONCE. --Anonymous

Returning to the observations of David Bohm, he writes, in comparing the points of view of relativity theory and quantum theory:

"Relativity theory describes time-space as completely analyzable down to dimensionless points related by absolute causal lawsthere is no possibility of giving meaning to a moment 'now'."

However, quantum theory suggests a concept of overlapping moments with extension and duration in space and time, embedded in a broader context, and governed by the quantum-mechanical wave function.

Thus, as with a motion picture, our experience has a sense of movement, or becoming. Bohm states that:

"In the time aspect, [we comprehend] the BECOMING OF BEING, while in the 'timeless' aspect, [we comprehend] the BEING OF BECOMING.

Going back to Paper 118, we are told by a Mighty Messenger that we:

perceive time by analysis. (*1297; 118:3.1)

[perceive] space by synthesis. (*1297; 118:3.1)

Briefly, these words may be interpreted with these meanings:

● ANALYSIS--separating the whole into parts to find out the nature of the whole; working from the unknown to the known.

● SYNTHESIS--putting parts together to form the whole; working from the known to the unknown.

Suppose we now consider some more advanced concepts and ideas associated with transcending time and space. From Paper 106:

Mortals and other creatures find it necessary to think of potentials as being actualized in space and evolving to fruition in time, but this entire process is a time-space phenomenon which does not actually take place on Paradise and in eternity. On the absolute level there is neither time nor space; all potentials may be perceived as actuals. (*1173: 106:9.3)

With this information about Paradise, recall this statement, to me one of the most intriguing in the Urantia book:

The ultimaton, the first measurable form of energy, has Paradise as its nucleus. (*467; 42:1.2)

Then, of course, we know from the Foreword that:

The Isle of Paradise has a universe location but no position in space. (*7; 0:4.12)

And from Paper 11, The Eternal Isle of Paradise:

Paradise exists without time and has no location in space. (*120; 11:2.7)

Consider how David Bohm may be making some discoveries that support this Urantia information. He writes that, in physics, we find that:

"atomic structure dissolves into electrons, protons, neutrons, quarks, subquarks, etc., and eventually into dynamically changing forms in an all- pervasive and universal set of fields. When these fields are treated quantum-mechanically, we find that even in what is called a vacuum there are 'zero-point' fluctuations, giving 'empty space' an energy that is immensely beyond that contained in what is recognized as matter.

"Also, In the vacuum state the 'state function' (which represents the whole of space and time) oscillates uniformly at a frequency so high that it is utterly beyond any known physical interpretation. Further, 'we would be justified in saying that the vacuum state is, in a certain sense, 'timeless' or 'beyond time,' at least as time is now known, measured and experienced.'"

With this in mind, it is less than surprising that science is confused about what occurs at the quantum level. For example, L. Beynam, in a paper called "The Emergent Paradigm in Science" that appeared in Revision in 1978, gave a formulation of the well-known Bell's Theorem:

Basic principles of quantum theory spatially separated parts of reality cannot be independent

He goes on to say that this "opens up avenues of scientific development for which the classical constructs of space and time prove almost totally useless and meaningless."

Paul Davies in God and the New Physics reports on a 1982 experiment by Aspect, Dalibard, and Roger at the Institute of Theoretical and Applied Optics in Paris. From this experiment, this conclusion is drawn:

"Either objective reality does not exist and it is meaningless for us to speak of things or objects as having any reality above and beyond the mind of an observer OR faster-than-light communication with the future and the past is possible."

In a recent book called Time--The Familiar Stranger, J.T. Fraser writes:

"For a photon traveling at the speed of light, the passage of time has no reality. In the "life" of a photon, all events happen at once, and all distances shrink to zero."

Returning briefly to Paradise, we read in Paper 11:

The eternal Isle is composed of a single form of materialization--stationary systems of reality. This literal substance of Paradise is a homogeneous organization of space potency (called) absolutum. (*120; 11:2.6)

Space potency is a term difficult to define -- its meaning should convey the idea of potencies and potentials existent within space. (*126; 11:8.8)

David Bohm seems to be coming up with theories along these lines when he states this:

"The implicate order leads to the notion of a pre-space expressed in terms of algebraic relationships, out of which ordinary space-time emerges as a special case."

A few other glimpses into the mysteries of space and time should be mentioned here. From Paper 9, Relation of the Infinite Spirit to the Universe, we have this:

Infinite mind ignores time, ultimate mind transcends time, cosmic mind is conditioned by time. And so with space: the Infinite Mind is independent of space, but as descent is made from the infinite to the Adjutant levels of mind, intellect must increasingly reckon with the fact and limitations of space. (*102; 9:4.4)

And from Paper 12:

Time and space are inseparable only in the time-space creations, the seven superuniverses. Nontemporal space (space without time) theoretically exists, but the only truly nontemporal place is Paradise area. Nonspatial time (time without space) exists in mind of the Paradise level of function. (*135; 12:5.3)

During our time-space careers, there are many areas ripe for exploration. Perhaps time is the concept most closely related to personal experience. For example, in Paper 12, we are presented with the "three levels of time cognizance." (12:5.6)

● 1. Mind-perceived time consciousness of sequence, motion, and a sense of duration.

● 2. Spirit-perceived time insight into motion Godward and the awareness of the motion of ascent to levels of increasing divinity.

● 3. Personality creates a unique time sense out of insight into Reality plus a consciousness of presence and an awareness of duration. (*135)

As you know, The URANTIA Book often refers to advancement as being "inward" and "upward." In the light of this discussion of time and space, here is an interpretation of one meaning of these terms:

Inward/Inner Space Transcendence of Time

Upward/Outer Space Transcendence of Space

Now, consider this statement from Jesus' discourse:

There are seven different conceptions of space as it is conditioned by time. (*1439; 130:7.6)

I will close with this conjecture: Perhaps "inward" and "upward" are higher space dimensions; and each of us has an independent, personal time scale for these dimensions. BIBLIOGRAPHY

1. Beynam, Laurence M. "The Emergent Paradigm in Science," Revision, Spring, 1978.

2. Bohm, David. Wholeness and the Implicate Order. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1980.

3. Davies, Paul. The Cosmic Blueprint. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1988.

4. Flood, Raymond and Lockwood, Michael (Editors). The Nature of Time. New York: Basil Blackwell, Inc., 1986.

5. Fraser, J.T. Time, The Familiar Stranger. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1987.

6. Griffin, David R. (Editor). Physics and the Ultimate Significance of Time. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1986.

7. Ramsey, Norman F. "Precise Measurement of Time," American Scientist, Vol. 76, pages 42-49, January-February, 1988.

8. Talbot, Michael. Beyond the Quantum. New York: Macmillan, 1986.

9. The URANTIA Book. Uversa Press, Chicago, 1996.

10. Wolf, Fred Alan. Star Wave. New York: Macmillan, 1984. Callisto: a Living Planet ...Strong Evidence

By: Craig Carmichael Written: October 1999, revised March 2000. Minor rev. April 2000.

References: All scientific information in this document is from (a) www.jpl.nasa.gov/galileo web site or (b) JPL's Galileo Listserve (To subscribe, e-mail [email protected] with the message "subscribe galileo".) or (c) National Geographic September 1999 in an article about the Galileo project or (d) Scientific American (Feb 2000 iirc) in an article by Torrence Johnson, head of the Galileo Team. The underlying premise that there is a planet in our solar system with nonbreathing life, and other scientifically unverified solar system information, can be blamed squarely on The Urantia Book, pages as noted. All photographs by the Galileo Spacecraft, all illustrations courtesy of JPL-NASA

Which World Could it Be? We are told that Mars would be a sub-breather world if it were inhabited, and Venus would be peopled by superbreathers. Mercury and Luna are certainly lifeless: Ours is the only world in the inner solar system with much water. Saturn's orbiting world is an atmospheric world which would house mid-breathers. (Titan is probably the third planet "currently suitable for inhabitation" in our solar system (The Urantia Book (TUB) P173-d)). Anything beyond Saturn is certainly too far from the sun.

This leaves only Jupiter's family of four secondary planets. These four virtually airless worlds are just now being explored in much more detail than ever before, by the Galileo space probe's Jupiter-orbiting mission, extended for its fifth glorious year through the year 2000. Forget Star Trek's "Five Year Mission" - Galileo is real and a miracle more wonderous than "2001 a Space Oddessy", which it so nearly duplicates in date as well as location!

Left to right, Jupiter's Family of Secondary Planets: Io, Europa, Ganymede and Callisto. Note Callisto's richness of color compared to its grayish near-twin Ganymede. Callisto has about 2/3 of the land area of our own world, but none of its ocean area.

Innermost Io orbits within Jupiter's Van Allen belts in a radiation environment that would be quickly fatal to life, among many other extreme hostilities. It has aroused immense interest because of its continuous volcanic activity, which is no doubt a harbinger of its upcoming disintegration by tidal disruption in "the next few million years". (TUB P.658-b)

Europa seemed a most likely choice, as it seems certain it has a deep ocean of water under its planet-wide ice cover, and we are familiar with life developing in water. One discomforting feature of Europa as a life sphere was its small size, slightly smaller than our own moon. But other readers besides myself have speculated that it just about had to be the one, and no doubt scoured the pictures on the JPL-NASA website (www.jpl.nasa.gov/galileo) looking for signs of inhabitation. But we might infer that life probably doesn't start underwater on airless worlds from the statement that says it usually does on atmospheric worlds (TUB P.560-b), and a recent NASA study that says there'd be no way to energize underwater life where there is no significant sunlight on an airless world, and Europa's ice cover plus the distance from the sun probably makes it pretty dark down there. Perhaps Europa's ocean will freeze solid when its tidal friction partner Io is gone.

The surface of Ganymede seems frozen and dead from the Galileo photos. But it also has had its devotees among Urantia Book students as the life world c andidate. Its chief attractiveness was that it is the largest of these four small worlds, and it has very interesting geology, so to some it seemed the most likely to have life conditions.

At first Callisto seemed much like its twin in size, Mercury: a boring place where nothing special could possibly have happened, an undifferentiated amalgamation of craters, ice and rock. But Galileo did dutifully make a few relatively close passes at Callisto with its instruments humming.

Protection: Magnetic Field, Ozone Layer

Much to scientists' surprise, in fact unnoticed until long after the readings, Callisto turned out to have a magnetic field. This means that instead of being jumbled stuff all the way to the center as expected, Callisto, in common with Ganymede, must have a rocky core with a layer of circulating salt water or other conductive fluid, less of an ocean than a fluid mantle. Callisto's magnetic field resembles what is seen when a hollow copper sphere (or in this case Callisto's conductive salt water mantle) is subjected to a changing magnetic field (ie Jupiter's rotating field). The electric currents induced magnetically into the conducting layer produce their own magnetic field that exactly counters the imposed field.

The ozone ionosphere is generated by ultraviolet light striking the surface and splitting oxygen from the hydrogen in the ice molecules. Two oxygen molecules will combine to form oxygen gas, O2, and again UV energy can zap a third onto it for O3, ozone.

Together, these provide protection to shelter life from UV radiation and solar particles as they do on our world.

While everyone, both in the Urantia reader community and at JPL-NASA, seemed to be scrupulously ignoring Callisto, Galileo scientists nevertheless noticed a mystery, which seems to have gone largely without comment until very recently. In the close-up views, it was evident that there were few craters beneath about half a mile in size, in fact, few visible small-scale surface details at all, not even rocks. A dark material covered the landscape, leaving only larger crater rims and other peaks exposed. This matter appears to move. Planentary geologist Ronald Greeley said "The surface is being eaten away and blanketed by soft, fluffy stuff." and the vanishing ice theory "As the ice sublimates and is lost, all that is left is the dirt." (National Geographic, P.139): But they are at a loss to explain why it should happen on Callisto but not Ganymede. For that matter, why should such a process so completely smooth or obscure the smaller surface features? Grasping at straws for a rational explanation, they've speculated a static charge "fluffing up" the surface material. Can any dirt, rock powder or gravelly grit really qualify as "soft, fluffy stuff"? And what unknown energy that occurs nowhere else could cause or maintain a static charge millenium after millenium? The Galileo team themselves feel that none of the explanations so far is satisfying.

Four views of Callisto, at global, continental, regional and local sizes, showing the obscuration of small craters, rocks and other surface details by an unknown"soft, fluffy" and "dark" material

Life Chemistry

A NIMS (near infrared mapping spectrometer) reading had previously riveted my attention. The Galileo team had noted sulphur and carbon, the basic element of life, as features of the Callistan surface spectrum. Callisto may the only world besides Earth where carbon readings other than in atmospheric gasses are mentioned.

Recently it was revealed in more detail that there have been four unusual absorption spectra features in addition to the expected water ice and hydrated minerals, near a wavelength of four microns:

(1) Carbon Dioxide "trapped in the surface". (or perhaps existing as a chemical in living tissue?) There is also a carbon dioxide "exosphere" - a tenuous atmosphere. (2), (3) These would seem to be sulphur, which could have been blown into space by Io's volcanos, or originated locally, and may or may not be an important part of Callistan life chemistry. (4) This wavelength, considered by JPL scientists to be the strangest, and with good reason, corresponds to that absorbed by carbon- nitrogen bonds - the chemistry of organic life.

In fact, the lines are similar to laboratory spectra of complex organic molecules termed "tholins" by Carl Sagan. Tholins are thought to resemble organic material in the solar nebula; clouds of interstellar ice grains have comparable spectra. For life, these are some of the most important materials.

The existance of the exosphere is also very interesting. It ought to be lost as ultraviolet radiation from the Sun breaks the carbon dioxide (CO2) molecules into ions and electrons to be swept away by Jupiter's magnetic field. This indicates an ongoing flux of CO2 into the atmosphere. Although the scientists suggest outgassing from the surface, a more likely scenario is that it is given off as a waste product of living organisms, as it is on our planet. This CO2 might be utilized by plants (and animals?) in photosynthesis much as the trace of CO2 in our own atmosphere is.

Evidence for Forests

"Soft, fluffy stuff", organic compounds: could it be vegetation? Unfortunately, the highest resolution pictures are around 20 meters, 65 feet, per pixel or worse (above picture, close-up "Local" view with "1KM" bar). This seems to be too coarse to make out the individual components of the landscape material, as it should be if it were vegetation. PIA00514, below, resembles nothing so much as a forested landscape. I thought, Oh for color photos!, Oh for a closer view!

What is the nature of the dark material obscurring Callisto's landscape details except on steep or icy slopes? (each image pixel is around 30 meters, 100 feet, square)

Scanning the Callisto images again, the key was the three or four large-scale color pictures, in particular PIA00562, a continental- scale mosaic view of the Asgard "bullseye" region. It was immediately obvious: Large dark-green patchy regions of Callisto have the appearance of being heavily forested! Other areas show a subtle light lime green: "grasslands"? "scrub brush"? a different family of trees? Anyone who's looked down from a jet over the mountains at 40,000 feet will be familiar with such an appearance of forests from great altitude. Since they cover surface details so effectively, at least in the areas where the close-up views were taken, it would seem that very large bushes or else trees are the order of the sphere. There is more green in PIA00562 than in most space shuttle views of the earth's land areas.

In PIA00562, "Low-resolution color data were combined with a higher resolution mosaic to produce this infrared composite image". What this means is that I'm not completely sure these are natural colors, though I believe they are intended to be. In some of the global images said to be more-or-less natural color, there are hints of green, though nothing so strong as PIA00562. But even if it turns out that these 'greens' are actually another color, I maintain it looks very much like regions of vegetation.

The entire conjecture could, of course, be entirely wrong, reader beware! (<--universal disclaimer - good on any planet! :-) But vegetative cover seems a much better explanation for the lack of surface detail thanthe other conjectures, and I find the close-up pictures and PIA00562 convincing. The green color could conceivably be geological zones rather than trees, indicated by its pattern around Asgard, but it may also be that that owing to underlying geological mineral patterns trees grow well there.

No one even dreamed that such a thing could be, not on cold, cratered, airless and apparently liquidless Callisto, so we didn't recognize the familiar aspects of the scene.

PIA00562, The Asgard Region of Callisto. In this continental-scale mosaic, the lower left appears more straight down, while the curve of the planet's surface bends away to an oblique view towards the top right. Note the patches of green, a color not found in landscapes anywhere else in the solar system except on our own world.

Other Mysteries

Another mystery noted by the scientists is what appears to be erosion in areas of different elevations, especially crater rims sliding or collapsing down into the bottoms at points, these "mud"-flows even spreading out for two kilometers. While the process is unknown, it indicates something active has been at work, and there seems little reason to doubt that it still is today.

Also noticed by the Galileo team are what appear to be pits, of unclear origin. Not all are circular, and they seem distinguished from craters by their lack of rims. Are they "mudslidden" craters, craters partly covered by vegetation, or something man-made, such as open pit mines, or even just clearings in the trees? Could this be our first direct evidence of human activity on another planet?

I have no idea of the chemistry or biology that would activate life on an airless sphere with a surface climate of 120 degrees absolute (- 195 Celsius, -320 Fahrenheit). How the first primitive microbes and organisms could move around and spread in an environment with no evident liquid to drift in is beyond me, but perhaps there is hidden low-freezing-point liquid we can't see; maybe softening the soil as evidenced by the "mudflows". And perhaps primitive life there is only active in the heat of the mid-day sun (the day is about 17 of ours, curiously about the same as Saturn's planet, Titan) and hibernates the rest of the time. But it seems there are two temperature zones for life "much colder" than ours as well as two "much warmer" (TUB P. 562-c).

Regardless, TUB says life on non-breather worlds is radically different than on atmospheric worlds, and so is its heat regulation (TUB P.563-564). Perhaps animal life differentiates from plants at a later evolutionary stage - plants or seeds sprout legs and start to creep around. After all, it would seem that non-breathers get some of their energy intake from photosynthesis.

Whatever types of animals there are, there will be none that fly or make sound since there is no air. To us, eerie silence. Physically, the people would be around ten feet tall, very spindly, and slow moving, in accord with the weak gravity, one eighth of ours (evidence: TUB, P.562-b).

Light energy from the rather distant sun is only four percent as strong as in our region, but it is not diluted by an atmosphere and clouds. The trees or bushes are likely to be very tall and spindly, spreading their leaves and branches widely in their quest for light. Not only is there the light gravity, but additionally there is no wind to brace against. They may (or may not) also be very slow growing by our standards. (But they are, seemingly, green!) With the long day and dull sunlight, perhaps the more advanced plants have learned to move their leaves to keep them pointed at the sun.

The Urantia Book says that the advancing races on airless worlds must do much to protect themselves from [micro-] meteorites (TUB P.563-d), and one wonders how they survive to become advanced. Perhaps dense forest or brush cover forms a protective shield for the animals and early human races.

Airhead Ideas

That pretty much covers the essentials. Here are some of my own geographic observations and speculations. No doubt some of them are wrong.

First, altitude as a factor in plant growth on Callisto. One would anticipate that altitude would have no meaning on an airless world, but there is actually some atmosphere of tenuous ozone and carbon dioxide.

But, without other atmospheric gasses to carry it aloft, the ozone, along with the carbon dioxide, may possibly be a quite thin layer near the ground. This could mean that the higher the elevation, the less ozone above it, and the harsher the radiation from the sun. The ozone is, then, generated on the exposed higher bare-ice peaks and drifts down the slopes into the lowlands. This might help to explain why higher crater rims and other peaks are so clear of vegetation: there is a height above which it can't grow owing to UV radiation. Also it is possible the plant life utilizes the tenuous carbon dioxide for photosynthesis, just as here, and it could also thin quickly with altitude.

But I am a layman and have no real idea how high the atmospheric layers might extend. It is just as likely that the slopes are simply too steep, or that they are composed, as they appear to be, mainly of hard, infertile ice-rock in which plants can find no sustenance.

Now back to PIA562 and Asgard. (The center of Valhalla is the big yellowish "lump" in the global images.) The zone towards the center of the Asgard 'Bullseye' seems to have little ground cover. It would seem Asgard and Valalla were formed by huge meteor strikes which broke through to the mantle, causing a tremendous upwelling of water from the mantle. They may have struck earlier in Callistan history when the crust was thinner than today. The series of concentric troughs or crevasses around these two huge structures bespeak of surface shrinkage as these areas cooled and solidified. (Although, a few of the rings near Asgard's center appear to be raised, instead.) Some Valhallan meteor rays may be from the central yellowish material being thrown out by later, smaller meteors whose craters lie within the Valhalla center. Valhalla's ring structure is immense, occupying the major portion of one hemisphere.

If the ozone layer is indeed thin, it would drift away from the lighter materials in the Asgard/Valhalla central regions toward denser ground even if they were not elevated, as such lighter crustal zones would no doubt tend to be. There would be a double effect causing the evident stunting of plant growth revealed in the picture: lack of ozone protection and the impoverished soil, composed mainly of up-welled mantle ice. This idea is supported by the presence of many smaller craters and the concentric rift valleys whose floors seem much greener than the surrounding plains: (a) the elevation is lower and so there would be more ozone, and (b) underground minerals are more exposed. Meteors and comets would also add their own new minerals.

From these geologic or meteoric events may also be taken a theory of why Callisto and not Ganymede was suitable for life implantation. Callisto, being smaller, only had local regions where the segregation of the planet's inner layers involved the surface beyond an early date, and it cooled sooner, so mostly the surface retained the original rich minerals brought to it by meteoric and cometic accretion. On larger Ganymede, major portions of the surface, if not all of it, became involved and most of the heavier minerals sank into the planet, leaving mainly unfertile ice "rock" in the surface layers. This is the undoubted case on Europa, warmed by tidal friction, where even today meteors seem to break through the thin ice sheet and end up uselessly under the ocean. It is estimated that 20% of Callisto's surface is ice versus 50% on Ganymede. Euro pa must be close to 100%.

A separate factor in Callisto's habitability may be that it is the only Jovian world outside Jupiter's plasma torus, a giant donut shaped ring of charged particles orbiting Jupiter, originating in Io's volcanos and affected by Jupter's magnetic field. Whether this is significant I'm not sure.

Many large Callistan craters are glaringly white with no apparent ground cover. Perhaps these apparently blighted zones were caused by comets composed mainly of ice. Or, the heat generated by such large impacts melted the ice in the soil, or the object broke through to the planet's water "mantle", causing the other minerals to sink and leaving bright, unfertile ice at the surface.

It may be speculated that the Callistans must surely find their neighboring worlds much more environmetally friendly than we do ours, perhaps even livable. Ganymede and Europa are of similar gravity and in the same temperature belt as Callisto, and have similar sorts of magnetic fields and ionospheres. Since they are non-breathers, there is no atmospheric requirement.

On the other hand, it is very unlikely they will come to visit us on our world. What with its hellish heat, crushing gravity, blinding lighting, its toxic pressurized gas envelope, and the fact that it is 3/4 covered with molten rock, their scientists may well assume that the third planet could not possibly be inhabitable by any conceivable form of life. Site Index E-mail us WORLDS OF MONMATIA "Exploring Monmatia with Craig" Copyright 1999 Craig Carmichael

TUB says that 12 planets formed in our early solar system: 5 inner, 5 outer, and the Jupiter and Saturn systems (P.656-B,C). Martin Gardiner in his recent book Urantia, the Great Cult Mystery speaks of TUB as saying there are 'three more planets beyond '. No doubt he counts today's nine and knows there are no more any closer than Pluto. However, this conclusion is not correct.

First, five of the twelve were inner planets, but inner planet number five was pulled within Jupiter's LaRoche limit of critical tidal disruption and broke up to become the , leaving only eleven planets. (658-B)

Then, orbits backwards (retrograde) at an odd angle and is no doubt a planet captured by Neptune long ago, not a moon that formed with Neptune! Triton is very similar in composition and density to Pluto and not too much larger. Both have thin nitrogen atmospheres. The similarities suggest a commonness of origin away from Neptune's influence. Triton eventually crossed Neptune's path, with tidal friction slowing it so that it was captured, then circularizing the resulting highly eccentric retrograde orbit over time. Triton was fortunate enough to not hit Neptune's LaRoche limit of critical tidal disruption and be broken into asteroids in the process. So one planet became a moon, leaving ten.

The last world is less easy to pin down. First, we could resort to noting that is large enough to cause itself and Pluto to orbit about a common center of gravity between them. Technically, this constitutes them a double planet instead of a planet with a moon. But I am not happy with this answer. Even Pluto is so small - Charon surely can't be a 'world', maybe a 'worldlet'. But if no other explanation was to be found Charon could be counted as planet number twelve, (now number ten) - technically.

But it is quite likely that yet another planet formed out past Neptune, then wandered into Neptune's LaRoche limit and was tidally disrupted - broken up - to form the estimated thousands of small comet and asteroid objects in today's .

The Kuiper Belt has much in common with the asteroids. Most remnant asteriods are locked into orbital resonances with Jupiter; 3 asteroid orbits per 2 Jupiter orbits, or 5:3, etc. Why? Because any that weren't were eventually captured by Jupiter. If the fifth planet had formed in or entered into such a resonant orbit originally, it wouldn't have wandered and gotten broken up. And this resonance of orbits is also true of the Kuiper Belt objects and Neptune, making it seem very much like a second asteroid belt at the outer edge of the solar system.

Pluto might be termed a 'Kuiper Belt Planet'. It too is locked into a 3:2 ratio synchrony with Neptune, and though their orbits actually cross each other, never are Neptune and Pluto both near the cross-over points at the same time.

Or, could there still be one more planet to be found?

Neptune was found by noting 'perturbations' in Uranus's orbit and predicting the size and location of the planet that must be causing them.

Pluto was found by error in observations of Neptune's position and a lucky hit: though it was far too small to explain Neptune's supposed orbital perturbations, it just happened to be in the right place at the right time to be detected by those searching for a large planet that didn't exist. But for this, might it still be undetected? I don't know.

If there is another planet still in existance, it also is likely to be found in the Kuiper Belt in an orbital synchrony with Neptune. It would have to be a small world like Pluto or Triton or perhaps even smaller, as there don't seem to be any unexplained orbital perturbations in the outer planets. I won't hold my breath.

* * * * *

We need some new vocabulary here, I think. Planets, as currently used, excludes worlds orbiting other worlds (moons). We either have to start thinking in terms of worlds and let the word planet fade into much less usage, or else redefine planet to include planet-sized moons. (TUB implicitly does this, on page 166 using planets and worlds alternately.) Moons includes all planetary satellites from a lump of ice to a habitable world. These two ideosyncrasies of usage have created a mental block in our minds against moons. "All moons are like our moon: small cratered spheres of no interest, or just lumps of rock. They aren't planets." But Monmatia's seven moon-worlds are very diverse and interesting! Even Luna has now been found to have a bit of water ice near its poles, not quite all rock.

I'm using the word moons similar to planets: If it's greater than 2000 KM diameter, it's a moon or a planet: a world. (Pluto is the smallest world at 2345 KM diameter.) If it's less than 1000, it's a moonoid, or asteroid. Between these, from 1000 to 2000 KM, are moonlets and planetlets: worldlets perhaps.

So! We have 16 worlds worthy of the name: 9 solar planets and 7 moons (Jupiter: 4, Urantia: 1, Saturn: 1, Neptune: 1 ). Plus, there are 9 moonlets (Saturn: 4, Uranus: 4, Pluto: 1). Everything else under the sun is just asteroids, moonoids and meteoric debris.

Does that clear up a lot of conceptual clutter from the solar system?

All the moons are larger than Pluto; Ganymede and Titan are both larger than Mercury, though smaller than Mars. Calisto and Mercury are about the same size, as are Europa and Luna.

* * * * *

Before we go on, a word about the Kelvin temperature scale. Farenheit & Celsius just aren't suitable for what I'm about to describe. -225 degrees simply doesn't mean much to anybody - may we never see such weather!

Water freezes at 273 degrees Kelvin and boils at 373, a 100 degree range the same as Celsius. 0 degrees is absolute zero where all molecular motion ceases, so there can't be a negative temperature. Urantian room temperature is about 295 degrees. So in absolute terms, 150 degrees Kelvin is about half as warm as Urantia.

* * * * *

It is interesting to note that while TUB says Jupiter and Saturn are still in a gaseous state, Uranus and Neptune (both about four times the diameter of Urantia, or 16 times our land area or 64 times our volume) are described with "the other ten planets" that have solidified (656-D), though astronomers still seem to regard them as "gas giants". Looking at those patterned cloud layers, one does indeed not see a similar latitudinal banding to that which characterizes Jupiter and Saturn.

However, they are so far from the sun they could not possibly be life spheres. They must certainly qualify as 'frigid outlying worlds'. From these distances the Sun is just the brightest star. Uranus also has an unhealthy 98 degree axis tilt: most parts of the planet experience days and nights that last for Urantian decades at various times. Temperatures in the vicinity of both are around 40 degrees Kelvin. Triton's south pole was measured by Voyager 2 at just 37 degrees, the coldest weather ever recorded anywhere!

* * * * *

Likely Europa, orbiting Jupiter, is the world of the non-breathers. (464-A)

The space environs around Jupiter are in the vicinity of 125 degrees Kelvin, but the inner three moons are locked into orbits of about 43, 86, and 172 hours, and outer Callisto is somewhat over double that at 400. They are heated internally by tidal frictions resulting from their alternately lining up and being away from each other. This heat energy is paid for in gradually reducing orbital velocities: the moons are slowly spiralling inward like the track of a phonograph record.

Innermost Io has boiled off all its water and is the most volcanically active world in Monmatia, spewing geysers of sulfur and sodium hundreds of miles into space. It is gradually approaching Jupiter's LaRoche limit and is destined to undergo tidal disruption within the next few million years, either being captured by Jupiter or becoming a . (658-B)

Europa appears to have an Ocean covered by a thin layer of ice like our Arctic Ocean. There are no meteor craters or valleys, undoubtedly because water immediately floods and fills them in. There are no high mountains because the ice would crack and they would sink.

Ganymede and Callisto, farther out, have less heat and their surfaces seem frozen and dead. But even they have liquid circulating in their interiors, generating magnetic fields.

A recent study suggests that with no atmosphere, there is no source of energy on Europa to energize life, even in the water. But this is in keeping with the statement in TUB that non-breather life utilizes light energy and firsthand power transmutations of the Master Physical Controlers (563-A,B), in radical contrast to breathing worlds. Sunlight around Jupiter is about 1/16 the energy as at Urantia, equivalent to being in the shade here.

Other interesting facts: Europa has an ionosphere (its only bit of tenuous atmosphere) and a magnetic field to protect life from dangerous radiation. Sodium, chlorine and oxygen have been detected at the surface. It is a bit smaller than our own moon, Luna, but just 66% of its mass, and has about the land area of Africa.

What will Io's tidal disruption mean for Europa if it is the life world? Surely the climate will become significantly colder when its closest tidal fricton team partner vanishes! But that is millions of years off yet. No doubt it will be long since settled in light and life by then.

If it does prove to be inhabited, I bet it is one of the smallest inhabited worlds in Satania if not the smallest. And the inhabitants would be, conversely, among the largest owing to the light gravity - probably 10 feet tall (562-C). Galileo, which took pictures as close up as 600 kilometers from Europa at 6 meters-per-pixel resolution, has failed to disclose anything that looks like habitations or artificial creations ( - on any of the four moons. See www.jpl.nasa.gov/galileo for pictures and more info). But inhabitants may well live under the ice cover until they advance enough to build electronic apparatus for 'shunting or consuming' meteorites (563-D).

A Europa Closeup, as if through an airplane window. The bottom of the picture is about a mile wide, and 600 KM distant. The top is much farther in the distance. The basic white material is ice.

* * * * *

By a process of eliminating unsuitable worlds, we are left with Titan as probably TUB's third world 'currently suitable for inhabitation' (173- D) in our solar system. Of the other seeming candidates: Venus hardly rotates; Mars has almost no water and no ionosphere or magnetic field; Io is in Jupiter's radiation zone and has no water; Ganymede and Callisto appear dead and frozen; and Europa we've already accounted for.

Titan has a permanent cloud layer that has prevented us from seeing anything of the surface until very recently. The two Voyager space probes could tell us very little about it, the biggest dissapointment of the Voyager missions. pictures in the near infra-red have now revealed many surface features, and while their meanings haven't yet been interpreted, and the resolution is something like 100 miles-per- pixel, it's clear that it isn't all ocean as per some speculations. These pictures have disclosed that it rotates every 16 days, with one side always facing Saturn in its 16 day orbit, as previously predicted. (This gives new meaning to the expression "It's been a long day!")

The environment around Saturn is very cold, around 100 degrees Kelvin, and this certainly seems a very cold region, even though there are said to be two temperature zones for life "much colder" than Urantia (562-C).

But Titan, like Urantia, has an atmospheric blanket, and I speculate that the surface of Titan will be found to be much warmer than astronomers expect. I base this on other worlds which are apparently warmer than expected.

* Venus, with its very thick 'greenhouse' atmosphere is hotter than Mercury.

* The space regions around Urantia are well below freezing, 225 K(?), but Urantia surface temperatures are much warmer than this, averaging 295 K, a 70 degree difference - thankfully enough to turn solid ice into balmy seas.

* Although the Jupiter region is around 125 Kelvin, Io has boiled off all its water and has continuous volcanic activity and Europa appears to have liquid water under a quite thin layer of insulating ice. Even Ganymede and Callisto, previously thought to be solid, now are shown to have liquid circulating in their interiors, generating magnetic fields. Scientists seem to have been taken by surprise by each new discovery that indicates more warmth and activity than they thought.

Titan has much more actual air substance than Urantia. That's a substantially better insulation blanket. It yields in spite of the low gravity a 22 PSI surface pressure, very close to our 15 PSI and ideal for mid-breathers like ourselves (561-B).

My guess is that the surface will be around 200 degrees K, at least 100 degrees warmer than the surrounding space region and its own upper atmosphere. (The matter is certainly outside my expertise and I am on 'thin ice' in suggesting this or any other temperature.)

If the temperatures are as astronomers expect, perhaps the anticipated ethane-methane liquid forms the required ocean liquids for life.

But if it is as 'warm' as I speculate, an interesting possibility is that the solution freezes at 190 degrees K, whereas water alone is 273 degrees and ammonia by itself is similar to that. At temperatures below 273, any excess of either water or ammonia freezes out, leaving exactly the two-to-one mixture to provide an anti-freeze liquid with water for oceans and lakes on quite cold worlds.

There are traces of many common organic compounds and amino acid precursors from which life is built present in the atmosphere, which is thought to be similar to Urantia's primitive pre-life atmosphere.

If Titan's air is added to its solid diameter of 5150 KM then it exceeds Ganymede's 5260 KM and makes Titan the largest moon in Monmatia.

The probe Huygens is currently on its way to land on Titan as a part of the Cassini mission to Saturn. Perhaps when it arrives in about seven years we will learn more about this most mysterious and intriguing world. The Hubble images will help to decide on a landing site.

* * * * *

If only Mars had enough water to make lakes and streams and generate an ionosphere, and had a magnetic field, we might have a world of sub- breathers as neighbors. If only Venus rotated for a reasonable day and night, or if Uranus or Neptune were closer to the sun, there might have been superbreathers. If only the fifth planet hadn't broken up, there might be another world perhaps very similar to Urantia! The universe must be teeming with 'almost' inhabitable worlds!

But the solar system is not static. Perhaps in 100,000,000 years Ganymede will get close enough to Jupiter to warm up and get Europa-like oceans and evolve into another non-breather world, and still later on, maybe Callisto. Perhaps Uranus or Neptune or a solidified Saturn will get their day in the sunshine billions of years from now when the sun expands and swallows up the whole inner solar system.

TUB says that not one world in forty can support 'your order' of life. (173-D) Only five solar systems in Satania have more than two inhabited worlds (359-D). To have two among 16 worlds inhabitable by Adjuster-fusing breathers, plus a third Spirit-fusing order non-breather world, one of just nine in Satania, plus future evolutionary potential, must constitute Monmatia to be an exceptionally rich solar system indeed. SQUARE CIRCLES PUBLISHING Urantia Book related works

square calendar source articles the ub related ub-related "ascent to home news study aids circles cartoons contact us of events studies & circular books sites paradise" books books ARTICLES

STARS, GALAXIES, SUPERUNIVERSES

and THE URANTIA BOOK by Frederick L. Beckner

INTRODUCTION

In the past several years, since the advent of the Hubble Space Telescope (HST), there has been an explosion of astronomical information relating to our Milky Way galaxy, our Local Group of galaxies, and myriads of galaxies unknown at the time the Urantia Book was written. The HST has even allowed us a glimpse at galaxies believed to be near the edge of the universe itself. Figure 1 shows a portion of the Deep Field South image showing galaxies at distances out to 12 billion light years.

The Urantia Book contains a description of the universe which one might describe as "Urantian cosmology." This cosmological information, written prior to 1941 by celestial beings, was derived from revelation, not human astronomical science. It is therefore of interest to examine the Urantian cosmology, some 60 years later, to see how this revelation squares with current astronomical knowledge.

Much information of cosmological interest can be obtained by analysis of selected portions of the Urantia Book text. For example, the number of suns in the Master Universe, being all of material creation, is said to be equal to the number of glasses of water in the oceans of our planet. This paper describes a procedure for calculating this number given current readily- available information, arriving at a figure of 4.5 billion trillion suns. I will show that this number is in reasonable agreement with current knowledge.

Given this number and other astronomical information now available we are able to compute the average number of stars per galaxy. Given the identification of our Milky Way galaxy as the inhabitable portion of the superuniverse of Orvonton, we can estimate the number of inhabitable planets per star. It is even possible to determine, within limits, the size of the Grand Universe, our superuniverse, and our local universe of Nebadon.

After performing these calculations and comparing the results with current astronomical knowledge where possible, one finds that the Urantian cosmology is not generally inconsistent with our present knowledge of the universe. This is in spite of the fact that the Urantia Book states that it’s cosmology is not divinely inspired and may require revision in the future.

"The cosmology of these revelations is not inspired. It is limited by our permission for the co-ordination and sorting of present-day knowledge." (UB1109:3)

Figure 1. A portion of the Hubble Deep Field South image showing galaxies to near the edge of the universe. (NASA)

Urantian Cosmology

An overview of Urantian cosmology is given on the first page of the Urantia Book.

"Your world, Urantia, is one of many similar inhabited planets which comprise the local universe of Nebadon. This universe, together with similar creations, makes up the superuniverse of Orvonton, from whose capital, Uversa, our commission hails. Orvonton is one of the seven evolutionary superuniverses of time and space which circle the never-beginning, never-ending creation of divine perfection—the central universe of Havona. At the heart of this eternal and central universe is the stationary Isle of Paradise, the geographic center of infinity and the dwelling place of the eternal God.

The seven evolving superuniverses in association with the central and divine universe, we commonly refer to as the grand universe; these are the now organized and inhabited creations. They are all a part of the master universe, which also embraces the uninhabited but mobilizing universes of outer space." (UB1:5-6)

We thus live in the grand universe, which includes the presently-inhabited portion of the much larger master universe. The grand universe is subdivided into seven superuniverses, or collections of galaxies, one for each of the seven possible Master Spirits, or personality associations of the three triune manifestations of God. The seventh Master Spirit, being the association of the Universal Father, Eternal Son, and Infinite Spirit supervises our superuniverse of Orvonton. We will show that the Milky Way galaxy lies entirely within Orvonton, and is the greatest part of the inhabited portion of Orvonton. The capital of our superuniverse is called Uversa and will be shown to be located outside the Milky Way galaxy.

"Satania has a headquarters world called Jerusem, and it is system number twenty-four in the constellation of Norlatiadek. Your constellation, Norlatiadek, consists of one hundred local systems and has a headquarters world called Edentia. Norlatiadek is number seventy in the universe of Nebadon. The local universe of Nebadon consists of one hundred constellations and has a capital known as Salvington. " (UB182:5)

We also live in a star system called Satania, presumably named after Satan, a lieutenant and associate of Lucifer, a former ruler of Satania, who led a rebellion against God, which resulted in the isolation of our planet, Urantia, from the rest of the universe. Jerusem is said to be an architectural sphere, or artificial world, and thus is nonluminous and is not visible by telescopic means from Urantia. It is of special interest because it is on a of a satellite of Jerusem that we are resurrected after death. This is the location of the mansion worlds mentioned by Jesus.

Our star system of Satania is one of approximately 10,000 such systems in our local universe of Nebadon. This local universe was created by a Creator Son of God, Michael, who incarnated on Urantia to live the life of one of His mortal creatures and to reveal the nature of God the Father to the inhabitants of His local universe. Michael is better known on Urantia as His mortal incarnation, Jesus of Nazareth. The Urantia Book specifically says that our local universe of Nebadon is not a physical star system, but that its capital, Salvington, is within such a system. We will show that our local universe is approximately 4000 light years in diameter.

With this brief overview of Urantian cosmology, we are now prepared to examine specific teachings of the Urantia Book and to compare them with current astronomical knowledge.

The Master Universe

Size of the Master Universe

The Urantia Book does not explicitly give a size for the master universe. It does imply that the master universe is finite and is expanding.

"Even if the master universe eventually expands to infinity…" (UB92:6)

Current scientific estimates of the size of the master universe are generally based on the theory of the "big bang" where the universe came into being at an instant of time about 14 billion years ago, and has expanded outwards from this point at the speed of light ever since. A good discussion of three techniques for determining this age is given at http://www.astro.ucla.edu/~wright/age.html. Under these assumptions, it is thus a sphere having a radius of about 14 billion light years.

The Urantia Book implicitly denies the big bang theory, for it implies that the master universe was already in existence 875 billion years ago. It was at this time the Andronover nebula was initiated which resulted in our local universe of Nebadon.

"875,000,000,000 years ago the enormous Andronover nebula number 876,926 was duly initiated." (UB652:2)

Number of Stars in the Master Universe

The Urantia Book contains the following statement about the number of stars in the master universe.

“But in the master universe there are as many suns as there are glasses of water in the oceans of your world.” (UB173:0)

The volume of the oceans of Urantia can be found on the United States Geological Survey web site, www.usgs.gov/edu/waterdistribution.html, as 317 million cubic miles. Knowing this, and that one cubic mile is equivalent to 4.167 x 109 cubic meters, one finds that the volume of water on Urantia is 1.321 x 1018 m3 or 1.321 x 1024 cm3.

Another source states that the oceans cover 70 percent of the earth’s surface and have an average depth of 2 miles. The area of the earth’s surface is 4 pi times the square of the earth’s radius of 6,350 km. Given this, one can calculate that the volume of this water is 1.14 x 1024 cm3, which is in substantial agreement with the volume given by the USGS.

To compute the number of stars in the master universe we need a number for the volume of a glass of water. A small juice glass in my kitchen has a volume of 200 cm3. A typical drinking glass that I use daily has a volume of 300 cm3, and the volume of the largest glass I have is 500 cm3. Thus, taking the volume to be 300 cm3 will give results accurate to within about +/- 40%, a figure sufficient for our purposes. Given that the volume of a typical glass of water is about 300 cm3, one can calculate that the number of glasses of water in the oceans of Urantia is about 4.4 x 1021. Thus, according to the Urantia Book, the number of suns in the master universe must be on the order of 4.4 x 1021. The web site, Atlas of the Universe (http://anzwers.org/free/universe/universe.html), states that there are 2.0 x 1021 stars in the visible universe.

To put this number in perspective consider that a cubic rock salt crystal 0.92 cm (0.36 inches) on an edge will contain the same number of molecules. This can be calculated given that rock salt is a cubic crystal with a lattice constant of 5.64 x 10-8 cm. We can conclude that the number of atoms in the human body is much greater than the number of stars in the universe.

The Mass of the Master Universe

Given the number of stars in the master universe it is possible to estimate its mass. Given that the sun is an average star, and the mass of the sun is 1.989 x 1033 g (grams), then the mass of all the stars in the master universe would be 4.4 x 1021 * 1.989 x 1033 = 9 x 1054 g. Currently astronomers believe that more than 90% of the mass of the universe is tied up in “dark matter.” Thus the mass of the universe would be about ten times the mass of all the visible stars, or about 9 x 1055 g.

Eddington, in his book, Fundamental Theory (1946, p 105), computes the mass of the universe from general relativistic theory as 1.98 x 1055 g which is within a factor of 4.5 of the value inferred from UB statements. Thus these estimates agree within an order of magnitude, although we have no proof that either Eddington’s value or the UB value is correct. Eddington also computes the number of protons in the universe to be 3/2 * 2256 * 136 = 2.36 x 1079 (p283).

Number of Galaxies in the Master Universe

“In the not-distant future, new telescopes will reveal to the wondering gaze of Urantian astronomers no less than 375 million new galaxies in the remote stretches of outer space.” (UB130:5)

The Urantia Book is probably referring here to the Hale (Mt Palomar) telescope, which went into operation in 1948. The figure 375 million thus refers to the additional new galaxies observable when the Hale telescope was put into operation, not the number of galaxies in the master universe. Recently the Hubble Space Telescope made two deep field images, in the region of the North Pole, and another in the region of the South Pole (see Figure 1), these regions being those which could be continuously observed for long periods of time without interruption by occultation by the Earth. Exposure times of 10 days were used. From the north deep field image astronomers estimate that there are 80 billion galaxies in the universe. From the southern image they estimate that there are 125 billion galaxies in the universe. For the purposes of this paper we will assume that there are at least 100 billion galaxies in the master universe.

Number of Stars Per Galaxy

Given this number of galaxies and the total number of stars in the master universe, one can calculate that the average number of stars per galaxy is 4.4 x 1021 stars divided by 1.0 x 1011 galaxies or 4.4 x 1010 stars per galaxy (44 billion). The number of stars in our Milky Way galaxy is estimated to be around 200 to 400 billion. This is pretty good agreement with our average number since our galaxy is the second largest in our local cluster of about 30 galaxies, and thus may be considered to be an exceptionally large galaxy. There are many more small galaxies of the elliptical or globular types than there are of the spiral type such as our Milky Way. The information on the number of stars in the Milky Way was obtained from the University of Arizona at http://seds.lpl.arizona.edu/messier/more/mw.html.

Density of Stars in the Master Universe

If there are 4.4 x 1021 stars in the master universe and if the radius of the master universe is 14 billion light years, then the average density of stars in the master universe is 3.8 x 10-10 stars per cubic light year. If the stars were uniformly distributed throughout the master universe the minimum distance between stars would be about 1,400 light years. Actually, the stars cluster into globular clusters, galaxies, clusters of galaxies, and galactic superclusters where the stellar density is significantly greater than the average density, and leaving great voids in which the stellar density is much less than average. Given knowledge of the density of stars in a given region, it is possible to estimate the volume of the sphere necessary to contain a given number of stars, and from this to determine the approximate radius of this sphere. This technique will be used later to compute radii for the grand universe, our superuniverse, and our local universe.

The Grand Universe and Orvonton

Size of the Grand Universe

The size of the grand universe can be estimated from the number of stars it contains and an estimate of the average star density on that scale. The Urantia Book says there are ten trillion stars in our superuniverse (UB172:7). If we assume that all seven superuniverses are of approximately the same size, then there would be 70 trillion stars in the grand universe.

If the grand universe contains seventy trillion stars, and if these stars are in galaxies which are approximately uniformly distributed throughout the master universe, then the volume of space occupied by the grand universe will be a fraction 70 x 1012/4.4 x 1021 = 1.59 x 10-8 of the volume of the master universe. The current estimate of the radius of the master universe is about 14 billion light years. Since the volume is proportional to the radius cubed, the radius of the grand universe would be of the order of (1.59 x 10-8)0.333 = 2.5 x 10-3 times the radius of the master universe, or about 35 million light years. This assumes that the star density in the Grand Universe is the same as in the Master Universe.

There is good reason to believe that the actual star density within our local part of the universe is considerably higher than the average density throughout the master universe. This is because the stars are grouped into galaxies, clusters of galaxies, and even larger superclusters of galaxies leaving other areas with voids containing relatively few galaxies. We may estimate the average density of stars in our local group of galaxies in the following manner.

One source, the Atlas of the Universe, http://anzwers.org/free/universe/localgr.html, states that there are about 700 x 109 stars within 5 million light years of Earth. The density of stars in this volume is thus about 1.3 x 10-9 per cubic light year, or about 3.3 times the average density of the master universe. The same source gives the density in a sphere of about 1 billion light years as 1.19 x 10-10 per cubic light year. Thus this source estimates that the star density in our local area is about 10 times greater than that in a volume much greater than the volume of any supercluster. Given this, we must reduce our estimate of the size of the grand universe by a factor of the cube root of ten (10.333 = 2.15) to allow for the higher local density of stars. Our corrected estimate of the radius of the grand universe is then 35/2.15 = 16 million light years.

Since Havona is at the center of the grand universe, the distance from Earth to Havona would be about 16 million light years. If there are seven superuniverses distributed equally in angle about Havona, then the distance to the nearest superuniverse outside Orvonton would be about 14 million light years.

Another clue to the size of the grand universe is given in the following passage:

“Long before the presence of life on Urantia the [Solitary] messenger now associated with me was assigned on a mission out of Uversa to the central universe—was absent from the roll calls of Orvonton for almost a million years but returned in due time with the desired information.” (UB259:2)

The time given in this passage is most likely given in Uversa years, since the writers of the book seem to be quite explicit when they refer to Urantia years, calling such times either “Urantia years” or “years of Urantia time” 23 times throughout the book. Since the Solitary Messengers can travel at the rate of 4.52 million light years per Urantian year (UB267:1) and assuming the time given is in Uversa years (8.2 Urantia years, see UB174:2) the distance traveled by the Solitary Messenger would be less than 37 trillion light years. The distance to Havona would then be less than 18.5 trillion light years. This would be in good agreement with the value derived above from the number of stars in Orvonton if the Solitary Messenger had been absent only one Uversa year rather than one million years.

Number of Stars in Orvonton

The Urantia Book specifically gives the number of suns within Orvonton.

“The superuniverse of Orvonton is illuminated and warmed by more than ten trillion blazing suns.” (UB172:7)

This number of suns is indicative that Orvonton is composed of more than one galaxy, since the Milky Way, the second largest galaxy within the Local Group, is currently thought to contain about 200 to 400 billion stars. It would take at least 25 Milky Way or about 110 average galaxies to contain ten trillion stars. It is thus clear that our superuniverse of Orvonton is significantly bigger than our local group of about 30 galaxies and is much bigger than the Milky Way galaxy.

The Size of Orvonton

The Urantia Book gives at least seven different clues as to the size of our superuniverse, Orvonton.

"Although the unaided human eye can see only two or three nebulae outside the borders of the superuniverse of Orvonton, your telescopes literally reveal millions upon millions of these physical universes in process of formation." (UB130:4)

Figure 2. The galaxy M81 is just visible to the naked eye under ideal conditions. (SEDS)

The galaxy M81, shown in Figure 2, is visible to the unaided eye under very good viewing conditions. This 6.9 magnitude galaxy is 12 million light years distant and is probably not within Orvonton. It is a candidate for being another of the seven superuniverses.

This passage clearly delineates the spatial extension of Orvonton, since is says that the unaided human eye can see nebulae outside Orvonton. This means that the many galaxies visible by means of the telescope are not within Orvonton. This passage continues saying

“Most of the starry realms visually exposed to the search of your present-day telescopes are in Orvonton, but with photographic technique the larger telescopes penetrate far beyond the borders of the grand universe into the domains of outer space, where untold universes are in process of organization.” (UB130:4)

This sentence says that most the stars visible by eye through large telescopes are within Orvonton. This is one of the primary distinguishing characteristics of the galaxies within the Local Group; that they contain individual stars which are visible by aid of a telescope. An implication of this sentence is that some of these starry realms are outside of Orvonton. Thus some of the Local Group galaxies are outside of Orvonton. For more information on the Local Group refer to the web page of the University of Arizona Lunar and Planetary Laboratory, http://seds.lpl.arizona.edu/messier/more/local.html.

The upper limit on the radius of the grand universe of 16 million light years also implies an upper limit on the size of our superuniverse, Orvonton. If the seven superuniverses are spherical, equal in size, do not overlap, and are evenly distributed in a circle of radius equal to 16 million light years, then the radius of each superuniverse must be smaller than about 8 million light years. This must be considered to be an extreme upper limit to the size of Orvonton.

Another estimate of the size of Orvonton can be obtained in the same manner as our estimate of the size of the grand universe. If Orvonton contains 10 trillion stars, and if there are 4.4 x 1021 stars evenly distributed in the master universe, then a volume of space with a radius of 15.5 million light years would be required to hold this number of stars. Making the same correction for the difference between the local star density and that of the average density in the universe gives a radius of Orvonton of 15.6/2.15 = 7.2 million light years.

The statement that the Divine Counselor can reach any part of the superuniverse in less than one year implies that the radius of the superuniverse must be less than 4.5 million light years. Assuming that Urantia and Jerusem are in the relative close proximity of 2000 light years, then the radius of Orvonton must be less than 3.35 times 1.35 million light years, or 4.5 million light years.

Another limit to the size of Orvonton can be derived from a passage concerning the physical-energy circuits.

“The power centers and physical controllers of the superuniverses assume direction and partial control of the thirty energy systems which comprise the gravita domain. The physical-energy circuits administered by the power centers of Uversa require a little over 968 million years to complete the encirclement of the superuniverse.” (UB175:5)

This passage seems to indicate that the circumference of the superuniverse is 968 million light years. This would indicate that the radius of the superuniverse is 154 million light years. This value is inconsistent with our previously derived information about the size of the superuniverse. The value of 968 million years could be the sum of the travel times from the center of the superuniverse to the outer circumference, around the circumference, and back to the center, for all 30 energy systems. Assuming this, and if these circuits all travel at the velocity of light, then the radius of the superuniverse would be about 3.9 million light years. This value is consistent with our other information.

The size of Orvonton can be estimated from the passage that implies that no less than 4% of the volume of Orvonton is inhabited (UB121:5). From this, and assuming that Orvonton is roughly spherical we may infer that the ratio of the radius of Orvonton to that of the inhabited portion of Orvonton is no less than 2.92. Given that the radius of the inhabited portion of Orvonton is 250,000 light years (UB359:8), then the radius of Orvonton is not less than 730,000 light years.

Another indication of the size of Orvonton comes from the information given in the UB on the Andromeda galaxy. If Andromeda is within Orvonton as indicated by the UB, and if the distance to Andromeda is 1 million light years, then the radius of Orvonton must be at least 500 thousand light years.

Given the above considerations, one may conclude that the radius of Orvonton is greater than 730,000 and less than 4 million light years, possibly about 3 million light years. This would include the large Andromeda and Triangulum galaxies as well as a great number of other smaller galaxies necessary to give the stated number of stars.

The Milky Way Galaxy is within Orvonton

The Urantia Book indicates that our Milky Way galaxy is within the superuniverse of Orvonton.

“Practically all of the starry realms visible to the naked eye on Urantia belong to the seventh section of the grand universe, the superuniverse of Orvonton. The vast Milky Way starry system represents the central nucleus of Orvonton, being largely beyond the borders of your local universe. This great aggregation of suns, dark islands of space, double stars, globular clusters, star clouds, spiral and other nebulae, together with myriads of individual planets, forms a watchlike, elongated-circular grouping of about one seventh of the inhabited evolutionary universes.” (UB167:3)

One-seventh of the inhabited evolutionary universes (I take this to mean local universes) may very well mean that the Milky Way contains nearly the entire inhabited portion of Orvonton, which is one-seventh of the superuniverses in the grand universe.

The idea that the Milky Way galaxy is within the superuniverse of Orvonton is made even more specific in the following passage.

“They [the short space rays] emanate in the largest quantities from the densest plane of the superuniverse, the Milky Way, which is also the densest plane of the outer universes.” (UB475:1)

This passage can also be read to imply that the other outer universes (the other six superuniverses) lie in the plane of the Milky Way galaxy. It can also be read as implying that the Milky Way galaxy is the superuniverse of Orvonton, but this interpretation is inconsistent with the statement that Orvonton contains ten trillion stars, which is much larger than the 200 to 400 billion stars in the Milky Way.

We may infer that other nebulae (galaxies) outside the Milky Way belong to Orvonton from the passage

“some of the nebulae which Urantian astronomers regard as extragalactic are actually on the fringe of Orvonton and are traveling along with us.” (UB131:0)

The Andromeda and Triangulum galaxies and the Large and Small are examples of such nebulae which are extragalactic (outside the Milky Way galaxy) but which are part of Orvonton.

The following passage indicates that there are at least seven galaxies in Orvonton.

“Of the ten major divisions of Orvonton, eight have been roughly identified by Urantian astronomers. The other two are difficult of separate recognition because you are obliged to view these phenomena from the inside. If you could look upon the superuniverse of Orvonton from a position far-distant in space, you would immediately recognize the ten major sectors of the seventh galaxy.” (UB167:8)

One can presume that they are talking about the Milky Way galaxy as the seventh galaxy in Orvonton. These ten major sectors also presumably refer to ten arms of our spiral galaxy. In one visualization of the spiral arms of the Milky Way (see http://casswww.ucsd.edu/public/tutorial/MW.html) I can count only eight arms. The Atlas of the Universe site gives the names of six arms of our galaxy: the Cygnas, Perseus, Orion, Sagittarius, Scutum-Crux, and Norma arms. At this time we cannot exclude the possibility of their being ten arms, since much of the structure of our galaxy is hidden from us by dust clouds, radio observations being the only practical way to observe behind these clouds.

The Small and Large Magellanic Clouds are within Orvonton

Two nearby extragalactic nebula which were known before the invention of the telescope are the Large and Small Magellanic Clouds, which were noted by Magellan in 1519 during his voyages in the southern oceans. The , shown in Figure 3, is at a distance of about 210,000 light years, while the Large Magellanic Cloud is only 179,000 light years away. Being at a distance of less than 250,000 light years from the center of the Milky Way puts them within the inhabited portion of Orvonton.

Figure 3. The Small Magellanic Cloud located 210,000 light years from the center of the Milky Way lies within the inhabited portion of our superuniverse, Orvonton.

Uversa, the Capital of Orvonton, is not within the Milky Way

The Urantia Book gives the distance from our system capital of Jerusem to the center of the superuniverse of Orvonton. This distance corresponds to the distance to the Small Magellanic Cloud. Thus it is possible, although not likely as we will show later, that Uversa is within the SMC.

“The Satania system of inhabited worlds is far removed from Uversa and that great sun cluster which functions as the physical or astronomic center of the seventh superuniverse. From Jerusem, the headquarters of Satania, it is over two hundred thousand light-years to the physical center of the superuniverse of Orvonton, far, far away in the dense diameter of the Milky Way. Satania is on the periphery of the local universe, and Nebadon is now well out towards the edge of Orvonton. From the outermost system of inhabited worlds to the center of the superuniverse is a trifle less than two hundred and fifty thousand light-years. “ (UB359:8)

Being at a distance of 210,000 light years from the center of the Milky Way, the Small Magellanic Cloud is certainly “over two hundred thousand light-years” from Jerusem, and thus might be a candidate for the location of Uversa. The Small Magellanic Cloud does not, however, seem to be centrally located with respect to the three largest nearby galaxies, the Milky Way, Andromeda (M31), and Triangulum (M33). One must read “far, far away in the dense diameter of the Milky Way” as indicating a direction relative to Jerusem, rather than a position. This would be consistent with accepted astronomical usage of the word “in”, as meaning in the same direction. Thus a planet is said to be “in” , etc. To specifically locate the center of the superuniverse at the center of the Milky Way galaxy, one would use the words “at the center of” rather than “in.”

Taking the center of the superuniverse at the center of the Milky Way galaxy would be inconsistent with current knowledge in that the disk of the Milky Way is about 120,000 light years in diameter, and that Urantia (and presumably Satania) is about 26,000 light years from the center of the galaxy. Thus the distance from Satania to the center of the superuniverse would likely be slightly less than 26,000 light years, and not over 200,000 light years as stated. We thus conclude that the center of the superuniverse of Orvonton is not within the Milky Way galaxy.

Uversa Is Not Near the Center of the Milky Way

A Divine Counselor of Uversa states that he required 109 days to travel from Uversa to Urantia. He also says that his velocity is less than that of a Solitary Messenger. This allows one to place a lower limit on the distance from Urantia to Uversa.

“Trinity-origin beings possess prerogatives of transit which make them independent of transport personalities, such as seraphim. We all possess the power of moving about freely and quickly in the universe of universes. Excepting the Inspired Trinity Spirits, we cannot attain the almost unbelievable velocity of the Solitary Messengers, but we are able so to utilize the sum total of the transport facilities in space that we can reach any point in a superuniverse, from its headquarters [Uversa], in less than one year of Urantia time. It required 109 days of your time for me to journey from Uversa to Urantia.” (UB222:6)

This passage also allows one to compute the ratio of the distance from Uversa to the outermost point of Orvonton, basically the radius of Orvonton to the distance from Uversa to Urantia. This ratio is that of one year to 109 days or 365.25/109 = 3.35. Since we know that the radius of the inhabited portion of Orvonton is greater than 250,000 light years, then the distance from Urantia to Uversa must be greater than 74,600 light years. Since the distance from Urantia to the center of the Milky Way galaxy is about 26,000 light years, one can conclude that Uversa is not near the center of the Milky Way.

Another passage of the Urantia Book supports the notion that Uversa is not located at the center of the Milky Way.

“Uversa is favorably situated for the work of this [astronomy] colony, not only because of its central location, but also because there are no gigantic living or dead suns near at hand to disturb the energy currents.” (UB338:4)

It is known that there is a black hole at the center of the Milky Way which should be even more effective at disturbing the energy currents than living or dead suns. Due to dust clouds, dark nebulae, and a very high density of stars, the center of the galaxy would be a most unfavorable location for an astronomy colony.

Uversa is at the Astronomic Center of Orvonton

The following passages indicate that the various components of Orvonton rotate about Uversa, and thus Uversa is the astronomic center of Orvonton.

“The Sagittarius sector and all other sectors and divisions of Orvonton are in rotation around Uversa, … “ (UB168:3)

“6. The whirl of the ten major sectors, the so-called star drifts, about the Uversa headquarters of Orvonton.” (UB168:3)

This rotation about Uversa is presumably not due to the gravitational attraction of Uversa since it is an architectural world and this would be of relatively insignificant mass.

“10. Architectural Worlds. These are the worlds which are built according to plans and specifications for some special purpose, such as Salvington, the headquarters of your local universe, and Uversa, the seat of government of our superuniverse.” (UB172:1)

The statement that

“The Satania system of inhabited worlds is far removed from Uversa and that great sun cluster which functions as the physical or astronomic center of the seventh superuniverse.” (UB359:8)

also supports the notion that Uversa is at the physical center of Orvonton, and that it is at a great distance from Urantia.

An Upper Limit on the Distance to Uversa

The velocity of a Solitary Messenger as given in the passage below can be shown to be equivalent to 4.52 million light years per year of Urantia time.

“Their velocity in traversing space is variable, depending on a great variety of interfering influences, but the record shows that on the journey to fulfill this mission my associate messenger proceeded at the rate of 841,621,642,000 of your miles per second of your time.” (UB261:1)

Since the speed of light is 1.862809 x 105 miles/sec, the speed of the Solitary Messenger is 8.41621642 x 1011 miles per second divided by 1.862809 x 105 = 4.518 x 106 light years/ year. This is warp 4.5 million!

Given this speed, the travel time of 109 days stated above, and the location of Jerusem within 4000 light years of Urantia implies that the distance from Urantia to Uversa must be less than 1.35 million light years

Fraction of Orvonton which is Inhabited.

The UB implies that only a small fraction, between one and four percent, of Orvonton is currently inhabited. “That portion of Paradise which has been designated for the use of the existing universes is occupied only from one to four per cent, while the area assigned to these activities is at least one million times that actually required for such purposes. Paradise is large enough to accommodate the activities of an almost infinite creation.” (UB121:5)

This implies that the inhabited portion of each superuniverse occupies between one and four percent of the inhabitable planets of that superuniverse. Thus Orvonton contains 10 trillion stars, 40 trillion planets, 1 trillion inhabitable planets, and the inhabited portion of Orvonton contains between 10 and 40 billion inhabited planets, and must contain between 100 and 400 billion stars. The Milky Way galaxy has been estimated to contain between 200 and 500 billion stars. Thus it appears that the Milky Way galaxy contains most of the inhabited portion of Orvonton.

The ratio of the number of stars in the mostly uninhabited master universe to that of the grand universe is 4.4 x 1021/7 x 1013 = 6.3 x 107 (63 million). Could this be the reason that this portion of Paradise is over one million times greater than that actually required at present?

The Size of the Inhabited Portion of Orvonton

The Urantia Book gives a fairly precise indication of the size of the inhabited portion of Orvonton.

“From the outermost system of inhabited worlds to the center of the superuniverse is a trifle less than two hundred and fifty thousand light-years.” (UB359:8)

The radius of the Milky Way galaxy is about 65,000 light years. If the Milky Way contains the “central nucleus”, or inhabited portion, of Orvonton, then all of the Milky Way would likely be within the inhabited portion of Orvonton as we concluded above. This also establishes that the radius of Orvonton must be significantly greater than 250,000 light years.

Andromeda not within Inhabited Portion of Orvonton

The Urantia Book explicitly denies that the Andromeda galaxy, shown in Figure 4, is within the inhabited portion of Orvonton, our superuniverse.

Figure 4. The Andromeda Galaxy is probably within the uninhabited portion of our superuniverse.

“There are not many sun-forming nebulae active in Orvonton at the present time, though Andromeda, which is outside the inhabited superuniverse, is very active.” (UB170:1)

This passage implies that Andromeda is, however, within Orvonton. Notice that the UB is here making explicit the distinction between the inhabited and the uninhabited portions of the superuniverse.

The Distance to the Andromeda Galaxy

Speaking of the Andromeda galaxy (M31), the Urantia Book says

“This far-distant nebula [Andromeda] is visible to the naked eye, and when you view it, pause to consider that the light you behold left those distant suns almost one million years ago.” (UB170:1)

This contradicts current astronomical knowledge, which gives the distance to Andromeda as 2.39 +/- 0.09 million light years based on an average of 5 different types of determinations as discussed at http://www.earth.uni.edu/astro/cosmos/part6.html. This distance to Andromeda is not inferred from its red shift (Andromeda is actually blue shifted) but is obtained from a knowledge of the absolute brightness of certain Cephid variable stars which can be seen in Andromeda. The distance obtained by these methods could be in error by a factor of 2.667 (2.39/0.9) if the light we received from Andromeda were 86% absorbed by matter in the optical path, allowing only 14% to reach our telescopes. This might be due to the postulated “dark matter” surrounding our galaxy, but there is no evidence that this is the case. Such a severe light absorption would have to be exceedingly spatially uniform or its presence would be detectable as a patterning in the images obtained by our telescopes.

Upper Limit on the Distance to Andromeda

Given that Andromeda is within our superuniverse, there is an upper limit on the distance from Urantia to the Andromeda galaxy which would be consistent with other information given in the Urantia Book. This upper limit would be the distance from Urantia to Uversa plus the distance from Uversa to the edge of the superuniverse. In this limiting case Uversa would be directly between Urantia and Andromeda.

Knowing that the ratio of the distance from Uversa to the edge of the superuniverse to the distance from Uversa to Urantia is 3.35, then the maximum possible distance to the Andromeda galaxy is 4.35 (1 + 3.35) times the distance from Urantia to Uversa. Since Urantia is within the inhabited portion of Orvonton, then the distance from Urantia to Uversa is less than 250,000 light years, and so the maximum distance from Urantia to Andromeda is 4.35 x 250,000 = 1,087,500 light years.

This is consistent with the distance given in the Urantia Book as less than one million light years, but inconsistent with the current scientific value of this distance of about 2.4 million light years. In order to bring the Urantia Book cosmology into conformance with current science, the distance given in the UB from Uversa to the edge of the inhabited portion of the superuniverse would have to be scaled up by a factor of at least 2.4/1.0875 = 2.2.

Globular Clusters near the Edge of Orvonton

The Urantia Book states that

“The globular type of star clusters predominates near the outer margins of Orvonton.” (UB 170:2)

The existence and location of globular star clusters in a halo around the Milky Way was well known at the time the Urantia Book was written. A discussion of this subject can be found in The Universe Around Us by Sir James Jeans (1929, pp 60- 62). This book also contains a description of the distribution of these globular clusters as

“… lying on both sides of the Milky Way, its greatest diameter of about 250,000 light years lying in this plane, …”(p 62)

Given that the UB implies that the radius of the inhabited portion of Orvonton is 250,000 light years (UB359:8) and thus the radius of Orvonton itself must be significantly greater, it seems inconsistent to identify the star clusters mentioned in the UB with the globular clusters described by Jeans which have a maximum radius of 125,000 light years from the .

They may be speaking of the eleven dwarf spheroidal (or elliptical) galaxies that closely circle the Milky Way. More information on these can be found in an interesting paper by George Lake of the University of Washington. This paper can be found at the URL http://wwwhpcc.astro.washington.edu/papers/localgroup/lg.html. An image of the , located about 830,000 light years away, can be seen at http://antwrp.gsfc.nasa.gov/apod/ap960519.html. I suspect that these dwarf galaxies are within Orvonton.

Orvonton Rotates about the Isle of Paradise and Havona

The Urantia Book states that our superuniverse of Orvonton circles the Isle of Paradise and the central universe of Havona.

“Orvonton is one of the seven evolutionary superuniverses of time and space which circle the never-beginning, never-ending creation of divine perfection—the central universe of Havona. At the heart of this eternal and central universe is the stationary Isle of Paradise, the geographic center of infinity and the dwelling place of the eternal God.” (UB1:5)

Location of Havona

The Urantia Book states that the location of Havona is in the direction of the center of the Milky Way galaxy. Of course it is not in the Milky Way at all, but is about 16 million light years distant.

“When the angle of observation is propitious, gazing through the main body of this realm of maximum density, you are looking toward the residential universe [Havona] and the center of all things.” (UB167:5)

The Period of Rotation of Orvonton about Havona

The Urantia Book gives a clue to the period of rotation of Orvonton about Havona. “Today, the solar system to which Urantia belongs is a few billion years past the swing around the southern curvature so that you are just now advancing beyond the southeastern bend and are moving swiftly through the long and comparatively straightaway northern path.” (UB165:4)

If it took a few billion years to move from the southern curvature to just past the southeastern bend, a distance of one eighth of a complete revolution, then the period of rotation of Orvonton about Havona must be 8 times a few billion years. Assuming the word “few” indicates the number 3 gives a value of 24 billion years for the period of rotation of Orvonton about Havona. This is twice the current estimated age of the Universe and implies that Orvonton has not yet made one revolution about Havona.

The Orbital Velocity of Orvonton around Havona

The velocity of Orvonton in its orbit is the circumference of the orbit, 2 pi times the radius of the orbit, divided by the period of the orbit (24 billion years). Given that the period is 7.57 x 1017 s, and assuming a radius of 16 million light years, one finds that the velocity of Orvonton in its orbit around Havona is 1.25 x 106 m/s or 5.6 million miles per hour.

This velocity is of the order of magnitude of the currently estimated velocity of the Local Group of 400 km/s in the direction of the Virgo galactic cluster.

The Mass of Havona and the Isle of Paradise

Knowing the period of rotation of Orvonton about Havona to be about 24 billion years, and knowing the distance from Orvonton to Havona to be about 16 million light years, we can calculate an estimate of the mass of Havona. By equating the gravitational pull of Havona necessary to balance the centrifugal force of Orvonton in its orbit about Havona, one finds the mass of Havona to be given by

M = R V2/G

Where R is the radius of Orvonton’s orbit, V is the velocity of Orvonton in its orbit, and G is the universal gravitational constant (6.673 x 10-11 m3 kg-1 s-2). Knowing that 1 light year is 9.46 x 1015 m, the radius of Orvonton’s orbit is 1.51 x 1023 m. The velocity is 1.25 x 106 m/s as found above.

Substituting the appropriate values into the equation above gives the mass of Havona to be 3.5 x 1045 kg. Given that the mass of the sun is 1.989 x 1030 kg, this is equivalent to 1.9 x 1015 solar masses. This is also equivalent to about 900 Milky Way galaxies.

The UB says this about the mass of Havona and the Isle of Paradise:

“Owing to the enormous encircling masses of the dark gravity bodies about the fringe of the central universe, the mass content of this central creation is far in excess of the total known mass of all seven sectors of the grand universe.” (UB:129:2)

The Urantia Book states that Orvonton contains about 1013 solar masses. The seven sectors of the grand universe thus must contain about 7 x 1013 solar masses. Our calculated value of the mass of Havona and the Isle of Paradise is thus about 27 times that of the seven sectors of the grand universe, in agreement with the UB statement.

Possible Other Galaxies within the Grand Universe

Given that the radius of the grand universe is about 16 million light years, one can compile a list of the galaxies, or groups of galaxies, which could be possible locations of the other six superuniverses. If these superuniverses are in a circular orbit around Havona with radius of 16 million light years, we would expect to find two at a distance of 31 Mly, at +/- 0.86H (0.86 hours = 12.9 deg) galactic azimuth, two at 25 Mly distance at +/- 2.6H azimuth, and two at 14 Mly at +/- 4.3 H azimuth. This is because Havona is said to be in the direction of the center of the Milky Way galaxy (0 H galactic azimuth). Such candidates would also be found near the plane of our galaxy, that is, having small values of galactic elevation, Such a list will include:

1. NGC5128 (Centaurus A), shown in Figure 5, is located about 21 deg above the galactic plane at -3.4 H azimuth, and is 12 Mly distant. This makes it a candidate for one of the two closest superuniverses.

Figure 5. NGC 5128, Centaurus A, is possibly one of the other inhabited superuniverses. (NOAO/AURA/NSF)

2. NGC6744 shown in Figure 6 is located about 26 deg below the galactic plane at -1.8 H azimuth, and is 25 Mly distant. This is thought to be one of the most similar galaxies to the Milky Way.

Figure 6. NGC 6744 is similar to the Milky Way, and is a possible inhabited superuniverse. (NOAO/AURA/NSF)

After looking through lists of the many galaxies in the vicinity of Urantia, one finds that there are at least 192 galaxies within 32 Mly, and over 1000 galaxies within 100 Mly. It becomes clear that the local universe structure is more complex than the concept of seven superuniverses revolving about Havona presented in the Urantia Book. The concept of the seven superuniverses must be considered as referring to seven inhabited regions of space, and that it must be considered that there are many other uninhabited galaxies within the grand universe, besides Andromeda, not mentioned in the Urantia Book.

The lack of candidate galaxies having the characteristics stated above may be due to the fact that it is difficult to observe galaxies which lie in the plane of the Milky Way, and which are on the opposite side of the Milky Way from Urantia. Recently, some radio observations have revealed galaxies which are otherwise hidden by the obscuring matter of the Milky Way. Undoubtedly there are many unknown galaxies in this region that might be suitable candidates for the location of the other superuniverses.

Our Local Universe

Size of Our Local Universe, Nebadon

Nebadon is said to have about 10 million inhabitable planets. This implies that Nebadon contains about 100 million stars, assuming that on average one star in ten has an inhabitable planet. If the local stellar density is about one star per 240 cubic light years (there are 30 stars within a radius of 12 light years from Urantia), then the volume of space required to hold 100 million stars would be 2.4 x 1010 cubic light years. If this volume were approximately spherical, then the radius of this sphere would be about 1,800 light years. One might conclude that our local universe is about this size, or about 3000 to 4,000 light years in diameter. Thus is is clear that our local universe of Nebadon is not the same as our Local Group of galaxies, which is much bigger, on the order of several million light years in diameter.

The Location of Salvington

The UB makes the following statement concerning the location of Salvington, the capital of our local universe.

“Salvington, the headquarters of Nebadon, is situated at the exact energy-mass center of the local universe. But your local universe is not a single astronomic system, though a large system does exist at its physical center.” (UB359:1) Figure 7. M6, the Butterfly Cluster is located 2000 light years from Urantia in the direction of the galactic center and is likely near Salvington.

We can also guess that Salvington, the capital of our local universe is perhaps about 2000 light years from Urantia in the direction of the center of the Milky Way, since the book says that we are on the outer fringe of Nebadon. This would be near the location of M6, the Butterfly star cluster shown in Figure 7.

It is also likely that the majority of Nebadon is within the of the Milky Way galaxy.

Planets, Inhabited and Inhabitable

Fraction of Planets in Orvonton which are Inhabitable

The Urantia Book gives information on the fraction of planets that are inhabitable. One reads: “In your superuniverse not one cool planet in forty is habitable by beings of your order. And, of course, the superheated suns and the frigid outlying worlds are unfit to harbor higher life. In your solar system only three planets are at present suited to harbor life.” (UB173:5) Thus the upper limit on the fraction of planets which are inhabitable by human beings is 1 in 40 (0.025). This statement concerns our superuniverse of Orvonton, but since I assume the laws of nature are the same in all superuniverses I will assume this number is applicable to the other superuniverses as well.

The Number of Inhabitable Planets in Orvonton

The number of inhabitable planets in Orvonton is specifically given in the UB.

“Seven superuniverses make up the present organized grand universe, consisting of approximately seven trillion inhabitable worlds plus the architectural spheres and the one billion inhabited spheres of Havona.” (UB166:8)

Given this, one can conclude that our superuniverse of Orvonton contains about one trillion inhabitable worlds. Notice that the UB is careful to distinguish between inhabitable planets and inhabited planets. We will show later that most of these one trillion inhabitable worlds are currently uninhabited.

Fraction of Stars in Orvonton Containing an Inhabitable Planet

Given that there are one trillion inhabitable worlds in Orvonton, and 10 trillion stars in Orvonton, one must conclude that if stars had no multiple inhabitable planets, then one star in ten has an inhabitable planet. If, as is indicated in the section on the distribution of inhabited planets in Satania below, stellar systems tend to have only one inhabitable planet, then generally only one star in about ten would have any inhabitable planets.

A recent survey of 800 nearby stars using the Doppler method, has shown that about one star in twenty has at least a Jupiter- sized planet. That one star in ten has an inhabitable planet therefore seems not improbable.

Average Number of Planets per Star in Orvonton

If there are 0.1 inhabitable planets per star, and 0.025 inhabitable planets per planet then on the average there must be 0.1/0.025 = 4 planets per star in Orvonton. This would indicate that planets are a common occurrence. This is verified by current astronomical science which, although it can detect only large planets approximately the size of Jupiter, has shown such planets to be relatively common.

Number of Inhabitable Planets in our Solar System

“In your solar system only three planets are at present suited to harbor life.” (UB173:5)

Because of the wide diversity of life forms in the Universe, many planets which we would consider uninhabitable for man, may be perfectly habitable for some of the radically-different other life forms. Our solar system having three inhabitable planets is a rare occurrence since as we show below, only 0.7% of solar systems with inhabitable planets have three.

Distribution of Inhabited Planets in Satania

The UB gives the distribution of inhabited planets in Satania among the physical systems (solar systems) containing such planets.

“Satania is not a uniform physical system, a single astronomic unit or organization. Its 619 inhabited worlds are located in over five hundred different physical systems. Only five have more than two inhabited worlds, and of these only one has four peopled planets, while there are forty- six having two inhabited worlds.” (UB359: 7)

Thus there are 511 solar systems with one, 46 with two, 4 with 3, and only 1 with 4 inhabited planets. There are thus 511 + 46 + 4 + 1 = 562 solar systems with inhabited planets in the Satania system.

Average Number of Inhabited Planets per Star in Satania

The Urantia Book gives the number of stars in our system, Satania, which allows computing the average number of inhabited planets per star.

“There are upward of two thousand brilliant suns pouring forth light and energy in Satania, and your own sun is an average blazing orb.” (UB458:1)

Since there are 619 inhabited planets and 2000 stars in Satania, then there are on the average 0.31 inhabited planets per star, or equivalently, approximately one inhabited planet for every 3 stars. Given that there are 562 solar systems with an inhabited planet, then one star out of every 3.6 in Satania has an inhabited planet.

Given that one star in ten in Orvonton has an inhabitable planet, the fact that in Satania one star in 3.6 has an inhabited planet indicates that the Satania star system is an especially favorable environment for life. Current science accepts that only certain zones within a galaxy are favorable for supporting human life.

Fraction of Satania Presently Inhabited

According to a Table given in the Urantia Book (UB167:1), a system contains about 1000 inhabitable planets, therefore the Satania system containing 619 inhabited planets makes it about 62% inhabited. This is much higher than the fraction of Orvonton that is presently inhabited (around 1 to 4%).

The Size of Satania

Given the number of stars in Satania, one can estimate its size under the assumptions that the star density in Satania is uniform and the same as our local star density (one star per 240 cubic light years). Assuming this, one finds that a sphere of radius 48.5 light years is required to contain the 2000 stars said to comprise Satania.

Urantian Cosmology which may Require Future Revision

The Urantia Book states that its cosmology is not necessarily inspired, and that it may require revision in the future. In this article to this point we have been focusing on positive correspondences between Urantian cosmology and current knowledge. In truth, there are some aspects of this cosmology which are not validated by current science and which are likely to require revision.

For instance, the Urantia Book says

“The Uversa star students observe that the grand universe is surrounded by the ancestors of a series of starry and planetary clusters which completely encircle the present inhabited creation as concentric rings of outer universes upon universes.” (UB131:1)

In the past decade there has become available on the Internet a number of 3-dimensional visualizations of the universe. Studying these visualizations, one is struck by the fact that there is no evidence of a structure that can be described as “concentric rings of outer universes.” In fact, the universe appears to consist of large superclusters of galaxies, which are distributed in a more or less random manner.

In another instance the Urantia Book describes the “space zones” beyond the grand universe as

“Between the energy circuits of the seven superuniverses and this gigantic outer belt of force activity, there is a space zone of comparative quiet, which varies in width but averages about four hundred thousand light- years. These space zones are free from star dust—cosmic fog. Our students of these phenomena are in doubt as to the exact status of the space-forces existing in this zone of relative quiet which encircles the seven superuniverses. But about one-half million light-years beyond the periphery of the present grand universe we observe the beginnings of a zone of an unbelievable energy action which increases in volume and intensity for over twenty-five million light-years.” (UB130:0)

Again, there is no evidence of spherical zones of empty space surrounding any structure which might be the grand universe. Given the relatively small size of these space zones compared to the size of the grand universe and the distances between galaxies, this statement cannot be reconciled with known universe structure.

The idealized picture of seven superuniverses circling Havona in approximately the plane of our galaxy ignores the fact that assuming this cosmology is true, the space containing these universes also contains numerous other galaxy clusters outside the plane of our galaxy. There is no evidence of any organization of nearby galaxies resulting in a preferential localization near the plane of the Milky Way galaxy.

In another apparent disagreement with current scientific thought, the Urantia Book specifically denies the reality of the expansion of the universe, that the apparent recession of galaxies is linked to their distance by means of the Hubble constant. The UB says:

“Many influences interpose to make it appear that the recessional velocity of the external universes increases at the rate of more than one hundred miles a second for every million light- years increase in distance. By this method of reckoning, subsequent to the perfection of more powerful telescopes, it will appear that these far-distant systems are in flight from this part of the universe at the unbelievable rate of more than thirty thousand miles a second. But this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” (UB134:3)

Current science regards this Hubble effect as real. In fact, all the current 3-dimensional representations of the universe largely rely on this effect to establish the distance to the galaxies, Andromeda being an exception. If the Hubble effect is not real, then all such current representations are invalid. At this time there is no scientific evidence that the Hubble effect is not real, and in fact, there is significant evidence that it is real.

The Urantia Book states that only a very small portion of the contains life.

“As far as we know, no material beings on the order of humans, no angels or other spirit creatures, exist in this outer ring of nebulae, suns, and planets. This distant domain is beyond the jurisdiction and administration of the superuniverse governments.” (UB131:2)

Current scientific opinion is that life formed by a chance combination of chemicals and evolved into the complex life forms known today. It would be deemed as most unlikely that life was concentrated on only a few clusters of galaxies as implied by this UB statement. Of course, we have at present no way to know if this is true or not.

One of the most serious disagreements between current astronomical science and the Urantia Book cosmology concerns the size of Orvonton, The radius of Orvonton can be inferred to be about 3.35 times between 200,000 and 250,000 light years or about 770,000 light years as indicated by UB222:6 and UB359:8. This assumes that Jerusem, the capital of our star system, Satania, is relatively near (within 50 light years) to Urantia and is thus within the Milky Way. Such a small radius would exclude both the Andromeda and Triangulum galaxies from the uninhabited portion of Orvonton and it seems impossible that there are 10 trillion stars (UB172:7) within such a small volume.

One possible explanation for this inconsistency and also for that involving the distance to the Andromeda galaxy is to postulate that the authors of the Urantia Book presented a cosmology that was scaled to fit the astronomic knowledge of the time when the book was written. The value of one million light years for the distance to Andromeda was the current astronomical knowledge during the period of 1923 to 1953. The Urantia papers were written within this time period. If the authors scaled the true distance to the Andromeda galaxy down by a factor of about 3 to prevent the disclosure of unearned knowledge, to be maximally self-consistent they may have also scaled down the other two distances which they directly give. These distances are the 200,000 light years from Uversa to Jerusem, and the 250,000 light years corresponding to the radius of the inhabited portion of Orvonton.

If this hypothesis is true, then the true distances can be found by multiplying the values given in the UB by a factor of about 3. This makes the distance to the Andromeda galaxy agree with current knowledge. It makes the distance from Jerusem to Uversa to be greater than 600,000 light years, and the radius of the inhabited portion of Orvonton to be less than 750,000 light years. The overall radius of Orvonton would then be greater than 3.35 times 600,000 or 2.0 million light years. It would be less than 750,000/0.34 or 2.2 million light years. This places both the Andromeda and Triangulum galaxies within the uninhabited portion of Orvonton. It also makes the UB statement that Orvonton contains ten trillion stars much more plausible.

Such a scaling would not be inconsistent with the statement that the Divine Counselor can reach any part in Orvonton in one Urantia year. If the distance from Uversa to the edge of Orvonton is about 2.1 million light years, then the velocity of the Divine Counselor would be 2.1/4.51 = 0.47 times that of the Solitary Messengers, or consistent with his statement that he could not attain the speed of a Solitary Messenger. Apparently a Solitary Messenger travels at about twice the speed of a Divine Counselor. Any scaling factor greater than about 6 would be inconsistent with the stated speed of the Divine Counselor.

Could it be that the revision of the Urantian cosmology which the UB authors state may be required in the future is this scaling upwards of the stated distances by a factor of 3? This is probably one of the simplest possible revisions, which could be imagined.

Another discrepancy in UB cosmology concerns the time required for a Solitary Messenger to travel to the central universe (Havona) and back. The Urantia Book states that a Solitary Messenger can travel at a speed of

“841,621,642,000 of your miles per second of your time.” (UB261:1)

Since the speed of light is 186,281 miles per second, the speed of the Solitary Messenger is 4,512,000 times the speed of light.

The Urantia Book also says the following about a Solitary Messenger:

“Long before the presence of life on Urantia the [Solitary] messenger now associated with me was assigned on a mission out of Uversa to the central universe—was absent from the roll calls of Orvonton for almost a million years but returned in due time with the desired information.” (UB259:2)

In a million Urantia years a Solitary Messenger can travel a distance of 2,256 billion light years and back. The age of the universe is thought to be only 14 billion years, so the radius of the universe is no greater than 14 billion light years. It would take a Solitary Messenger only 6,200 years to travel to the edge of the known universe and back.

There is good reason, based on the number of stars in the grand universe, to believe that the distance from Uversa to the central universe is only about 16 million light years. A Solitary Messenger can travel this distance and back in only seven Urantia years. If this distance is correct the Solitary Messenger had 999,993 years to spend in the central Universe before he had to return.

There is also good reason to believe that the speed given for the Solitary Messenger is correct. This is based on the ability of a Divine Counselor, travelling at a lesser speed, to reach any part of Orvonton in one Urantia year, and the apparent size of Orvonton based on the number of stars in Orvonton. If this is so, it appears that he could have made the trip to the central universe and back in less than one Uversa year, or 8.2 Urantia years and still have had 1.2 Urantia years to conduct his business.

Thus it appears that the statement given in UB259:2 is grossly inconsistent with the other cosmology given in the UB. Perhaps it should have read that the Solitary Messenger was gone only one (Uversa) year?

Conclusions

These results show that the major aspects of Urantia Book cosmology are, in most part, in reasonable agreement with our present cosmological understanding. The major conflicts with current astronomical knowledge can be resolved if the three absolute distances given in the book are scaled up by a factor of about 3 to make the distance to the Andromeda galaxy conform approximately to current estimates.

The reader may question why the revelators chose to present a false value for the scale of the cosmology given in the UB. I believe that this choice actually demonstrates the wisdom of the revelators. Given that the currently-accepted value of the distance to the Andromeda galaxy was 900,000 light years at the time the book was written (Jeans, op.cit. p66), the revelators were faced with several conflicting choices. At the time, the distance to the Andromeda galaxy was the only extra-galactic distance known with any belief of certainty. I believe they chose to give this distance to provide an absolute scale to the size of our superuniverse because it was the largest distance determined by Urantian science of that time. Given this, they were faced with two choices: revealing the true distance or presenting a distance in agreement with accepted knowledge. Given the fact that the Urantian science was inaccurate at the time, any statement made would inevitably be at odds with current opinion, either before or after the truth was known. Revealing the true distance would immediately create disbelief in the revelation among the science-minded audience at which the revelation is directed, and would impart unearned scientific knowledge, prohibited by the mandate of revelation, which would shortly be acquired unaided by Urantian scientists in any event. In giving the then-accepted value, they avoided any controversy during the early stages of the acceptance of the revelation. The impact of the later inconsistency with Urantian astronomy they defused by explicitly admitting that the cosmology presented was not divinely inspired and would require revision in the future. Scaling all distances down by the same factor would create the minimum possible distortion to the presented cosmology, and would allow recovery of the true distances in the future when the true distance to the Andromeda galaxy was known.

The Urantia Book expressly condones not revealing facts when it might inhibit spiritual advancement. Speaking of the seraphic recorders it says,

“Some day they will teach you to seek truth as well as fact, to expand your soul as well as your mind. … But sometimes error is so great that its rectification by revelation would be fatal to those slowly emerging truths which are essential to its experiential overthrow. When children have their ideals, do not dislodge them; let them grow.” (UB554:6)

Did the revelators decide that correcting the factual error concerning the distance to Andromeda might inhibit the spread of the spiritual truths they were trying to implant?

The apparent inconsistency in the time taken by the Solitary Messenger in his trip to the central universe and back is not convincing evidence of the inaccuracy of UB cosmology. It may be that the Solitary Messenger spent the vast majority of the time during his trip in collecting the desired information, or it may be that the value “one million” was inserted by a human editor who could not believe that such a trip would take only one year.

It appears unlikely that the other disagreement with Urantian science, that of the purposeful implantation of life in the seven superuniverses, or galaxy clusters, versus the random spontaneous self-assembly of life from inert matter, will be resolved anytime within the foreseeable future. It does seem possible to verify the presence of life in the near vicinity of our solar system, which the UB states is a relatively common occurrence. This should be encouraging to those engaged in the present SETI efforts.

back to top read more articles contact Fred Beckner

The Universe within 14 billion Light Years The Visible Universe

Number of superclusters in the visible universe = 10 million Number of galaxy groups in the visible universe = 25 billion Number of large galaxies in the visible universe = 350 billion Number of dwarf galaxies in the visible universe = 3.5 trillion Number of stars in the visible universe = 30 billion trillion

About the Map

This map attempts to show the entire visible Universe. The galaxies in the universe tend to collect into vast sheets and superclusters of galaxies surrounding large voids giving the universe a cellular appearance. Because light in the universe only travels at a fixed speed, we see objects at the edge of the universe when it was very young up to 14 billion years ago.

Additional Maps

A Map of the Universe within 2 billion Light Years The universe has been partially mapped out to about 2 billion light years. Here is a map showing many of the major superclusters within 2 billion light years.

Data and Catalogs

The Big Bang and the Expansion of the Universe This page is a brief explanation of the Big Bang and it explains how the universe is expanding and why there is no centre or edge of the expanding universe.

The Distance Scale of the Universe What exactly is the distance to the edge of the visible universe? How do you define distance in an expanding universe? This page tries to answer this difficult question.

The Size of the Universe

The visible universe appears to have a radius of 14 billion light years because the universe is about 14 billion years old. The light from more distant objects simply has not had time to reach us. For this reason everybody in the universe will find themselves at the middle of their own visible universe. The precise scale of the universe is complicated by the fact that the universe is expanding. Galaxies we see near the edge of the visible universe emitted their light when they were much closer to us, and they will now be much further away.

The true size of the universe is probably much larger than the visible universe. The geometry of the universe suggests that it may have an infinite size and that it will expand forever. Even if the universe is not infinite, our visible universe must be a minute speck in a much larger totality.

The Hubble Deep Field

In December 1995, the Hubble Space Telescope was pointed at a blank area of the sky in Ursa Major for ten days. It produced one of the most famous astronomy pictures of modern times - the Hubble Deep Field Image. A part of it is shown here. Almost every object in this image is a galaxy typically lying 5 to 10 billion light years away. The galaxies revealed here are all shapes and colours, some are young and blue, whereas others are old, red and dusty.

A Slice of the Universe

By collecting distances to thousands of galaxies in a narrow strip of the sky, it is possible to produce a 'slice' of the universe, like this one shown below from the 2dF Galaxy Redshift Survey which looks out into the universe to 3.5 billion light years, although not much data was collected for galaxies beyond 3 billion light years. These types of plots show how clustered the galaxies in the universe really are, even on the largest scales. About 52 000 galaxies are plotted.

The Milky Way Galaxy

A spiral galaxy, type Sbc, centered in Sagittarius

The Milky Way is the galaxy which is the home of our Solar System together with at least 200 billion other stars (more recent estimates have given numbers around 400 billion) and their planets, and thousands of clusters and nebulae, including at least almost all objects of Messier's catalog which are not galaxies on their own (one might consider two globular clusters as possible exceptions, as probably they are just being, or have recently been, incorporated or imported into our Galaxy from dwarf galaxies which are currently in close encounters with the Milky Way: M54 from SagDEG, and possibly M79 from the Canis Major Dwarf). See our Messier Objects in the Milky Way page, where details are given for each object to which part of our Galaxy it is related. All the objects in the Milky Way Galaxy orbit their common center of mass, called the Galactic Center (see below).

As a galaxy, the Milky Way is actually a giant, as its mass is probably between 750 billion and one trillion solar masses, and its diameter is about 100,000 light years. Radio astronomial investigations of the distribution of hydrogen clouds have revealed that the Milky Way is a spiral galaxy of Hubble type Sb or Sc. Therefore, out galaxy has both a pronounced disk component exhibiting a spiral structure, and a prominent nuclear reagion which is part of a notable bulge/halo component. It is still not clear if it has a bar structure (so that it would be type SB) or not, but an increasing number of investigations has given some evidence for this, so that the Milky Way may look like M61 or M83, and is perhaps best classified as SABbc.

● More on the structure of the Milky Way

The Milky Way Galaxy belongs to the Local Group, a smaller group of 3 large and over 30 small galaxies, and is the second largest (after the Andromeda Galaxy M31) but perhaps the most massive member of this group. M31, at about 2.9 million light years, is the nearest large galaxy, but a number of faint galaxies are much closer: Many of the dwarf Local Group members are satellites or companions of the Milky Way. The two closest neighbors, both already mentioned, have only recently been discovered: The nearest of all, discovered in 2003, is an already almost disrupted , the Canis Major Dwarf, the nucleus of which is about 25,000 light-years away from us and about 45,000 light-years from the Galactic Center. Second comes SagDEG at about 88,000 light years from us and some 50,000 light years from the Galactic Center. These two dwarfs are currently in close encounters with our Galaxy and in sections of their orbits situated well within the volume ocupied by our Milky Way. They are followed in distance by the more conspicuous Large and Small Magellanic Cloud, at 179,000 and 210,000 light years, respectively.

The spiral arms of our Milky Way contain interstellar matter, diffuse nebulae, and young stars and open star clusters emerging from this matter. On the other hand, the bulge component consists of old stars and contains the globular star clusters; our galaxy has probably about 200 globulars, of which we know about 150. These globular clusters are strongly concentrated toward the Galactic Center: From their apparent distribution in the sky, Harlow Shapley has concluded that this center of the Milky Way lies at a considerable distance (which he overestimated by factors) in the direction of Sagittarius and not rather close to us, as had been thought previously.

Our solar system is thus situated within the outer regions of this galaxy, well within the disk and only about 20 light years above the equatorial symmetry plane but about 28,000 light years from the Galactic Center. Therefore, the Milky Way shows up as luminous band spanning all around the sky along this symmetry plane, which is also called the "Galactic Equator". Its center lies in the direction of the constellation Sagittarius, but very close to the border of both neighbor constellations Scorpius and Ophiuchus. The distance of 28,000 light years has recently (1997) been confirmed by the data of ESA's astrometric satellite Hipparcos. Other investigations published consequently have disputed this value and propose a smaller value of some 25,000 light years, based on stellar dynamics; a recent investigation (McNamara et.al 2000, based on RR Lyrae variables) yields roughly 26,000 light years. These data, if of significance, wouldn't immediately effect values for distances of particular objects in the Milky Way or beyond.

The solar system is situated within a smaller spiral arm, called the Local or Orion Arm, which is merely connection between the inner and outer next more massive arms, the Sagittarius Arm and the ; see our Milky Way Spiral Structure page.

Similar to other galaxies, there occur supernovae in the Milky Way at irregular intervals of time. If they are not too heavily obscurred by interstellar matter, they can be, and have been seen as spectacular events from Earth. Unfortunately, none has yet appeared since the invention of the telescope (the last well observed supernova was studied by Johannes Kepler in 1604).

Milky Way pictures are wide-field exposures. Besides being attractive and often colorful, they are often suited to view the Milky Way objects (including nebulae and star clusters) in their celestial surroundings of field stars. Some fields include lots of Messier objects and thus included here:

● Milky Way central region including constellations Sagittarius, Scorpius, Ophiuchus and Scutum, and map of the Milky Way Central Region, by Bill Keel of the University of Alabama ● Milky Way in Sagittarius, including portions of Scorpius and Ophiuchus

● Milky Way around M17, M18, and M24

Our image was obtained by David Malin of the Anglo-Australian Observatory, and shows the many Messier objects around the direction of the Galactic Center. It is copyrighted and may be used for private purpose only. For any other kind of use, including internet mirroring and storing on CD-ROM, please contact the Photo Permissions Department (photo at aaoepp.aao.gov.au) of the Anglo Australian Observatory.

● More information on this image by David Malin

● Old style AAT image

In order to obtain a picture of the whole Milky Way as it appears from Earth, one must either compose a mosaic of many photographs (optionally computer-processed), or create a drawing; fine examples may be accessed below:

● A good Milky Way photo mosaic

● Knut Lundmark's drawing of the Milky Way

In the infrared light, the structure of the Milky Way can be better investigated, as the obscurring dust clouds are of better transparency for long wavelength IR than for the visible light. The Cobe satellite has provided an infrared image of the Milky Way's central region.

The central region of the Milky Way, as those of many other galaxies, is more densely crouded with stars than the outer region, and contains a massive central object, *.

Below we give some data for the Galactic Center (this and all following positions for 2000.0):

Right ascension 17 : 45.6 (h : m)

Declination -28 : 56 (deg : m)

Distance 28 (kly)

The Galactic North Pole is at

Right ascension 12 : 51.4 (h : m)

Declination +27 : 07 (deg : m)

The coordinate data given here were extracted from the online coordinate calculator at Nasa/IPAC's Extragalactical Database (NED) (also available by telnet).

Our Sun, together with the whole Solar System, is orbiting the Galactic Center at the distance given, on a nearly circular orbit. We are moving at about 250 km/sec, and need about 220 million years to complete one orbit (so the Solar System has orbited the Galactic Center about 20 to 21 times since its formation about 4.6 billion years ago).

In addition to the overall Galactic Rotation, the solar system is moving between the neighboring stars (peculiar motion) at a velocity of about 20 km/s, to a direction called "Solar Apex," at the approximate position RA=18:01, Dec=+26 (2000.0); this motion has been discovered by William Herschel in 1783.

Considering the sense of rotation, the Galaxy, at the Sun's position, is rotating toward the direction of Right Ascension 21:12.0, Declination +48:19. This shows that it rotates "backward" in the Galactic coordinate system, i.e. the Galactic North Pole is actually a physical South Pole with respect to galactic rotation (defined by the direction of the angular momentum vector).

● More info on the Milky Way Spiral Structure

● Messier Objects in the Milky Way page

More links to Milky Way materials:

● Milky Way Galaxy images from the Astronomical Picture of the Day archives

● Milky Way Wide-Angle Photos

● Multi Wavelength Images of the Milky Way (Nasa ADC)

● Milky Way page of the MAP space observatory project

● The Summer Milky Way from S.E. Arizona

● Milky Way panorama by Axel Mellinger

● The Milky Way Galaxy within 50,000 light years, A Map of the Milky Way, and The Milky Way's Satellite Galaxies, from An Atlas of the Universe

● The Structure of the Milky Way Tutorial, Gene Smith

● Yahoo's index of Milky Way webpages

References:

● D.H. McNamara, J.B. Madsen, J. Barnes, and F.B. Ericksen, 2000. The Distance to the Galactic Center. PASP 112 p. 202 (Feb. 2000)

General References and Further Reading:

● The Milky Way, by Bart J. and Priscilla F. Bok. 5th edition. Harvard University Press, 1981. ● The Guide to the Galaxy, by Nigel Henbest and Heather Cooper. Cambridge University Press, 1994. ● The Alchemy of the Heavens, by Ken Croswell. Anchor Books, New York, 1995.

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 22 Aug 2002, 12:00 MET Galaxies

Click the icon to view galaxies of the Messier catalog

>>Links; >>References; >>Galaxy Clusters

The icon shows M51, the Whirlpool Galaxy.

Galaxies are large systems of stars and interstellar matter, typically containing several million to some trillion stars, of masses between several million and several trillion times that of our Sun, of an extension of a few thousands to several 100,000s light years, typically separated by millions of light years distance. They come in a variety of flavors: Spiral, lenticular, elliptical and irregular. Besides simple stars, they typically contain various types of star clusters and nebulae.

We live in a giant spiral galaxy, the Milky Way Galaxy, of 100,000 light years diameter and a mass of roughly a trillion solar masses. The nearest dwarf galaxies, stellites of the Milky Way, are only a few 100,000 light years distant, while the nearest giant neighbor, the Andromeda Galaxy, also a spiral, is about 2-3 million light years distant.

Spiral

Spiral galaxies usually consist of two major components: A flat, large disk which often contains a lot of interstellar matter (visible sometimes as reddish diffuse emission nebulae, or as dark dust clouds) and young (open) star clusters and associations, which have emerged from them (recognizable from the blueish light of their hottest, short-living, most massive stars), often arranged in conspicuous and striking spiral patterns and/or bar structures, and an ellipsoidally formed bulge component, consisting of an old stellar population without interstellar matter, and often associated with globular clusters. The young stars in the disk are classified as stellar population I, the old bulge stars as population II. The luminosity and mass relation of these components seem to vary in a wide range, giving rise to a classification scheme. The pattern structures in the disk are most probably transient phenomena only, caused by gravitational interaction with neighboring galaxies.

Our sun is one of several 100 billion stars in a spiral galaxy, the Milky Way. Lenticular (S0)

These are, in short, "spiral galaxies without spiral structure", i.e. smooth disk galaxies, where stellar formation has stopped long ago, because the interstellar matter was used up. Therefore, they consist of old population II stars only, or at least chiefly. From their appearance and stellar contents, they can often hardly be distinguished from ellipticals observationally. Elliptical

Elliptical galaxies are actually of ellipsoidal shape, and it is now quite safe from observation that they are usually triaxial (cosmic footballs, as Paul Murdin, David Allen, and David Malin put it). They have little or no global angular momentum, i.e. do not rotate as a whole (of course, the stars still orbit the centers of these galaxies, but the orbits are statistically oriented so that only little net orbital angular momentum sums up). Normally, elliptical galaxies contain very little or no interstellar matter, and consist of old population II stars only: They appear like luminous bulges of spirals, without a disk component.

However, for some ellipticals, small disk components have been discovered, so that they may be representatives of one end of a common scheme of galaxy forms which includes the disk galaxies. Irregular

Often due to distortion by the gravitation of their intergalactic neighbors, these galaxies do not fit well into the scheme of disks and ellipsoids, but exhibit peculiar shapes. A subclass of distorted disks is however frequently occuring.

From their appearance, galaxies are classified in types as given above, as spiral, lenticular, elliptical, and irregular galaxies, where spirals may be further classified for the presence of a bar (S: spirals, SAB: Intermediate, SB: Barred spirals). More precisely, ellipticals are sub-classified for ellipticity from E7 (strongly elongated) to E0 (circular), and spirals for prominence of bulge versus spiral arms from Sa (or SABa, SBa) to Sc or Sd. This so-called Hubble Classification Scheme can well be illustrated by Messier's galaxies:

● Hubble Scheme with Messier galaxies for HTML browser supporting tables (e.g., Netscape, IBM Webexplorer)

● Hubble Scheme for HTML browsers not supporting tables (Lynx, Mosaic)

Galaxies of all types, though of a wide variety of shapes and appearances, have many basic common features. They are huge agglomerations of stars like our Sun, counting several millions to several trillions. Most of the stars are not lonely in space like our Sun, but occur in pairs (binaries) or multiple systems.

The most massive galaxies are giants which are a million times more massive than the lightest: Their mass range is from at most some million times that of our Sun in case of the smallest dwarfs, to several trillion solar masses in case of giants like M87 or M77. Accordingly, the number of stars in them varies in the same range.

The linear size of galaxies also scatters, ranging from small dwarfs of few thousands of light years diameter (like M32) to respectable several 100,000 light years. Among the biggest Messier galaxies are the Andromeda galaxy M31 and the bright active Seyfert II galaxy M77.

Our Milky Way Galaxy, a spiral galaxy, is among the massive and big galaxies with at least 250 billion solar masses (there are hints that the total mass may even be as large as 750 billion to 1 trillion times that of the Sun) and a disk diameter of 100,000 light years.

Besides very many individual stars, most galaxies contain the following typical objects:

● Globular star clusters, large but quite compact agglomerations of some 100,000 to several million stars. These large clusters have about the same mass as the smallest galaxies, and are among the oldest objects in galaxies. Often, they form conspicuous systems, and occur at galaxies of every type and size. The systems vary in a wide range in richness between the individual galaxies. ● As the stars develop, many of them leave nebulous remnants (planetary nebulae or supernova remnants) which then populate the galaxies.

● While the older stars, including the globular clusters, tend to form an ellipsoidal bulge, the interstellar gas and dust tends to accumulate in clouds near an equatorial disk, which is often conspicuous (i.e., in spiral and lenticular galaxies). ● The interstellar clouds are the places of . More acurately, huge diffuse nebulae are places where crowded (open) clusters and associations of stars are formed. ● A rather dense galactic nucleus, which is somewhat similar to a "superlarge" globular cluster. In many cases, galactic nuclei contain supermassive dark objects, which are often considered as Black Hole candidates.

Galaxies normally emit light of every wavelength, from the long radio and microwave end over the IR, visual and UV light to the short, high-enregy X- and gamma rays. Interstellar matter is coolest and therefore best visible in radio and IR, while supernova remnants are most conspicuous in the high-energy part of the electromagnetic spectrum.

Some galactic nuclei are remarkably distinguished from the average: These so-called Active Galactic Nuclei (AGNs) are intensive sources of light of all wavelengths from radio to X-rays. The activities seen in the AGNs are caused by gaseous matter falling into, and interacting with, the supermassive central objects mentioned above, according to the current consensus of most researchers. Sometimes, the spectra of these nuclei indicate enormous gaseous masses in rapid motion; galaxies with such a nucleus are called Seyfert galaxies (for their discoverer, Karl Seyfert). M77 is the brightest Seyfert galaxy in the sky. Few galaxies have even more exotic nuclei, which are extremely compact and extremely bright, outshining their whole parent galaxy; these are called quasars (an acronym for QUAsi-StellAR objects). From their properties, quasars resemble extremely active Seyfert galaxy nuclei. However, quasars are so rare and the nearest is so remote that the brightest of them, 3C273, about 2 billion lightyears away in the constellation Virgo, is only of magnitude 13.7, and none of them is in Messier's or even in the NGC or IC catalog.

Occasionally, at irregular intervals given by chance, in any type of galaxies, a supernova occurs: This is a star suddenly brightning to a high luminosity which may well outshine the whole galaxy; the maximal of a supernova may well reach -19 to -20 magnitudes. This remarkable phenomenon has attracted the attention of many astronomers (equally both professionals and amateurs), who observe galaxies regularly as they "hunt" supernovae. Supernovae have been observed in several Messier catalog galaxies.

According to our current scientific understanding, at least most galaxies (including our Milky Way and those in Messier's catalog) have formed during a comparatively short period, at about the same time, within the first billion years after the universe started to expand, from an initial hot state. Thus they are all almost as old as the universe itself, currently thought to be about 10-15 billion years. It is thought that galaxy formation started when primordial clouds of gaseous matter (hydrogene and helium), the proto-galaxies, were singled out and started to collapse by their own gravity. According to computer simulations, the variety of galaxy forms results from different initial parameters of the proto-galaxies such as the amount of (initial) angular momentum, as well as their later evolution in their environments, such as interaction with other neighboring galaxies.

Links

● Radial velocities of the Messier galaxies

● Nasa's Extragalactical Database (NED) (also available by telnet)

❍ NED data of the Messier galaxies

● Galaxy Informations from the University of Alabama

● Galaxies and the Universe - WWW Course Notes by Bill Keel

● Galaxies text (by Nick Strobel; Scholar series at the MAA)

● Galaxy Catalogs List

● Arp's Catalog of Peculiar Galaxies; this catalog includes some of Messier's galaxies (see also the Arp Galaxies in Other Catalogs page of the Online Arp Catalog)

● Zsolt Frei's Catalog of 113 Nearby Galaxies with images taken at different wavelengths; [also by ftp]

● ARVAL Catalog of Bright Galaxies

● Globular cluster systems in other galaxies: Catalog by W. E. Harris (we hold a possibly older copy); Globular Clusters in Other Galaxies (M. Kissler-Patig)

● From An Atlas of the Universe:

❍ The 200 Brightest Galaxies

❍ Galaxies and Groups of Galaxies within 20 million light

❍ The within 100 million Light Years

❍ The Universe within 200 million Light Years

● Look at Galaxies in Messier's Catalog

● Also look at our collection of some significant non-Messier galaxies

References

Imagery and atlasses:

● Allan Sandage. The Hubble Atlas of Galaxies. Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1961. 185 superb black & white photographs of galaxies of all types, obtained by the Mt. Palomar and Mt. Wilson Observatory telescopes, with captions and data, and a technical and scientific introduction. ● James D. Wray. The Color Atlas of Galaxies. Cambridge University Press, 1988. 3-color (UBV) images of 616 galaxies (including all Messier galaxies but M89), taken with telescopes at the McDonald Observatory, Texas, and the Cerro Tololo Interamerican Observatory, Chile, with data and captions. ● Timothy Ferris. Galaxies. Sierra Club Books, San Francisco, 1980. Superb book (look to get the more expensive full-size edition) with color and b/w photographs of galaxies and some other objects, from various observatories.

Of course, fine galaxy photos can be found in many more general astronomy books also.

Special observing Guides:

● Kenneth Glyn Jones (editor). Webb Society Deep-Sky Observer's Handbook, Volume 4, Galaxies, 1981; Volume 6, Anonymous Galaxies, 1987. Enslow Publishers, Hillside, NJ.

Most general Deep Sky Observing Guides are good as well.

Textbooks:

● Dimitri Mihalas and James Binney. Galactic Astronomy. W.H. Freeman, 1981 (probably out of print). Now replaced by: James Binney and Michael Merrifield. Galactic Astronomy. Princeton University Press, 1998. This is a good introduction and review especially for the observational properties of galaxies (as they were known at the time of publication). ● James Binney and Scott Tremaine. Galactic Dynamics. Princeton Series in Astrophysics, Princeton University Press, 1987. In-depth treatment of the physics of galaxies. Some mathematical and physical background is required for this book. ● Paul W. Hodge. Galaxies. Harvard University Press, 1986.

Historical Review:

● Richard Berendzen, Richard Hart, and Daniel Seeley. Man Discovers the Galaxies. Science History Publications, Neale Watson Academic Publications, New York 1976.

Galaxy Clusters

Some galaxies are isolated "island universes" which float lonely through an otherwise empty region of the universe. But usually, space is too densely crowded with them, so that they form groups of some galaxies (or some dozens of galaxies), or even large clusters of up to several thousands of galaxies. The galaxies of these groups are in mutual gravitational interaction which may have significant influence on their appearance.

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 25 Jan 1998, 14:08 MET Sagittarius

● Download map

Messier Objects in Sagittarius: M8, M17, M18, M20, M21, M22, M23, M24, M25, M28, M54, M55, M69, M70, M75

● Constellation index

● More on constellation Sagittarius [ MAA Original]

● More on Sagittarius (Chris Dolan)

● Digital images - Constellation Sagittarius page (T. Credner/S. Kohle) [ unframed version] - M75 in Capricornus page

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Star Clusters

Click the icon to view Star Clusters of the Messier Catalog

>> Links >>

Globular

Globular clusters are gravitationally bound concentrations of approximately ten thousand to one million stars. They populate the halo or bulge of the Milky Way and other galaxies with a significant concentration toward the Galactic Center. Spectroscopic study of globular clusters shows that they are much lower in heavy element abundance than stars such as the Sun that form in the disks of galaxies. Thus, globular clusters are believed to be very old and formed from an earlier generation of stars (Population II). More recent estimates yield an age of 12 to 20 billion years; the best value for observation is perhaps 14 to 16 billion (see e.g. the discussion at M92). As their age is crucial as a lower limit for the age of our universe, it was subject to vivid and continuous discussion since decades. The age of globular clusters is determined by investigating their H-R diagrams, as discussed in our globular cluster page.

The disk stars, by contrast, have evolved through many cycles of starbirth and supernovae, which enrich the heavy element concentration in star-forming clouds and may also trigger their collapse.

Our galaxy has about 200 globular clusters, most in highly eccentric orbits that take them far outside the Milky Way. Most other galaxies have globular cluster systems as well, in some cases (e.g., for M87) containing several thousands of globulars! Open

Open (or galactic) clusters are physically related groups of stars held together by mutual gravitational attraction. They are believed to originate from large cosmic gas/dust clouds in the Milky Way, and to continue to orbit the galaxy through the disk. In many clouds visible as diffuse nebulae star formation takes still place at this moment, so that we can observe the formation of new young open star clusters (composed of young Population I stars). Open clusters populate about the same regions of the Milky Way and other galaxies as diffuse nebulae, notably spiral arms in disk galaxies, and irregular galaxies, and are thus found along the band of the Milky Way in the sky.

Most open clusters have only a short life as stellar swarms. As they drift along their orbits, some of their members escape the cluster, due to velocity changes in mutual closer encounters, tidal forces in the galactic gravitational field, and encounters with field stars and interstellar clouds crossing their way. An average has spread most of its member stars along its path after several 100 million years; only few of them have an age counted by billions of years. The escaped individual stars continue to orbit the Galaxy on their own as field stars: All field stars in our and the external galaxies are thought to have their origin in clusters. Binary and Multiple Star Systems

Star formation leads to the formation of multiple star systems at least as often as it does single star systems, such as our own Solar System. In fact, if the mass of the planet Jupiter were a few times larger, it would become a star.

One should keep in mind that almost all Messier clusters are members of our Milky Way Galaxy (the only probable exception is globular cluster M54 which apparently belongs to the Sagittarius Dwarf Elliptical Galaxy, a closely neighbored dwarf spheroidal galaxy which was discovered in 1994). Other galaxies contain clusters of any type, too, which can be detected with sufficiently sensitive instruments. Links

● Look at Clusters in Messier's Catalog

● Also look at our collection of some significant non-Messier clusters

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 21 Nov 1999, 23:25 MET Nebulae

Click the icon to view Nebulae of the Messier Catalog

The icon shows the Horsehead Nebula (Barnard 33), a dark nebula superimposed on an emission nebula (IC 434).

Diffuse Nebulae

Diffuse nebulae are clouds of interstellar matter, namely thin but widespread agglomerations of gas and dust. If they are large and massive enough they are frequently places of star formation, thus generating big associations or clusters of stars. Some of the young stars are often very massive and so hot that their high energy radiation can excite the gas of the nebula (mostly hydrogene) to shine; such nebula is called emission nebula. If the stars are not hot enough, their light is reflected by the dust and can be seen as white or bluish reflection nebula. As most diffuse emission nebulae also contain dust, they typically have a reflectin nebula component also. Planetary Nebulae

When a star like our sun has used up all its central nuclear fuel, it finally ejects a significant portion of its mass in a gaseous shell which is then visible in the light emitted due to high-energy excitation by its extremely hot central star, which previously was the core of the stellar progenitor (thus, planetary nebulae are a special kind of emission nebulae). These nebulae quickly expand and fade while their matter is spread in the interstellar surroundings. Supernova Remnants

Stars which are considerably more massive than our Sun, and have at least about 3 solar masses left after their giant state, can most probably not evolve quitely into an end state as a , but when coming to age, explode in a most violent detonation which flashes up at a luminosity of up to 10 billion times that of the sun, called supernova (of type II) and ejecting the very greatest part of the stellar matter in a violently expanding shell. Alternatively, infalling matter on a white dwarf star can cause it to explode as a supernova of type I. The nebulous ejecta of supernovae of either type are called supernova remnants.

The only supernova remnant in Messier's catalog is the first object, the Crab Nebula M1, the remnant of a type II supernova. Dark Nebulae

Although none of them is in Messier's catalog, some of these objects are conspicuous. Unlike the others, the bright nebulae, these dust clouds are only visible by the absorption of light from objects behind them. They are distinguished from diffuse nebula mainly because they happen to be not illuminated by embedded or nearby stars.

The term "Nebula" has varied in the history of astronomy. In pre-telescopic times it was used to distinguish objects which look non-stellar from the pointlike stars. Most "nebulae" known at that time have been shown to be open star clusters. The term "Nebula" was thus used for what we now call "Deepsky Object".

In early telescopic times, the nature of these objects was still widely unknown. With open clusters resolved, still all other deepsky objects were summarized as "Nebulae". Only the use of large telescopes, the discovery of spectroscopy and the invention of photography in the second half of the 19th century made it possible to distinguish "real" nebulae - i.e., gas and dust clouds - with certainty from objects made up of stars (globular clusters and galaxies).

Now that the nature of nebulae as interstellar masses of gas and dust is known, there are still several classification schemes. The first is based on spectroscopy and the light which is seen from the nebulae:

● Emission Nebulae: Emit light because the atoms in their gases are excited by high energy radiation of stars involved. ● Reflection Nebulae: Reflect light of nearby stars by their dust particles. ● Absorption Nebulae or Dark Nebulae: Absorb light: Their gas component can be seen as absorption spectra in the light of background stars, their dust component by absorbing and reddening background light.

This scheme tells nothing on the nature of the nebulae.

A more modern scheme distinguishes star-forming or pre-stellar nebulae (basically diffuse and dark nebulae) from post-stellar nebulae (basically planetary nebulae and supernova remnants). The first of these classes typically includes clouds of interstellar matter of a mass of several 100 or several 1,000 stars, while the latter is related to one specific star in advanced state of evolution, at or just beyond the end of its nuclear life.

There are a number of variations and special classes of nebulae such as the Herbig-Haro Nebulae (related to stars in the process of formation, and emit jets of gaseous material, thus often found near large diffuse nebulae with star formation) and Wolf-Rayet Nebulae (related to hot Wolf-Rayet stars, stars of some age that have ejected matter they now cause to shine).

On cosmic timescales, all these types of nebulae, in particular the bright nebulae, undergo rapid changes and have only comparatively short lifetimes, so that those we observe are all rather young objects. Planetary nebulae and supernova remnants usually have only a few thousands of years before they fade and spread their matter into the this interstellar matter of their environment, while star forming H II regions while shine bright for the few 100,000 or million years they are brightened by the very hot massive O stars that formed within them. The giant molecular clouds have a somewhat longer life of some 10s of millions of years, while they form new stars and star clusters.

One should keep in mind that all Messier nebulae are members of our Milky Way Galaxy (together with many others). Other galaxies contain nebulae, too, which can be detected with considerably sensitive instruments within the images of these galaxies. Links

● Nebulae and Star Clusters within 10000 light years map from An Atlas of The Universe - also note their Map of the Orion Arm within 2000 light years for nearby nebulae ● Look at Nebulae in Messier's Catalog

● View some significant non-Messier nebulae

● Bill Arnett's Web Nebula collection

References

● Webb Society Deep-Sky Observer's Handbook Vol. 2: Planetary and Gaseous Nebulae, by Kenneth Glyn Jones (ed.). Enslow Publishers 1978/1979.

● James B. Kaler, Cosmic Clouds, Scientific American Library, W.H. Freeman, 1997 (German edition: Kosmische Wolken, 1998)

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 25 Jan 1998, 16:23 MET The Sagittarius Dwarf Elliptical Galaxy, SagDEG

Dwarf Elliptical Galaxy SagDEG (also Sagittarius dSph) in Sagittarius

In 1994, R. Ibata, M. Irwin, and G. Gilmore found this small Local Group galaxy by stellar brightness density investigations Right Ascension 18 : 55.1 (h : m) (see also e.g. the August 1994 issues of Astronomy or Sky & Telescope or the German Sterne und Weltraum). This galaxy Declination -30:29 (deg : m) was immediately recognized as being the nearest known neighbor to our Milky Way, significantly closer than the Large Magellanic Cloud which was considered to be our closest companion until than. It held the title of our nearest intergalactic Distance 88.0 (kly) neighbor for nine years, but lost it in November 2003 to the then newly discovered Canis Major Dwarf. Apparent Dimension 190x490 (arc min) This dwarf galaxy is called SagDEG (for Sagittarius Dwarf Elliptical Galaxy), or sometimes Sagittarius Dwarf Spheroidal Galaxy; don't confuse it with another member, SagDIG (Sagittarius Dwarf ). It is strongly recommended to avoid misleading designations such as "Sagittarius Dwarf" (which is an older designation for SagDIG), "Sagittarius I Dwarf", or similar ambiguous names for this galaxy, although they occasionally occur in websites, databases, articles and papers.

These are two minor galaxies in the same constellation Sagittarius, which are of different type: The difference between these types is that dwarf irregulars still have interstellar matter and/or young stars while the dwarf elliptical have only an old yellowish stellar population. From its stellar contents, it is resembling other low members of the local group such as the , but it is so highly obscured that it was hidden up to the 1994 investigation.

SagDEG is one of the most recently discovered members of the Local Group, and is currently in a very close encounter to our Milky Way galaxy. It is apparently in process of being disrupted by tidal gravitational forces of its big massive neighbor in this encounter. Nevertheless it is apparently big: 5x10 degrees in the sky.

Globular cluster M54 coincides with one of the galaxy's two bright knots, and is also receding at about the same velocity. It may also be at the same distance (about 88,000 light years), so probably M54 is the first "extragalactic" globular ever discovered (by Charles Messier in 1778), or a recent immigrant to the globular cluster system of our Milky Way galaxy. When SagDEG will be disrupted after the current encounter, M54 and the other at least three globulars of this dwarf (Arp 2, and Terzan 8, which are all much fainter than M54) will be the "remnants", while the other stars will be spread over the , or escape as intergalactic travelers. The globulars will perhaps be captured and find their place in the halo of the Milky Way galaxy. There is already one Milky Way globular cluster which is suspected to have been captured from SagDEG: Palomar 12.

In February 1998, a team of astronomers headed by Rosemary Wyse of John Hopkins University found that SagDEG orbits the Milky Way Galaxy in less than one billion years. Because it must have passed the dense central region of our Galaxy at least about ten times, it is surprising that the dwarf has not been disrupted for so far. Astronomers suspect that this fact is an indication for significant amounts of dark matter within this small galaxy, which ties the stars stronger to the galaxy by its gravity. We have their press release here, or you can read their original report online.

References:

● R. A. Ibata, G. Gilmore, and M. J. Irwin, 1994. A Dwarf in Sagittarius. Nature, Vol. 370, No. 6486 (July 21, 1994)

● SIMBAD data for SagDEG

● NED data for SagDEG

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 23 Nov 2003

M 79

Globular Cluster M79 (NGC 1904), class V, in Lepus

Right Ascension 05 : 24.5 (h:m)

Declination -24 : 33 (deg:m)

Distance 42.1 (kly)

Visual Brightness 7.7 (mag)

Apparent Dimension 9.6 (arc min)

Discovered 1780 by Pierre Méchain.

Globular cluster M79 was found by Pierre Méchain on October 26, 1780, and reported his discovery to his friend and colleague, Charles Messier, who determined its position and included it in his catalog on December 17, 1780. It was first resolved into stars and recognized as a globular cluster by William Herschel in about 1784.

M79 is a beautiful globular cluster at a quite unusual location in the sky: Most globulars are grouped around the Galactic center, but this is one of the few which are situated in the other hemisphere, i.e. it is beyond us for hypothetical observers in the central stellar bulge of our Milky Way galaxy. It is little over 40,000 light years from us, but about 60,000 light years from the galactic center.

At this distance, M79's apparent diameter of 9.6 minutes of arc corresponds to a linear extension of about 118 light years. This cluster is slightly elliptical, extended at position angle 45 deg, and has only 7 known variables. It is receding from us at about 200 km/sec.

In 2003, it was found that M79 is perhaps a rather new immigrant into the globular cluster system ot our Milky Way: It may come from, or still be a member, of the remnant globular cluster system of the Canis Major Dwarf galaxy, which is currently undergoing a very close encounter with our Galaxy, and in progressive state of dissolution. Together with M79, three more globular clusters are suspected to have immigrated from the Canis Major Dwarf: NGC 1851, NGC 2298, and NGC 2808.

About 0.5 degrees to the SW of M79 lies the 5.5 mag star ADS 3954 with its 7th mag companion, separated by 3".

● Historical Observations and Descriptions of M79

● UIT images of M79 (visible and UV) from the Astro-1 Space Shuttle mission (STS-35)

● More images of M79

● Amateur images of M79

● Multispectral Image Collection of M79, SIRTF Multiwavelength Messier Museum

● Marco Castellani's data for M 79

● SIMBAD Data of M79

● NED Data of M79

● Publications on M79 (NASA ADS)

● Observing Reports for M79 (IAAC Netastrocatalog)

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 9 Dec 1999 Canis Major Dwarf

Irregular Galaxy Canis Major Dwarf, centered in Canis Major

Right Ascension 07 : 15 (h : m)

Declination -28: (deg : m)

Distance 25.0 (kly)

Apparent Dimension 720 (arc min)

Discovered in November 2003 by Martin, Ibata, Bellazzini, Irwin, Lewis, and Dehnen.

This small galaxy, or galaxy remnant, was discovered only in 2003 by a team of astronomers from France, Italy, the UK, and Australia. It was found from the analysis of data on asymmetries in the population of Galactic stars (of spectral type M) in the 2MASS All Sky catalog. These stars show several large-scale asymmetries, the most significant of which is a strong elliptical-shaped over-density close to the Galactic plane, around the position l=240deg, b=-8deg in Galactic coordinates, or about RA=07:20, Dec=-30, with an extension in Galactic longitude of about 12 deg (720 arc min). The distance of this concentration was estimated at 25,000 light-years from us and 42,000 light-years from the center of our Milky Way Galaxy.

The authors find that this concentration is the nucleus of a dwarf galaxy which is in a progressive state of disruption, as it orbits our Milky Way Galaxy. This galaxy is thus our nearest known intergalactic neighbor, and a new dwarf member of the Local Group. The major part of its matter has been distributed along its orbit, and forms arc structures around the Milky Way. It may have been a considerable though small galaxy at one time, having of the order of one billion stars, and may have contributed up to about one percent of the matter of our Milky Way.

The image on the right shows the Canis Major Dwarf's nucleus just below the stellar band indicating the equatorial plane of our Milky Way. This is an infrared view, composed from the Two-Micron All Sky Survey (2MASS).

In many respects such as size, orbit and the process of dissolution, the Canis Major Dwarf is similar to SagDEG, which had been discovered in 1994 and taken the place as the nearest known neighbor for nine years.

Some Milky Way globular clusters are loosely grouped around the nucleus of the Canis Major dwarf, and at least some of them may have their origin in the halo of this small galaxy, and may represent the remnant of its former globular cluster system: M79, NGC 1851, NGC 2298, and NGC 2808. Open clusters AM-2 and Tombaugh 2 are strong candidates for being physically associated with the Canis Major Dwarf.

Links:

● University of Strasbough Press Release (November 4, 2003) - [Local Copy]

● Canis Major Dwarf: A New Closest Galaxy. Astronomy Picture of the Day (APOD) November 23, 2003.

References:

● Nicolas F. Martin, Rodrigo A. Ibata, Michele Bellazzini, Michael J. Irwin, Geraint F. Lewis and Walter Dehnen, 2003. A dwarf galaxy remnant in Canis Major: the fossil of an in-plane accretion onto the Milky Way. To appear in: Monthly Notes of the Royal Astronomical Society. Preprint: astro-ph/0311010

● Michele Bellazzini, Rodrigo A. Ibata, L. Monaco, Nicolas F. Martin, Michael J. Irwin, and Geraint F. Lewis, 2003. The Moon befind the finger. Detection of the Canis Major galaxy in the background of galactic open clusters. To appear in: Monthly Notes of the Royal Astronomical Society. Preprint: astro-ph/0311119

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 22 Nov 2003 Messier Objects in the Milky Way Galaxy

Most of the 70 Messier objects which are not galaxies are part or member of the Milky Way galaxy of some kind; the only probable exception being globular cluster M54 which belongs to the nearest neighbor galaxy, SagDEG. Basically, all the diffuse nebulae and open star clusters as well as supernova remnants trace the spiral arms of our galaxy, while the globular clusters populate the galactic bulge with a strong concentration toward the Galactic center, and the planetary nebulae are somewhat an intermediate object class and occur in both; the four Messier planetaries happen to be situated not far from the disk and situated either within or close to the spiral arms (more acurately, our Local or Orion Arm).

Spiral Arms traced by Messier Objects:

● "+I", Perseus Arm ● "0", Local Arm, Orion Arm ● "-I", Sagittarius Arm, Sagittarius-Carina Arm

Perseus Arm

Object Con Type RA (2000) Dec dist

M 52 NGC 7654 Cas OC 23:24.2 +61:35 5.0 M103 NGC 581 Cas OC 01:33.2 +60:42 8.0 M 38 * NGC 1912 Aur OC 05:28.4 +35:50 4.2 M 1 NGC 1952 Tau SNR 05:34.5 +22:01 6.3 M 36 * NGC 1960 Aur OC 05:36.1 +34:08 4.1 M 37 * NGC 2099 Aur OC 05:52.4 +32:33 4.4

Orion Arm

Object Con Type RA (2000) Dec dist

M 6 NGC 6405 Sco OC 17:40.1 -32:13 2 M 7 NGC 6475 Sco OC 17:53.9 -34:49 0.8 M 23 NGC 6494 Sgr OC 17:56.8 -19:01 2.15 M 25 IC 4725 Sgr OC 18:31.6 -19:15 2 M 57 NGC 6720 Lyr PN 18:53.6 +33:02 2.3 M 27 NGC 6853 Vul PN 19:59.6 +22:43 1.25 M 29 NGC 6913 Cyg OC 20:23.9 +38:32 4.0 M 73 NGC 6994 Aqr OC? 20:58.9 -12:38 2.0 M 39 NGC 7092 Cyg OC 21:32.2 +48:26 0.825 M 76 NGC 650 Per PN 01:42.4 +51:34 3.4 M 34 NGC 1039 Per OC 02:42.0 +42:47 1.4 M 45 Tau C+N 03:47.0 +24:07 0.38 M 42 NGC 1976 Ori DN 05:35.4 -05:27 1.6 M 43 NGC 1982 Ori DN 05:35.6 -05:16 1.6 M 78 NGC 2068 Ori DN 05:46.7 +00:03 1.6 M 35 NGC 2168 Gem OC 06:08.9 +24:20 2.8 M 41 NGC 2287 CMa OC 06:46.0 -20:44 2.3 M 50 NGC 2323 Mon OC 07:03.2 -08:20 3 M 47 NGC 2422 Pup OC 07:36.6 -14:30 1.6 M 46 NGC 2437 Pup OC 07:41.8 -14:49 5.4 M 93 NGC 2447 Pup OC 07:44.6 -23:52 3.6 M 48 NGC 2548 Hya OC 08:13.8 -05:48 1.5 M 44 NGC 2632 Cnc OC 08:40.1 +19:59 0.577 M 67 NGC 2682 Cnc OC 08:50.4 +11:49 2.7 M 97 NGC 3587 UMa PN 11:14.8 +55:01 2.6 M 40 UMa DS 12:22.4 +58:05 0.51

Sagittarius Arm

Object Con Type RA (2000) Dec dist

M 20 NGC 6514 Sgr DN 18:02.6 -23:02 5.2 M 8 NGC 6523 Sgr DN 18:03.8 -24:23 5.2 M 21 NGC 6531 Sgr OC 18:04.6 -22:30 4.25 M 24 IC 4715? Sgr MWP 18:16.9 -18:29 10-15 NGC 6603 Sgr OC 18:18.4 -18:25 10 M 16 NGC 6611 Ser C/N 18:18.8 -13:47 7 M 18 NGC 6613 Sgr OC 18:19.9 -17:08 4.9 M 17 NGC 6618 Sgr DN 18:20.8 -16:11 5 M 26 NGC 6694 Sct OC 18:45.2 -09:24 5 M 11 * NGC 6705 Sct OC 18:51.1 -06:16 6

Halo Globular Clusters

Object Con Type RA (2000) Dec dist

M 79(*) NGC 1904 Lep GC 05:24.5 -24:33 42.1 M 68 NGC 4590 Hya GC 12:39.5 -26:45 33.3 M 53 NGC 5024 Com GC 13:12.9 +18:10 59.7 M 3 NGC 5272 CVn GC 13:42.2 +28:23 33.9 M 5 NGC 5904 Ser GC 15:18.6 +02:05 24.5 M 80 NGC 6093 Sco GC 16:17.0 -22:59 32.6 M 4 NGC 6121 Sco GC 16:23.6 -26:32 7.2 M107 NGC 6171 Oph GC 16:32.5 -13:03 20.9 M 13 NGC 6205 Her GC 16:41.7 +36:28 25.1 M 12 NGC 6218 Oph GC 16:47.2 -01:57 16.0 M 10 NGC 6254 Oph GC 16:57.1 -04:06 14.4 M 62 NGC 6266 Oph GC 17:01.2 -30:07 22.5 M 19 NGC 6273 Oph GC 17:02.6 -26:16 28.4 M 92 NGC 6341 Her GC 17:17.1 +43:08 26.7 M 9 NGC 6333 Oph GC 17:19.2 -18:31 26.7 M 14 NGC 6402 Oph GC 17:37.6 -03:15 29.0 M 28 NGC 6626 Sgr GC 18:24.5 -24:52 18.6 M 69 NGC 6637 Sgr GC 18:31.4 -32:21 28.0 M 22 NGC 6656 Sgr GC 18:36.4 -23:54 10.4 M 70 NGC 6681 Sgr GC 18:43.2 -32:18 29.4 M 54(*) NGC 6715 Sgr GC 18:55.1 -30:29 88.7 M 56 NGC 6779 Lyr GC 19:16.6 +30:11 32.9 M 55 NGC 6809 Sgr GC 19:40.0 -30:58 17.6 M 71 NGC 6838 Sge GC 19:53.8 +18:47 12.7 M 75 NGC 6864 Sgr GC 20:06.1 -21:55 61.3 M 72 NGC 6981 Aqr GC 20:53.5 -12:32 55.4 M 15 NGC 7078 Peg GC 21:30.0 +12:10 33.6 M 2 NGC 7089 Aqr GC 21:33.5 -00:49 37.5 M 30 NGC 7099 Cap GC 21:40.4 -23:11 26.1

Notes:

● "*": M36, M37 and M38 as well as M11 are sometimes listed as in the Orion Arm ● "(*)": M79 and M54 are probably recent immigrants to the Milky Way galaxy's globular cluster system, coming from nearby dwarf galaxies that are currently in close encounters with our Galaxy, and in the process of disintegration: M79 from the Canis Major Dwarf, and M54 from SagDEG.

Links:

● Map of Star Clusters and Nebulae within 10,000 light years, by Richard Powell. From his "An Atlas of the Universe" project.

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 24 Nov 2003 Spiral Galaxies (and other disks)

Click icon to see a spiral galaxy of Messier's catalog

>> Messier's spiral galaxies; Links

The icon shows M51, the Whirlpool Galaxy.

Among the galaxies, there are apparently three main categories, according to their appearance: the disk galaxies (`cosmic frisbies' according to P. Murdin, D. Allen, and D. Malin), consisting of a huge disk of stars and interstellar matter, which may form interesting patterns, the elliptical galaxies (`cosmic footballs') which are uniformly looking, ellipsoidal agglomerations of stars, and the irregular galaxies (`cosmic misfits') which cannot be integrated in this scheme.

Physically, it is not necessary so clear (at least in the opinion of the present author) if this classification is real, because there exist intermediate types even between ellipticals and spirals, i.e. spiral galaxies often have an ellipsoidally formed "bulge" which may be very luminous (as in case of the Sombrero galaxy M104) or rather inconspicuous; some spirals seem to lack this component at all. A heavy bulge is often connected with the presence of a big ellipsoidal core. On the other hand, at least some ellipticals seem to house a disk component also; ths most conspicuous example of such a galaxy is probably Centaurus A (NGC 5128), a prominent galaxy in the Southern hemisphere which is not a because of its southern declination, but forms a group with the beautiful spiral M83. Centaurus A is regarded as peculiar. One may speculate that e.g. the disk around the center of M87, which is often regarded as the around the supermassive object in that galaxy's nucleus, may be a smaller manifestation of the same disk phenomenon.

Focussing on the disk (or disk dominated) galaxies, these often show beautiful and conspicuous patterns in the form of spiral arms and/or luminous bars. These structures have been a mystery for a long time, it was thought that there may be physically different classes of disks (e.g., "normal" and "barred" disks), but now it seems as if they are all the consequences of gravitational interactions with neighboring galaxies. Encounters with neighbors cause inhomogenities and un-symmetries in the gravitational field within the disk, which tends to compress the gas in some regions. If the density of the gas in these regions exceeds a certain critical value (which depends on parameters as the temperature), star formation can take place, resulting in the formation of red diffuse emission nebulae and blue clusters of hot young stars, which slowly change their color to the yellow when they come to age, and their hottest stars have disappeared (i.e., exploded as supernovae).

The star forming regions tend to be aligned along spiral arms, as the denser regions in the interstellar matter apparently prefer to form such patterns. When getting older, they sometimes stay conspicuous as yellowish "fossil arms", which can be traced in several galaxies.

Galaxies are classified, according to their appearance, in the so-called Hubble scheme (after its inventor, Edwin Powell Hubble; see e.g. our illustration of the Hubble Scheme with Messier galaxies). This scheme defines the classes listed above, i.e. spiral, elliptical and irregular galaxies, and is especially interesting for spirals: Those with pronounced bar structures are called "barred spirals" and classified "SB", while normal spirals are simply called "S" or sometimes "SA"; some authors take "SAB" or "S(B)" for mixed types. Spiral galaxies, "normal" and barred, with conspicuous bulges (especially near their center) are classified "Sa" or "SBa", those which have prominent bulges and pronounced arms are clssified "Sb" or "SBb", and those which are dominated by the arms are "Sc" or "SBc". If the core and bulge seems to be lacking, a galaxy is classified "Sd" or "SBd", and those which have no pronounced core and show irregularities are classified as "Sm"; these represent a type between disk and irregular galaxies.

Some of the galaxies, mostly those who had no closer encounters for a longer period of time, and those who have lost most of their interstellar matter for some reason, do not show any conspicuous pattern within their disks; these are often called "S0" or "lenticular" galaxies. Although they are disks, they can often hardly be distinguished from ellipticals from their appearance, and have often been misclassified in the past. This misclassification happened to all the four Messier lenticulars in the past, and to many other galaxies of this type.

When undergoing a heavy interaction, or collision, with a massive neighbor, disk galaxies may be distorted very peculiarly, and then are often classified as irregular; this is the case for the only Messier irregular, M82.

All disk galaxies have a very different appearance, depending from what direction they are seen, or under which angle toward the line of sight (to us) their disk is inclined. According to this situation, they are either seen from their edge (or "edge-on"), or from near their equatorial plane, as thin, flat, linear and elongated patches, often with dusty structures along their equators, or almost from their poles so that we can see their disks "face-on". Tom Polakis has featured some edge-on galaxies.

Our Milky Way is one of the big and more massive spiral galaxies, and is of Hubble type Sbc, or perhaps SBbc if it should have a bar.

Spiral galaxies in Messier's catalog: M31, M33, M51, M58, M61, M63, M64, M65, M66, M74, M77, M81, M83, M88, M90, M91, M94, M95, M96, M98, M99, M100, M101, M104, M106, M108, M109. Other early known spiral galaxy: Milky Way.

(Probable) S0 galaxies in Messier's catalog: M84, M85, M86, NGC 5866 (M102 ?).

The irregular galaxy M82 is also a distorted disk galaxy.

Links:

● Look at Spiral Galaxies in Messier's Catalog

● Also look at our collection of some significant non-Messier spiral galaxies

Lenticular

Elliptical

Irregular

This webpage was selected as Houston Astronomical Society Site Of The for August 17, 2003

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 25 Jan 1998, 16:26 MET

M 61

Spiral Galaxy M61 (NGC 4303), type SABbc, in Virgo

Right Ascension 12 : 21.9 (h:m)

Declination +04 : 28 (deg:m)

Distance 60000 (kly)

Visual Brightness 9.7 (mag)

Apparent Dimension 6x5.5 (arc min)

Discovered 1779 by Barnabus Oriani.

M61 was discovered by Barnabus Oriani on May 5, 1779 when following the comet of that year, 6 days before Charles Messier's discovery, who had seen it on the same day as Oriani but mistaken it for the comet. Messier mistook it for two nights more, until he realized that it did not move. As for a small number of others, this object was assigned an own number, H I.139, by William Herschel, who normally avoided to give own numbers to Messier's objects, when he observed and cataloged it on April 17, 1786.

M61 is one of the larger galaxies in the Virgo cluster; its 6 arc minutes of diameter correspond to about 100,000 light years, similar to the diameter of the Milky Way galaxy. Its 10th magnitude corresponds to an absolute magnitude of -21.2.

Four supernovae have been observed in M61: 1926A (12.8 mag) was discovered by Wolf and Reinmuth, 1961I (mag 13, Humason), 1964F (mag 12, Rosino), and 1999gn (13.4 mag, Dimai). NED gives the following types and (alternative values for) maxima: SN 1926A, type IIL, 14pv; SN 1961I, type II, 13.0; SN 1964F, type I, 14.0. The Supernova 1961I appeared in the spiral arms, about 82" from the center, and was photographed by the Lick observatory, see e.g. Burnham (you may also order this image from them as slide or print).

● Historical Observations and Descriptions of M61

● More images of M61

● Amateur images of M61

● SIMBAD Data of M61

● NED Data of M61

● Publications on M61 (NASA ADS)

● Observing Reports for M61 (IAAC Netastrocatalog)

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 28 Dec 1999

M 83

Spiral Galaxy M83 (NGC 5236), type SABc, in Hydra

Southern Pinwheel

Right Ascension 13 : 37.0 (h:m)

Declination -29 : 52 (deg:m)

Distance 15000 (kly)

Visual Brightness 7.6 (mag)

Apparent Dimension 11x10 (arc min)

Discovered 1751-52 by Abbe Nicholas Louis de la Caille.

M83 was classified as intermediate between normal and barred spiral galaxies by G. de Vaucouleurs, in his classification this is SAB(s)c. It is magnificient in our image, has very well defined spiral arms and displays a very dynamic appearance, appealing by the red and blue knots tracing the arms. The red knots are apparently diffuse gaseous nebulae in which star formation is just taking place, and which are excited to shine by its very hot young stars. The blue regions represent young stellar populations which have formed shortly (i.e., some million or some dozens of million years ago). Between the pronounced spiral arms are regions with fewer stars. Dark dust lanes follow the spiral structure throughout the disk, and may be traced well into the central region to the nucleus, which has only 20" diameter. This nucleus shows strong emission lines. It is composed of an older yellowish stellar population which dominates the whole central region, and extends along the barlike structure.

Our image was obtained by David Malin with the 3.9-meter Anglo-Australian Telescope of the Anglo-Australian Observatory. Interested parties can get more detailed information on this image. Also available are more images of M83 with the same telescope.

David Malin, in his older publications, always gave a distance of about 25 million light years, as he does in his book A View of the Universe in chapter 4, while in his Galaxies chapter 8, he joins the lot of those claiming a distance of about 10 million light years, and gives an argument, namely that the brightest stars can be viewed as individuals over this distance. M83 recedes at 337 km/sec, implying a bit larger distance from Hubble's law (H0=75 yields about 15 million light years, uncorrected for the disturbation by the Virgo cluster of galaxies, the Virgo centric flow, but in excellent agreement with the value of 15.3 million light years given in R. Brent Tully's Nearby Galaxies Catalog). Kepple/Sanner give another deviating distance value of 22 million ly.

This galaxy is sometimes called the "Southern Pinwheel". It forms a small physical group, the M83 group, with the peculiar radio galaxy Centaurus A (NGC 5128) and the unusual galaxy NGC 5253 in Centaurus. R. Brent Tully also lists the following smaller and fainter presumable (or possible) members of this group: NGC 4945, NGC 5102, NGC 5164, NGC 5408, ESO 381-20 (MCG-6-28-017; 1243-33), ESO 324-24 (MCG-6-30-003; 1324-41), ESO 444-84 (MCG-5-32-000; 1334-27), ESO 325-11 (1342-41), and ESO 383-87 (MCG-6-30-025; 1346-35).

Five or six supernovae were reported in M83 up to now, more than in any other Messier galaxy:

● 1923A was observed by C.O. Lampland at at mag 14. ● 1945B appeared on July 13, 1945 and reached mag 14.2). This supernova was only detected in 1990 by W. Liller on photographic plates taken at Harvard's station at Bloemfontein (South Africa), and could be traced from July 13 to August 7 (see IAU Circular 5091).

● 1950B was observed by G. Haro and reached mag 14.5 in its maximum, ● 1957D was discovered by H.S. Gates on December 13, 1957 and reached only mag 15.0, it was about 3' NNE of the nucleus. ● Supernova 1968L was discovered visually by amateur astronomer Jack C. Bennett of Pretoria, South Africa, when sweeping for comets; this was a type I, located 5" preceding the nucleus and reached mag 11 to 12. ● 1983N appeared on July 3, 1983 and became as bright as 12.5 mag.

For years, M83 had been the galaxy with most discovered supernovae, but recently NGC 6946 came up with the same number of 6, or even one more if 1945B should be an error.

M83 was discovered by Abbe Nicholas Louis de la Caille at the Cape of Good Hope in 1751-52, it was his object Lacaille I.6. Thus it became the first galaxy discovered beyond the Local Group. It was next cataloged by Charles Messier on February 17, 1781; from his mid-northern location in Paris (at 49 degrees Northern latitude), it is such a difficult object that he stated that: "One is only able with the greatest concentration to see it at all." The present author can confirm it is one of the most difficult Messier objects from South Germany. Due to this fact, older Northern-compiled catalogs tended to underestimate its brightness considerably; e.g., Becvar has it at a mere 10.1 mag only.

Early 19th century Australian observer James Dunlop has it as No. 628 in his catalog. Its spiral structure was noted and sketched by William Lassell who described it as a "three-branched spiral."

M83 is one of the showpieces in the southern deep sky, but difficult for mid-northern observers, as already stated. It is even rather difficult to find: First locate one of the stars Gamma or Pi Hydrae. It can be found either by star hopping from Gamma Hydrae (mag 3.00, spectral type G5 III) which is 6.5 deg N and 3deg 15' (19 min in RA) W, or from Pi Hydrae (3.27 mag, spectral type K2 III) from which M83 is about 3deg 15' S and 6deg 20' W. Following a trail of 5th to 7th mag stars, one arrives at a yellowish 5.83-mag star of spectral type F6 and a mag 7.0 white star (spectrum A5 V) which lie about 30' NE of M83. Star hopping from Gamma will bring you close to NGC 5061 (H 1.138), an elliptical galaxy of mag 10.2.

Southerners may find it easier by locating M83 from the constellation Centaurus, as it is just north of the border from Hydra to this constellation. From Iota and Theta Centauri, in the Head of the Centaurus figure, locate the stars i, h and k (mentioned by Messier) as well as g Centauri, all between mag 4 and 5; they are also known as 1 i Cen, 2 g Cen, 3 k Cen, and 4 h Cen. g and i just point to M83 (and further to Gamma Hydrae); the galaxy comes beyond i, at double distance from it than has g.

● Historical Observations and Descriptions of M83

● More Anglo-Australian Telescope images of M83

● ESO/VLT images of M83

● NRAO/VLA radio images of M83

● Chandra X-ray Observatory images of M83

● GALEX images of M83 in the ultraviolet light

● More images of M83

● Amateur images of M83

● SIMBAD Data of M83

● NED Data of M83

● Publications on M83 (NASA ADS)

● Observing Reports for M83 (IAAC Netastrocatalog)

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 20 Jul 2003 Under construction!

Classification of the Milky Way Galaxy

Our Galaxy is classified as Sb (Sky Catalogue 2000.0) or Sbc by most sources. Newer investigations have brought up more and more evidence that the Milky Way probably has a bar, or barlike structure, in its central region, which would modify its classification to become a barred spiral of type SB, or intermediate type between barred and "normal" spirals, SAB.

Already in the 1970s, Gerard de Vaucouleurs has classified the Milky Way Galaxy as "SAB(rs)bc II", where

● "SAB" means that the Milky Way has (probably) a less evolved central bar structure - "SA" would be a "normal", barless spiral, "SB" a barred spiral galaxy ● "(rs)" means that there is a weak central ring of stars and gas around the nucleus ● "bc"

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 7 Jan 2000 Under construction!

The Structure of the Milky Way Galaxy

As the Milky Way is seen from Earth as a diffuse band all around the sky, and as we live within it and have no opportunity to view it from outside, our Galaxy's global structure is not immediately obvious.

Our Galaxy is classified as Sb (Sky Catalogue 2000.0) or Sbc by most sources. Newer investigations have brought up more and more evidence that the Milky Way probably has a bar, or barlike structure, in its central region, which would modify its classification to become a barred spiral of type SB, or intermediate type between barred and "normal" spirals, SAB.

● More on the Classification of the Milky Way

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 13 Aug 1999 The Local Group of Galaxies

This is "our" group of galaxies. It was first recognized by Hubble, in the time of the first distance determinations and redshift measurements (see, e.g., his The Realm of the Nebulae).

Messier objects: The Andromeda Galaxy M31 and its satellites M32 and M110, as well as the Triangulum Galaxy M33.

Other members (over 30 in all) include our Milky Way Galaxy, the Large and the Small Magellanic Cloud (LMC and SMC), which have been known before the invention of the telescope, as well as several smaller galaxies which were discovered more recently. These galaxies are spread in a volume of nearly 10 million light years diameter, centered somewhere between the Milky Way and M31. Membership is not certain for all these galaxies, and there are possible other candidate members.

Of the Local Group member galaxies, the Milky Way and M31 are by far the most massive, and therefore dominant members. Each of these two giant spirals has accumulated a system of satellite galaxies, where

● the system of the Milky Way contains many (nearby) dwarf galaxies, spread all over the sky, namely Sag DEG, LMC, SMC, the recently discovered and widely disrupted Canis Major Dwarf, and the dwarf galaxies in Ursa Minor, Draco, Carina, Sextans (dwarf), Sculptor, Fornax, Leo I, Leo II, and perhaps the , and (which may alternatively belong to the NGC 3109 subgroup), ● the system of the Andromeda galaxy is seen from outside, and thus grouped around its main galaxy M31 in Andromeda, containing bright nearby M32 and M110 as well as fainter and more far-out NGCs 147 and 185, the very faint systems And I, And II, And III and possibly And IV (but for this one see remark below), And V, And VI (Pegasus dwarf), And VII (), and And VIII.

The third-largest galaxy, the Triangulum spiral M33, may or may not be an outlying gravitationally bound companion of M31, but has itself probably the dwarf LGS 3 as a satellite. Also, IC 1613 may perhaps be a member of the M31 subgroup, as may be the doubtful members UGCA 86 and UGCA 92. ● There is a third potential subgroup around irregular galaxy NGC 3109, which contains , Sextans B, the Antlia Dwarf and perhaps Leo A (but that one may belong to the Milky Way subgroup). ● The other members, mostly dwarf irregulars, cannot be assigned to one of these main subgroups, and float quite alone in the gravitational field of the giant group members. They tend to form a vast cloud, the Local Group Cloud.

Only one dwarf galaxy, GR 8, seems to be so isolated that it doesn't belong to any of these substructures.

The substructures of the group are probably not stable. Observations and calculations suggest that the group is highly dynamic and has changed significantly in the past: The galaxies around the large elliptical have probably been once part of our galaxy group.

As this shows, the Local Group is not isolated, but in gravitional interaction, and member exchange, with the nearest surrounding groups, notably:

● the Maffei 1 group, which besides the giant elliptical galaxy Maffei 1 also contains smaller , and is associated with nearby IC 342 and a number of smaller galaxies. Highly obscurred by dark dust near the Milky Way's equatorial plane. ● the Sculptor Group or South Polar Group (with members situated around the South Galactic pole), dominated by NGC 253

● the M81 group

● the M83 group

The next more distant galaxy groups, the NGC 4244 group and the CVn I Cloud (with M94 and M64) are probably too remote to have interacted significantly with the Local Group in the past.

It is of interest that of the subgroups of the Local Group mentioned above, the NGC 3109 group tends to the general direction of the Maffei 1 group and the M81 group, while the Local Group Cloud tends to the general direction of the Sculptor Group.

In the future, interaction between the member galaxies and with the cosmic neighborhood will continue to change the Local Group. Some astronomers speculate that the two large spirals, our Milky Way and the Andromeda Galaxy, may perhaps collide and merge in some distant future, to form a giant elliptical (see a summary of a possible scenario). In addition, there is evidence that our nearest big cluster of galaxies, the Virgo Cluster, will probably stop our cosmological recession away from it, accelerate the Local Group toward itself so that it will finally fall and merge into this huge cluster of galaxies, see our Virgo Cluster & Local Group page.

A table of the currently known Local Group member galaxies follows. While the positions are known very acurately, the distances are only very vaguely known for some members, and the sources even disagree for the most prominent members such as M31 and M33. If interested, look at our compilation of distances from various sources. Please note that this table is currently under review, as new data (Hipparcos distances, discovery of new members) keep our knowledge in flow.

Local Group Member Galaxies

Galaxy RA Dec Type m_v dim RV Dist

WLM 00:02.0 -15:28 IB(s) IV-V 10.9 12 x 4 - 42 3400 IC 10 00:20.4 +59:18 KBm? 10.3 7.3 x 6.4 - 83 4200: Cet dw 00:26.1 -11:02 dSph/E4 14.4 2800 NGC 147 00:33.2 +48:31 dE5 pec 9.5 15.0 x 9.4 + 89 2400 And III 00:35.4 +36:31 dSph/E2 13.5p 4.5 x 3.0 2900: NGC 185 00:39.0 +84:20 dE3 pec 9.2 14.5 x 12.5 + 39 2300 M110 00:41.3 +41:41 E5 pec 8.5 19.5 x 12.5 - 1 2900 And VIII 00:42.3 +40:37 dSph pec 9.1 45 x 10 -250 2700: M 32 00:42.7 +40:52 E2 (cE2) 8.1 11.0 x 7.3 + 35 2900 M 31 00:42.7 +41:16 SA(s)b I-II 3.4 185.0 x 75.0 - 59 2900 And I 00:45.7 +38:00 dSph/E3 pec ? 13.2 2.5 x 2.5 2900: SMC 00:51.7 -73:14 SB(s)m pec 2.3 280 x 160 - 30 210 Scl dw 01:00.0 -33:42 dSph/E3 pec 10.5p +162 300: LGS 3 01:03.8 +21:53 Irr 15.4p 2 3000: IC 1613 01:05.1 +02:08 IAB(s)m V 9.2 20.0 x 18.5 -125 2900: And V 01:10.3 +47:38 dSph 15.9 2900: And II 01:16.4 +33:27 dSph/E0 13.5 3.6 x 2.5 2900: M 33 01:33.9 +30:39 SA(s)cd II-III 5.7 67.0 x 41.5 + 3 3000 Phe dw 01:51.1 -44:27 Irr 13.1 4.9 x 4.1 1600: For dw 02:39.9 -34:32 dSph/E2 8.1 12.0 x 10.2 500 UGCA 92 04:32.0 +63:36 Irr ? S0 ? 13.8 2.0 x 1.0 + 66 4700 LMC 05:19.7 -68:57 SB(s)m 0.1 650 x 550 + 13 179 Car dw 06:14.6 -50:58 dSph/E3 20.9 23.5 x 15.5 360 CMa dw 07:15 -28 Irr 720 25 Leo A 09:59.4 +30:45 IBm V 12.9 5.1 x 3.1 2500 Sex B 10:00.0 +05:20 Ir+ IV-V 11.8 5.1 x 3.5 4700 NGC 3109 10:03.1 -26:09 Ir+ IV-V 10.4 16.0 x 2.9 +131 4500 Ant dw 10:04.1 -27:20 dSph/E3 14.8 2.0 x 1.5 4600 Leo I 10:08.5 +12:18 dE3 9.8 9.8 x 7.4 900 Sex A 10:11.1 -04:43 Ir+ V 11.9 5.9 x 5.0 5200 Sex dw 10:13.2 -01:37 dSph/E3 12. 320 Leo II 11:13.5 +22:10 dSph/E0 pec 12.6 12.0 x 11.0 750 GR 8 12:58.7 +14:13 Im V 14.5 1.2 x 1.1 +165 7900: UMi dw 15:08.8 +67:12 dSph/E4 10.9 41.0 x 26.0 240 Dra dw 17:20.1 +57:55 dSph/E0 pec 9.9 51.0 x 31.0 280 Milky Way 17:45.6 -28:56 SAB(s)bc I-II ? - 0 28 SagDEG 18:55 -30:30 dSph/E7 +168 88 SagDIG 19:30.1 -17:42 IB(s)m V 15.5 2.9 x 2.1 4200 NGC 6822 19:44.9 -14:49 IB(s)m IV-V 9.3 15.5 x 13.5 + 66 1800 Aqr dw 20:46.8 -12:51 Im V 13.9 2.3 x 1.2 3400 Tuc dw 22:41.7 -64:25 dSph/E5 15.7 2.9 x 1.2 3200 UKS2323-326 23:26.5 -32:23 Irr 13.9 1.5 x 1.2 4700 And VII 23:27.8 +50:35 dSph 2.5 x 2.0 2600 Peg dw 23:28.6 +14:45 Im V 13.2 5.0 x 2.7 3000: And VI 23:51.7 +24:36 dSph 11.2 3.5 x 3.5 2800

Possible further members:

UGCA 86 03:59.9 +67:08 Irr ? S0 ? 13.5 0.8 x 0.7 +262 6200 IC 5152 22:06.1 -51:17 IAB(s)m IV 10.6 4.9 x 3.0 + 30 5800

Below we list some nearby but probably non-member field galaxies (which are also not members of one of the neighboring groups listed above), in the same format as above:

Nearby Non-Member (?) Galaxies

Galaxy RA Dec Type m_v dim RV Dist

NGC 55 00:14.9 -39:11 Sc/SB(s)m 8.8 32.4 x 5.6 +129 7000 NGC 404 01:09.4 +35:43 E0 10.1 4.4 x 4.1 +178 8000: Cam A 04:25.3 +72:48 Irr 14.8 3.7 x 2.1 6500:: NGC 1569 04:30.8 +64:51 Irp+ III-IV: 11.2v 2.9 x 1.5 + 87 7500:: NGC 1560 04:32.8 +71:53 Sd 11.5v 9.8 x 2.0 +151 7500:: Argo dw 07:05.3 -58:31 Irr 14.2 3.5 x 1.7 +554 12000: UGC 9128 14:15.9 +23:03 Irp+ 14.4 1.7 x 1.3 +154

Key:

RA, Dec: Right Ascension and Declination for epoch 2000.0 Type: Classification type from Tom Polakis' article, or elsewhere m_v Apparent visual brightness in Magnitudes. A "p" indicates that only photographic magnitudes are available and given. dim Angular dimension in arc minutes RV: wrt galactic center in km/sec Dist: Distance in 1000 light years (kly)

A colon following a number indicates this value is uncertain.

More data of and remarks on Local Group Galaxies

Galaxy R SG Diam Mass Other names/Remarks

WLM (*) LGC 8 ? UGCA 444, DDO 221 IC 10 LGC UGC 192 Cet dw LGC NGC 147 M31 UGC 326, DDO 3 And III M31 PGC 2121 NGC 185 M31 UGC 396 M 110 M31 17 10000 NGC 205 And VIII M31 33 M 32 M31 8 3000 NGC 221 M 31 M31 195 400000 NGC 224 And I M31 PGC 2666 SMC MW 25 6000 NGC 292, Nubecula Minor Scl dw MW ESO 351- G 030, PCG 3589 LGS 3 (*) M31/33 Psc dw, PCG 3792 IC 1613 M31/LC UGC 668, DDO 8 And V M31 And II M31 PGC 4601 M 33 M31/33 60 25000 NGC 598 Phe dw (I) MW/LGC ESO 245- G 007, PGC 6830 For dw MW ESO 356- G 004, PGC 10093 UGCA 92 (I) M31? EGB 0427+63, PGC 15439 LMC MW 30 20000 ESO 056- G 115, PGC 17223, Nubecula Major Car dw MW ESO 206- G 220, ESO 206- GA020, PGC 19441 CMa dw MW Leo A M/3109 Leo III, UGC 5364, DDO 69 Sex B (I) N3109 UGC 5373, DDO 70 NGC 3109 (I) N3109 UGCA 194, DDO 236 Ant dw (I) N3109 5 PGC 29194 Leo I MW UGC 5470, DDO 74, Harrington-Wilson 1, Regulus Galaxy Sex A N3109 UGCA 205, DDO 75 Sex dw MW Leo II MW Leo B, UGC 6253, DDO 93, Harrington-Wilson 2 GR 8 (?) GR8 UGC 8091, DDO 155, VV 558 UMi dw MW UGC 9749, DDO 199 Dra dw MW UGC 10822, DDO 208 Milky Way MW 100 750000 SagDEG (*) MW Sgr dShp, Sgr I dw SagDIG (*) LGC Sgr dw, ESO 594- G 004, UKS 1927-177, PGC 63287, Kowal's Object NGC 6822 LGC IC 4895, DDO 209, Barnard's Galaxy Aqr dw LGC DDO 210, PGC 65367 Tuc dw LGC PCG 69519 UKS2323-326 LGC UGCA 438 And VII M31 Cas dSph, Cas dw Peg dw LGC UGC 12613, DDO 216, Peg DIG And VI M31 Peg dSph, Peg II

Possible members:

UGCA 86 (?) M31/L? PGC 14241 IC 5152 (?) LGC? ESO 237- G 027

Key:

R: Remarks: (*), (?) and (I); see below SG: Subgroup (after Mateo 1999). MW=Milky Way subgroup, M31: M31 subgroup, M31/33: M33 subgroup (probably part of M31 subgroup), LGC: Local Group Cloud (vast cloud of dwarf irregulars), N3109: NGC 3109 subgroup (not counted to Local Group by Van den Bergh), GR8: GR8 group (LG membership in doubt), M/N3109: Either MW or NGC 3109 group Diam: Diameter in 1000 light years (kly) Mass: Mass in million solar masses

Remarks (*):

● "WLM" is "Wolf-Lundmark-Melotte" ● "LGS" stands for "Local Group (suspected)" (LGS 3)

● "SagDEG" is the "Sagittarius Dwarf Elliptical Galaxy" (discovered 1994, containing M54)

● "SagDIG" is the "Sagittarius Dwarf Irregular Galaxy"

Galaxies marked with "(?)" may be non-members as they are not in the list of Irwin et.al. 1997 (this list has 35 Local Group members), in particular:

● UGCA 86 may be a member of the Maffei 1 group

● GR8 and IC 5152 are listed as nearby non-member galaxies in Irwin's list. They may be lonely nearby non-members near the edges of the group. ● The Aquarius Dwarf is also listed by Irwin as non-member, but Van den Bergh (2000) reports its membership has now be confirmed. ● Leo A was also listed in Irwin's list of non-members, but recent distant re-determination confirmed its membership.

Galaxies marked with "(I)" are newly taken into the list from Irwin's list: Besides the newly discovered Antlia dwarf, these are the Phoenix dwarf, UGCA 92, Sextans B, and NGC 3109.

More Data on the Probable Nearby Non-Members listed above:

Galaxy Other names/Remarks

NGC 55 ESO 293- G 050 NGC 404 UGC 718 Cam A NGC 1569 UGC 3056 NGC 1560 UGC 3060 Argo dw PGC 20125 UGC 9128 DDO 187

Various sources have listed other, former Local Group candidates which however have not been confirmed:

"Galaxy" listed Rem

1010-27 McGraw = Ant dw ? DDO 187 (UGC 9128) McGraw Nearby probable non-member galaxy, see above SDIG KKT Member of the Sculptor Group of Galaxies LGS 2 Irwin diffuse reflection nebulosity And IV vdB Background galaxy, or open cluster in M31 Sex C (A 1003) LGAA globular cluster Palomar 3 UMa dw (A 1127) dV,LGAA globular cluster Palomar 4 Ser dw (A 1513) dV globular cluster Cap dw (A 2144) McGraw globular cluster Palomar 12 Snickers Radio observations of 1975 indicated this nearby galaxy candidate NGC 6946 Hubble Nearby non-member galaxy IC 342 Hubble Member of the Maffei 1 or IC 342 Group of Galaxies Maffei 1 Maffei Member of the Maffei 1 or IC 342 Group of Galaxies Maffei 2 Maffei Member of the Maffei 1 or IC 342 Group of Galaxies 2318-42 Irwin

Sources: dV: G. De Vaucouleurs 1975, Nearby Groups of Galaxies, ch. 4, The Local Group. Published in "Galaxies and the Universe," ed. by A. Sandage, M. Sandage and J. Kristian. Hubble E.P. Hubble 1936, The Realm of the Nebulae, Yale University Press. Local group table on p. 126. KKT: Kraan-Korteweg & Tammann, 1979. Astronomische Nachrichten 300, p. 181 LGAA: Le Grand Atlas de L'Astronomie, Encyclopedia Universalis, 1986. German edition: "Der große JRO Atlas der Astronomie" McGraw: McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Astronomy, by Sybil P. Parker (ed), p. 242 Maffei: P. Maffei 1968, PASP 80, p. 618 vdB: S. van den Bergh 1972, Search for Faint Companions to M31. ApJ. 171, p. L31-L33. Andromeda IV is probably not an independent Local Group galaxy, but either a large open cluster in M31 (Jones, 1993), or a more remote background galaxy (Ferguson et.al., 2000)

As our Milky Way obscures parts of the sky, there is still a steady flow of new discoveries of galaxies, in low galactic latitudes (i.e., near the equatorial plane of our galaxy, where the obscuring dust is most dense). Also, some of the galaxies are of extreme low surface brightness, and it was only recently possible to detect them. Therefore, it must be expected that more Local Group members exist, obscurred by dust, or extremely faint, and are still waiting for their detection somewhen in the future.

Jeff Bondono has compiled a comprehensive list of Local Group member and member candidate galaxies.

Links

You are invited to contribute more links which are of interest for this page; please contact the maintainer.

● Local Group Galaxies, images and more information on all known certain and possible member galaxies as well as all former candidates, at SEDS

● Bill Arnett's table of Local Group galaxies

● (Lengthy) article on the Local Group by George Lake

● Mike Irwin's Local Group page and Local Group Member list

● Brian Skiff's list of Local Group galaxies (based on 's article in PASP May 2000 issue)

● Local Group Galaxies table from NED (from Mateo 1998)

● Local Group Survey, by Phil Massey Based on High Resolution Images from the KPNO and CTIO 4-m telescopes.

● Milky Way Satellite and Local Group pages (from An Atlas of the Universe, by Richard Powell)

● Local Group galaxy images from the Astronomical Picture of the Day archives

● Observing the Local Group by Tom Polakis; from Deep Sky Magazine #36.

● The Local Group of Galaxies map and list, and The Milky Way's Satellite Galaxies, from An Atlas of the Universe

● Distribution of Galaxies in the Local Group, an animated graphical 3D presentation by Wil Milan

References

● Annette M.N. Ferguson, J.S. Gallagher, and Rosemary F.G. Wyse, 2000. On the Nature of Andromeda IV. Astronomical Journal, Vol. 120, No. 2, p. 821-832 (08/2000) ● Joseph H. Jones, 1993. CCD photometry of Andromeda IV - Dwarf irregular galaxy or M31 open cluster? Astronomical Journal, vol. 105, no. 3, p. 933-7 (03/1993)

● Mario Mateo, 1998. Dwarf Galaxies of the Local Group. Annual Review of Astronomy and Astrophysics, Volume 36, 1998, p. 435-506. Available online [framed version] - table of Local Group galaxies (NED Level 5)

● Sidney van den Bergh, 1972. Search for Faint Companions to M31. Astrophysical Journal, vol. 171, p. L31-L33

● Sidney van den Bergh, 1994. The Outer Fringes of the Local Group. Astronomical Journal 107, No. 4, p. 1328-1332 (April 1994)

● Sidney van den Bergh, 2000. Updated Information on the Local Group. Publications of the Astronomical Society of the Pacific, Vol. 112, No. 770, p. 529-536 (April 2000)

● Tom Polakis has published an interesting article for observers of local group galaxies, Observing the Local Group, in the Deep Sky magazine (#36), which was reprinted in David Eicher's book Galaxies and the Universe. (was also available online but disappeared)

● Paul W. Hodge, Galaxies. Harvard University Press, 1986. In particular Chapter 7: The Local Group. ● Edwin P. Hubble, The Realm of the Nebulae, Yale University Press, 1936 (in particular, pp. 124, 145)

This page has been used in the sci.astro FAQ

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 22 Nov 2003

M 31

Spiral Galaxy M31 (NGC 224), type Sb, in Andromeda

Andromeda Galaxy

Right Ascension 00 : 42.7 (h:m)

Declination +41 : 16 (deg:m)

Distance 2900 (kly)

Visual Brightness 3.4 (mag)

Apparent Dimension 178x63 (arc min)

Known to Al-Sufi about AD 905.

M31 is the famous Andromeda galaxy, our nearest large neighbor galaxy, forming the Local Group of galaxies together with its companions (including M32 and M110, two bright dwarf elliptical galaxies), our Milky Way and its companions, M33, and others.

Visible to the naked eye even under moderate conditions, this object was known as the "little cloud" to the Persian astronomer Abd-al-Rahman Al-Sufi, who described and depicted it in 964 AD in his Book of Fixed Stars: It must have been observed by and commonly known to Persian astronomers at Isfahan as early as 905 AD, or earlier. R.H. Allen (1899/1963) reports that it was also appeared on a Dutch starmap of 1500. Charles Messier, who cataloged it on August 3, 1764, was obviously unaware of this early reports, and ascribed its discovery to Simon Marius, who was the first to give a telescopic description in 1612, but (according to R.H. Allen) didn't claim its discovery. Unaware of both Al Sufi's and Marius' discovery, Giovanni Batista Hodierna independently rediscovered this object before 1654. Edmond Halley, however, in his 1716 treat of "Nebulae", accounts the discovery of this "nebula" to the French astronomer Bullialdus (Ismail Bouillaud), who observed it in 1661; but Bullialdus mentions that it had been seen 150 years earlier (in the early 1500s) by some anonymous astronomer (R.H. Allen, 1899/1963).

It was longly believed that the "Great Andromeda Nebula" was one of the nearest nebulae. William Herschel believed, wrongly of course, that its distance would "not exceed 2000 times the distance of Sirius" (17,000 light years); nevertheless, he viewed it at the nearest "island universe" like our Milky Way which he assumed to be a disk of 850 times the distance of Sirius in diameter, and of a thickness of 155 times that distance.

It was William Huggins, the pioneer of spectroscopy, who noted in 1864 the difference between gaseous nebula with their line spectra and those "nebulae" with star-like, continuous spectra, which we now know as galaxies, and found a continuous spectrum for M31 (Huggins and Miller 1864).

In 1887, Isaac Roberts obtained the first photographs of the Andromeda "Nebula," which showed the basic features of its spiral structure for the first time.

In 1912, V.M. Slipher of Lowell Observatory measured the radial velocity of the Andromeda "nebula" and found it the highest velocity ever measured, about 300 km/sec in approach. This already pointed to the extra-galactic nature of this object. According to Burnham, a better value is about 266 km/sec, but R. Brent Tully gives 298 km/sec, and NED has again 300 +/- 4 km/s as the modern value. Note that all the previous values describe the motion with respect to our Solar System, i.e. heliocentric motion, not that w.r.t. the Milky Way's Galactic Center. The latter value can be obtained by correcting for the motion of our Solar System around that center. The modern values for Galactic rotation and heliocentric radial velocity yield that the Andromeda Galaxy and the Milky Way are approaching each other at about 100 km/sec.

In 1923, Edwin Hubble found the first Cepheid variable in the Andromeda galaxy and thus established the intergalactic distance and the true nature of M31 as a galaxy. Because he was not aware of the two Cepheid classes, his distance was incorrect by a factor of more than two, though. This error was not discovered until 1953, when the 200-inch Palomar telescope was completed and had started observing. Hubble published his epochal study of the Andromeda "nebula" as an extragalactic stellar system (galaxy) in 1929 (Hubble 1929).

At modern times, the Andromeda galaxy is certainly the most studied "external" galaxy. It is of particular interest because it allows studies of all the features of a galaxy from outside which we also find in Milky Way, but cannot observe as the greatest part of our Galaxy is hidden by interstellar dust. Thus there are continuous studies of the spiral structure, globular and open clusters, interstellar matter, planetary nebulae, supernova remnants (see e.g. Jeff Kanipe's article in Astronomy, November 1995, p. 46), galactic nucleus, companion galaxies, and more.

Some of the features mentioned above are also of interest for the amateur: Even Charles Messier found its two brightest companions, M32 and M110 which are visible in binoculars and conspicuous in small telescopes, and created a drawing of all three. These two relatively bright and relatively close companions are visible in many photos of M31, including the one in this page. They are only the brightest of a "swarm" of smaller companions which surround the Andromeda Galaxy, and form a subgroup of the Local Group. At the time of this writing (September 2003), at least 11 of them are known: Besides M32 and M110 these are NGC 185, which was discovered by William Herschel, and NGC 147 (discovered by d'Arrest) as well as the very faint dwarf systems And I, And II, And III, possibly And IV (which may however be a cluster or a remote background galaxy), And V, And VI (also called the Pegasus dwarf), And VII (also Cassiopeia dwarf), and And VIII. It is still not clear if M33, the smaller spiral galaxy in Triangulum, and its probable companion LGS 3 belong to this subgroup, or the more remote Local Group member IC 1613, or one of the possible member candidates UGCA 86 or UGCA 92.

The Andromeda Galaxy is in notable interaction with its companion M32, which is apparently responsible for a considerable amount of disturbance in the spiral structure of M31. The arms of neutral hydrogene are displaced from those consisted of stars by 4000 light years, and cannot be continuously followed in the area closest to its smaller neighbor. Computer simulations have shown that the disturbances can be modelled by a recent close encounter with a small companion of the mass of M32. Very probably, M32 has also suffered from this encounter by losing many stars which are now spread in Andromeda's halo.

The brightest globular cluster of the Andromeda Galaxy M31, G1, is also the most luminous globular in the Local Group of Galaxies; its apparent visual brightness from Earth is still about 13.72 magnitudes. It outshines even the brightest globular in our Milky Way, Omega Centauri, and can be glimpsed even by better equipped amateurs under very favorable conditions, with telescopes starting at 10-inch aperture (see Leos Ondra's article in Sky & Telescope, November 1995, p. 68-69). The Hubble Space Telescope was used to investigate globular cluster G1 in mid-1994 (published April 1996). While the easiest, G1 is not the only M31 globular cluster which is in the reach of large amateur telescopes: Amateur Steve Gottlieb has observed 18 globular clusters of M31 with a 44cm telescope. With their 14-inch Newton and CB245 CCD camera, observers of the Ferguson Observatory near Kenwood, CA have photographed G1 and four fainter M31 globulars. Barmby et.al (1999) have found 435 globular cluster candidates in M31, and estimate the total number at 450 +/- 100.

The astrophotographer is even better off, as he can gather the fainter light of the fine detail in the spiral arms, as in our image: Amateurs can obtain most striking pictures even with inexpensive equipment, from wide-field exposures to detailed close-ups. Also in photography, better equipment pays off, as is demonstrated by our image, which was obtained by (and is courtesy of) Texas amateur Jason Ware, with a 6-inch refractor. More information on this image is available.

The brightest star cloud in the Andromeda galaxy M31 has been assigned an own NGC number: NGC 206, because William Herschel had taken it into his catalog as H V.36 on the grounds of his discovery observation of October 17, 1786. It is the bright star cloud at the upper left, just below a conspicuous dark nebula, in our photograph (very conspicuous in the larger photo).

Despite the large amount of knowledge we now have about the Andromeda Galaxy, its distance, though among the best known intergalactic distances, is not really well- known. While it is well established that M31 is about 15-16 times further away than the Large Magellanic Cloud (LMC), the absolute value of this measure is still uncertain, and in current sources, usually given between 2.4 and 2.9 million light-years - a consequence of the uncertainty in the LMC distance and thus the overall intergalactic distance scale. E.g., the semi-recent correction from data by ESA's astrometrical satellite Hipparcos has pushed this value up by more than 10 percent, from about 2.4-2.5 to the about 2.9 million light-years we use here.

Under "normal" viewing conditions, the apparent size of the visible Andromeda Galaxy is about 3 x 1 degrees (our acurate value, given above, is 178x63 arc minutes, while NED gives 190x60'). Careful estimates of its , performed with 2-inch binoculars, by the French astronomer Robert Jonckhere in 1952-1953, revealed an extension of 5.2 times 1.1 degrees (reported by Mallas), corresponding to a disk diameter of over 250,000 light years at its distance of 2.9 million light years, so that this galaxy is more than double as large as our own Milky Way galaxy ! Its mass was estimated at 300 to 400 billion times that of the sun. Compared to the newer estimates for our Milky Way galaxy, this is considerably less than the mass of our galaxy, implying that the Milky Way may be much denser than M31. These results are confirmed by new estimates of the total halo masses, which turn out to be about 1.23 trillion solar masses for M31, compared to 1.9 trillion for the Milky Way (Evans and Wilkinson, 2000).

The Hubble Space Telescope has revealed that the Andromeda galaxy M31 has a double nucleus. This suggests that either it has actually two bright nuclei, probably because it has "eaten" a smaller galaxy which once intruded its core, or parts of its only one core are obscured by dark material, probably dust. In the first case, this second nucleus may be a remainder of a possibly violent dynamical encountering event in the earlier history of the Local Group. In the second case, the duplicity of Andromeda's nucleus would be an illusion causes by a dark dust cloud obstructing parts of a single nucleus in the center of M31.

Up to now, only one supernova has been recorded in the Andromeda galaxy, the Supernova 1885, also designated S Andromedae. This was the first supernova discovered beyond our Milky Way galaxy, on August 20, 1885, by Ernst Hartwig (1851-1923) at Dorpat Observatory in Estonia. It reached mag 6 between August 17 and 20, and it was independently found by several observers. However, only Hartwig realized its significance. It faded to mag 16 in February 1890.

● Historical Observations and Descriptions of M31

● Images of M31 from the Isaac Newton Telescope, by the INT Team and David Malin

● More images of M31

● Amateur images of M31

● IRAS investigated M31 in the infrared light

● Rosat has explored M31 in the X-ray light

● Chandra X-ray Observatory images of M31

● GALEX images of M31 in the ultraviolet light

● More images of M31 and M32

● Amateur images of M31 and M32

Animation explaining the structure of M31

Links

● Atlas of the Andromeda Galaxy by Paul W. Hodge. University of Washington Press, 1981.

● DIRECT: A project to directly determine the distances of M31 and M33 (by Kris Stanek, Harvard-Smithsonian CfA)

● John A. Blackwell's M-31 Atlas

● Jack Schmidling's M31 page

● Multispectral Image Collection of M31, SIRTF Multiwavelength Messier Museum

● SIMBAD Data of M31

● NED Data of M31

● Publications on M31 (NASA ADS)

● Observing Reports for M31 (IAAC Netastrocatalog)

References

● P. Barmby, J.P. Huchra, J.P. Brodie, D.A. Forbes, L.L. Schroeder and C.J. Grillmair, 1999. Preprint astro-ph/9911152. ● N.W. Evans and M.I. Wilkinson, 2000. The mass of the Andromeda galaxy. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, Volume 316, Issue 4, p. 929-942 (08/2000) ● Edwin P. Hubble, 1929. Astrophysical Journal, Vol. 69, p. 103-157 and plates III-VIII.

● William Huggins and W.A. Miller, 1864. On the Specta of some of the Nebulae. Philosophical Transactions, Vol. 154 (1864), p. 437.

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 18 September 2003 The Satellite Galaxy System of the Milky Way Galaxy

Galaxy RA Dec Type m_v dim RV Dist h:m d:m mag arc min km/s kly

SMC 00:51.7 -73:14 SB(s)m pec 2.3 280 x 160 - 30 210 Scl dw 01:00.0 -33:42 dSph/E3 pec 10.5p +162 300: Phe dw (?) 01:51.1 -44:27 Irr 13.1 4.9 x 4.1 1600: For dw 02:39.9 -34:32 dSph/E2 8.1 12.0 x 10.2 500 LMC 05:19.7 -68:57 SB(s)m 0.1 650 x 550 + 13 179 Car dw 06:14.6 -50:58 dSph/E3 20.9 23.5 x 15.5 360 CMa dw 07:15 -28 Irr 25 Leo A (?) 09:59.4 +30:45 IBm V 12.9 5.1 x 3.1 2500 Leo I 10:08.5 +12:18 dE3 9.8 9.8 x 7.4 900 Sex dw 10:13.2 -01:37 dSph/E3 12. 320 Leo II 11:13.5 +22:10 dSph/E0 pec 12.6 12.0 x 11.0 750 UMi dw 15:08.8 +67:12 dSph/E4 10.9 41.0 x 26.0 240 Dra dw 17:20.1 +57:55 dSph/E0 pec 9.9 51.0 x 31.0 280 Milky Way 17:45.6 -28:56 SAB(s)bc I-II ? - 0 28 SagDEG 18:55 -30:30 dSph/E7 490 x 190 +168 88

.. more to come soon ..

● The Local Group of Galaxies

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 8 Oct 2003 The Large Magellanic Cloud, LMC

Irregular Galaxy LMC, the Large Magellanic Cloud in Dorado

Right Ascension 5 : 23.6 (h:m)

Declination -69 : 45 (deg:m)

Distance 179.0 (kly)

Visual Brightness 0.1 (mag)

Apparent Dimension 650x550 (arc min)

Known pre-historically on the Southern hemisphere. Mentioned 964 A.D. by Al Sufi. Probably mentioned by Amerigo Vespucci in 1503-4. Discovered by Magellan 1519.

The Large Magellanic Cloud, together with its apparent neighbor and relative, the Small Magellanic Cloud, are conspicuous objects in the southern hemisphere, looking like separated pieces of the Milky Way for the naked eye. They were certainly known since the earliest times by the ancient southerners, but these people produced little documents which are still preserved. The first preserved mention of the Large Magellanic Cloud was by Persian astronomer Al Sufi, who in 964 A.D., in his Book of Fixed Stars calls it Al Bakr, the White Ox, of the southern Arabs, and points out that while invisible from Northern Arabia and Baghdad, this object is visible from the Strait of Babd al Mandab, at 12deg 15' Northern latitude. Next, it was probably mentioned by Amerigo Vespucci in a letter written during his third voyage about 1503-4, as one of "three Canopes, two bright and one obscure;" Amerigo's bright "Canopes" are thought to be the Magellanic Clouds, while the obscure one is probably the Coalsack dark nebula. Eventually, it was Magellan and his discovery expedition who brought them to our knowledge in 1519.

Both Magellanic Clouds are irregular dwarf galaxies orbiting our Milky Way galaxy, and thus are members of our Local Group of galaxies. The Large Magellanic Cloud, at its distance of 179,000 light years, was longly considered the nearest external galaxy, until in 1994, the Sagittarius Dwarf Elliptical Galaxy was discovered at only about 80,000 light years. (Our current distance value takes into account the corrected Cepheid distance scale based on the Hipparcos satellite data published in early 1997.)

Although a small irregular galaxy, the LMC is full of interesting objects including diffuse nebulae (especially the Tarantula Nebula, NGC 2070, a giant H II region), globular and open clusters, planetary nebulae, and more.

● Some prominent LMC objects

On February 24, 1987, supernova 1987A occurred in the Large Magellanic Cloud, which was the nearest observed supernova since Keplers, which occured before the invention of the telescope. Supernova 1987A, peculiar and of type II, was one of the most interesting objects for the astrophysicists in the 1980s (some even say of this century).

In John Caldwell's observing list. In the Astronomical League's Southern Sky Binocular Club list.

The image in this page was obtained by David Malin with the Anglo-Australian Telescope. This image is copyrighted and may be used for private purpose only. For any other kind of use, including internet mirroring and storing on CD-ROM, please contact the Photo Permissions Department of the Anglo Australian Observatory.

● More information on this image (David Malin)

● Donald R. Pettit's LMC astrophoto from the International Space Station, ISS (Feb 2003)

● Multispectral Image Collection of the Large Magellanic Cloud, SIRTF Multiwavelength Messier Museum

● NED data of LMC

● SIMBAD Data of LMC

● Observing Reports for the Large Magellanic Cloud - LMC (IAAC Netastrocatalog)

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 11 Mar 2004 Globular Star Clusters

Click icon to view globular clusters of Messier's catalog

>> Messier's Globular Clusters; Links

The icon shows 47 Tucanae (NGC 104).

Globular clusters are gravitationally bound concentrations of approximately ten thousand to one million stars, spread over a volume of several tens to about 200 light years in diameter.

The first globular cluster discovered, but then taken for a nebula, was M22 in Sagittarius, which was probably discovered by Abraham Ihle in 1665. This discovery was followed by that of southern Omega Centauri (NGC 5139) by Edmond Halley on his 1677 journey to St. Helena. This "nebula" had been known but classified as star since ancient times. Next followed the discovery of M5 in Serpens Caput by Gottfried Kirch in 1702, and that of M13 in Hercules, again by Halley, in 1714. De Chéseaux's list of nebulae of 1746 contains, in addition, two new globular clusters, M71 and M4, while Jean-Dominique Maraldi discovered M15 and M2 in September of this year (1746). Abbe Lacaille's catalog of southern "nebula" of 1751-52 contains 8 globular clusters (among them 5 new ones), while Messier's catalog contains a total of 29 globulars, 20 of them new discoveries. Charles Messier was the first to resolve one globular cluster, M4, but still referred to the other 28 of these objects in his catalog as "round nebulae." Thus, in summer 1782, before William Herschel started his comprehensive deep sky survey with large telescopes, there were 33 globular clusters known. Herschel himself discovered 37 new globulars, bringing the number of known globulars to 70. He was the first to resolve virtually all of them into stars, and coined the term "globular cluster" in the discussion adjacent to his second catalog of 1000 deepsky objects (1789).

These early known globulars are all belonging to our Milky Way Galaxy, but some of them have been integrated, or have immigrated into the Galactic Globular Cluster system only recently, including M54 (noted 1994) and M79 (noted 2003).

Melotte's list of 1915 already lists 83 globulars, Shapley (1930) has 93, one of them in the Large Magellanic Cloud (NGC 1651). Helen Sawyer (Hogg, 1947) lists 99 Milky Way globular clusters, 97 of which are still considered as such; her 1959 list (Sawyer Hogg 1959) has 118 entries (115 real). Further lists of Arp (1965), Alcaino (1973) and Kukarkin (1974) have between 119 and 131 clusters. Becvar lists 100, the Sky Catalogue 2000.0 lists 138 globulars, a number given for 1987 also by Kenneth Glyn Jones (1991). The more recent compilations of Webbink (1985) and Djorgovski and Meylan (1993) have 154 and 143 (both 141 real), respectively. W.E. Harris' database of 1999 contains 147; the four further recent discoveries brings the number of currently known Milky Way globular clusters to 151. Of the 151 known globular clusters of our Milky Way galaxy, 104 are in the NGC catalog, and 3 more in the IC catalog of J.L.E. Dreyer.

Since their discovery and resolution, globular clusters were always thought or suspected to be physical objects, agglomerations or swarms of stars held together by their mutual gravity, all close together and at about the same distance. The proof for this correct guess, or working model, came only with spectroscopy, showing that the stars of these clusters have radial velocities as expected for such swarms, and perfectly match in color-magnitude or Hertzsprung-Russell diagram, i.e. they represent a population of stars of about same age (also see below), all at about the same distance.

The distribution of the globular clusters in our Milky Way galaxy is concentrated around the galactic center in the Sagittarius -- Scorpius -- Ophiuchus region: Of the 138 Milky Way globulars listed in the Sky Catalog 2000, these constellations contain 29, 18, and 24 globulars, respectively, so a total of 71 clusters, or 51.4 percent (though one must admit that of the 29 clusters listed in Sagittarius, probably four are members of the Sagittarius Dwarf Elliptical Galaxy discovered 1994, and not really of the Milky Way, among them M54; however, these are in process to be integrated into the Milky Way's halo). Current counting (June 2002) brings these numbers to 33, 19 and 25 globulars in Sagittarius, Scorpius and Ophiuchus, respectively, thus a total of 77 clusters of a total of 151, or 51.0 percent. Of the 88 constellations, only 43 or about half contain any globular cluster at all; Aquila follows with 7, Serpens with 5, Hercules and Ara with 4 clusters each, and no further constellation contains more than 3.

Of the 151 known clusters, 138 (91.4 percent) are concentrated in the hemisphere centered on Sagittarius, while only 13 globulars (8.6 percent) are on the opposite side of us (among them M79). Of these 13, four (including M79) are suspected to be members of the remnant globular cluster system of the Canis Major Dwarf galaxy discovered in 2003, which again is going to be integrated into the Milky Way's Galactic Halo.

This pronounced anisotropy in the distribution of globular clusters was of historic importance when Harlow Shapley, in 1917, derived from it that the center of our galaxy is lying at a considerable distance in the direction of Sagittarius and not close to our solar system as had been thought previously (however, he significantly overestimated the size of the Milky Way as a whole, as well as the size of the globular cluster system and our distance from the Galactic Center).

Radial velocity measurements have revealed that most globulars are moving in highly excentric elliptical orbits that take them far outside the Milky Way; they form a halo of roughly spherical shape which is highly concentrated to the Galactic Center, but reaches out to a distance of several 100,000 light years, much more than the dimension of the Galaxy's disk. As they don't participate in the Galaxy's disk rotation, they can have high relative velocities of several 100 km/sec with respect to our solar system; this is what shows up in the radial velocity measurements.

Spectroscopic study of globular clusters shows that they are much lower in heavy element abundance than stars such as the Sun that form in the disks of galaxies. Thus, globular clusters are believed to be very old and consisted from an earlier generation of stars (Population II), which have formed from the more primordial matter present in the young galaxy just after (or even before) its formation. The disk stars, by contrast, have evolved through many cycles of starbirth and supernovae, which enrich the heavy element concentration in star-forming clouds and may also trigger their collapse.

Globular clusters typically contain a number of variable stars, in particular RR Lyrae stars which were once called "Cluster Variables" because of their abundance in globulars. Their frequency is varying from cluster to cluster. A small number of four globular clusters also contains planetary nebulae; these appear to be so rare because of the short liftime of planetary nebulae. They also contain a large number of white dwarfs and, at least in some cases, many neutron stars, some of which show up as pulsars.

The H-R diagrams for globular clusters (here shown for M5) typically have short main sequences and prominent horizontal branches, this again represents very old stars that have evolved past giant or supergiant phases.

Comparison of the measured HRD of each globular cluster with theoretical model HRDs derived from the theory of provides the possibility to derive, or estimate, the age of that particular cluster. It is perhaps a bit surprising that almost all globular clusters seem to be of about the same age; there seems to be a physical reason that they all formed in a short period of time in the history of the universe, and this period was apparently long ago when the galaxies were young. Semi-recent estimates yield an age of 12 to 20 billion years; the best value for observation is perhaps 12 to 16 billion (see e.g. the discussion at M92). As their age is crucial as a lower limit for the age of our universe, it was subject to vivid and continuous discussion since decades. In early 1997, the discussion of the age of the globular clusters got revived because of the general modifications of the distance scale of the universe, implied by results of ESA's astrometrical satellite Hipparcos: These results suggest that galaxies and many galactic objects, including the globular clusters, may be at a 10 per cent larger distance; therefore, the intrinsical brightness of all their stars must be about 20 % higher. Considering the various relations which are important for understanding stellar structure and evolution, they should also be roughly 15 % younger, in a preliminary off-hand estimate.

As globular clusters follow their orbits around the Milky Way's Galactic center through the billion years, they are subject to a variety of disturbations:

● some of their stars escape as they get randomly accelerated in mutual encounters, ● tidal forces from the parent galaxy acts on them, particularly heavy in that part of their orbit which is closest to the galactic center (near the periapsis), ● each passing through the galactic plane, as well as close encounters with greater masses like (any type of) clusters or big nebulous clouds contributes to disturbation, ● stellar evolutionary effects and loss of gas also contribute to increasing the rate of mass loss (and thus deflation) of the clusters

Although significantly slower compared to the less densely packed and less populated open clusters, these disturbations are tending to disrupt the clusters. The currently existing globulars are just the survivers of a perhaps significantly larger population, the rest of which has been disrupted and spread their stars throughout the Galactic halo. The process of destruction still works, and it was estimated that about half of the Milky Way globulars will cease to exist within the next 10 billion years.

Our galaxy has a system of perhaps about 180 to 200 globular clusters (including the 29 Messier globulars, of which two may have immigrated only recently: M54 and M79). Most other galaxies have globular cluster systems as well, in some cases (e.g., for M87) containing several thousands of globulars! A small number of the known extragalacric globulars is in the reach of larger amateur telescopes; see Jim Shield's Extragalactic Globulars webpage for examples.

While all the globulars in our Milky Way, and our big companion, the Andromeda Galaxy M31, are old, other Local Group galaxies as the Large and the Small Magellanic Cloud as well as the Triangulum Galaxy M33 also contain considerably younger globular star clusters, which can be concluded with certainty from spectroscopic investigations. These galaxies contain also extremely large diffuse nebulae with masses of the order of globular clusters, clear candidates for future young globulars currently in formation, notably the Tarantula Nebula NGC 2070 in the LMC and NGC 604 in M33. A large number of over 100 young globular clusters have been detected recently in M82, an irregular galaxy beyond the Local Group.

Messier's globular clusters: M2, M3, M4, M5, M9, M10, M12, M13, M14, M15, M19, M22, M28, M30, M53, M54, M55, M56, M62, M68, M69, M70, M71, M72, M75, M79, M80, M92, M107. Other early known globular clusters: NGC 104 (47 Tucanae), NGC 4833, NGC 5139 (Omega Centauri), NGC 6397.

Links

● The Milky Way Globular Clusters

● Planetary Nebulae in Globular Clusters (in the Milky Way)

● Link to the most current globular cluster data file, compiled by W. E. Harris of the Physics and Astronomy department of McMaster University. We hold possibly older versions of the data file and the reference file at SEDS.

● Globular Cluster list by Brian Skiff

● Globular Cluster Catalogs List; Catalog List (Mikkel Steine)

● ARVAL Catalog of Bright Globular Clusters

● Globular Cluster Catalog: Info and references, by Leroy W.L. Guatney. Includes a Globular Observing "Club".

● A galactic globular cluster database, by Marco Castellani. Data (Harris), images (DSS) and color-magnitude diagrams.

● Virtual Tour of the Milky Way Globular Cluster system (Limber Observatory)

● Manos' Globular Cluster Page

● Faint globular hunting: ❍ Barbara Wilson's Obscure Globular Clusters of the Milky Way: Terzan Clusters and UKS-1, Extreme Halo Globulars (NGC 2419; AM 1; Pal 3, 4, 14; Eri)

❍ Palomar Globular Clusters, by Jim Shields, Barbara Wilson and Doug Snyder (including a Palomar Marathon)

● Globular Cluster List from An Atlas of the Universe

● Distribution of Milky Way Globular Clusters, an animated graphical investigation by Wil Milan

● Globular clusters in other galaxies: ❍ Catalog of Globular Cluster Systems of Other Galaxies by W. E. Harris (we hold a possibly older copy - also see NED Level5 article); Globular Clusters in Other Galaxies (M. Kissler-Patig)

❍ Extragalactic Globulars - The Brightest Globular Cluster in Eight Nearby Galaxies, hints for observers by Jim Shields

● Look at Globular Clusters in Messier's Catalog

● Also look at our collection of some significant non-Messier globulars

References

● Gonzalo Alcaino, 1973. Atlas of galactic globular clusters with colour magnitude diagrams. Universidad Catolica de Chile, Santiago.

● Halton C. Arp, 1965. Globular Clusters in the Galaxy. Ch. 19 in: Galactic Structure, ed. A. Blaauw, p. 401. Univ. of Chicago Press. ● Antonin Becvar, 1964. Atlas of the Heavens - II, Catalogue 1950.0. Publishing House of the Czechoslovak Academy of Sciences, Praha and Sky Publishing Corporation, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Fourth enlarged edition. Here: Globular Clusters, p. 289-292. ● S. Djorgovski and G. Meylan, 1993. In: G. Meylan and S. Djorgovski (eds.), Structure and Dynamics of Globular Clusters, ASP Conference Series 50, A.S.P., San Francisco, p. 325-336

● Kenneth Glyn Jones, 1991. Messier's Nebulae and Star Clusters. 2nd revised edition, Cambridge University Press.

● William E. Harris, 1996-2003. Milky Way Globular Clusters - current version (now Feb 2003). Also see: A Catalog of Parameters for Globular Clusters in the Milky Way. Astronomical Journal, vol. 112, p. 1487-1488 (10/1996)

● Alan Hirshfeld and Roger W. Sinnott (eds.), 1985. Sky Catalogue 2000.0. Volume 2. Double Stars, Variable Stars and Nonstellar Objects. Cambridge University Press and Sky Publishing Corporation, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Here Globular Clusters, p. 291-294, and introduction p. xxiii-xxiv. ● Kukarkin, 1974. Gobular star clusters. The general catalogue of globular star clusters of our galaxy, concerning information on 129 objects known before 1974. Sternberg State Astron. Inst., Moscow

● P. Melotte, 1915. A catalogue of star clusters shown on the Franklin-Adams chart plates. Mem. R. Astron. Soc., 60, 175-186

● Helen B. Sawyer (Hogg), 1947. A Bibliography of Individual Globular Clusters. The University of Toronto Press.

● Helen B. Sawyer Hogg, 1959. Star Clusters. In: S. Flügge (ed.), Handbuch der Physik [Encyclopedia of Physics], Vol. LIII (53): Astrophysik IV: Sternsysteme [Astrophysics IV: Stellar Systems], p. 129-207.

● Harlow Shapley, 1930. Star Clusters. Harvard Observatory Monographs, No. 2. New York, 1930. ● R.F. Webbink, 1985. Structure parameters of galactic globular clusters. In: Dynamics of star clusters; Proceedings of the Symposium, Princeton, NJ, May 29-June 1, 1984. Dordrecht, D. Reidel Publishing Co., p. 541-577

Open Clusters

Binary Star Systems

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 23 Nov 2003 Open Star Clusters

Click icon to view open clusters of Messier's catalog

>> Messier's open clusters; Links

The icon shows the Southern open cluster NGC 3293.

Open clusters are physically related groups of stars held together by mutual gravitational attraction. Therefore, they populate a limited region of space, typically much smaller than their distance from us, so that they are all roughly at the same distance. They are believed to originate from large cosmic gas and dust clouds (diffuse nebulae) in the Milky Way, and to continue to orbit the galaxy through the disk. In many clouds visible as bright diffuse nebulae, star formation still takes place at this moment, so that we can observe the formation of new young star clusters. The process of formation takes only a considerably short time compared to the lifetime of the cluster, so that all member stars are of similar age. Also, as all the stars in a cluster formed from the same diffuse nebula, they are all of similar initial chemical composition.

Open clusters are of great interest for astrophysicists because of these properties:

1. the stars in a cluster are all at about the same distance 2. the stars have approximately the same age 3. the stars have about the same chemical composition 4. the stars have different masses, ranging from about 80-100 solar masses for the most massive stars in very young clusters to less than about 0.08 solar masses.

Therefore, they represent samples of stars of constant age and/or constant chemical composition, suited for study with respect to stellar structure and evolution, and to fix lines or loci in many state diagrams such as the color-magnitude diagram (CMD), or Hertzsprung-Russell diagram (HRD). Comparing the "standard" HRD, derived from nearby stars with sufficiently wellknown distances, or the theory of stellar evolution, with the measured CMD of star clusters, provides a considerably good method to determine the distance of star clusters. Comparing their HRD with stellar theory provides a reasonable way to estimate the age of star clusters. The result that all the cluster HRDs can be explained by the theory of stellar evolution gives convincing evidence for this theory, and moreover for the underlying physics including nuclear and atomic physics, quantum physics and thermodynamics.

Over 1100 open clusters are known in our Milky Way Galaxy, and this is probably only a small percentage of the total population which is probably some factor higher; estimates of as many as about 100,000 Milky Way open clusters have been given.

Most open clusters have only a short life as stellar swarms. As they drift along their orbits, some of their members escape the cluster, due to velocity changes in mutual closer encounters, tidal forces in the galactic gravitational field, and encounters with field stars and interstellar clouds crossing their way. An average open cluster has spread most of its member stars along its path after several 100 million years; only few of them have an age counted by billions of years. The escaped individual stars continue to orbit the Galaxy on their own as field stars: All field stars in our and the external galaxies are thought to have their origin in clusters quite probably.

The first open clusters have been known since prehistoric times: The Pleiades (M45), the Hyades and the Beehive or Praesepe (M44) are the most prominent examples, but Ptolemy had also mentioned M7 and the Coma Star Cluster (Mel 111) as early as 138 AD. First thought to be nebulae, it was Galileo who in 1609 discovered that they are composed of stars, when observing M44. As open clusters are often bright and easily observable with small telescopes, many of them have been discovered with the earliest telescopes: As seen in the list below, there are 27 in Messier's list, and 32 others were also known in summer 1782. Note that all these early known clusters belong to our Milky Way Galaxy.

In 1767, Reverend John Michell (Michell 1767) derived that clusters were most probable physically related groups rather than chance collections of stars, by calculating that it would be extremely improbable (1/496,000) to find even one cluster like the Pleiades anywhere in the sky, not to speak of the number of then-known open clusters; moreover he presumed that all or at least most then-known nebulous objects actually were composed of stars. The finding of common by Mädler for the Pleiades and other stellar groups, including the Ursa Major Moving Cluster by Proctor (Proctor 1869), further established the physical relationship between cluster stars. Finally, spectroscopy was needed to show the common radial motion (velocity) of the cluster stars, and to show that the stars perfectly match in a Hertzsprung-Russell diagram (HRD), indicating that they all lie at roughly the same distance. The final confirmation of the roughly common distance came only from the direct measurement of for a number of nearby clusters, both from Earth-bound observatories and from ESA's astrometric satellite Hipparcos.

Eventually, the theoretical study of stellar evolution has provided convincing evidence that the stars of a cluster are all roughly of the same age, and thus have formed within a short period of time on the cosmic time scale, i.e. their HRDs represent isochrones, or pictures of stars of all the same age.

Open clusters are often typized according to a simple scheme which goes back to Harlow Shapley, which describes richness and concentration roughly: c very loose and irregular d loose and poor e intermediately rich f fairly rich g considerably rich and concentrated

Another important and more sophisticated scheme was introduced by R.J. Trumpler (Trumpler 1930). This scheme consists of three parts, characterizing the cluster's degree of concentration, the range of brightness of its stars, and the richness, as follows:

Concentration I Detached; strong concentration toward center II Detached; weak concentration toward center III Detached; no concentration toward center IV Not well deteached from surrounding star field Range in Brightness 1 Small range in brightness 2 Moderate range in brightness 3 Large range in brightness Richness p Poor: Less than 50 stars m Moderately rich: 50 to 100 stars r Rich: More than 100 stars

A "n" following the Trumpler class indicates that there is nebulosity associated with the cluster.

Messier's open clusters: M6, M7, M11, M16, M18, M21, M23, M25, M26, M29, M34, M35, M36, M37, M38, M39, M41, M44, M45, M46, M47, M48, M50, M52, M67, M93, M103. Moreover, the Milky Way starcloud M24 contains the open star cluster NGC 6603, and all diffuse nebulae in Messier's catalog contain very young open clusters, still in the process of formation. Other early known open clusters: 752, 869 (h Per), 884 (Chi Per), 2244, 2362, 2451, 2477, 2516, 2546, 2547, 3228, 3293, 3532, 3766, 4755 (Kappa Cru), 5281, 5662, 6025, 6124, 6231, 6242, 6530, 6633, I2391 (Omicron Vel), I2488, I2602, I4665, Brocchi's Cluster (Cr 399), Alpha Persei Cluster (Mel 20), Hyades (Mel 25), Coma Star Cluster (Mel 111), Ursa Major Moving Cluster (Cr 285).

All the diffuse nebulae in Messier's catalog are associated with open clusters of young stars which have formed of the nebula's material in (astronomically) very recent times, and are still formed today in many cases.

Links

● WEBDA: A Site Devoted to Stellar Open Clusters, by Jean-Claude Mermilliod. Presentation - Cluster list

● A Simulation of Star Cluster Evolution

● Open Cluster Catalogs List; Catalog List (Mikkel Steine)

● ARVAL Catalog of Bright Open Clusters

● Open Clusters List and Star Clusters and Nebulae within 10000 light years map from An Atlas of The Universe - also note their Map of the Orion Arm within 2000 light years for nearby open clusters

● Look at Open Clusters in Messier's Catalog

● Also look at our collection of some significant non-Messier open clusters

References

● Woldemar Götz, Die offenen Sternhaufen unserer Galaxis (The open star clusters of our Galaxy), Verlag Harri Deutsch, 1990

● John Michell, 1767. An Inquiry into the probable Parallax, and Magnitude, of the Fixed Stars, from the Quantity of Light which they afford us, and the particular Circumstances of their Situation. Philosophical Transactions, Vol. 57, p. 234-264. ● Richard A. Proctor, 1869. Preliminary Paper on certain Drifting Motions of the Stars. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, Vol. 18, p. 169-171. ● Robert Julius Trumpler, 1930. Preliminary results on the distances, dimensions and space distribution of open star clusters. Lick Observatory Bulletin, Vol. 14, p. 154

Globular Clusters

Binary Star Systems

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 29 Mar 1998, 20:00 MET Diffuse Nebulae

Click icon to view a diffuse nebula from Messier's catalog

>> Messier's diffuse nebulae; Links

The icon shows reflection nebulae in Scorpius around Antares. The globular cluster at the lower right is M4.

Diffuse nebulae, sometimes inacurately referred to as gaseous nebulae, are clouds of interstellar matter, namely thin but widespread agglomerations of gas and dust. If they are large and massive enough they are frequently places of star formation, thus generating big associations or clusters of stars. Some of the young stars are often very massive and so hot that their high energy radiation can excite the gas of the nebula (mostly hydrogene) to shine; such nebula is called emission nebula. If the stars are not hot enough, their light is reflected by the dust and can be seen as white or bluish reflection nebula. Note that many emission nebulae also have an additional reflection nebula component (as they usually also contain dust); a most impressive example for this is the Trifid Nebula M20.

Diffuse emission nebulae are often called H II regions because they are mainly consisted of ionized hydrogene, H II - the roman number after the element symbol (here H) designating the ionization level: `I' would stand for neutral atoms, the `II' here means first ionization, i.e. the hydrogene atoms have lost their single electron, and for other elements higher numbers (ionization levels, or numbers of lost electrons) would be possible (e.g., He III, O III or Fe V).

After some million years, the gas and dust of the nebula will have been used up for forming stars (and planets), or blown away by the stellar winds of the young hot stars. A newly born open star cluster will remain. From the physical viewpoint, the nebulae are an early stage of evolution of star clusters.

The first diffuse nebula discovered was the Orion Nebula, M42, observed telescopically in 1610 by N. Peiresc. The diffuse nebulae were longly be considered as distant, unresolved star clusters, or star clouds, until in the 1860s spectroscopy revealed their gaseous nature by showing line spectra, in particular due to the pioneering research of William Huggins. Eventually, in 1912, Vesto M. Slipher discovered that the nebulae in the Pleiades, M45, had the same spectra as the stars illuminating them, thus proving their nature as reflection nebulae. Of Messier's nebulae, M78 is the only pure reflection nebula, and the first of these objects to be discovered; its nature as a reflection nebula was revealed in 1919, again by V.M. Slipher.

While all of Messier's diffuse nebulae belong to our Milky Way galaxy, most other galaxies (especially all spiral and irregular galaxies) also contain such objects.

Messier's diffuse nebulae: M8, M17, M20, M42, M43, M78. Moreover, open star cluster M16 (NGC 6611) is physically connected with the Eagle Nebula IC 4703, an H II region, and the Pleiades, M45, contain diffuse reflection nebulae. Other early known diffuse nebulae: NGC 2070, NGC 3372.

Links

● Diffuse Nebulae Catalogs List

● ARVAL Catalog of Bright Nebulae (Diffuse and SNRs)

● Diffuse Nebulae list from An Atlas of the Universe

● Look at Diffuse Nebulae in Messier's Catalog

● Also look at our small collection of some significant diffuse nebulae not in Messier's catalog

● Interstellar Matter text (Scholar series at the MAA)

References

● James B. Kaler, Cosmic Clouds, Scientific American Library, W.H. Freeman, 1997 (German edition: Kosmische Wolken, 1998)

Planetary Nebulae

Supernova Remnants

Dark Nebulae

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 23 Nov 2003 The Small Magellanic Cloud, SMC

Irregular Galaxy SMC, the Small Magellanic Cloud (NGC 292) in Tucana

Right Ascension 00 : 52.7 (h:m)

Declination -72 : 50 (deg:m)

Distance 210.0 (kly)

Visual Brightness 2.3 (mag)

Apparent Dimension 280 x 160 (arc min)

Known pre-historically on the Southern hemisphere. Probably mentioned by Amerigo Vespucci in 1503-4. Discovered by Magellan 1519.

Like its larger apparent neighbor, the Large Magellanic Cloud, the Small Magellanic Cloud was certainly known to the ancient southerners, and was probably mentioned by Amerigo Vespucci in a letter written during his third voyage about 1503-4, but became known to us only when Magellan went on his journey around the world, in 1519. The main body of the Small Magellanic Cloud has been assigned NGC 292 in Dreyer's catalog, which is now sometimes used for this galaxy. In addition, many clusters and nebulae which are members of this galaxy have been given their own NGC numbers.

This galaxy looks like a piece of the Milky Way for the naked eye. It orbits our Milky Way galaxy at about 210,000 light years distance, which makes it the third-nearest external galaxy known (after the LMC and the 1994 discovered Sagittarius Dwarf Elliptical Galaxy). Our current distance value takes into account the corrected Cepheid distance scale based on the Hipparcos satellite data published in early 1997.

The SMC is of irregular type. It may be a distorted barred disk, deformed by the tidal gravitational forces of Milky Way and LMC, but this is not sure. It contains several nebulae and star clusters which can be seen in photographs and through telescopes.

Our small neighboring galaxy contains the same kinds of objects as our Milky Way, in particular open clusters, diffuse nebulae, supernova remnants, planetary nebulae, and one globular cluster, NGC 121. It is situated well outside the denser regions of the galaxy, slightly north but not far from the galactic foreground globular 47 Tucanae (NGC 104).

● Some prominent SMC objects

It was the Small Magellanic Cloud where Miss Henrietta Leavitt discovered the period-luminosity relation of Cepheid variables, which is since then the most reliable method available for determining large cosmic distances.

In John Caldwell's observing list. In the Astronomical League's Southern Sky Binocular Club list.

The image in this page was obtained by David Malin with the Anglo-Australian Telescope. This image is copyrighted and may be used for private purpose only. For any other kind of use, including internet mirroring and storing on CD-ROM, please contact the Photo Permissions Department of the Anglo Australian Observatory. The image also shows two remarkable foreground objects, globular clusters of our own Milky Way galaxy: Situated on the right is conspicuous 47 Tucanae (NGC 104), while in the left top is NGC 362. These are, of course, much closer to us than the galaxy. ● More information on this image by David Malin

● Multispectral Image Collection of the Small Magellanic Cloud, SIRTF Multiwavelength Messier Museum

● NED data of SMC

● SIMBAD Data of the Small Magellanic Cloud (NGC 292)

● Observing Reports for NGC 292, Small Magellanic Cloud - SMC (IAAC Netastrocatalog)

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 29 Mar 1998 Ophiuchus

● Download map

Messier Objects in Ophiuchus: M9, M10, M12, M14, M19, M62, M107

● Constellation index

● More on constellation Ophiuchus [ MAA Original]

● More on Ophiuchus (Chris Dolan)

● Digital images - Constellation Ophiuchus page (T. Credner/S. Kohle) [ unframed version]

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Scorpius

● Download map

Messier Objects in Scorpius: M4, M6, M7, M80

● Constellation index

● More on constellation Scorpius [ MAA Original]

● More on Scorpius (Chris Dolan)

● Digital images - Constellation Scorpius page (T. Credner/S. Kohle) [ unframed version]

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Under construction!

Milky Way Spiral Structure

The disk of the Milky Way exhibits a spiral structure, which shows up in the distribution of the objects populating the disk component, i.e. population I stars and objects. These objects include, in particular, young stars, diffuse star-forming nebulae (H II regions) and open star clusters. Population I objects are very or rather young, in contrast to the very old population II objects of the Milky Way's Halo (globular clusters and old stars, including older planetary nebulae).

The origin of the spiral structure is thought to be in density waves which are triggered by gravitational disturbations, in particular during encounters with neighbor galaxies. The density waves first concern interstellar matter, which is compressed, forms diffuse nebulae which become starforming regions, and later form (open) clusters and associations of young stars, the most lumionous and conspicuous of which are massive, hot, blue and short-lived. Therefore, we see the most current density wave in the reddish H II regions, the elder next in the blueish clouds and associations of hot young stars, the next in age are characterized by type II (and Ib, Ic) supernova remnants and a bit older, less hot and blue open clusters. They can also be traced by the stars of the hotter spectral types, O, B, and A. The stars which are even older have dissipated into a more diffuse background; this includes intermediate population I stars, older star clusters and the younger representatives of the planetary nebulae.

The arms of the Milky Way, at least near the solar neighborhood in our Galaxy, are typically named for the constellations where (in the direction of which) more substantial parts of them are situated.

Our solar system is situated (by chance) in a smaller spiral arm, called the Local or Orion Arm, sometimes labelled "0". This small or intermediate arm connects the more substantial next inner arm and the next outer arm. The next inner arm, sometimes labelled "-I", is called the Sagittarius or Sagittarius-Carina Arm, the next outer arm, labelled "+I", is the Perseus Arm. At least one even outer arm, and two more inner arms have been identified.

A list of the Milky Way Spiral Arms follows, sorted from outside to inside near our solar neighborhood in the Galaxy:

● "+II", Outer Arm ● "+I", Perseus Arm ● "0", Local Arm, Orion Arm ● "-I", Sagittarius Arm, Sagittarius-Carina Arm ● "-II", Scutum-Crux Arm ●

These arms can be traced by deepsky objects, namely diffuse nebulae, open star clusters and associatons, (type II and Ib/Ic) supernova remnants, and main sequence stars of so-called "early" (hot) spectral types.

Perseus Arm

Object Con Type RA (2000) Dec dist

M 52 NGC 7654 Cas OC 23:24.2 +61:35 5.0 M103 NGC 581 Cas OC 01:33.2 +60:42 8.0 NGC 869 Per OC 02:19.0 +57:09 7.1 NGC 884 Per OC 02:22.4 +57:07 7.4 M 38 * NGC 1912 Aur OC 05:28.4 +35:50 4.2 M 1 NGC 1952 Tau SNR 05:34.5 +22:01 6.3 M 36 * NGC 1960 Aur OC 05:36.1 +34:08 4.1 M 37 * NGC 2099 Aur OC 05:52.4 +32:33 4.4

Orion Arm

Object Con Type RA (2000) Dec dist

M 6 NGC 6405 Sco OC 17:40.1 -32:13 2 M 7 NGC 6475 Sco OC 17:53.9 -34:49 0.8 M 23 NGC 6494 Sgr OC 17:56.8 -19:01 2.15 M 25 IC 4725 Sgr OC 18:31.6 -19:15 2 M 57 NGC 6720 Lyr PN 18:53.6 +33:02 2.3 M 27 NGC 6853 Vul PN 19:59.6 +22:43 1.25 M 29 NGC 6913 Cyg OC 20:23.9 +38:32 4.0 M 73 NGC 6994 Aqr OC? 20:58.9 -12:38 2.0 M 39 NGC 7092 Cyg OC 21:32.2 +48:26 0.825 M 76 NGC 650 Per PN 01:42.4 +51:34 3.4 M 34 NGC 1039 Per OC 02:42.0 +42:47 1.4 M 45 Tau C+N 03:47.0 +24:07 0.38 M 42 NGC 1976 Ori DN 05:35.4 -05:27 1.6 M 43 NGC 1982 Ori DN 05:35.6 -05:16 1.6 M 78 NGC 2068 Ori DN 05:46.7 +00:03 1.6 M 35 NGC 2168 Gem OC 06:08.9 +24:20 2.8 M 41 NGC 2287 CMa OC 06:46.0 -20:44 2.3 M 50 NGC 2323 Mon OC 07:03.2 -08:20 3 M 47 NGC 2422 Pup OC 07:36.6 -14:30 1.6 M 46 NGC 2437 Pup OC 07:41.8 -14:49 5.4 M 93 NGC 2447 Pup OC 07:44.6 -23:52 3.6 M 48 NGC 2548 Hya OC 08:13.8 -05:48 1.5 M 44 NGC 2632 Cnc OC 08:40.1 +19:59 0.577 M 67 NGC 2682 Cnc OC 08:50.4 +11:49 2.7 M 97 NGC 3587 UMa PN 11:14.8 +55:01 2.6 M 40 UMa DS 12:22.4 +58:05 0.51

Sagittarius Arm

Object Con Type RA (2000) Dec dist

M 20 NGC 6514 Sgr DN 18:02.6 -23:02 5.2 M 8 NGC 6523 Sgr DN 18:03.8 -24:23 5.2 M 21 NGC 6531 Sgr OC 18:04.6 -22:30 4.25 M 24 IC 4715? Sgr MWP 18:16.9 -18:29 10-15 NGC 6603 Sgr OC 18:18.4 -18:25 10 M 16 NGC 6611 Ser C/N 18:18.8 -13:47 7 M 18 NGC 6613 Sgr OC 18:19.9 -17:08 4.9 M 17 NGC 6618 Sgr DN 18:20.8 -16:11 5 M 26 NGC 6694 Sct OC 18:45.2 -09:24 5 M 11 * NGC 6705 Sct OC 18:51.1 -06:16 6

Notes:

● "*": Listed as in the Orion Arm in

References:

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 7 Dec 2000 Supernovae observed in the Milky Way: Historical Supernovae

Similar to other galaxies (including the Messier galaxies), there occur supernovae in our Milky Way at irregular intervals of time.

If they are not too heavily obscurred by interstellar matter, they can be seen as very spectacular events in the sky. Unfortunately, though, none of them has been well visible since the invention of the telescope, although modern estimates predict that every few decades one supernova should occur in a galaxy like the Milky Way.

Here we list the supernovae (sometimes only candidates, indicated by question marks) which have been recorded through the history of humanity.

Year Date Con mag Remnant Observed/Comments

2241 BC ?? ? -10 Dubiously listed in some source 352 BC ? Chinese; "first such record" according to Hellemans/Bunch 185 AD Cen -2 SNR 185 Chinese 369 ? Chinese 386 ? Chinese 393/396 Sco -3 SNR 393 Chinese 437 ? Gem 827 ? Sco/Oph -10 902 ? Cas 0 1006 Apr 30 Lup -9+-1 SNR 1006 Arabic; also Chinese, Japanese, European 1054 Jul 4 Tau -6 M1 Chinese, North American (?); also Arab, Japan 1181 Aug 6 Cas -1 Chinese and Japanese 1203 ? Sco 0 1230 ? Aql 1572 Nov 6 Cas -4 Tycho SNR Tycho Brahe's SN 1604 Oct 9 Oph -3 Kepler SNR Johannes Kepler's SN 1680? 1667? Cas Cas A Flamsteed ? not seen ?

Key: Year/Date: Time of observation/occurrance, Con: Constellation, mag: estimated in brightness maximum, Remnant: Identification of the supernova remnant

Restricting to the more or less safe supernova events, this table reduces significantly, most probably because of poor recording of our ancestors, to only 8 supernovae, one of which (185 AD) was even questioned recently:

Year Date Con RA Dec mag Comment/SNR

185 AD Cen 14:43.1 -62:28 -2 (-6 mag acc. to Sky Catalog 2000) SNR: G135.4-2.3/RCW 86 393/396 Sco 17:14 -39.8 -3 3 radio sources candidates for SNR 1006 Apr 30 Lup 15:02.8 -41:57 -9+-1 SNR: PKS 1459-41 1054 Jul 4 Tau 05:34.5 +22:01 -6 M1 1181 Aug 6 Cas 02:05.6 +64:49 -1 3C 58 Chinese and Japanese 1572 Nov 6 Cas 00:25.3 +64:09 -4 Tycho 1604 Oct 9 Oph 17:30.6 -21:29 -3 Kepler 1680? 1667? Cas 23:23.4 +58:50 6? Cas A SN

Key: Year/Date: Time of observation/occurrance, Con: Constellation, RA/Dec: Right Ascension and Declination (2000.0) mag: estimated apparent magnitude in brightness maximum

Even for the 185 AD event, doubts have been brought up on its nature as a supernova (Y.-N. Chin and Y.-L. Huang 1994, "Identification of the Guest Star of AD 185 as a Comet Rather than a Supernova", Nature 371, 398).

A notable event with some similarity to a supernova occurred with the star Eta Carinae in 1843, when it brightened to mag -0.8 and became the second brightest star in the heavens after Sirius, although it is at the great distance of 10,000 light years.

Only two supernovae have been discovered in other galaxies of the Local Group: SN 1885 or S Andromedae in the Andromeda Galaxy M31, and SN 1987A in the Large Magellanic Cloud.

Links:

● Michael Richmond's Information on the historical supernovae

● Historical Records of Supernovae (Cornell Univ., Astro 201) [Lists also SN 386 AD]

References:

● The Historical Supernovae, by D.H. Clark and F.R. Stephenson, Pergamon Press, 1977 ● Historical Supernovae, by F.R. Stephenson and D.H. Clark, Scientific American, Vol. 234, June 1976, p. 100-107. ● F. Richard Stephenson and David A. Green, 2003. A Millennium of Shattered Stars - Our Galaxy's Historical Supernovae. Sky and Telescope, Vol. 105, No. 5 (May 2003), p. 40-48.

● Please report me any errors, remarks and comments related to this list !

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 2 May 17:00 MET The Universe within 5 million Light Years The Local Group of Galaxies

Number of large galaxies within 5 million light years = 3 Number of dwarf galaxies within 5 million light years = 37 Number of stars within 5 million light years = 700 billion

About the Map

The Milky Way is one of three large galaxies belonging to the group of galaxies called the Local Group which also contains several dozen dwarf galaxies. Most of these galaxies are depicted on the map, although most dwarf galaxies are so faint, that there are probably several more waiting to be discovered.

Data and Catalogs

The Local Group There are at least 40 galaxies in the local group plus several more lying on on the borders. Here is a list of all the known members of the local group of galaxies.

Some of the galaxies in the Local Group

Shown below are four of the galaxies in the Local Group. The Triangulum galaxy (left) is a spiral galaxy and the third largest galaxy in the local group, it contains 50 billion stars. NGC 147 (top centre) is a dwarf elliptical galaxy and IC 10 (top right) is a dwarf irregular galaxy, they both contain tens of millions of stars. NGC 3109 (bottom right) is another dwarf irregular galaxy of several hundred million stars and it is also the largest member of a small sub-group of galaxies within the Local Group.

Astronomy Picture of the Day

Discover the cosmos! Each day a different image or photograph of our fascinating universe is featured, along with a brief explanation written by a professional astronomer.

May 19, 1996

Nearby Dwarf Galaxy Leo I Credit: Anglo-Australian Telescope photograph by David Malin Copyright: Anglo-Australian Telescope Board

Explanation: Leo I is a dwarf spheroidal galaxy in the Local Group of galaxies dominated by our Milky Way Galaxy and M31. Leo I is thought to be the most distant of the eleven known small satellite galaxies orbiting our Milky Way Galaxy. Besides the LMC and the SMC, all Milky Way satellite galaxies are small, dim, dwarf spheroidals, including the closest galaxy - the Sagittarius Dwarf. Leo I is most distant than most of them, thought to be about 250 kpc away. Analysis of stars in Leo I show it contains many stars only about 3 billion years old - much younger than in most galaxies.

Tomorrow's picture: Helios Helium

| Archive | Index | Search | Glossary | Education | About APOD |

Authors & editors: Robert Nemiroff (GMU) & Jerry Bonnell (USRA). NASA Technical Rep.: Sherri Calvo. Specific rights apply. A service of: LHEA at NASA/ GSFC

Age of the Universe

There are at least 3 ways that the age of the Universe can be estimated. I will describe

● The age of the chemical elements. ● The age of the oldest star clusters. ● The age of the oldest white dwarf stars.

The age of the Universe can also be estimated from a cosmological model based on the Hubble constant and the densities of matter and dark energy. This model-based age is currently 13.7 +/- 0.2 Gyr. But this Web page will only deal with actual age measurements, not estimates from cosmological models. The actual age measurements are consistent with the model-based age which increases our confidence in the Big Bang model.

The Age of the Elements

The age of the chemical elements can be estimated using radioactive decay to determine how old a given mixture of atoms is. The most definite ages that can be determined this way are ages since the solidification of rock samples. When a rock solidifies, the chemical elements often get separated into different crystalline grains in the rock. For example, sodium and calcium are both common elements, but their chemical behaviours are quite different, so one usually finds sodium and calcium in different grains in a differentiated rock. Rubidium and strontium are heavier elements that behave chemically much like sodium and calcium. Thus rubidium and strontium are usually found in different grains in a rock. But Rb-87 decays into Sr-87 with a half-life of 47 billion years. And there is another isotope of strontium, Sr-86, which is not produced by any rubidium decay. The isotope Sr-87 is called radiogenic, because it can be produced by radioactive decay, while Sr-86 is non-radiogenic. The Sr-86 is used to determine what fraction of the Sr-87 was produced by radioactive decay. This is done by plotting the Sr-87/Sr-86 ratio versus the Rb-87/Sr-86 ratio. When a rock is first formed, the different grains have a wide range of Rb-87/Sr-86 ratios, but the Sr-87/Sr-86 ratio is the same in all grains because the chemical processes leading to differentiated grains do not separate isotopes. After the rock has been solid for several billion years, a fraction of the Rb-87 will have decayed into Sr-87. Then the Sr-87/ Sr-86 ratio will be larger in grains with a large Rb-87/Sr-86 ratio. Do a linear fit of

Sr-87/Sr-86 = a + b*(Rb-87/Sr-86) and then the slope term is given by b = 2x - 1 with x being the number of half-lives that the rock has been solid. See the talk.origins isochrone FAQ for more on radioactive dating.

When applied to rocks on the surface of the Earth, the oldest rocks are about 3.8 billion years old. When applied to meteorites, the oldest are 4.56 billion years old. This very well determined age is the age of the Solar System. See the talk.origins age of the Earth FAQ for more on the age of the solar system.

When applied to a mixed together and evolving system like the gas in the Milky Way, no great precision is possible. One problem is that there is no chemical separation into grains of different crystals, so the absolute values of the isotope ratios have to be used instead of the slopes of a linear fit. This requires that we know precisely how much of each isotope was originally present, so an accurate model for element production is needed. One isotope pair that has been used is rhenium and osmium: in particular Re-187 which decays into Os-187 with a half-life of 40 billion years. It looks like 15% of the original Re-187 has decayed, which leads to an age of 8-11 billion years. But this is just the mean formation age of the stuff in the Solar System, and no rhenium or osmium has been made for the last 4.56 billion years. Thus to use this age to determine the age of the Universe, a model of when the elements were made is needed. If all the elements were made in a burst soon after the Big Bang, then the age of the Universe would be to = 8-11 billion years. But if the elements are made continuously at a constant rate, then the mean age of stuff in the Solar System is

(to + tSS)/2 = 8-11 Gyr which we can solve for the age of the Universe giving

to = 11.5-17.5 Gyr

Radioactive Dating of an Old Star

A very interesting paper by Cowan et al. (1997, ApJ, 480, 246) discusses the thorium abundance in an old halo star. Normally it is not possible to measure the abundance of radioactive isotopes in other stars because the lines are too weak. But in CS 22892-052 the thorium lines can be seen because the iron lines are very weak. The Th/Eu (Europium) ratio in this star is 0.219 compared to 0.369 in the Solar System now. Thorium decays with a half-life of 14.05 Gyr, so the Solar System formed with Th/Eu = 24.6/14.05*0.369 = 0.463. If CS 22892-052 formed with the same Th/Eu ratio it is then 15.2 +/- 3.5 Gyr old. It is actually probably slightly older because some of the thorium that would have gone into the Solar System decayed before the Sun formed, and this correction depends on the nucleosynthesis history of the Milky Way. Nonetheless, this is still an interesting measure of the age of the oldest stars that is independent of the main-sequence lifetime method.

A later paper by Cowan et al. (1999, ApJ, 521, 194) gives 15.6 +/- 4.6 Gyr for the age based on two stars: CS 22892-052 and HD 115444.

A another star, CS 31082-001, shows an age of 12.5 +/- 3 Gyr based on the decay of U-238 [Cayrel, et al. 2001, Nature, 409, 691-692]. Wanajo et al. refine the predicted U/Th production ratio and get 14.1 +/- 2.5 Gyr for the age of this star.

The Age of the Oldest Star Clusters

When stars are burning hydrogen to helium in their cores, they fall on a single curve in the luminosity-temperature plot known as the H-R diagram after its inventors, Hertzsprung and Russell. This track is known as the main sequence, since most stars are found there. Since the luminosity of a star varies like M3 or M4, the lifetime of a star on the main sequence varies like t=const*M/L=k/L0.7. Thus if you measure the luminosity of the most luminous star on the main sequence, you get an upper limit for the age of the cluster:

Age < k/L(MS_max)0.7

This is an upper limit because the absence of stars brighter than the observed L(MS_max) could be due to no stars being formed in the appropriate mass range. But for clusters with thousands of members, such a gap in the mass function is very unlikely, the age is equal to k/L(MS_max)0.7. Chaboyer, Demarque, Kernan and Krauss (1996, Science, 271, 957) apply this technique to globular clusters and find that the age of the Universe is greater than 12.07 Gyr with 95% confidence. They say the age is proportional to one over the luminosity of the RR Lyra stars which are used to determine the distances to globular clusters. Chaboyer (1997) gives a best estimate of 14.6 +/- 1.7 Gyr for the age of the globular clusters. But recent Hipparcos results show that the globular clusters are further away than previously thought, so their stars are more luminous. Gratton et al. give ages between 8.5 and 13.3 Gyr with 12.1 being most likely, while Reid gives ages between 11 and 13 Gyr, and Chaboyer et al. give 11.5 +/- 1.3 Gyr for the mean age of the oldest globular clusters.

The Age of the Oldest White Dwarfs

A white dwarf star is an object that is about as heavy as the Sun but only the radius of the Earth. The average density of a white dwarf is a million times denser than water. White dwarf stars form in the centers of red giant stars, but are not visible until the envelope of the red giant is ejected into space. When this happens the ultraviolet radiation from the very hot stellar core ionizes the gas and produces a . The envelope of the star continues to move away from the central core, and eventually the planetary nebula fades to invisibility, leaving just the very hot core which is now a white dwarf. White dwarf stars glow just from residual heat. The oldest white dwarfs will be the coldest and thus the faintest. By searching for faint white dwarfs, one can estimate the length of time the oldest white dwarfs have been cooling. Oswalt, Smith, Wood and Hintzen (1996, Nature, 382, 692) have done this and get an age of 9.5+1.1-0.8 Gyr for the disk of the Milky Way. They estimate an age of the Universe which is at least 2 Gyr older than the disk, so to > 11.5 Gyr.

Hansen et al. have used the HST to measure the ages of white dwarfs in the globular cluster M4, obtaining 12.7 +/- 0.7 Gyr. In 2004 Hansen et al. updated their analysis to give an age for M4 of 12.1 +/- 0.9 Gyr, which is very consistent with the age of globular clusters from the main sequence turnoff. Allowing allowing for the time between the Big Bang and the formation of globular clusters (and its uncertainty) implies an age for the Universe of 12.8 +/- 1.1 Gyr.

Tutorial: Part 1 | Part 2 | Part 3 | Part 4 FAQ | Age | Distances | Bibliography | Relativity

© 1997-2004 Edward L. Wright. Last modified 23 July 2004 Glossary of Astronomical and Cosmological Terms

Tutorial: Part 1 | Part 2 | Part 3 | Part 4 FAQ | Age | Distances | Bibliography | Relativity absorption line: a more or less narrow range of wavelengths in a spectrum that is darker than neighboring wavelengths. Absorption lines are seen in stars. angles: are measured in degrees or arcminutes (denoted by a single quote) or arcseconds (denoted by a double quote) or radians. 1 radian = 180/pi = 57.2958 degrees, 1 degree = 1o = 60 arcminutes = 60' = 3600 arcseconds = 3600". baryon: a massive elementary particle made up of three quarks. Neutrons and protons are baryons. blackbody: an object with a constant temperature that absorbs all radiation that hits it.

Cepheid: a type of pulsating variable star with a luminosity that can be determined from the period of its variation: Cepheids with long pulsation periods are bigger and thus more luminous than short period Cepheids. cold dark matter: a type of dark matter that was moving at much less than the speed of light 10,000 years after the Big Bang. (see dark matter) continuum: a smooth spectrum without emission or absorption lines. Some sources like tungsten lamps or blackbodies are purely continuum sources, while in sources with lines the continuum is a smooth spectrum drawn through the points between the lines.

CMB: Cosmic Microwave Background radiation, also CMBR, CBR and the "3 K blackbody radiation". Radiation left over from the hot Big Bang which has cooled by expansion to a temperature slightly less than 3 degrees above absolute zero. cosmological constant: a term in Einstein's general relativity equations that leads to an acceleration of the expansion of the Universe. Usually denoted by the capital Greek letter Lambda when expressed with units of inverse length squared, or by the lower-case Greek lambda when normalized to the critical density like Omega. critical density: the density of the Universe necessary so the expansion rate of the Universe is just barely sufficient to prevent a recollapse. Numerically the critical 2 2 -30 density is 3*Ho /[8*pi*G] or 19*[Ho/100] *10 gm/cc. dark matter: a form of matter that does not emit light, absorb light, or scatter light. Its only interactions are gravitational. density: the amount of matter in a volume divided by the volume, so the units are grams per cubic centimeter. Water has a density of 1 gram per cubic centimeter. The lower case Greek letter rho is usually used the symbolize density in equations. dipole: a pattern with one hot side of the sky and one cold side of the sky.

Doppler: 19th century physicist who discovered the variation in the wavelength of waves caused by motion of the source. electromagnetic force: one of the four forces of nature. Electromagnetic interactions hold electrons in atoms, hold atoms in molecules, and are used in all electronic devices. electroweak: a unified force that combines the electromagnetic and weak nuclear interactions. Predicted by Weinberg and Salam, experimentally verified by Rubbia and van der Meer. emission line: a more or less narrow range of wavelengths in a spectrum that is brighter than neighboring wavelengths. Emission lines are seen in quasars. energy: the ability to do work, with units of ergs or Joules. One Joule is 10,000,000 ergs. One erg is the kinetic energy of a 2 gram mass moving at one cm/sec. Energy per unit time is power, and 1 Watt of power is 1 Joule per second. escape velocity: the minimum velocity that will allow an object to escape from a gravitational field. fine structure constant, usually denoted as the lower case Greek alpha, is the dimensionless ratio e2/(hbar*c) = 1/137.03599976... [in cgs units, or e2/ (4*pi*epsilono*hbar*c) in MKS units], which gives the strength of the electromagnetic interaction. Here e is the electron charge, hbar is Planck's constant divided by 2*pi, and c is the speed of light. flux: power per unit area. The flux from the Sun at the Earth is 1367 Watts per square meter. This total power is often divided up into different frequency or wavelength bands, giving for example Watts per square meter per Hertz or ergs per square cm per second per micron. 1 Jansky is 10-26 Watts per square meter per Hertz. fluence: energy per unit area. Fluence is time times flux. gamma ray: a very high energy photon, more energetic than an X-ray.

Gyr: gigayear, or one billion years. See for a table of all the metric prefixes from yocto (10-24) to yotta (1024). grand unified theory: a model for unifying the strong nuclear force, the weak nuclear force, and the electromagnetic force into a single interaction. Several such GUTs have been proposed, but not yet experimentally verified. gravitational potential: the gravitational energy per unit mass of a particle, equivalent to the acceleration of gravity times the height in ordinary circumstances on the surface of the Earth. homogeneous: the same at all locations. Homgenized milk is not separated into cream and milk. horizon: the edge of the visible Universe, but not the edge of the Universe since the Universe has no edge.

Hot Big Bang: A model of the Universe beginning at very high density and temperature, which expands and cools to become like the Universe we observe now. hot dark matter: a type of dark matter that was moving at close to the speed of light 10,000 years after the Big Bang. (see dark matter)

Hubble constant: or Ho, the ratio of velocity to distance in the expansion of the Universe, so v = HD. The "o" [pronounced "naught"] on Ho means the current value, since the Hubble "constant" changes with time (but it is the same everywhere in the Universe at a given time). The measured value of Ho has also changed dramatically since even before Hubble's work, as shown in Huchra's Ho history. inflationary scenario: a modification of the Big Bang model in which a large cosmological constant exists temporarily early in the history of the Big Bang, leading to a rapid accelerating expansion of the Universe, which is then followed by the normal Big Bang model with a decelerating expansion. isotropic: the same in all directions. Anisotropic - not isotropic. Anisotropy - difference between different directions. In the standard color scheme for CMB anisotropy maps measured by the COBE DMR, red shows areas of the sky that are warmer, while blue shows the cooler regions.

Lambda: the upper case Greek Lambda is usually used to denote Einstein's cosmological constant. A non-zero Lambda indicates a non-zero vacuum energy density and causes a long-range repulsive effect which leads to the accelerating expansion of the Universe.

Lyman alpha line: the strongest line in the spectrum of the most common atom in the Universe, hydrogen. It is emitted at a wavelength of 122 nm. The general formula for the wavelength of hydrogen lines is

1/wavelength = [n-2 - m-2]/91.2 where n = 1, 2, 3, ... is the lower state quantum number and m = n+1, n+2, ... is the upper state quantum number. When n = 1, these lines with m = 2, 3, ... are called Lyman alpha, Lyman beta, ... and form the Lyman series. When n = 2, these lines with m = 3, 4, ... are called H-alpha, H-beta, ... and form the Balmer series.

MACHO: MAssive Compact Halo Object, and also one of projects searching for MACHOs by looking for gravitational microlensing: the other projects are EROS and OGLE. A MACHO is an object with a mass from about 10 billion tons to solar masses. If it is made out neutrons and protons then it is baryonic dark matter, but primordial black holes are a non-baryonic dark matter version of MACHOs. magnitude: a scale used by astronomers to measure flux. Each 5 units on the magnitude scale corresponds to a 100-fold decrease in the flux. The Sun has magnitude - 26.5. Sirius, the brightest star in the night sky, has magnitude -1.6. The faintest stars visible with the naked eye have magnitude 6. micron: one micrometer, 0.000001 meters. Visible light has wavelengths between 0.4 and 0.7 microns. 1 micron is 10,000 Angstroms, or 1000 nanometers (nm). 1 nanometer is 0.000000001 meters. nanowatt or nW: one billion'th of a watt. neutralino: a particle predicted by supersymmetry models of the forces of nature. These models predict that each type of known particle will have a supersymmetric partner. The neutralino is the lightest electrically neutral supersymmetric partner, and it is a candidate for cold dark matter. As of 1999, no supersymmetric partner particles of any kind have been observed experimentally. A neutralino is one type of WIMP. non-baryonic: not made up of neutrons, protons and electrons, and thus not like any of the known chemical elements.

Nucleon: a neutron or a proton - one of the particles inside an atomic nucleus.

Omega: the ratio of the density of the Universe to the critical density. omega: the lower case Greek omega is often used to denote Omega*h^2, where h=Ho/[100 km/sec/Mpc]. Since Omega is the density divided by the critical density, and 2 -30 the critical density is 3*Ho /[8*pi*G], this combination is just proportional to the physical density. omega=1 corresponds to 19*10 gm/cc, or in SI: 19 yoctograms per cubic meter. : a unit of distance used by astronomers, corresponding to a parallax of one arc-second. Equal to 3.085678x1013 kilometers, or 3.26 light-years. kpc: 1000 ; Mpc: 1 million parsecs.

QSO: quasi-stellar object. The first discovered QSO's were radio sources, leading to the name quasi-stellar radio sources, or QSRS, or quasars. These objects look like stars on an image of the sky, but their spectra show strong emission lines at high redshift. The redshift means that quasars are very far away, and are thus the most luminous objects in the Universe. quadrupole: a type of pattern on the sky which generally has two high spots and two low spots. quantum fluctuations: the uncertainty principle in quantum mechanics leads to all allowed interactions occuring with some probability. quark: An elementary, strongly interacting constituent of matter. Quarks come in six flavors: up, down, charm, strange, top and bottom. The up, charm and top quarks have electric charges of +(2/3)e, while the down, strange and bottom quarks have charges of -(1/3)e. The proton which has a charge of +e is constructed of two up quarks and one down quark: (uud), while the neutron is (udd). redshift: the Doppler shift for objects receding from the Earth causes the wavelengths of light to get longer, and hence shift into the red part of the spectrum. Because of the expansion of the Universe, objects with high redshift are far away, and we see them as they were a long time ago. spectrum: result of spreading out light by wavelengths. A rainbow is a natural spectrum. The eye is sensitive to waves from violet at 380 nm wavelength to red at 700 nm wavelength, but astronomers now study electromagnetic radiation from gamma rays through X-rays, ultraviolet, violet, blue, green, yellow, orange, red, infrared and radio waves.

Steady State: a model of the expanding Universe with constant density and physical properties. Matter must be continually created to maintain the constant density. steradian: the unit of solid angle. There are 4*pi steradians in the entire celestial sphere. One square degree is (1/57.3)2 steradians because one degree is (1/57.3) radians. strong nuclear force: one of the four forces of nature. The strong nuclear force holds the particles in the nucleus of atoms together. time dilation: in special relativity, moving clocks appear to run slowly when compared to stationary clocks. This clock slowing is called time dilation. vacuum energy density: Quantum theory requires empty space to be filled with particles and anti-particles being continually created and annihilated. This could lead to a net density of the vacuum, which if present, would behave like a cosmological constant. weak nuclear force: one of the four forces of nature. The weak nuclear force is responsible for radioactive decay as well as the fusion reactions in the Sun that provide heat and light for the Earth.

WIMP: a Weakly Interacting Massive Particle, a possible form for cold dark matter. zero point energy: the uncertainty principle does not allow a quantum mechanical system to have a definite position and definite velocity at the same time. Thus a harmonic oscillator like a pendulum or a mass on a spring has a minimum energy that is larger than zero, since zero energy would require a definite position to zero the potential energy and a definite (zero) velocity to zero the kinetic energy. This minimum energy is 0.5*h*f, where h is Planck's constant and f is the frequency of the oscillator.

Ned Wright's home page

Tutorial: Part 1 | Part 2 | Part 3 | Part 4 FAQ | Age | Distances | Bibliography | Relativity

© 1996-2005 Edward L. Wright. Last modified 21 Feb 2005 Groups and Clusters of Galaxies with Messier objects

Galaxies are usually members of groups or clusters, and those listed in Messier's catalog are no exceptions. Below please find those groups containing Messier galaxies.

Groups of Galaxies containing at least two Messier objects

Ordered roughly by Right Ascension.

Local Group of Galaxies Messier objects: The Andromeda Galaxy M31 and its satellites M32 and M110, as well as the Triangulum galaxy M33. Other members (over 30 in all) include our Milky Way Galaxy, the Large and the Small Magellanic Cloud (LMC and SMC), as well as several smaller galaxies. It is also somehow associated with the group around the large elliptical Maffei1. M81 group Messier objects: M81 and M82. This group is very nearby, only some 11 million light-years distant. Other members include NGC 3077 and NGC 2976, an outlying member of the group is NGC 2403. M96 group (Leo I group) Messier objects: M95, M96, M105. There are many more galaxies in this group, including NGC 3384 in the same field as M105. Leo triplett (M66 group) M65 (NGC 3623), M66 (NGC 3627) and NGC 3628. Probably physically related to the M96 group. Ursa Major Cloud Messier objects (probable members): M108, M109. A large and vast cloud of galaxies of at least 79 member galaxies. Virgo Cluster of Galaxies (or Coma-Virgo Cluster) Messier objects: M49, M58, M59, M60, M61, M84, M85, M86, M87, M88, M89, M90, M91, M98, M99, and M100. The Virgo Cluster with its some 2000 member galaxies dominates our intergalactic neighborhood, as it represents the physical center of our Local Supercluster, and influences all the galaxies and galaxy groups by the gravitational attraction of its enormous mass. Our Local Group has experienced a speed-up of 100..400 km/sec towards this cluster (the Virgo-centric flow), and it is still unclear if at one time it will fall and merge into the cluster. HST observations of Cepheids in M100, together with the work of Nial R. Tanvir on the M96 group extrapolated to this cluster, indicate that the Virgo cluster is at a distance of some 60 million light-years. M51 group Messier objects: M51, M63. M94 Group, CVn I Cloud Messier objects: M64, M94. This vast and loose group or cloud of galaxies is listed by various sources but not in R. Brent Tully's Nearby Galaxies Catalog.

Further Messier galaxies contained in groups

The following list contains the Messier galaxies which are members of groups but not listed above; usually, some info on the corresponding groups is included in the object pages for these galaxies. It is ordered roughly by Right Ascension again.

● M74 is probably the chief member of a small physical group of galaxies (the M74 group)

● M77 is the dominating member of a small but remarkable group of galaxies, the M77 group (sometimes also called the NGC 1068 group).

● M106 is the brightest member of the Canes Venatici II (CVn II) group or M106 group of galaxies

● M104 is the dominating member of a small group called the M104 group or NGC 4594 group of galaxies.

● M83 forms the M83 group together with some conspicuous but quite southern galaxies, including Centaurus A (NGC 5128) and the unusual galaxy NGC 5253. This group is sometimes also referred to as Centaurus A group or NGC 5128 group. ● M101 forms the M101 group of at least 9 galaxies with several faint companions. Some sources suppose some physical connection with the M51 group but this is doubtful. ● The M102 candidate NGC 5866 is the brightest member of a conspicuous group of galaxies in Draco, the NGC 5866 group, which contains (besides NGC 5866) the bright edge-on spiral NGC 5907, NGC 5879, and a lot of fainter galaxies.

Links:

● A List of Nearby Galaxy Groups and The major Groups and Clusters of Galaxies within 200 million ly from An Atlas of the Universe

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: November 14, 2004 Groups and Clusters of Galaxies

Click icon for an index of galaxy groups and clusters containing galaxies of Messier's catalog

Our icon shows a region near the center of the Virgo Cluster of galaxies, near the large lenticulars M84 and M86.

Galaxies do not usually occur as isolated "island universes" in space which which float lonely through an otherwise empty universe, but normally form groups of several individuals, in a wide range from few or few dozens of galaxies to large clusters of up to several thousands. The galaxies of these groups are in mutual gravitational interaction which may have significant influence on their appearance.

Messier's galaxies are no exceptions, but in virtually all cases members of groups and clusters of galaxies; moreover, Messier had even discovered the nearest big cluster of galaxies, the Virgo Cluster, although at his time, the nature of galaxies was not recognized; thus he wrote of a concentration of nebulae, of which he had cataloged 16. This huge agglomeration contains several dozens of large and thousands of small galaxies.

Our own galaxy, the Milky Way, is also a member of a smaller group of galaxies, the Local Group, which contains three large and over 30 small galaxies. Together with most nearby galaxy groups (and field galaxies), the Local Group is part of the so-called Local or Virgo Supercluster, which is dominated by the big Virgo Cluster.

Big clusters like Virgo have a tendency to attract and finally incorporate the small groups and individual galaxies in their immediate neighborhood as time goes by. Besides accumulating mass, the cluster also grows in volume because of the following process: The incoming galaxies are accelerated by the cluster's gravity, and fall in with high velocities. Having reached the cluster, they transfer their kinetic energy during encounters to member galaxies, and thus "heat" the cluster. Like a gas, the heated cluster expands to a larger volume.

It is not yet clear if our Local Group will at one time be "eaten" by the Virgo cluster.

Links

optical and x-ray images (White, U. Alabama)

● Galaxy Cluster Catalogs List

● The Abell Catalogue of Clusters of Galaxies is available online thanks to Mikkel Steine

● Groups and Clusters of Galaxies containing Messier Objects

● Look at our collection of other significant clusters and groups of galaxies

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: January 25, 1998 The Virgo Cluster of Galaxies

Also: Coma-Virgo cluster of Galaxies

This giant agglomeration of galaxies is the nearest big cluster of galaxies, the largest proven structure in our intergalactic neighborhood, and the most remote cosmic objects with a physical connection to our own small group of galaxies, the Local Group, including our Milky Way galaxy. This structure is another discovery by Charles Messier, who noted behind his entry for M91 (here quoted from Kenneth Glyn Jones' book):

``The constellation Virgo and especially the northern wing is one of the constellations which encloses the most nebulae. This catalog contains 13 which have been determined, viz. Nos. 49, 58, 59, 60, 61, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90 and 91. All these nebulae appear to be without stars and can be seen only in a good sky and near meridian passage. Most of these nebulae have been pointed out to me by M. Méchain.''

Together with his later entries, 98, 99, and 100, Messier had cataloged 16 members of the Virgo cluster which he viewed as a 'cluster of nebulae'. Pierre Méchain, in a letter of 1783, stated that he had seen even more "Nebulae" in this region which "Messier had not seen;" unfortunately, no records are known indicating which galaxies this may have been.

Our image shows a star chart drawn by Messier, cropped from a larger chart he published with his observations of the comet of 1779 (all 16 Messier objects are marked in this drawing). This discovery occured in 1781, significantly more than a century before the true nature of galaxies was realized in the 1920s ! A long history of exploration still had to pass until its nature as a physical cluster of galaxies became obvious.

Messier galaxies which are Virgo cluster members: M49, M58, M59, M60, M61, M84, M85, M86, M87, M88, M89, M90, M91, M98, M99, and M100.

The Virgo Cluster with its some 2000 member galaxies dominates our intergalactic neighborhood, as it represents the physical center of our Local Supercluster (also called Virgo or Coma-Virgo Supercluster), and influences all the galaxies and galaxy groups by the gravitational attraction of its enormous mass. It has slowed down the escape velocities (due to cosmic expansion, the `Hubble effect') of all the galaxies and galaxy groups around it, thus causing an effective matter flow towards itself (the so-called Virgo-centric flow). Eventually many of these galaxies have fallen, or will fall in the future, into this giant cluster which will increase in size due to this effect. Our Local Group has experienced a speed-up of 100..400 km/sec towards the Virgo cluster. Current data on the mass and velocity of the Virgo cluster indicate that the Local Group is probably not off far enough to escape, so that its recession from Virgo will probably be halted at one time, and then it will fall and merge into, or be eaten by the cluster, see our Virgo Cluster & Local Group page.

Because of the Virgo Cluster's enormous mass, its strong gravity accelerates the member galaxies to considerably high peculiar velocities, up to over 1500 km/sec, with respect to the cluster's center of mass. Investigations over the past decades have revealed a quite complex dynamic structure of this huge irregular aggregate of galaxies. The Virgo cluster is close enough that some of its galaxies, which happen to move fast through the cluster in our direction, exhibit the highest blue- shifts (instead of cosmological redshifts) measured for any galaxies, i.e. are moving toward us: The record stands for IC 3258, which is approaching us at 517 km/sec. As the cluster is receding from us at about 1,100 km/sec, this galaxy must move with over 1,600 km/sec through the Virgo Cluster's central region. Analogously, those galaxies which happen to move fastest away from us through the cluster, are receding at more than double redshift than the cluster's center of mass: The record is hold by NGC 4388 at 2535 km/sec, so that this galaxy moves peculiarly in the direction away from us at over 1,400 km/sec.

Our image shows the central portion of the Virgo Cluster of Galaxies, and is centered on the giant elliptical galaxy M87 which is considered to be the dominant galaxy of the whole giant cluster, situated close to its physical center. The two bright galaxies on the right (west) are (right-to-left) M84 and M86; starting from these two, a chain of galaxies ("Markarian's chain") stretches well to the upper (northern) middle of our image (and beyond, well to M88 which is slightly outside above the sky area photographed our image). The appealing group around these two giant lenticulars is described with M84, and in our collection of images with M84 and M86; we also have images of M87 together with Markarian's chain around M84 and M86. To the left (east) of M87, the considerably bright elliptical (type E0) M89 occurs (on roughly the same declination as M87), above it and slightly more left is the inclined and conspicuous spiral M90, while below (south) and left of M89 there is M58, sitting just on the edge of our image.

● Read a more detailed discussion of our image, identifying some of the fainter NGC galaxies.

● View the Virgo Cluster in X-ray light, or

● Compare the visual and X-ray appearance or an enlargement of the central part around M87.

● View an X-ray/Radio Overlay image of the Virgo Cluster

● Look at our table of Virgo Cluster members, showing some brighter non-Messier members also

● Limber Observatory near San Antonio, Texas, provides a clickable map of the Virgo cluster with links to images of the Messier galaxies.

● Observing the Virgo Cluster of Galaxies - our hints for observers

● Scott D. Davis' sketch of Virgo cluster galaxies around M84, M86, M87 and many fainter galaxies

● Bill Ferris' Virgo Cluster chart and observations page; he also features Markarian's chain

● The Virgo Mainline: Galaxy Hopping "Markarian's Chain", by Steve Gottlieb

● The Virgo Supercluster within 100 million Light Years from An Atlas of the Universe

● Identify galaxies in the heart of the Virgo cluster interactively

As the Virgo Cluster is such an important object in our wider intergalactic neighborhood, its distance from us is of great interest, also for the determination of the cosmic distance scale, and for cosmological issues. Semi-recent HST observations (from the 1990s) of Cepheids in M100, as well as estimates from the globular cluster luminosity in M87, together with the work of Nial R. Tanvir and, again, HST observations, on the M96 group, extrapolated to this cluster, indicate that the Virgo cluster is at a distance of some 60 million light-years. Historically, the Virgo Cluster distance has been subject of controversial discussion since Hubble's earliest (and systematically too small) estimates.

References for further reading:

● Bruno Binggeli, 1999. The Virgo Cluster - Home of M87. in: Proceedings of a workshop held at Ringberg Castle, Tegernsee, Germany, 15-19 September 1997, by Hermann-Josef Röser, Klaus Meisenheimer (eds.), Springer, Berlin & New York. Available online - framed version

● Virgo cluster optical and x-ray images (White, U. Alabama)

● An ESO Workshop, held in Garching, September 4-7, 1984, was completely devoted to the Virgo Cluster of Galaxies. See ESO Conference and Workshop Proceedings No. 20, 1985, edited by O.-G. Richter and B. Binggeli.

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: May 11, 2005

Besides being a considerably successful comet hunter and deep-sky discoverer, Charles Messier was also a skilled carthographer of the heavens. This was of particular importance for him, because for every comet discovery, he published a map of the comet's trajectory in the Memoirs of the French Academy of Sciences. These maps, although not intended to be so, were also some of the most up-to-date star charts available.

Our map presents the path of the comet of 1779 from the constellation Hercules thru Corona and Bootes to Coma Berenices and Virgo.

If we look carefully at the detail of the region around Coma at the right, we see a number of nebulous objects with labels like "nebula 1777" or "nebula 1780." These are some of the nebulae that Messier was publishing almost simultaneously in his famous nebula catalog of 1781. There are no less than 28 Messier objects depicted in the full comet map, many of them for the first time.

Messier's chart of the Coma-Virgo Region

The path of the comet in the first week of April, 1779, is charted at lower left. There are a number of nebulae depicted in Coma, indicated by the letters a,b,c, etc. as well as several others identified by their year of discovery. There is also a cluster of eleven newly discovered nebulae at lower right, numbered 1 to 11. These are part of the famous Virgo cluster of nebulae.

In this chart, the following Messier objects can be identified:

● M49 = "Nebul. 1771",

● M58--M60 = "3 Nebul. 1779" (r-to-l),

● M61 = "Neb. 1779",

● M84--M91 and M98--M100 = "Onze Neb. Observees en 1781", labeled with numbers as follows:

● M84 = 5,

● M85 = 4,

● M86 = 6,

● M87 = 7,

● M88 = 8,

● M89 = 9,

● M90 = 10,

● M91 (wrong position) = 11,

● M98 = 1,

● M99 = 2,

● M100 = 3.

For his star charts, Messier used the plates in the Fortin edition of John Flamsteed's Atlas celeste of 1776.

From the Out of This World: The Golden Age of the Celestial Atlas Exhibition of Rare Books from the Collection of the Linda Hall Library.

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 7 Feb 1998 Messier Objects in the Virgo Cluster

In this chart of the Virgo Cluster region by Charles Messier, he has marked the positions of all 16 Messier Objects in this region:

● Near the bottom and in the right half, "Neb. 1779" is M61

● Below the image's center, "Nebul. 1771" is M49

● Left of the image's center, "3 Nebul. 1779" are, from left to right: M60, M59, and M58.

● The "Onze Neb. Observees en 1781" (Eleven Nebulae Observed in 1781) are M84--M91 and M98--M100:

❍ M98 = 1,

❍ M99 = 2,

❍ M100 = 3,

❍ M85 = 4,

❍ M84 = 5,

❍ M86 = 6,

❍ M87 = 7,

❍ M88 = 8,

❍ M89 = 9,

❍ M90 = 10,

❍ M91 (wrong position) = 11,

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 26 Jan 2001

M 91

Spiral Galaxy M91 (NGC 4548), type SBb, in Coma Berenices

Right Ascension 12 : 35.4 (h:m)

Declination +14 : 30 (deg:m)

Distance 60000 (kly)

Visual Brightness 10.2 (mag)

Apparent Dimension 5.4x4.4 (arc min)

Discovered most probably by Charles Messier in 1781. Independently rediscovered by William Herschel in the on April 8, 1784.

On March 18, 1781, Charles Messier discovered the unusually large number of 8 nebulous objects, all in the region of today's border of the constellations Virgo and Coma Berenices, i.e. Virgo Cluster galaxies (plus one additional object, globular cluster M92 in Hercules). The last of these eight objects was cataloged by him as M91, but his position was erroneous.

Thus, for a long time, M91 was a missing Messier object, as Messier had determined its position from M89 while he thought it was from M58, as the Texas amateur William C. Williams of Fort Worth has figured out in 1969 (Williams 1969). Thus, the identity of M91 with NGC 4548, which had been cataloged H II.120 by William Herschel on April 8, 1784, was finally uncovered. Previous opinions have been that M91 had either been a comet which the great comet hunter Messier mistook for a nebula, and Owen Gingerich had suspected that it had been a duplicate observation of M58. William Herschel had not found M91 at Messier's erroneous position and suspected that it might have been NGC 4571 (his H III.602), a beautiful but faint 11.3 mag barred spiral (NGC 4571 came into discussion in summer 1994 when a group of astronomers at the Canada France Hawaii Telescope (CFHT) used observations of 3 Cepheids in this galaxy for a determination of the Hubble constant).

The barred spiral galaxy M91 is an appealing member of the Virgo Cluster of Galaxies. It is of type SBb and its bar is very conspicuous, lying at position angle 65/245 degrees (as measured from the North direction to the East). As its recession velocity is only about 400 km/sec, it has a considerable peculiar velocity toward us through the Virgo cluster, about 700 km/sec, as the cluster's recession velocity is about 1100 km/sec.

The membership of Messier 91 in the Virgo Cluster of Galaxies was confirmed by a recent measurement of its distance as 52 +/- 6 million light years by detecting Cepheid variables. These measurements were done by the Hubble Space Telescope H0 Key Project Team (paper XX, 1997). This coincides well with the value for other Virgo galaxies, including M100. The difference of their to our value is mainly due to another distance of the Large Magellanic Cloud assumed by them - the Hipparcos correction would increase their distance to about 58 Mly.

For the moderately equipped amateur, M91 is one of the most difficult Messier objects. Suggestions of this bar may be seen at medium power even in smaller telescopes, if the viewing conditions are good enough to see the galaxy at all. Photos show the bar more clearly, and show the spiral arms emanating from the ends of the bar.

Messier had described M91 as "Nebula without stars, fainter than M90". John Herschel described it as bright, large, little elongated, little brighter in the middle in his General Catalogue, while in his earlier observations, he describes its shape once as "pretty much elongated" and twice as "round". This is probably because of different viewing conditions: Under poor conditions, only the bright elongated bar region of this galaxy shows up, while under good conditions the spiral arms show up and exhibit an almost round to slightly elongated shape. This effect can be reproduced to some degree with amateur instruments.

● Historical Observations and Descriptions of M91

● Hubble Space Telescope images of M91

● More images of M91

● Amateur images of M91

● SIMBAD Data of M91

● NED Data of M91

● Publications on M91 (NASA ADS)

● Observing Reports for M91 (IAAC Netastrocatalog)

References

● H0 Key Project materials on M91:

❍ The HST Key Project Archives - M91

❍ John A. Graham et.al., 1997. The Hubble Space Telescope Key Project on the Extragalactic Distance Scale. XX. The Discovery of Cepheids in the Virgo Cluster Galaxy NGC 4548. The Astrophysical Journal, Volume 516, Issue 2, p. 626-646.

● William C. Williams, 1969. Letter to the Editor. Sky & Telescope, Vol. 38, No. 6, December 1969, p. 376. Available online.

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Last Modification: 28 Dec 2002 Pierre Méchain's Letter of May 6, 1783

Pierre Méchain has contributed a number of deepsky object discoveries to the Messier Catalog, but also discovered some more "nebulae", which he communicated to Bernoulli in Berlin in a letter dated May 6, 1783. This letter was published in German language in the Astronomisches Jahrbuch for 1786, p. 231-237.

From: Astronomisches Jahrbuch für das Jahr 1786. nebst einer Sammlung der neuesten in die astronomischen Wissenschaften einschlagenden Abhandlungen, Beobachtungen und Nachrichten [Astronomical Yearbook for the Year 1786. in addition to a collection of the newest treatises, observations and news], edited by J.E. Bode. Berlin, 1783. [16.] Ueber die Bahn des zweyten Kometen von 1781. Entdeckung einiger Nebelsterne; die Elemente der Bahn des neuen Planeten und astronomische Beobachtungen [On the orbit of the second comet of the year 1781. Discovery of some nebulous stars; the elements of the orbit of the new planet and astronomical observations], by Mr Méchain, in Paris, p. 231-237.

Translated from German by H. Frommert

>> Comets >> Nebulae -- M105 -- M102 -- M104 -- M108/M109 -- M106 -- M107 >> Uranus >> Observations

On the Orbit of the second Comet

of the Year 1781. Discovery of some Nebulous Stars; the Elements of the Orbit of the new Planet and astronomical Observations.

by Mr. Méchain in Paris, from a letter of him to Mr. Bernoulli, of May 6, 1783.

[On cometary orbits] Herewith follow the elements requested by Mr. Bode of the orbits of the two last comets which appeared in the year 1781, and equally the positions of the new nebulous stars discovered by me.

The elements of the orbit of the first comet of the year 1781, are given in the Connoissance des tems [sic] for 1784. page 365, I think, that I have sent you such [elements] more than a year ago, and without doubt, you or Mr. Bode will have the volume for 1784. at hand. (*)

The main pieces of the orbit of the second comet of 1781 (**) I give here, as they have been calculated by me after the very beautiful method of Mr. de la Place, which will be published in the Memoirs of the Academy for 1780.

The ascending node 2s 17d 22' 55" The inclination of hte orbit 27 12 4 Longitude of perihelion in the orbit 0 16 3 7 Distance at perihelion 0.9609951 Average time of the perihelion passage the 29th of Nov. 12h 42' 46"

The motion is retograde. (***)

These elements differ only insignificantly from thise which I have found by the conventional methods. I have found most of my observations obtained from Octob. 9 to Dec. 25, acurate to 1 minute with this theory, and the largest deviations never exceed 2 minutes. Meanwhile the apparent path of this comet in the sky extended for almost 170 degrees. In its true orbit, it traversed an arc of 97d 20' and the heliocentric latitude changed by 27d 22' from the day I discovered it to Dec. 25. On Nov. 9 at 6 1/4 o'clock in the evening, it passed only 40 min near the north pole of the . (****) It has passed its ascending node on Octob. 10. On Dec. 25, when its northern geocentric latitude was only 16d 30' yet, it was standing almost in opposition to the place where it had been discovered. At the end of October and the beginning of November it was visible to the naked eye. The tail was steadily quite short and almost only recognizable in the telescope.

(*) These elements are already printed in the Jahrbuch 1785. page 166.

(**) See astronom. Jahrbuch f. 1785. page 164 166 and following.

(***) Simultaneously, look at my [Bode's] main pieces of the orbit of this comet found by a casual drawing in the Jahrbuch for 1785. page 168.

(****) See astronomisches Jahrbuch for 1785. page 167. and Fig. 1 on the 3rd table.

[On nebulous objects] Concerning the nebulous stars or nebulous patches, I'm not able to satisfy Mr. Bode['s] request, because up to now I was lacking time to determine the acurate positions of allthose I have discovered. Therfore, I only want to give the positions of some which are not included in the Connoissance des tems [sic] f. 1784 [Messier's Catalog], and will indicate the others in such a manner that one will be able to recognize them. (**) [M105] Mr. Messier mentions there on page 264 and 265 two nebulous stars, which I have discovered in the Lion [Leo; M95 and M96]. I find nothing to correct for the given positions which I have determined by comparison of their situation with respect to Regulus. There is, however, a third one, somewhat more northerly, which is even more vivid [brighter] than the two preceding ones. I discovered this one on March 24, 1781, 4 or 5 days after I had found the other two. On April 10, I compared its situation with Gamma Leonis from which followed its right ascension 159d 3' 45" and its northern declination of 13d 43' 58".

[M102] On page 267 of the Connoissance des tems [sic] f. 1784. Mr. Messier lists under No. 102 a nebula, which I have discovered between Omicron [actually Theta] Bootis and Iota Draconis; but this is a mistake. This nebula is the same as the preceding No. 101. Mr. Messier, caused by an error in the sky charts, has confused this one in the list of my nebulous stars communicated to him.

[M104] On May 11, 1781, I discovered a nebula above the Raven [Corvus], which did not appear to me to contain any single star. It is of a faint light and difficult to find when the wires of the micrometer are illuminated. I have compared it on this day and the following with Spica in the Virgin and from this derived its right ascension 187d 9' 42" and its southern declination 10d 24' 49". It does not appear in the Connoissance des tems.

[Virgo Cluster] On page 262 and 263, Mr. Messier mentions various nebulae, which I indicated to him. There are, however, in that region some others also, which he has not seen and the positions of which I intend to determine, as soon as I will have a comfortable observing place, which will not be delayed for long any more.

[M108, M109] Page 265 No. 97 [M97]. A nebula near Beta in the Great Bear. Mr. Messier mentions, when indicating its position, two others, which I also have discovered and of which one is close to this one [M108], the other is situated close to Gamma in the Great Bear [M109], but I could not yet determine their positions.

[M106] In July 1781 I found another nebula close to the Great Bear near the star No. 3 of the Hunting Dogs and 1 deg more south, I estimate its right ascension 181d 40' and its northern declination about 49d. I will be going to determine the more acurate position of this one shortly.

[M107] In April 1782 I discovered a small nebula in the left flank of Ophiuchus between the stars Zeta and Phi, the position of which I have not yet observed any closer.

This is, up to what is included in the mentioned Connoissance des tems [sic], all I have done concerning the nebulous stars. I will make up a separate memoir about that, and closer determine their positions and appearances.

(**) See the list of nebulous stars observed by Mr. Messier and Mr. Méchain since 1771. Page 164 [of the same Jahrbuch].

[On the new planet] Now I will report to you a little bit about the new planet of Mr. Herschel, which I have busily observed from April 25, 1781 to now. I have tried on different occasions to find a circular orbit, which meets the requirement of my observations and always noticed, that it was necessary with the progress of time to assume a smaller radius vector; for that given by Mr. de la Place was always too large. In the of July 1782, I undertook the attempt to obtain an ellipse from 4 selected observations, of which the outermost two were about a year apart, by which I obtained an impression of the elements of the orbit. Aftr the last opposition, Mr. de la Place requested 4 acurate observations from me, of which the two outermost would lie as far apart as I ever had them; but the two others should just include the oppositions of 1781 and 1782. Consequently he has thought up a very simple and meaningful method, by which he has found the measures of an ellipse which represents the four observations mentioned above very well, and which leaves only an error of 8 to 9 seconds for the observation of April 26, 1782. For my part, I have made use of a very simple method which Mr. Boskovich has communicated to me, which is based on the same 4 observations, of which the outermost are 594 days apart. I have calculated an ellipse, according to which the outermost observations agree exactly, and the two between them differ only 4 or 8 seconds more. Just this exact agreement also occurs for the other observations. Eventually, this ellipse gives the longitude only 7 seconds larger that the observation of the last April 26 [1783], 121 days after the last which it was based upon. The planet has not yet traversed a sufficiently large piece of arc and the deviation of its motion is too insignificant to be able to find more acurate elements of the orbit. But I believe, however, that the elements derived by Mr. de la Place and myself approach the truth, or are at least sufficient to get a general impression of the extension and situation of the orbit. A more comprehensive series of observations will closer inform us about this.

Here follow the elements of the elliptical orbit I calculated for the new planet:

Place of perihelion, May 11, 1781 5s 22d 13' 17" Time of passage of the perihelion, November 7, 1799 at 7h 0m average time on the Paris meridian Distance in perihelion 18.25870 Distance in aphelion 19.89938 Major half axis 19.07904 Period of siderial revolution 83 years 4 Place of the ascending node 2s 11d 49' 17" Inclination of the orbit 43 35 Heliocentric longitude, on May 11 1781 at 8h 47' average time 2 28 11 24 1/2 Average anomsly, taken from the perihelion, for this time 2 19 9 55

The first observation, which was used for calculating this orbit, is from May 11, 1781; the others have been improved with respect to the precession of the equinoxes, aberration and nutation, to have the true places and the siderial motion since May 11, 1781, as is required here.

[Observations] At the transit of Mercury on November 12 of last year 1782, weather in Paris was so fine as one can always only wish. (*)

I noticed the full entry of Mercury or the first inner contact of the edges at 3h 2' 8" true time.

The second inner contact of the edges on exit was at 4h 17' 46".

I have also measured various distances of the center of Mercury from the Sun's limb, abd calculated, that the true conjunction occured at 4h 3' 18" true time in 7s 20d 26' 39 1/2". The tables of Mr. de la Lande, give 11 sec. more in longitude and in latitude, for which I found 15' 52.1", only 1 sec less than the observation (**). Other observers have noticed the first contact later; but I coincide up to triffle with Mr. le Monnier, Dagelet and another one. Moreover also the observations most deviating from mine only give a difference of 6 sec. in view of the geocentric longitude of Mercury.

(*) Here at us [in Berlin] the whole day was covered air and very foggy.

(**) Theerefore, they coincide very well with observation for this planet. My calculations of the transit, according to these tables, appears in the Ephemeris for 1782, p. 158. The calculation therein according to Halley's tables, as it appears in the 2nd volume of the Berlin collection of astronomical tables, therefore shows, that for entry and exit 21 minutes in time are missing.

This remarkable difference has its origin primarily in that Halley's tables put the ascending node of Mercury 10 minutes more east, and thus give the geocentric latitude 37" less; the chord, however, which Mercury traverses in front of the sun, is so close to the solar limb, that a small difference in latitude produces a very large one in duration and consequently in the times of entry and exit of Mercury.

At the occultation of the Pleiades by the Moon on February 9, 1783 the sky was less favorable; therefore, I have only been able to observe the entries of 3 stars:

Entry of Merope or d Plei. 6h 50m 45 1/2s true time, a good observation. -- of Atlas or f Plei. 8h 22m 52s acurate to 3 or 4s. -- of Pleione or h Plei. 8h 38m 1s rather acurate.

On the latitude of 48d 51' 50" and 2" time, west of the meridian of the Royal Observatory.

Also, we have observed the latest total lunar of March 18 of the year [1783] very well; (*) But because from such an event not much important can be derived and the indication of the entry and exit of separate patchesis loose, I only want to give here the phases mentioned, as I have observed them at Paris in the Cabinet of the King 14" west of the Royal Observatory.

(*) At Berlin, because of the cloudy sky, almost nothing of this eclipse could be seen. At the entry the Moon appeared between the clouds for a few minutes, but afterwards disappeared completely. At the time of total eclipse between 9 1/2 and 11 o'clock, the darkness of the night was exceptional. In the following night the moon was shining bright, and also the nights before the eclipse have been clear. Anyway it is strange, that of seven lunar rising over the Berlin horizon, since 1775 to now (Aug. 1783), not one has been visible in clear air.

● More on Pierre Méchain

Hartmut Frommert Christine Kronberg [contact]

Site Index

THE BIG BANG NEVER HAPPENED by Michael Wisenbaker Illustrated

TABLE OF CONTENTS

● I. Introduction

● II. The "Big Bang" Cosmological Model Rests on Four Observable Facts

❍ A. The Outward Motion of Galaxies

❍ B. Age of Earth Determined by Radioactivity

❍ C. The Overall Chemical Makeup of the Universe

❍ D. Cosmic Background Radiation

● III. Trouble in Bang-Land

❍ A. Dark Attractors

❍ B. The Horizon Problem

❍ C. The Flatness Problem

❍ D. Quasars - Cosmic Fossils

❍ E. Inflation: The Universal Cure-All

❍ F. Big Attraction

❍ G. Then, The "Great Wall"

❍ H. Biggest Bang Problems

● IV. The Current Crisis in Cosmology

● V. The Respiratory Universe Model

❍ A. Horizon and Flatness Problems

❍ B. The Large Scale Structure of the Universe: "The Great and Southern Walls"

❍ C. Streaming Motions of Galaxies: "The Great Attractor"

❍ D. Dark Gravitational Matter: "Dark Islands of Space"

❍ E. Redshift

● VI. Conclusion

● References

I. Introduction

The "Big Bang" cosmological theory proposes that the entire universe began at a definite moment in the distant past at which time the universe was crammed into a point of infinite density. According to the Big Bang cosmological model, the universe began in a sort of explosion - starting out from infinite density and temperature - and then expanded, thinned out, and cooled. The Big Bang model holds that at all times subsequent to the universe's initial moment of creation, the universe has been controlled by gravity only, and its mathematical description thus follows logically from Einstein's theory of gravity.

The Big Bang theory of the origin and evolution of the universe began to develop major problems throughout the 1970's and 1980's as new astronomical observations became inconsistent with more and more of its theoretical underpinnings: generally, the astronomical observations simply did not square with a system controlled only by gravitational forces. Such observations have resulted in the current "crisis in cosmology" which begs for the Big Bang theory to be replaced with another cosmological model.

II. The "Big Bang" Cosmological Model Rests on Four Observable Facts

A. The Outward Motion of Galaxies

This motion, discovered by Hubble in 1929, was interpreted as evidence for the expansion and explosive beginning of the universe. Two kinds of measurements were needed in Hubble's analysis, the speed and distance of neighboring galaxies. Since the early 1900's it had been thought that neighboring galaxies were speeding away from Earth as determined by what is known as the "Doppler Shift," which is evidenced by the "redshift" of light waves.

1. "Redshift of Waves" When a source of light is in motion, its colors shift, analogously to the shift in pitch of a moving source of sound. In light, the analogue of pitch is color. If a source of light is moving closer, its colors are shifted up in frequency, toward the blue end of the spectrum; if the source is moving away, its colors are shifted down, toward the red. From the amount of shift, the speed of the moving source of light can be inferred. See Illustration 1

2. "Recession of Galaxies" Hubble discovered that the colors of most nebula were shifted toward the red, indicating that they were speeding away from us. This change in color of cosmic objects is known as "redshift."

If galaxies were flying away from each other, they would have been closer together in the past; thus it was felt that the universe was more dense at earlier times. If this backward extrapolation were continued, there would be some definite moment in the past when all matter in the universe was crammed together in a state of almost infinite density. From the rate of expansion, when this point in time occurred could be estimated: about 10 - 15 billion years ago. This concept of the beginning of the universe came to be called the "Big Bang" model, according to which the universe began in a sort of explosion, starting out from infinite density and temperature, and then expanded, thinned out, and cooled. The Big Bang model logically follows from Einstein's theory of gravity to provide a mathematical description of the universe.

The Big Bang was not like an ordinary explosion in which a localized region of flying debris spreads out into a surrounding region of non-moving space, but instead it was to have occurred everywhere. Under such a view there would be no surrounding space for the universe to move into, because any such space would be part of the universe; the concept of the individual particles in the universe flying away from one another is like marks on the surface of a balloon all receding from one another as the balloon is blown up. See illustration 2

B. Age of Earth Determined by Radioactivity

There is a completely independent method for verifying the age of the Earth, radioactive dating of uranium ore. The approximate match between the age of the Earth as calculated in this manner, and the age of the universe according to the Big Bang model as gauged by recession of galaxies, is good. Radioactive dating of uranium ore suggests the age of the Earth to be 4 billion years -- as opposed to a million years or 10 trillion years -- relatively very close to the age of 10 - 15 billion years which the Big Bang model predicts for the universe.

C. The Overall Chemical Makeup of the Universe

In addition to providing an explanation for the observed expansion and age of the universe, the Big Bang model explains why the overall chemical makeup of the universe is approximately 25% helium and 75% hydrogen, and attempts to explain such chemical make-up in terms of atomic processes of the early universe. According to the Big Bang model the universe was once so hot that none of the chemical elements except for hydrogen and helium, the lightest elements, could exist. All other elements consist of a fusion of two or more particles, which could not hold together under the intense heat of the very early universe as it expanded and cooled.

Calculations done by Hoyle and others in 1964 and refined by Peebles in 1966, and Fowler and Hoyle in 1967, showed that in just a few minutes after the Big Bang should have converted approximately 25% of the mass of the universe to helium, the next lightest element after hydrogen. It is believed that all heavier elements are manufactured in nuclear reactions in the centers of stars; as a result of such reactions and subsequent stellar explosions, other chemical elements, (O2 + C, etc.), make up only a trace of the mass of the universe. See illustration 3

D. Cosmic Background Radiation

The other important experimental confirmation of the Big Bang theory is the "cosmic background radiation", the bath of radio waves from space, which first was predicted as a necessary remnant of a hot, younger universe and then was actually discovered in 1965.

The cosmic background radiation was first predicted by Gannow in 1948 and later independently predicted by Peebles, et al in 1965. Both groups contended that when the universe a few seconds old, a special kind of radiation would have been produced throughout space and then would have traveled freely throughout space, appearing today with a wavelength corresponding to radio waves and a temperature of about 3° K (above absolute zero). According to such theory, when the temperature of the universe dropped to 3,000°K, at about 300,000 years ago after Big Bang, protons and electrons combined to form helium. At such time, all matter and radiation went separate ways and in the 15 billion years of universe expansion since, the radiation has cooled to 2.74°K.

In 1965 such background radiation was discovered by scientists at Bell Laboratories, and then in 1989 the COBE satellite was launched and confirmed that the spectrum of cosmic background radiation is very close to what was predicted by the Big Bang model: the cosmic background radiation was found to be a perfectly smooth 2.735°K in all directions of space (isotropic), to a sensitivity of one part in 100,000.

Using the Big Bang model as a predicate, comprehensive cosmological theories have developed of how the stars and galaxies were formed; how galaxies have taken on different shapes; and how they have aged.

By the early 1990's the Big Bang model of the universe had become well-developed and so well accepted that it in fact had become part of the public consciousness.

At the beginning of the 1990's the Big Bang model was "alive and well".

III. Trouble in Bang Land

The Big Bang theory of the origin and evolution of the universe began to develop major problems throughout the 1970's and 1980's as astronomical observations became inconsistent more and more of its theoretical underpinnings.

A. Dark Attractors

During the 1970's as some astronomers mapped the velocities of wandering galaxies, Rubin and Ford concentrated on galaxies' spiral arms, reasoning that the way a galaxy was spinning would go a long way toward explaining its structure and movement: they used spectroscopy to determine whether light from the galaxies' arms moved toward the red or blue end of the spectrum. See illustration 6

Astronomers assumed that the largest concentration of a galaxy's mass was tucked around its core; thus, a galaxy should behave like a gigantic solar system. The great gravitational attraction of the galaxy's central mass should keep the outer objects in place and set their velocity according to Newton's inverse-square law; the close-in objects should speed around the center while the more distant objects would rotate at a slower pace. Since this is true of our solar system, it should be no different for any galaxy. See illustration 7 (Newton's law of gravitation in its most simple form, states that the mutual attractive force between two bodies is proportional to the product of their masses divided by the square of the distance between them.)

Astronomers used redshift calculations to determine that the outer stars in spiral galaxies moved as fast as those near the core; they were astonished. Unless something unseen was holding the galaxies together, Newton's inverse-square law would require that the outer stars and gases should have twirled off into space; the existence of extra mass in the form of some kind of matter was required. The second line of indirect evidence is that galaxies in clusters swarm around one another at speeds which are incomprehensible unless extra gravitational matter is holding the clusters together. See illustration 8

Rubin and Ford analyzed over two hundred galaxies in the late 1970's and early 1980's and found there was extra unknown matter in virtually every galaxy they had examined which was at least ten times as massive as the visible luminous stars and dust. Somehow, over 90 percent of the matter in the universe had not been accounted for. This fact led astronomers to propose the existence of unseen "dark gravitational matter," composing 90% of all matter in the universe, in dark haloes around galaxies. See illustration 9

As discomforting as it is to propose that 90% of all matter in the universe is unseen, it is far less discomforting than throwing out all of the known laws of physics.

B. The Horizon Problem

In 1969, only four years the microwave background radiation was discovered, astronomers began wondering why the background radiation was so utterly smooth. The problem was that the radiation was smooth across distances that were too great to have allowed light to travel from a point on one side of the universe to a point on the other side within the age of the universe allowed by the Big Bang. Astrophysicists were able to look for the edge of the universe at the very limits of observability, at what they called the "horizon." If they looked at the horizon in one direction, then looked the other way, they found that the background radiation poured in at precisely the same temperature, 2.735 degrees Kelvin, from both directions. The problem was that the regions of the universe could only have reached the same temperature by having been in contact at one time.

If the universe had existed forever, there would have been plenty of time for any two regions of the universe, no matter how far apart today, to have exchanged heat and thus homogenized. But was not the case in a universe that supposedly had evolved from a Big Bang in which the horizon of the universe extended out only about 15 billion light- years in every direction. Such background radiation from a distant edge of the universe would have thus taken at least 15 billion years to reach Earth; the radiation from the opposite horizon also had taken 15 billion years to get here. This meant that the two regions of space had to be separated by at least 30 billion light-years. But if the universe was only about 15 billion years old, the question was how could these widely separated regions have ever been in contact with one another in order to share the same temperature. There simply was no way for a signal moving at the speed of light -- supposedly the maximum velocity attainable according to Einstein's theories -- ever to have traveled between the two points. See illustration 10

C. The Flatness Problem

As well as the universe's beginning, theorists faced another big problem -- its fate. Generally, two kinds of universes predicated by Einstein's theory: one that would go on expanding forever, and one that would fall back on itself. In a universe which fell back on itself, there would be enough matter for the gravitational force acting on it to bring the outward expansion to a halt. How much matter was required for this to occur was calculated with great accuracy: about 3 hydrogen atoms per cubic yard of space (or 5 x 10-27 kilograms per cubic meter). Gravity acting on matter of this density, the so-called "critical density," eventually would cause a universe like this to begin falling back on itself; at last, in pure collapse, the entire universe would revert to a single point of nearly infinite density and heat.

There was a third possibility, too, that the universe was neither open nor closed, but rather was balanced precariously between a fate of grand contraction and infinite expansion. Astrophysicists assigned the Greek letter omega (W) to represent the ratio between the actual cosmic mass density as determined by observers and the critical density that would allow gravity to pull the universe back down on itself. If this ratio were equal to or less than 1, there would be too little actual mass density to halt the expansion, which would then go on forever. If omega were greater than 1, then the universe would be closed and the expansion would (or should already have) come to a halt. See illustration 11

Using the example of an arrow shot by a bow and sent flying into the air, omega was similar to the ratio of gravitational energy to kinetic energy. If the archer were strong enough and shot the arrow skyward with more than the critical speed represented by the ratio, the arrow would escape Earth's gravity. If the arrow were shot at just the critical speed, the arrow would forever travel in orbit with gravitational and kinetic energies exactly balanced, their ratio equal to 1. See illustration 12

An astronomer would call this a "flat" trajectory.

Astoundingly, this seemed to be exactly the case with the universe under the Big Bang scenario; observational astronomers were unable to determine whether the curved space of the universe was open or closed. The reason appeared to be that the universe was precisely poised between the two states, its omega exactly equal to 1. Theoretical supporters of the Big Bang believed that how the universe appears today -- in terms of the number and distribution of the galaxies -- had been almost wholly determined by minute features in the earliest instant of the universe. These conditions were believed to have been set when the universe was at the early age of 10-43 second. There could have been almost no deviation in conditions in the universe then to allow for the conditions we see today. For omega to have remained so close to 1 -- that is, for the universe to be so incredibly flat today -- the difference between the cosmic mass density and the critical density must have been almost nonexistent in the earliest instants after the Big Bang: at 1 second after the Big Bang, it was calculated, the universe had to be fine-tuned to an accuracy of 1 part in 1015, or to within 1 trillionth of 1 percent. (To help grasp the size of a number this large, if the universe had been formed 15 billion years ago, it would have been in existence for about 1015 seconds).

At 10-43 second, the universe would have had to have been fine-tuned to within 1 part in 1059, a fraction so small as to be incomprehensible. Had there been less matter by so much as one of these minuscule fractions, matter would have expanded outward so quickly that gravity could never have condensed the hydrogen and helium gases enough to form galaxies and stars; with just a tiny fraction more matter, gravity would have been too strong, and the expansion would have been halted long ago.

Since only enough mass had been detected throughout the cosmos to bring omega up to 0.1 -- one-tenth the requirement amount -- huge quantities of matter were still unaccounted for, meaning that almost the entire inventory of the universe or 90%, is unseen, undetected and unknown.

D. Quasars - Cosmic Relics

In late 1980's a series of observations occurred that added to cosmologists' concerns over the horizon and flatness problems; they found new celestial objects which appeared to be at an enormous distance from Earth and receding very fast. Unknown objects, they were so they were called "quasi-stellar radio objects," or "quasars." A quasar could be a hundred times brighter than the Milky Way but only about the size of our solar system and were at the most distant radius of the universe and moving away at 90% of the speed of light. It was initially believed, that if the red shifts analyses were correct, quasars were formed 10 billion years ago.

The discovery of a quasar, "PC1158+4635" in 1989 further shocked astrophysicists since it was found to be 14 billion light-years from Earth. A quasar so distant and so near the down of time should not exist: PC1158+4635 left too little time in the current model of the universe's evolution to get from the Big Bang to stellar structures such as galaxies. Even more disturbing, some such quasars which have redshifts so large that they appear to be on the edge of the universe have been found in the vicinity of nearby galaxies with small redshifts. If, as expected, such quasars are connected with the galaxy, then the two objects would be moving with vastly different velocities: this would mean that their red shifts -- perhaps even all redshifts -- result from a phenomenon other than rapid recession, as now believed.

E. Inflation: The Universal Cure-All

During the late 1970's - early 1980's, the subject of the extraordinary flatness of the universe, the unbelievable balance of the cosmos between runaway expansion and utter , posed an incomprehensible problem. Then, in the late 1970's, Guth proposed a solution: that the entire infant cosmos could have slipped into an unstable state that physicists call a false vacuum and that this momentary state could cause the universe to experience a rapid change called a phase transition as it cooled in the instant after the Big Bang. (When water is chilled very rapidly, it can remain liquid far below its freezing point of 0 degrees Celsius; then it freezes all at once.) He proposed that as the universe cooled, the instantaneous false vacuum created by supercooling had driven the expansion: the universe would have done it all by itself; there would be no outside force; no hand of God; no divine creative power was necessary.

Guth calculated that inflation should have begun precisely at 10-35 second following the Big Bang when the hyper-dense conditions of the universe would have created the false vacuum condition at which time, according to the field equations of general relativity, a kind of anti-gravitational force would have pushed matter apart instead of drawing it together. Within the infinitesimal span of 10-32 second, the anti-gravitational repulsion would have made the universe expand in size by a factor of 1050 -- equivalent to a grain of sand growing bigger than our universe in the same span of time -- and then after such rapid expansion the universe then reverted to the rate of expansion of the standard Big Bang model. See illustration 13

Inflation would solve the horizon problem: all the regions of the universe that we observe today would have been in contact with one another before inflation began at 10-35 second so that all the energy of the universe would have been evenly distributed before the exponential inflation of space itself.

More importantly, the inflation scenario would solve the flatness problem by reducing it to a simple exercise in geometry: whatever the curvature of space before inflation, it would have been flattened during the rapid expansion like the surface of a balloon "flattens" as it is inflated.

A major problem developed with inflation: inflation predicted that the rapid expansion would have occurred in a number of separate spatial bubbles which should be observable today. Bubbles were a major problem for inflation because they are not observable.

Notwithstanding the bubble wall problem, the cosmology world was galvanized by the novel concept of inflation since it solved such difficult problems. One possible solution to the bubble problem was worked out which predicted that the observable universe would occupy but one billion-trillionth of a single bubble domain. This theory eliminated bubble walls as a major worry: the walls would be so far beyond our observational reach of about 15 billion light-years that they could never possibly become visible.

The non-verifyiability of the inflation theory has been a major flaw from its inception: throughout the history of science the best theories have always made verifiable predictions, which could be tested by experiment or observation. For example, Einstein's general relativity, predicted a number of phenomena that were later observed and Quantum Theory, envisioned numerous experiments at the subnuclear level that were then carried out in accelerators. On the other hand inflation cannot be tested. Guth's original theory of inflation made only one single prediction that could be considered testable: astronomers should be able to discern the walls of domains smaller than the observable universe which has turned out to be false; no hint of domain walls has ever been observed.

Another major problem with inflation is that it required that omega (W) equal 1 exactly and thus required the universe's mass to be 10 times the amount we can account for. To solve this problem, theorists, adopting inflation to cure observational problems with the Big Bang, proposed that 90% of the mass of the universe was missing; they proposed a "missing mass" to represent 90% of the universe. They called this missing mass "cold dark matter," which also has never been observed. Moreover, the cold dark matter was required by the theory to consist of non-baryonic material, unlike any of the matter in the rest of the universe.

By the late 1980's the inflation theorists became to be perplexed by the basic dilemma that the inflation which would have smoothed out the inhomogeneities of the earlier universe would have left no fluctuations in the density of space capable of producing the giant galactic structures which were then becoming being observed. On the other hand, if inflation had not occurred they could not explain the flat universe.

F. Big Attraction

The background radiation that had been discovered in 1965 was considered the chief evidence for the Big Bang. In 1977 scientists sent balloons aloft equipped with the most sophisticated measuring devices that had yet been used to detect minute variations in this radiation. They found surprised results: the radiation was shifted slightly toward the red end of the spectrum on one side of the sky, and slightly toward the blue end in the other direction.

As a consequence the conclusion was inescapable that the Earth and the solar system were, in fact, moving rapidly in the direction of the blueshifted background radiation. See illustration 14

The entire Milky Way had a peculiar motion not related to the general expansion of the universe. Calculations undertaken soon afterward showed that not only the Milky Way, but that the entire local group of about thirty galaxies was moving in the same direction at about 700 kilometers per second (about 2 percent of the speed of light) in the direction of Virgo; these galaxies exhibited what became known as a "streaming motion." Later astronomers found that our local group are being pulled not only toward Virgo but toward an unseen, unknown mass, in a direction which lay nearly perpendicular to the estimated position of Virgo.

In 1987 a group of seven astrophysicists analyzed the streaming motions of some four hundred galaxies in our region of the universe and made an announcement that shook the world astrophysics community: every nearby galaxy, including those in clusters and gigantic superclusters, was streaming at a rate of 600 to 700 kilometers per second toward a point in the sky that lay some 300 million light-years beyond Hydra-Centaurus, some 70 million light-years away. The unknown object toward which all the galaxies were streaming was named the "Great Attractor." The mass of this monumentally Great Attractor was calculated to be as that of tens of billions of galaxies. In 1989 astronomers announced that the Great Attractor appeared to be two extremely dense superclusters of galaxies stretching 300 million light-years across the universe beyond Hydra-Centaurus. See illustration 15

G. Then, The "Great Wall"

Until the 1980's, without the advanced computer technology then available to astronomers, astronomers were unable to undertake a meaningful survey of the universe using Hubble's concept of red shift. Until then, no one had the slightest idea what the actual structure of the universe might be.

In the mid-1980's Huchra and Geller of Harvard and Smithsonian Observatory built a red-shift map of the sky; instead of the uniform distribution of galaxies that they expected, astronomers begin finding great clusters of galaxies, superclusters and, eventually, the immense superclusters. Their study revealed that the universe consisted of a pattern of galactic structures that utterly defied existing theory, including one unusually large cosmic construction at least 500 million light-years long and 15 million light-years thick. Not able to tell its exact size because it ran off the edge of their survey, they named it the "Great Wall," and further speculated that it could be made up of walls of still larger galactic bubbles. See illustration 16

In between these gigantic new structures they surprisingly found great stretches of empty space nearly devoid of any matter at all. One of these voids was an estimated 300 million light-years across, far too immense a span of emptiness to be accommodated by existing ideas about how the universe had evolved; according to these standard theories, based on the Big Bang model the cosmic density should have been as quite smooth.

Big Bang theorists were stunned since the Great Wall was far too large and too massive to have formed by only the mutual gravitational attraction of its member galaxies, as should have been the case under the Big Bang scenario. Worse, indications that the Great Wall might be just a part of one of a series of gigantic galactic sheets lined up one after the other in a honeycomb structure with voids of 400 million light-years in between have been recently confirmed: an extension of the Great Wall has been found in the Southern Hemisphere, the "Southern Wall." The gigantic structure as now mapped consists of over 11,000 galaxies stretching over what is believed to be a billion light-years. See illustration 17

H. Biggest Bang Problems

In 1994 the newly-repaired Hubble Space Telescope (the "HST") took a new look at the rate of the expansion of the universe in a renewed effort to determine its age. The repaired HST spied cephoid "standard candles" in the M100 galaxy in the Virgo cluster and, based on the expansion rate, determined the Cephoids to be 56 million light years from Earth, rather than several times further. Such observations necessitated the age of the universe to be 8-12 billion years old, based on the consequential expansion rate, rather than the 16-20 billion previously believed. See illustration 18

The huge problem for advocates of the Big Bang theory is that certain objects in the universe, particularly certain quasars which are reliably dated at 16 billion years old, appear to be older than the universe itself!

Such realizations have led to the current crisis in cosmology. The new findings that the universe is younger than objects in it has began to permeate the public consciousness.

IV. The Current Crisis in Cosmology

In 1962 Thomas Kuhn revolutionized our concepts concerning the history of science: in his classic work The Structure of Scientific Revolutions Kuhn hit on the word "paradigm" to describe the world view of any specific scientific community. Kuhn proposed that science did not move forward by refining old views but rather by changing basic concepts; he described an old paradigm-anomaly-crisis-revolution-acceptance-new paradigm cycle. By the mid-1990's, it appears that cosmology is ready for just such a paradigm shift.

The current crisis in cosmology generally is that the Big Bang model does not allow enough time to get the universe from its early state to one we are seeing now. The question is: how did the universe get to be as lumpy as it is given the COBE results, which would indicate that the universe would be smooth and homogenous from a Big Bang beginning.

In an atmosphere reminiscent of the last days of dying Aristotelian or Ptolemaic cosmology, Big Bang theorists would have us now believe that our universe is filled with an utterly smooth background radiation in a volume of space which is filled with galactic structures too large to possibly exist, which may themselves have sprung from quasars too old for the age of a cosmos in which at least 90 - 99% of all matter was supposed to be there and had never been seen. Such problems beg the proposition of a new cosmological model.

CONCLUSION? THE BIG BANG NEVER HAPPENED!

NEEDED? SOME OTHER COSMOLOGICAL MODEL (See pages 651-655 in The Urantia Book)

● Stellar recession began 8 billion years ago (local systems). ● Objects exist which appear to be "outside" of the universe. ● If cosmological model is controlled only by gravity, over 90% of the mass of the universe is unaccounted for. ● Spherical matter ("dark islands of space") comprises Dark Gravitational Matter. ● Large-scale features of the universe ("outer space levels") represented by the Great Wall and the Southern Wall. ● Large-scale recession (red-shift) consists of "space respiration". ● Galactic streaming demonstrates super-universe rotation.

V. The Respiratory Universe Model

The problems of the Big Bang model can be solved, as well as its characteristics explained, by the "Respiratory Universe" model in which seven super-universes circle the central universe in a counter-clockwise rotation; the first of the four outer space layers rotates around the central universe in a clockwise direction; the expansion-contraction cycle of the universe ("respiration") which takes approximately 2 billion years; and in which the various spheres of space consist of stars, dark islands of space, minor space bodies (such as comets, meteors, etc.), planets, and architectural spheres. Such a model is presented in The Urantia Book.

A. Horizon and Flatness Problems

The Respiratory Universe model would easily explain the horizon problem, since the universe, having practically existed for infinity, would have plenty of time to exchange heat and energy. The microwave background energy, or radiation, would appear to be practically the same everywhere.

Such a model, which would exhibit slow controlled epochs of fine-tuned expansion and contraction, would appear to be neither "open," flying apart, or "closed," heading toward the Big Crunch, but rather to be "flat". Critical mass, or omega, would not be a factor since forces other than gravity would come into play. The existence of these forces have been suggested by physicists such as the Swedish Nobel laureate Hannes Alfven, who contends that the universe is continually energizing itself by means of electromagnetic currents; Alfven contends such currents are as important to universe development as gravity. Alfven believes that magnetic fields and currents can concentrate matter and energy far faster and more effectively than can gravity. Also, theories by even Big Bang supporters such as Hawking, have been proposed stating that energy may continually be recycled in the universe by the explosion of black holes after gravity has completed its work of matter condensation. If this is the case, the energy-mass-energy conversion cycle could repeat itself endlessly allowing plenty of time for heat in the universe to equalize and requiring no "critical mass."

B. The Large Scale Structure of the Universe

"The Great and Southern Walls" The increasingly comprehensive maps which show enormous structures consisting of galaxies located along the bubble-like surface of enormous "voids" are also explained by the Respiratory Universe model. The model contains four huge outer space levels which encircle the superuniverse clusters. Thus, the first outer space level could be what is now described as the "Great Wall - Southern Wall" complex.

C. Streaming Motions of Galaxies: "The Great Attractor"

In the Respiratory Universe model consisting of seven superuniverse galaxies moving in a counter-clockwise direction around a universal center, an individual superuniverse cluster of galaxies would exhibit an overall "streaming motion" associated with such a counter-clockwise rotational track. In addition, one's home galaxy would exhibit angular rotation associated with the rotation of the super-universe around its system axis.

The Respiratory Universe model which combines counter-clockwise and angular rotation would therefore explain the streaming motions which we actually observe toward what we now call the Great Attractor. See illustration 22

D. "Dark Islands of Space": Dark Gravitational Matter

The "dark gravitational matter" comprising 90% of all matter in the universe is the matter which is required to be present from the laws of physics, but which is not visible. In an effort to explain its identity, astronomers have proposed that such matter consist of "dark haloes" of exotic kinds of particles.

Such matter is better explained by compact "black hole-like" objects; especially since the laws of physics would suggest that dispersed halo particulate should contract and condense to form sphercal bodies as a result of gravitational forces. Detailed studies of nearby galaxies have been made to verify the existence of and locate such compact objects.

Recently some confirmation of the existence of dark gravitational matter in the form of compact spheres, which astronomers call MACHOs ("Massive Compact Halo Objects") has been reported; they have noticed a star slowly brightening and then fading again. Astronomers have proposed that this event, which occured in the Large Magellanic Cloud, a companion galaxy to ours, could be "microlensing" the gravitational focusing of a star's light by a large compact invisible object as that mass moved between us and the distant star. This microlensing event, discovered by Griest of University of California, San Diego, is the first direct evidence of dark matter. See illustration 23

The Respiratory Universe model proposes that "Dark Islands of Space," or MACHOs, cause the rotational veolocities of galaxies. MACHOs consequently represent 10% of the "missing mass" of the universe which is the mass known to be present due to rotational velocities of galaxies, but which represent objects which are not conventionally visible. See illustration 24

E. Redshift

What has been perhaps the most troubling aspect of the Respiratory Universe model is the abundance of redshift in the cosmos. The Respiratory model predicts that much of the redshift is not actually real, but rather occurs because of the rotational direction of the first outer space level with reference to our superuniverse domain. Now that the Great Wall has been discovered, detailed study of it will no doubt display a preferential streaming direction due to such rotational direction. See illustration 25

VI. Conclusion

Today, in a trend reminiscent of the methods of Ptolemaic astronomers until Copernicus came to the rescue, cosmologists are ignoring facts that fail to fit the Big Bang model. When the theoretical model first appeared, it was a reasonable and seemingly scientific explanation for a relatively small amount of astronomical data taken earlier in the century: it was consistent with the Hubble redshift of galaxies and large-scale expansion; it seemed to explain the observed abundances of light elements such as helium and hydrogen which had not been created in the fusion furnaces of existing stars, but created in the earliest moments of the Big Bang. In what probably was its finest hour, the Big Bang model predicted the microwave background radiation at about the temperature that was consistent with a creation explosion out of a formless nothingness 15 billion years or so ago.

However, the troubling observational and theoretical problems of the 1970's and 1980's increasingly have challenged the Big Bang model. The Big Bang model also began having more and more difficulty reconciling the latest observational details found by astronomers with the fundamental assumption that on the galactic and cosmic scales gravity was the sole player. In other words, the theory failed to explain convincingly how matter had become organized in clusters of galaxies and superclusters in the time period allotted since the Big Bang.

Also for the universe to be structured in a manner consistent with current observations, more than 90 percent of its matter would have to be in the form of some unknown, unseen, but unbelievable massive dark matter which would not only have to be present in such a huge quantity that it would account gravitationally for the size and behavior of the new clusters and superclusters, but it also would have to be of such a bizarre quality that it could not possibly be detected by even the most sophisticated technology. For instance, gravity working alone would have taken something like 100 billion years to create the supercluster two and a half billion light-years across that was recently discovered by American and German observers. This was a time scale at least five times longer than permitted by even the most generous of the Big Bang models.

To salvage the Big Bang, theorists have brought in a number of ad hoc assumptions such as inflation, to supposedly cause the universe to expand exponentially, but which suffers from the same malady as the Big Bang, an inability to make predictions that can be tested.

Today the long odds are that the Big Bang never happened. Perhaps the Big Bang was just a "big spash," a stellar disgorgement in our little neighborhood of the universe that was neither the beginning of time nor the creation of the cosmos.

How long will the Big Bang theory survive? Whether the Big Bang goes down in five years or twenty-give years, it appears inevitable that it soon will be overwhelmed by more and more uncompromising new observations and experimentation. In the next millennium scientists and other people looking back likely will regard it much the way we look back on the cosmology of Aristotle, a quaint theory that people believed in for a while.

SELECTED REFERENCES

1. Astronomy Magazine, March 1994, Waukesha, Wisconsin. 2. Barrow, J. & Tipler, F. (1986). The Anthropic Cosmological Principle. Oxford University Press. New York. 3. Boslough, J. (1992). Masters of Time. Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., United States and Canada. 4. Boslough, J. (1985). Stephen Hawking's Universe. Avon Books. New York. 5. Calder, N. (1989). Einstein's Universe. Penguin Group. New York. 6. Carrigan, R. Jr. and Trower, P. (1989). Particle Physics in the Cosmos. W. H. Freeman & Company, New York. 7. Cohen, N. (1988). Gravity's Lens. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Canada. 8. Dallas Morning News, June 13, 1994, Dallas, Texas. 9. Davies, P. (1982). The Accidental Universe. Press Syndicate of the University of Cambridge. New York. 10. Davies, P. (1983). God & the New Physics. Simon & Schuster, Inc. New York. 11. Davies, P. (1984). Superforce. Simon & Schuster, Inc. New York. 12. Davies, P. (1988). The Cosmic Blueprint. Simon & Schuster, Inc. New York. 13. Davies, P. (1992). The Mind of God. Simon & Schuster, Inc. New York. 14. Davies, P. and Gribbin, J. (1992). The Matter Myth. Simon & Schuster, Inc. New York. 15. Gribbin, J. (1986). In Search of the Big Bang. Bantam Books. New York. 16. Gribbin, J. (1988). The Omega Point. Bantam Books. New York. 17. Gribbin, J. & Rees, M. (1989). Cosmic Coincidences. Bantam Books. New York. 18. Hartman, W.K. & Miller, R. (1987). Cycles of Fire. Workman Publishing Co. New York. 19. Hawking, S. (1988). A Brief History of Time. Bantam Books. New York. 20. Kaufmann, III, W. (1979). Black Holes and Warped Spacetime. W.H. Freeman and Company. 21. Lerner, Eric J. (1992). The Big Bang Never Happened. Vintage Books, a division of Random House, Inc., New York. 22. Lightman, A. and Brawer, R. (1990). Origins. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA. 23. Malin, S. (1989). The Greenwich Guide to Stars, Galaxies and Nebulae. Press Syndicate of the University of Cambridge, New York. 24. Morris (1990). The Edges of Science. Prentice Hall Press. New York. 25. Penrose, R. (1989). The Emperor's New Mind. Oxford University Press. New York. 26. Scientific American, June 1994 Edition, New York. 27. Time-Life Books (1988). Stars. Time-Life Publishing. New York. 28. Wheeler, J.A. (1980). Beyond the Black Hole. In Some Strangeness in the Proportion. (ed. H. Woolf). Addison-Wesley. Reading, Massachusetts. 29. Wheeler, J.A. (1990). A Journey into Gravity and Spacetime. W.H. Freeman and Company. England.

A Service of The Urantia Book Fellowship Red Shift: Waves of light or sound are stretched out or compressed by motion:

Stretching a wave makes the wavelength longer; in the case of sound, it makes the note deeper; for light, it shifts the wavelength toward the red end of the spectrum.

Illustration 1 CLASSICAL "BIG BANG" EXPANSION MODEL

According to the "Big Bang" expansion theory of the universe, the universe began in a sort of explosion, starting from infinite density and temperature and then expanded, thinned out, and cooled, while being controlled by gravity. The appearance of its expansion can be likened to the surface of a balloon being blown up: the galaxies all recede from one another.

Illustration 2 Illustration 3 SPECTROGRAPH AND SPIRAL GALAXY

Light from the side of the galaxy rotating toward Earth is shifted toward the blue end of the spectrum; light rotating away, to the red.

Illustration 6 VELOCITIES OF ROTATING BODIES IN SOLAR SYSTEM SET BY NEWTON'S INVERSE SQUARE LAW

Unlike matter in galaxies, velocity of bodies in solar system decreases as distance from center increases.

Illustration 7 EVIDENCE FOR DARK MATTER

Illustration 8 Illustration 9 THE HORIZON PROBLEM

The Cosmic Background Radiation is perfectly smooth; it radiates from all directions in the cosmos at 2.795 degrees Kelvin.

Illustration 10 BIG BANG EXPANSION SCENARIOS

The Universe is (1) open, (2) closed, or (3), flat, depending on whether the ratio of its actual density to the "critical density", called omega, is <1, >1, or precisely equal to 1. The "critical density" of the Universe is the density above which the Universe would go on expanding forever.

Illustration 11 Illustration 12 THE INFLATIONARY UNIVERSE

The inflationary universe theory wiped away many of the Big Bang's cosmological problems, but has problems of its own which are observationally untestable.

Illustration 13 STREAMING MOTION OF GALAXIES

When the cosmic background radiation of the entire sky was surveyed in 1977, the radiation was shifted toward the red end of the spectrum on one side of the sky, and toward the blue end in the other. The entire Milky Way was "streaming" across the sky in a motion not related to the expansion of the Universe at a rate of 700 Kilometers per second.

Illustration 14 THE GREAT ATTRACTOR

Our local group of galaxies were also found to be streaming in the direction of a gigantic mysterious mass some 300 light years beyond, and along with, the Hydra-Centaurus supercluster, at a rate of 700 kilometers per second.

Illustration 15 THE "GREAT WALL"

In 1989 an aggregation of galaxies of at least 500 million light years across located along bubble-like surfaces of enormous "voids", comparatively empty regions of space measuring as much as 150 million light years in diameter, were discovered by astronomers.

Illustration 16 THE "GREAT WALL" and the "SOUTHERN WALL"

An extension to the southern hemisphere of the Great Wall suggests such large- scale structures persist over the entire sky.

Image 17 Based on new Hubble Space Telescope Observations which place Cepheid "standard candles" in M100 galaxy in Virgo cluster at 56 million light years from Earth rather than several times further, the age of the Universe, based on this expansion rate, is estimated to be 8-12 billion years old.

Illustration 18 THE RESPIRATORY UNIVERSE MODEL

Counter-clockwise rotation around a universal center point along with angular rotation around a super universe axis would exhibit our galaxy's peculiar motion toward the "Great Attractor."

Illustration 22 MICROLENSING

(1) Normally observers see only the light rays coming directly from the distant star.

(2) As the invisible star passes in front, it blocks the central light ray. But gravity bends nearby rays making the distant star appear to brighten.

(3) After the invisible star moves on, observers once again see only the central star. The distant star's brightness returns to normal.

Illustration 23 COSMOLOGICAL SOLUTION #1

"Dark Gravitational Matter" actually exists and consists of "MAssive Compact Halo ObjectS" ("MACHOS")

Illustration 24 SPACE RESPIRATION AND REDSHIFT

Rotation of superuniverse clusters in central universe is counter-clockwise; (1) clockwise rotation of 1st outer space level causes redshift. Space respiration occurs in successive 2 billion year intervals; (2) current recession of galaxies causes redshift.

Illustration 25 HOW LARGE IS ORVONTON, REALLY? (and other questions) By Norm Du Val, ARS&SC Many Urantians have wondered and speculated about the true size of our superuniverse, the grand universe, and the master universe, especially since the Urantia Papers and science do not seem to be in very good agreement concerning the makeup of the cosmos. And it may be as the Urantia Papers state, -that people are discovering "errors on the face of the associated cosmologies" in the Papers. So, how large is Orvonton, and do we have to change the Papers in order to make them fit the science du jour, or worse, the science of yesterday?

The Urantia Papers say that Orvonton will have one trillion inhabitable planets. They also say that the Milky Way Galaxy is the nucleus of Orvonton. I never thought that "nucleus" in this case meant that our galaxy was a small part, like say a one thousandth part of Orvonton, but rather that it was the main body, making up perhaps 70, 80 or even 90% of the Superuniverse. Granted, in the modern view of the astronomical universe, with superclusters of thousands of galaxies, to think that our average sized galaxy and only six more like it comprise the "seven Superuniverses" which surround another single galactic entity, Havona, almost seems quaint. The Grand Universe would then be quite small in the scheme of things. Could the Grand Universe be this small?

Until fairly recently it was popular scientific knowledge that there were some 100 billion stars in the Milky Way Galaxy. What that, it would be practically impossible for the Milky Way to have more than a fraction of Orvonton's stated one trillion inhabitable planets. Each star in the galaxy would have to have an average of 10 inhabitable planets. That would be highly unlikely. At best, one could only expect to have an inhabitable planet per every two stars, this ratio being derived from page 458 where the Urantia Papers say that Satania has two thousand blazing suns and will have about 1,000 inhabitable planets. But we know from the Papers that on the scale of the Superuniverse of Orvonton, a ratio of 10 stars per inhabitable planet is the correct number.

One way to solve the problem involves reaching far out into space to include other large galaxies like the Milky Way in order to make up the necessary stars to achieve one trillion inhabitable planets. Furthermore, some say that many or most of the supposed 100 billion stars in the Milky Way are not viable candidates for having planetary families suitable for life. By one account, 98% of the stars would be eliminated as being "too small or too cool" to support planetary systems and life. That would leave only 2 billion stars available and would yield about one billion inhabitable planets. This number is 1/1,000 of the number needed for the Orvonton of the Urantia Papers , so one would have to take in approximately 1,000 more Milky Way class galaxies in order to get the right numbers.

Another problem that makes matters worse is that while it has been widely stated that the Milky Way has 100 billion stars, the Urantia Papers say that Orvonton has ten trillion stars, thus the Milky Way could only be one-one hundredth of Orvonton. And consider that when you have to reach out into space 50 million or 500 million light years to acquire dozens or a thousand more galaxies in order to make up one trillion planets and ten trillion stars under these assumptions, you are saying that the Urantia Papers are wrong when they claim a radius of 250 thousand light years for Orvonton. This is nothing new. Many in the movement automatically give the benefit of the doubt to current science. I like to go with the Urantia Papers first, and let science find its own way in its own time. The Urantia Papers are not going to change, but I know that science will.

It would seem then that nothing short of a miracle could reconcile this problem of science versus the Urantia Papers, but after researching the subject, and armed with NEW SCIENCE, I am more sure than ever that the smaller model of Orvonton is the correct one.

Let's begin with some basic and related questions.

How large is the Milky Way?

Time was when the Milky Way was considered to be about 80,000 light years in diameter. More recently the figure of 100,000 light years has been used. But new studies have shown that the Milky Way has an extensive and massive halo of stars around it and now the figure of 300,000 light years is being mentioned as an appropriate size for our galaxy. In addition, there are a number of dwarf galaxies that seem to be in orbit around the Milky Way. If these are considered to be a part of the Milky Way, the size of the galaxy is very close to 500,000 light years in diameter. This figure is remarkably the same one that the Urantia Papers use as the size for Orvonton. At the bottom of page 359 and the top of page 360, it says,

"From the outermost system of inhabited worlds to the center of the Superuniverse is a trifle less than two hundred and fifty thousand light-years."

If 250,000 is the radius, then 500,000 must be the diameter.

How many stars are in our Milky Way Galaxy?

This is an important question. Many older sources and some newer give the figure that is still widely cited of 100 billion stars, but this figure is out of date. On page 172 the Urantia Papers say,

"The Superuniverse of Orvonton is illuminated and warmed by more than ten trillion blazing suns. These suns are the stars of your observable astronomic system. More than two trillion are too distant and too small ever to be seen from Urantia."

Wow, ten trillion suns! So how are we going to get from 100 billion to ten trillion? The answer is - gradually.

Note too something very important in the paragraph above from the Urantia Papers. Of the ten trillion blazing suns, it says that two trillion are too small ever to be seen from Urantia. Even though these suns are small, the Urantia Papers validate these small suns as legitimate, viable, blazing suns. Also, for the 1935 era, when the Papers say that "These suns are the stars of your observable astronomic system, it is saying that these stars are part of the Milky Way Galaxy. The Milky Way was the observable astronomic system for all practicable purposes in 1935. In other words, The Urantia Papers are saying that there are 10 trillion suns in and around the close neighborhood of the Milky Way.

Of all the stars in our galaxy, how many would we have to discard as being too small or too cool to support planets and life, so that we can arrive at an accurate "star per inhabitable planet ratio"?

The answer is relatively few. For the most part, stars are stars. The smaller, "cooler" stars are called red dwarfs, but these are real stars and should not be confused with other types of "dwarf" stars. It is true that astronomy says that the majority of stars in our galaxy are red dwarfs, but astronomy does not say they are too small or cool to support planetary systems or life. These stars are spectral class M stars. As noted above, the Urantia Papers support them as "blazing suns."

The smallest of the M class stars are at least 100 times more massive than Jupiter, the largest planet in the solar system, and most are between 200 and 600 times as large as Jupiter, which means that they are 20 to 60 % of the mass of the Sun, and they burn at surface temperatures of about 3,500 degrees Kelvin. They have plenty of gravity and heat and light to hold and sustain planetary systems and planetary life, and they are long lived stars. Astronomer Carl Sagan likes them too. In talking about the stars in the galaxy, he has this to say from his book "Cosmos:"

"Very few of these stars are of the massive short-lived variety that squander their reserves of thermonuclear fuel. The great majority have lifetimes of billions or more years in which they are shining stably, providing a suitable energy source for the origin and evolution of life on nearby planets."

The "great majority" to which Carl Sagan refers are the class M stars which in fact do make up the bulk of the stars in the galaxy. The Urantia Papers seem to call all normal stars "blazing or brilliant" if the nuclear fires have been ignited. Spectral class M stars are in fact blazing stars, blazing with nuclear fusion just the same as our star. They are simply not as massive or as hot. The Encyclopedia Britannica says,

"The most common stars and those that contribute the most to the local density are the dwarf M stars..."

Class M stars are main sequence, bona-fide, fire breathing, blazing stars.

On Page 458 of the Urantia Papers it says,

"Of the thirty suns nearest yours, only three are brighter."

Of the twenty-seven that are not as bright as our sun, most are probably class M stars. We cannot eliminate these stars from the life equation. We can eliminate white dwarfs, black dwarfs, neutron stars, pulsars, Red Giants, stars too close to the galactic nucleus, stars embedded in nebulosity and dust clouds, and perhaps some others, but all of these together are a small percentage of the total.

If Satania has 2000 blazing suns and will have 1,000 inhabitable planets, or two to one, and if the larger superuniverse scale ratio is ten stars per inhabitable planet, we can assume that the less stellar crowded places in the galaxy are probably much more productive of inhabitable planets than the more dense regions. With a 10:1 ratio and 100 billion stars The Milky Way then could easily have 10 billion inhabitable planets. This is still far short of the number needed to avoid having to reach out to the Virgo Supercluster for enough galaxies and stars with one trillion inhabitable planets to comprise Orvonton as per the Urantia Papers. Somehow we need a magic hat trick here, a miracle, or some NEW SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION, or else the Urantia Papers' figure of an Orvonton radius of 250,000 light years must be wrong.

What's the difference between the term "stars" that science uses, and "blazing stars," "blazing suns" and "brilliant suns," as used in the Urantia Papers?

There is no difference. They are all the same.

Would most or all of the inhabited worlds have temperature, air pressure and gravity conditions close to those of the Earth, and would the type of life be similar to ours?

No. A good reading of Paper 49, THE INHABITED WORLDS will quickly dispel any notion that the inhabited worlds are similar or that the inhabitants are similar from one world to another, except that they are thinking bipeds. As the Urantia Papers note for the non-breathers, many have no air or air pressure at all. They live in a vacuum. Likewise for temperature, on airless worlds the surface temperatures would be very extreme, high and low. On page 563 the Urantia Papers say,

"On the non-breathing worlds the advanced races must do much to protect themselves from meteor damage by making electrical installations which operate to consume or shunt the meteors. Great danger confronts them when they venture beyond these protected zones. These worlds are also subject to disastrous electrical storms of a nature unknown on Urantia. During such times of tremendous energy fluctuation the inhabitants must take refuge in their special structures of protective insulation."

On Page 564 it says,

"Life on the worlds of the non-breathers is radically different from what it is on Urantia. The non- breathers do not eat food or drink water as do the Urantia races. The reactions of the nervous system, the heat-regulating mechanism, and the metabolism of these specialized peoples are radically different from such functions of Urantia mortals. Almost every act of living, aside from reproduction, differs, and even the methods of procreation are somewhat different."

In an infinite universe, while there will be many worlds more or less like ours, it seems that conditions on many other inhabited worlds will not resemble anything like what we have on Earth, according to the Urantia Papers. Page 560 lists the various types of life that need to be created in response to differing planetary conditions. Since all space bodies have gravity, that would seem to be the only condition that would be similar on all worlds, and even then the Urantia Papers say on Page 562 that,

"Some of the larger worlds are peopled with beings who are only about two and one-half feet in height. Mortal stature ranges from here on up through the average heights on the average-sized planets to around ten feet on the smaller inhabited spheres."

The beings are two and one half feet tall on the one hand and ten feet tall on the other hand due to the forces of gravity, both much stronger and much weaker than we have on Earth.

On page 564 it says,

"There are great differences between the mortals of the different worlds, even among those belonging to the same intellectual and physical types, but all mortals of will dignity are erect animals, bipeds."

How many inhabited planets are in our own solar system?

Our star has at least one inhabited world, and it probably has two. Talking about a world of non- breathers, on page 564 the Urantia Papers say:

"You would be more than interested in the planetary conduct of this type of mortal because such a race of beings inhabits a sphere in close proximity to Urantia."

It is very unlikely that "close proximity" means Alpha Centauri, 4.5 light years away. It must mean in our solar system. There are not many worlds in our solar system which would qualify as a non-breather world, but two come to mind that are large enough, have solid surfaces, and are airless. Our Moon, and Jupiter's moon of Ganymede are the most likely places. Io is a sulfuric hellhole, Europa is watery world covered with ice. The surface of Callisto is also icy. Saturn's Titan and Neptune's Triton have atmospheres and they are too far from the warming rays of the sun. The planet Mercury also has some serious drawbacks, though a case could be made for it to be a candidate for the non-breather world.

We can probably eliminate our Moon. It's close, we've studied it telescopically for decades, and we've been there. It would be hard for us not to have noticed intelligent life activity if it was there. That leaves Ganymede. One Urantian, Joe Pope, made a strong case for Ganymede as the home of the other mortal race of non-breathers in our solar system. Ganymede is not be the size of Urantia, but the Papers don't say an inhabited world or moon has to be this big, just that if they are the size of Urantia, they are almost ideal. On Page 559 it says,

"In several of the physical systems of Satania the planets revolving around the central sun are too large for habitation, their great mass occasioning oppressive gravity. Many of these enormous spheres have satellites, sometimes a half dozen or more, and these moons are often in size very near that of Urantia, so that they are almost ideal for habitation."

Ganymede is the largest moon in the solar system.

What about the regions toward the central galactic bulge, would life be possible there?

Yes. Even in the denser regions of the galaxy except for around the very nucleus, life would be possible. If the stars were only one light year or less apart, there would be plenty of room. Satania is not in what we might consider the more dense regions, but the Urantia Papers give us an idea of what it might be like nearer to the galactic core. On Page 559 the Urantia Papers say,

"The oldest inhabited world of Satania, world number one, is Anova, one of the forty-four satellites revolving around an enormous dark planet but exposed to the differential light of three neighboring suns."

Imagine, three nearby stars in the sky! Anyone who has seen the movie "Contact" has an idea of what it might be like as Jodie Foster's character arrives at the first stellar way station. This world, Anova, with forty-three companions, revolves about a much larger planet, probably similar to the Ganymede-Jupiter system. More importantly, there are three suns in Anova's sky, apparently all close enough to contribute to the lighting and heating of the planet. How far away could these stars be from Anova and still be beneficial? A tenth light year? One hundredth of a light year? At one hundredth of a light year, a star would be 16 times the distance from our sun to Pluto. This triple star system probably has more than one inhabited planet. Being a very old system, it may even be the one system in Satania that has four peopled planets. (Page 359) (Incidentally, the Centauri system, our closest stellar neighbor is also a triple star system and could very well be the home system of Anova.)

But what about the 100 billion figure commonly used as the number of stars in the Milky Way, -is it right?

No, not only is it not right, it is "off" as far as up-to-date science is concerned by a factor of 10 to 20 times, possibly more. The 100 billion figure arose in the 1960s but persisted in new books and articles into the 1990s and is sometimes still mentioned. However, I've seen the figure of 200 billion stars for the Milky Way as long ago as 1975. In a book called "Amazing Universe", a National Geographic Society book by Herbert Friedman, it says,

"Our sun is only one of about 200 billion stars in the Milky Way."

Later, in a an attempt to scale the universe down so that the sun would be size of a pinhead and our solar system would fit inside a living room, it says,

"The Milky Way would be a disk...dotted with 200 billion stars."

Then, in Carl Sagan's Cosmos, copyright 1980, he says,

"We know N*, the number of stars in the Milky Way Galaxy, fairly well, by careful counts of stars in small but representative regions of the sky. It is a few hundred billion; some recent estimates place it at 4 X 1011."

In other places in his book he uses the actual figure of 400 billion. 400 billion suns! Now we are starting to get into some serious numbers. Another few hundred billion here and there and we'll be on our way. Of those 400 billion stars, at a star to inhabited planet ratio of 10:1, there should now be 40 billion inhabitable planets, almost 4% of a trillion and 4% of the amount needed to describe a much smaller Orvonton with a trillion inhabitable planets.

It's still not enough -yet. But wait! There's more.

In the January 1995 Sky & Telescope magazine, in an article called, "The Galaxy We Call Home" it says,

"The total mass of our galaxy is surprisingly large, and it gets larger as you measure it farther away from the galactic center. For the part of the galaxy closer to the center than we are, rotation speeds of gas clouds imply a mass of about 100 billion Suns. But make your measurements farther out, using the motions of stars in the halo or the interaction of the whole galaxy with Andromeda and other neighbors, and you get more like 1,000 billion Suns."

Imagine that, 1,000 billion, or one trillion suns in the Milky Way. Now it depends on where you take your measurements. This new information took me a bit by surprise and it may do the same to you if you are not familiar with it. At first I thought it must be a mistake, but it isn't. In the Encyclopedia Britannica, Macropedia, 1992, it says,

"The total mass of the Galaxy, which had seemed reasonably well established during the 1960s, has become a matter of considerable uncertainty."... "and so all that can be said is that the mass is perhaps five or 10 times larger than thought earlier. That is to say, the mass, including the dark matter, must be about 1,000,000,000,000 times the mass of the Sun, with considerable uncertainty."

"Considerable uncertainty," indeed!

So science has gone from 100 million stars in the 1960s, and which the Encyclopedia Britannica says "had seemed reasonably well established," to a galaxy with 1 trillion times the mass of our local star, the Sun. That's not just the same as 1 trillion suns like our star, because most of the stars are smaller red dwarfs, 20-60% of the size of the Sun. So the number of stars could easily be 2-5 times more than 1 trillion.

This topical section in the Britannica closes with these words. (Diehard science people may want to close their eyes here.)

"In the meantime it must be said that astronomy does not know what makes up much of the universe." [Encyclopedia Britannica - 1992]

And there's still more!

Amazingly, there is corroborating new scientific information from the Grolier CD-ROM encyclopedia. (Copied directly from the CD.) It says:

"The total mass of the Galaxy can be measured by studying the motions of individual stars and clouds of hydrogen gas in different parts of the galaxy and by applying CELESTIAL MECHANICS to calculate a total mass that will account for the observed motions. The mass can also be determined from the motions of the Galaxy's small satellite galaxies, especially the nearby dwarf elliptical galaxies, and globular clusters. Recent computations by both methods agree that the Galaxy's mass is possibly 1,000 to 2,000 billion times the mass of the Sun. As the Sun's mass is about average for a star in the Galaxy, the total number of stars must also be of this order."

1,000 to 2,000 billion solar masses is one to two trillion solar masses! While "solar masses" are not necessarily stars, according to the encyclopedia the total number of stars in the Milky Way must also be of the same order. Let's now use this new figure of two trillion solar masses. Again, because many stars are smaller than our Sun a fixed amount of mass translates into more stars if they are smaller. Two trillion solar masses could equal four or five trillion stars, halfway to the 10 trillion stars the Urantia Papers mention for Orvonton. Instead of having to bend the Papers to meet science, we simply wait patiently for the science to change. And change it does.

We have now gone from 100 billion stars in the galaxy in the 1960s all the way to possibly two trillion or more stars today. Isn't science wonderful! And at any given time, whether now or then, many scientists and astronomers will give you their numbers with absolute assurance that they are correct.

As one can see, the number of stars has been rising steadily for 25 years or more. We now have a plausible figure that is 20 times what it was in the days of "100 billion stars". But has the number of real stars changed? No. Only the science has changed. One thing you can say about science, over the years, concerning the estimates of the number of stars in the Milky Way, it has always erred on the conservative side. This is clearly shown by the fact that the numbers just keep getting larger.

Using all this new data, if we now use the maximum current figure of two trillion solar masses in the Milky Way, and if that equivalates into 4-5 trillion stars considering that many are much smaller than our Sun, we easily come to a figure of a half trillion inhabitable planets if there are 10 stars per such planet. That's half the figure given in the Papers, and without leaving the galactic neighborhood.

We can assume at this point that the scientific estimates for the number of stars in the Milky Way are going to continue rising until they approach the true number of stars, as science continues to do its thing, and as more and better ways of measuring the mass of our galaxy are brought to bear, even to the point of approaching ten trillion stars as per the Urantia Papers statement about Orvonton. Check back in ten years. We are in the ballpark, and moving in the right direction. This fits extremely well with the idea that the Milky Way is the nucleus of Orvonton. On page 167 it says,

"The vast Milky Way starry system represents the central nucleus of Orvonton, being largely beyond the borders of your local universe. This great aggregation of suns, dark islands of space, double stars, globular clusters, star clouds, spiral and other nebulae, together with myriads of individual planets, forms a watchlike, elongated-circular grouping of about one seventh of the inhabited evolutionary universes.

The Milky Way could hardly be the nucleus of Orvonton if Orvonton included the Virgo Supercluster as some suggest. The Milky Way would be as a lost grain of sand in an Orvonton that large.

Adding to the mass of the Milky Way proper, current science says that there are also about 150 or more globular star clusters in the galactic halo. Concerning globular clusters, on page 170 the Urantia Papers say virtually the same thing regarding Orvonton that science already knows about the Milky Way Galaxy.

"The globular type of star clusters predominates near the outer margins of Orvonton."

That nails it, I think, but two other statements in the Papers also support the Milky Way as the "main item" in Orvonton. On page 167 it says,

"Practically all of the starry realms visible to the naked eye on Urantia belong to the seventh section of the grand universe, the Superuniverse of Orvonton."

And on page 130 the Urantia Papers say,

"...the unaided human eye can see only two or three nebulae outside the borders of the Superuniverse of Orvonton...

Identical statements can be made about the Milky Way Galaxy. With the exception of the Andromeda galaxy and the two Magellanic star clouds, everything you can see in the night sky with the naked eye is within the Milky Way Galaxy.

And yet another statement that points to the Milky Way as being the core and the largest component of Orvonton is this one from page 458,

"The most recent of the major cosmic eruptions in Orvonton was the extraordinary double star explosion, the light of which reached Urantia in A. D. 1572. This conflagration was so intense that the explosion was clearly visible in broad daylight."

This supernova was of course the one seen by Tycho Brahe on November 11, 1572. It has been pinpointed by astronomers as being in an outer spiral arm of the Milky Way, some 15,000 light years distant, not in some galaxy far off in outer space.

In view of all this compelling data, it should be clear now that an area of space about 500 thousand light years in diameter and centered on the Milky Way Galaxy is in fact Orvonton.

How large is our local system of Satania?

On page 359, the Urantia Papers say that,

"Satania is not a uniform physical system, a single astronomic unit or organization,..."

But if it was a uniform physical system, more specifically if it was a cube of space, and assuming 2,000 stars, and an average of four light years between stars in our area of the galaxy, it would be a cube about 50 light years on each edge.

How far away is the Andromeda Galaxy? Don't the Urantia Papers say that the distance is about one million light years?

It is hard to be sure exactly how far away it is. Science seems to think it is about 2.2 million light years at this time. It used to think it was about one million light years away and 2.5 million light years has been science's high guess. But here is what the Encyclopedia Britannica has to say about distance measurements to external galaxies,

"Distance determinations for the nearest galaxies still remain uncertain by as much as 30 percent, and the scale of distances beyond the local group of galaxies is even more unsure, with an uncertainty of at least a factor of two."

Contrary to popular opinion, the Urantia Papers do not say that the distance to the Andromeda Galaxy is about one million light years. The Urantia Papers say that the light from those stars took almost one million years to get here. (Page 170) Perhaps it's all the same, but perhaps it's not.

What is the Virgo Supercluster, The Great Wall, and other deep space large scale universe structures that astronomy has discovered?

They are almost certainly manifestations of the outer space zones as mentioned in the Urantia Papers. On page 130, speaking from a 1935 reference, it says,

"In the not-distant future, new telescopes will reveal to the wondering gaze of Urantian astronomers no less than 375 million new galaxies in the remote stretches of outer space."

And on page 125,

"You may visualize the first outer space level, where untold universes are now in process of formation, as a vast procession of galaxies swinging around Paradise, bounded above and below by the midspace zones of quiescence and bounded on the inner and outer margins by relatively quiet space zones."

Further, on page 130, the Urantia Papers say, (again, from 1935 reference point) "Although the unaided human eye can see only two or three nebulae outside the borders of the Superuniverse of Orvonton, your telescopes literally reveal millions upon millions of these physical universes in process of formation. Most of the starry realms visually exposed to the search of your present-day telescopes are in Orvonton, but with photographic technique the larger telescopes penetrate far beyond the borders of the grand universe into the domains of outer space, where untold universes are in process of organization. And there are yet other millions of universes beyond the range of your present instruments."

If the Virgo Supercluster and other features of deep space that we can see now with our telescopes were a part of Orvonton or even the Grand Universe, the Papers would have said so right there.

What about the so-called "Great Attractor", what is it and are we heading toward it?

The Great Attractor is also probably part of the outer space zones, its motion causing it to appear as if we are heading in its direction when in fact we are not. On page 134 the Urantia Papers talk about such a situation.

"But the greatest of all such distortions arises because the vast universes of outer space in the realms next to the domains of the seven Superuniverses seem to be revolving in a direction opposite to that of the grand universe. That is, these myriads of nebulae and their accompanying suns and spheres are at the present time revolving clockwise about the central creation. The seven Superuniverses revolve about Paradise in a counterclockwise direction. It appears that the second outer universe of galaxies, like the seven Superuniverses, revolves counter-clockwise about Paradise. And the astronomic observers of Uversa think they detect evidence of revolutionary movements in a third outer belt of far- distant space which are beginning to exhibit directional tendencies of a clockwise nature."

What are quasars?

"Quasars are the most luminous known objects in the universe, some of them having luminosities more than thousands of times greater than that of the Galaxy. Some quasars are markedly and erratically variable in their light in a period of minutes. Their diameters must therefore be less than 100 light-minutes across, or about the size of the solar system. Thus hundreds to thousands of times the luminosity of the entire Galaxy is emitted from a volume 10 to the 17th power smaller than that of the Galaxy--an incredible outpouring of energy." [Grolier Encyclopedia.]

Here is what the Urantia Papers have to say about quasars on page 129,

"Far out in space, at an enormous distance from the seven inhabited Superuniverses, there are assembling vast and unbelievably stupendous circuits of force and materializing energies."

And on page 130,

"Still greater activities are taking place beyond these regions, for the Uversa physicists have detected early evidence of force manifestations more than fifty million light-years beyond the outermost ranges of the phenomena in the first outer space level. These activities undoubtedly presage the organization of the material creations of the second outer space level of the master universe."

It's interesting that the Grolier Encyclopedia phrase, "an incredible outpouring of energy", and the Urantia Papers' phrase, "unbelievably stupendous circuits of force and materializing energies," are so similar.

Finally, from page 131 of the Urantia Papers, the Revelators tell us,

"We can observe its immensity, we can discern its extent and sense its majestic dimensions, but otherwise we know little more about these realms than do the astronomers of Urantia."

Amen.

Norm Du Val P.O. Box 202 Reeder, ND 58649 - USA

Revised 04-08-2002 Return to main page. SQUARE CIRCLES PUBLISHING Urantia Book related works

square calendar source articles the ub related ub-related "ascent to home news study aids circles cartoons contact us of events studies & circular books sites paradise" books books

ARTICLES

A defense of the Urantia Book's version of Earth-Moon Evolution

Substituting the word "mass" for "size" in one place in the Urantia Book and making a size-volume distinction are the two keys to a new, completely reasonable interpretation of the Urantia Book's questionable account of earth-moon evolution.

by Dr. Phil Calabrese

RECENTLY AND in earlier publications of Innerface International, alongside many good examples of the UB's seeming prophetic science, editor Ken Glasziou has also expressed the opinion that "the Urantia Book's account of the evolution of the earth-moon system is simply impossibly wrong." UB reader Matthew Block had earlier alerted me to Ken's writing on the earth-moon evolution, and more recently another UB reader, Norm Du Val, asked me to look it over and also suggested that distinguishing between mass and size might dispel the difficulty with Ken's interpretation.

Ken takes an apparently heretofore unrecognized "word switch" error and magnifies it into a great distortion of the real meaning and content of the UB's account, which turns out to be quite reasonable after two adjustments are made to Ken's interpretation.

The first is that comparing the "sizes" of two bodies is different from comparing their "masses." For bodies of roughly equal density like the earth and moon during these ages, mass is proportional to volume, and volume is proportional to the cube of the radius of the spherical body, whereas the size of a sphere is simply proportional to its radius.

Ken seems to take mass and size to be proportional, as though size referred to volume rather than to a linear measure of the sphere.

Mathematically,

Volume (V) = (4/3) * Pi * (cube of the radius R) Mass (M) = Density * V

So M = Density * (4/3) * Pi * R**3 = K * R**3, where K is some constant.

If M1 and M2 are two masses of two bodies of corresponding radii R1 and R2, then

(M1/M2) = K * R1**3 / (K * R2**3) = (R1/R2)**3.

And so solving for (R1/R2),

(R1/R2) = (M1/M2)**(1/3), the cube root of (M1/M2).

(R1/R2) is also the ratio of the diameters of the spheres.

So in comparing two bodies, if one body is 30% greater in SIZE than the second body, i.e., the ratio of the size of one to the size of the other is 1.3, then the larger body will have roughly (1.3)*(1.3)(1.3) = 2.2 times the MASS of the smaller body.

(Again, this assumes bodies of equal density, which is a good enough approximation for explaining factors of error of 8 and 16 supposedly contained in the UB's account.)

On the other hand, if the mass of the first body is 1/10 the mass of the second body, then the size of the first body will be approximately the cube root of (1/10) larger in SIZE (diameter or radius) than the second body. The cube root of 1/10 is about 0.46. So the first body would be almost half the second body in size while only 1/10 its mass.

With this distinction in mind, let us interpret the UB's account in the three paragraphs below:

Data:

1. "2,500,000,000 years ago the planets had grown immensely in size. Urantia was a well-developed sphere about one tenth its present mass and was still growing rapidly by meteoric accretion." (P. 658)

2. "2,000,000,000 years ago the earth began decidedly to gain on the moon. Always had the planet been larger than its satellite, but there was not so much difference in size until about this time, when enormous space bodies were captured by the earth. Urantia was then about one fifth its present size." (P. 659)

3. "1,500,000,000 years ago the earth was two thirds its present size, while the moon was nearing its present mass. (P.659)

In 1. the UB says that the earth was 1/10 its present mass.

Mass_Earth_2.5B = (1/10) Mass_Earth_Now

So by the earlier number example,

Size_Earth_2.5B = 0.46 Size_Earth_Now

By this implication, the UB is saying in affect that 2.5 billion years ago the earth was almost half as big as it is now.

But in paragraph 2., the UB says that after another half billion years the earth had grown to 1/5 its present size. But 1/5 = 0.20, which is much less than 0.46. So the UB has seemingly contradictory data here.

So Ken is right that on its face there is something "impossibly wrong" with the account. Unfortunately he doesn't find the simplest remedy and instead ends up discounting the UB's science. He even suggests that this was an error purposely put in by the Revelators. Too bad.

I think there is an error in the UB in paragraph 1. The word "mass" should be "size". With that one change, and the distinction of linear size versus cubic volume (and mass), the UB's account makes complete sense.

So those who think that errors were purposely included in the UB will have to look elsewhere to make their case, because a simple word change could easily have been made in transcribing the text into type. Isn't that enough to acknowledge that the UB is not infallible?

***

The idea that errors were purposely included in the UB by the Revelators to prevent Book idolatry--to prevent belief in the infallibility of the Urantia Book--is quite insidious to the long-term human belief and faith in the authenticity of the UB as actual divine revelation. That is not the intention of those promoting this "time bombs" notion, but I think it is a subtle, unrecognized implication of it because it really discredits the Revelators as divine truth tellers.

Frankly, this notion that the Revelators resorted to purposely telling us falsehoods to prevent book idolatry greatly underestimates their ability to deter such Book worship by employing the truth. Instead of "time bombs", the Revelators decided to leave in the human transcription errors that they knew about such as the suggested "mass-size" word change. They also mentioned some scientific oversimplifications that would need updating in a "few short years". These self-qualifications should have been enough to ensure a healthy skepticism of anything written in the UB without overly discounting the UB as divine revelation.

The Revelators also included rather implausible or embarrassing facts like "Mighty Messengers," 50- foot wing span human transport birds (which are aerodynamically possible, "racial inferiority", and angelic speeds of three times that of light. These things do not need to be false to discourage Book idolatry. It is rather because people find them hard to believe that they have entertained the idea that they are false and were purposely included to prevent Book idolatry.

But we should not forget that every divine revelation, including the UB, requires some faith, not just reason. Were scientists unable to witness it, they would tend not to believe that caterpillars could metamorphose into butterflies, or that words and pictures could be sent almost instantly over invisible "electromagnetic waves."

There is always reason to believe more than we can scientifically prove.

That is my claim in view of K. Godel's Incompleteness Theorem. The Incompleteness Theorem essentially says that any language that contains the counting numbers has statements that are true but which cannot be proved true using only words in the language in which that statement was made. Only a richer language can prove the statement, but that richer language has its own unprovable statements.)

Interpretation of UB paragraphs with the word change and size-volume distinction:

1. 2,500,000,000 years ago the planets had grown immensely in size. Urantia was a well-developed sphere about one tenth its present size (not mass) and was still growing rapidly by meteoric accretion.

Size_Earth_2.5B = (1/10) Size_Earth_Now

Therefore the mass of the earth was (1/10)*(1/10)*(1/10) = 1/1000 = 0.1% of its present mass. That seems to be about right.

2."2,000,000,000 years ago the earth began decidedly to gain on the moon. Always had the planet been larger than its satellite, but there was not so much difference in size until about this time, when enormous space bodies were captured by the earth. Urantia was then about one fifth its present size." (P. 659)

Size_Earth_2B = (1/5) Size_Earth_Now

So

Mass_Earth_2B = (1/5)*(1/5)*(1/5) = 1/125 Mass_Earth_Now

Earth has gained from roughly 1/1000 its present mass to 1/125 its present mass.

Note that although the earth and moon had earlier been about the same size, it was at this time that earth gained significantly on the moon in size. If earth was, say, 1.3 times the size of the moon, for example, then its mass was 1.3 cubed or about 2.2 times the mass of the moon by then, not roughly equal as Ken claims.

In any case, at this time the moon had significantly less than 1/125 of the present mass of the earth.

This also seems about right since the earth now has gained even more on the moon in relative size and mass, but both are gaining by meteoric capture.

3. "1,500,000,000 years ago the earth was two thirds its present size, while the moon was nearing its present mass. (P.659)

Size_Earth_1.5B = (2/3) Size_Earth_Now

So

Mass_Earth_1.5B = (2/3)*(2/3)*(2/3) Mass_Earth_Now = (8/27) Mass_Earth_Now = 0.296 Mass_Earth_Now

So the mass of the earth then was about 3/10 or 30% of its present mass.

That the moon was nearing its present mass means it was no longer gaining much more material and so not gaining much in size either. Two bodies with equal size have equal mass (assuming equal density); two such bodies of equal mass have equal size. So it doesn't matter which word is used here to state this fact. However, saying that two things are about equal in mass implies they are even closer in size.

***

Facts about the earth and moon quoted by Ken:

Present mass of the earth = 5.94 x 10**21 metric tons Present radius of earth = 6378 km.

Present mass of the moon = 7.5 x 10**19 metric tons Present radius of moon = 1738 km.

***

So the earth is now about (6378/1738) = 3.670 times the moon in size and the earth is now (5.94 x 10**21 / 7.5 x 10**19) = (5.94/7.5) * (10**2) = 79.2 times the moon in mass.

Note that by the formula being used above a size ratio of 3.67 should roughly correspond to a mass ratio of 3.67 cubed, or 49.4. That the earth has even larger mass ratio over the moon is probably due to the earth's somewhat greater density due to more gravity packing the matter together and perhaps heavier matter too.

Concerning mass,

Mass_Moon_1.5B = Mass_Moon_Now = (1/79.2) Mass_Earth_Now.

But Mass_Earth_Now = (10/3) Mass_Earth_1.5B

So Mass_Moon_1.5B = (1/79.4)*(10/3) Mass_Earth_1.5B = 0.0420 Mass_Earth_1.5B = about 1/24 Mass_Earth_1.5B

So 1.5 billion years ago the mass of the moon was about 1/24 the mass of earth.

This seems about right because the earth continued gaining in relative mass on the moon during the intervening 1.5 billion years so that it is now 79.4 times the moon in mass not just 24 times.

Concerning size,

Size_Moon_1.5B = Size_Moon_Now = (1/3.67) Size_Earth_Now

And Size_Earth_Now = (3/2) Size_Earth_1.5B

So Size_Moon_1.5B = (1/3.67)*(3/2) Size_Earth_1.5B = 0.41 Size_Earth_1.5B

So at that time the moon was about 41% the size of the earth compared to only about 27/100 = 27% of earth's size now. But that is about right because the earth continued to gain matter while the moon didn't gain much after that.

So we see that there is nothing essentially wrong with the UB's account of the earth-moon evolution that a single word substitution and being careful to distinguish between mass and size can't fix.

Phil Calabrese is a retired professor of mathematics, past aerospace engineer, a retired research mathematician for the US Navy, and owner of Data Synthesis. He is also a long-time Urantia Book reader.

Email Phil Phil's website: DataSynthesis.org

QuickTime™ and a TIFF (LZW) decompressor are needed to see this picture.

Data Synthesis TheThe ComingComing ScientificScientific San Diego, CA ValidationValidation ofof TheThe UrantiaUrantia BookBook Philip Calabrese, Ph.D.

The Urantia Book Fellowship International Conference (IC’ 05) MAKING SPIRIT MATTER: The Next 50 Years

Villanova University Villanova, Pennsylvania

July 30 - August 4, 2005 OverviewOverview ofof PresentationPresentation

1) The Urantia Book has predicted many implausible and subsequently verified scientific facts better than our scientists while also successfully avoiding untenable systematic errors, unlike our scientists; 2) Therefore, on statistical grounds, only superhumans could have written the science and cosmology of The Urantia Book; 3) The cosmology of The Urantia Book while “transient” (a few hundred years in this context) is also of “immense value” in this transition period and beyond; 4) Examples of immensely valuable “instruction in cosmology” from The Urantia Book; 5) Soon-coming scientific predictions of The Urantia Book; 6) The future value of the cosmology of The Urantia Book. WasWas TheThe UrantiaUrantia BookBook WrittenWritten byby HumanHuman Beings?Beings? PotentiallyPotentially DiscreditingDiscrediting PitfallPitfall AvoidedAvoided

ƒ “Piltdown Man” - The 1912 & 1917 “Missing Link” fossils, a hoax finally exposed and discredited after 1950. ƒ Even as late as 1947 the fossils were still generally believed to be real. [Har03]

ƒ Although the evolution of vegetable life can be traced into animal life, and though there have been found graduated series of plants and animals which progressively lead up from the most simple to the most complex and advanced organisms, you will not be able to find such connecting links between the great divisions of the animal kingdom nor between the highest of the prehuman animal types and the dawn men of the human races. These so-called "missing links" will forever remain missing, for the simple reason that they never existed. The Urantia Book, Page-669 Line-24 Para ContinentalContinental DriftDrift

ƒ Pangaea - Alfred Wegener’s 1920’s theory of a single continent that broke apart and “drifted” (largely rejected by 1929, vindicated in the late1950’s and 60’s). [Wag96], [Hug05], [Wei05]

ƒ“750,000,000 years ago the first breaks in the continental land mass began as the great north-and-south cracking, which later admitted the ocean waters and prepared the way for the west-ward drift of the continents of North and South America, including Greenland. The long east-and-west cleavage separated Africa from Europe and severed the land masses of Australia, the Pacific Islands, and Antarctica from the Asiatic continent.” Page-663 Line-3 Para-1 MountainsMountains andand EarthquakesEarthquakes

ƒ Continents float on liquid rock; allowed “continental drift”; collisions cause mountains; shifting now causes earthquakes; periodic submergence continues. ƒ “The outer crust was about forty miles thick. This outer shell was supported by, and rested directly upon, a molten sea of basalt of varying thickness, a mobile layer of molten lava held under high pressure but always tending to flow hither and yon in equalization of shifting planetary pressures, thereby tending to stabilize the earth's crust. Even today the continents continue to float upon this non- crystallized cushiony sea of molten basalt. Were it not for this protective condition, the more severe earthquakes would literally shake the world to pieces. Earthquakes are caused by sliding and shifting of the solid outer crust and not by volcanoes.” Page-668 Line-27 Para-6 & 7 InjuryInjury RepairRepair PredictionPrediction

ƒ “In experimental partial resection in the rat, the remaining liver tissue starts to regenerate within a few hours. …dead liver cells are replaced by proliferation of surviving liver cells. Hepatocytes, Kupffer cells, endothelium, bile ducts, vessels, all proliferate.” “The factor(s) stimulating proliferation of remaining hepatocytes are not known. T(h)ey may be humoral. Indeed: 1) blood from a partially hepatectomized animal induces a proliferative response in the liver of a non-operated animal.” [Orf01] Emilio Orfei, Department of Pathology, Loyola University of Chicago, 2001

ƒ “When a living cell is injured, it possesses the ability to elaborate certain chemical substances which are empowered so to stimulate and activate the neighboring normal cells that they immediately begin the secretion of certain substances which facilitate healing processes in the wound; and at the same time these normal and uninjured cells begin to proliferate-- they actually start to work creating new cells to replace any fellow cells which may have been destroyed by the accident.” Page-735 Line-7 Para-2 TheThe LimitationsLimitations ofof RevelationRevelation ƒIs all or most of The Urantia Book’s science already outdated - merely transient early 20th century cosmology? ƒAre the numerous differences between contemporary science and The Urantia Book’s cosmology “errors on the face” of The Urantia Book evident after “a few short years”? ƒSince the cosmology of The Urantia Book is “not inspired”, and the revelators were not permitted to reveal “unearned” or pre-mature knowledge, how valuable can its cosmological discourses be? ScientificScientific (&(& Spiritual)Spiritual) ValueValue ofof TheThe UrantiaUrantia BookBook ƒ Immense value in reducing confusion by the authoritative elimination of error ƒ Immense value in co-ordination of known or about-to- be-known facts and observations ƒ Immense value in the restoration of important bits of lost knowledge concerning epochal transactions in the distant past ƒ Immense value in supplying information which will fill in vital missing gaps in otherwise earned knowledge ƒ Immense value by presenting cosmic data in such a manner as to illuminate the spiritual teachings contained in the accompanying revelation Page-1109 Line-40 Para-7 AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions FulfilledFulfilled (Billions(Billions ofof Universes)Universes)

ƒ “In the not-distant future, new telescopes will reveal to the wondering gaze of Urantian astronomers no less than 375 million new galaxies in the remote stretches of outer space.” Page-130, Line-47

ƒ “The relatively quiet zones between the space levels, such as the one separating the seven superuniverses from the first outer space level, are enormous elliptical regions of quiescent space activities. These zones separate the vast galaxies which race around Paradise in orderly procession.” Page-125 Line-6 AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions ConfirmedConfirmed (Huge(Huge Redshifts)Redshifts)

“Although your spectroscopic estimations of astronomic velocities are fairly reliable when applied to the starry realms belonging to your superuniverse and its associate superuniverses, such reckonings with reference to the realms of outer space are wholly unreliable. Spectral lines are displaced from the normal towards the violet by an approaching star; likewise these lines are displaced towards the red by a receding star. Many influences interpose to make it appear that the recessional velocity of the external universes increases at the rate of more than one hundred miles a second for every million light-years increase in distance. By this method of reckoning, subsequent to the perfection of more powerful telescopes, it will appear that these far-distant systems are in flight from this part of the universe at the unbelievable rate of more than thirty thousand miles a second. But this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” Page-134 Line-15 AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions ConfirmedConfirmed (Outer(Outer SpaceSpace Zones)Zones)

ƒ “You may visualize the first outer space level, where untold universes are now in process of formation, as a vast procession of galaxies swinging around Paradise, bounded above and below by the midspace zones of quiescence and bounded on the inner and outer margins by relatively quiet space zones.” Page-125 Para-1 ƒ “The Outer Space Levels. Far out in space, at an enormous distance from the seven inhabited superuniverses, there are assembling vast and unbelievably stupendous circuits of force and materializing energies. Between the energy circuits of the seven superuniverses and this gigantic outer belt of force activity, there is a space zone of comparative quiet, which varies in width but averages about four hundred thousand light-years. These space zones are free from star dust--cosmic fog.” Page-129 Line-45 AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions FulfilledFulfilled (“Walls”(“Walls” andand “Voids”)“Voids”)

ƒ “The first maps, published in 1986, were a great surprise to the astrophysicists. They had expected to find relative uniformity above the scale of the already- familiar galaxy clusters. Instead, the first surveys showed--and subsequent surveys have confirmed--that great clusters of galaxies are arranged in thin sheets or long filaments.” Michael Norman, NCSA/Univ. of Illinois ƒ North and South, Sheets and Voids, Margaret J. Geller and Emilio E. Falco, Harvard-Smithsonian Center for Astrophysics.

ƒ The Earth is at the center. Each of 9,325 points in this image represents a galaxy in the northern and E southern galactic hemispheres; unmapped a r regions are inaccessible because the plane of the t Milky Way obscures them. Note the “ring of h galaxies” centered around a location in the obscured region. Center of predicted ring of galaxies AstronomicAstronomic PredictionsPredictions FulfilledFulfilled (Rotational(Rotational SpeedSpeed && DarkDark Matter)Matter)

ƒ Galactic rotational speeds. ƒ As reported in Science Frontiers in 1982, “According to the physical laws governing orbital motion in a central force field, like that of our sun, distant objects should rotate more slowly than those closer to the central mass.” … “Doppler measurements of galaxy rotations made by Vera C. Rubin and her colleagues, at the Carnegie Institution, indicate that most stars out near the galactic rims rotate just as fast or faster than those closer to the hub.” [Cor82] ƒ Dark Matter. The Urantia Book Predicted the existence of dark matter holding fast spinning galaxies together. (Page-173 Line-3 Para-1) NeutrinosNeutrinos ƒ Neutrinos Exist. • Predicted by W. Pauli in 1931 and incorporated by E. Fermi in 1934 into his theory of atomic decay • First observed in 1959 by Clyde Cowan and Fred Reines. [Bar98] ƒ The 1955 Urantia Book affirmed Fermi’s unproved theory: “The mesotronic disintegration is also accompanied by the emission of certain small uncharged particles.” Page-479 Para-3 (Mesotrons are now called mesons.) ƒ Neutrinos Have Mass. Only in 1998 did our scientists discover that neutrinos have mass, upsetting their “standard theory”: ƒ “A Weighty Discovery in Particle Physics. In June 1998, an international team of Japanese and U.S. physicists unveiled strong evidence that elusive subatomic particles known as neutrinos have mass (or weight).” [Inf05] ƒ “The integrity of the nucleus is maintained by the reciprocal cohering function of the mesotron, which is able to hold charged and uncharged particles together because of superior force-mass power and by the further function of causing protons and neutrons constantly to change places.” Page-479 Line-9 Para-2 ProbabilityProbability ofof HumanHuman AuthorshipAuthorship

What is the probability of human authors guessing correctly that: ƒ No “missing link” exists: Probability estimate ≤ 1/50 ƒ Floating continents drifted; formed mountains: ≤ 1/40 ƒ Injured cells secrete chemicals stimulating repair: ≤ 1/50 ƒ “No less than 375 million” new galaxies will be seen: ≤ 1/100 ƒ “Walls” of galaxies are separated by huge voids: ≤ 1/100 ƒ Stronger telescopes will see huge red shifts: ≤ 1/5 ƒ Galaxies spin fast; dark matter keeps them together: ≤ 1/5 ƒ Neutrinos exist and have mass ≤ 1/4 So the probability of all of these happening by chance is ≤ (1/50)(1/40)(1/50)(1/100)(1/100)(1/5)(1/5)(1/4) ≤ 1/100,000,000,000 = less than 1 chance in 100 billion. Many other examples exist reducing this probability even more. InstructionsInstructions inin CosmologyCosmology • Huge Redshifts - Due to “numerous factors of error” • Space Expansion - Space moves and contains motion • Existence and Universe Location of a Focal Singularity in the Topology of Space - timeless and spaceless Paradise • Local versus Paradise Gravity • The Maturation of Space Potency into Mass Particles • Wavelike Manifestations and the Unqualified Absolute • A Rotating Universe - Einstein and Gödel • Solar System Origin • Solar Internal Temperature and Energy Sources • Physics and Chemistry Alone Cannot Evolve into Life • Garden of Eden - 1 mile down in eastern Mediterranean HugeHuge SpectrographicSpectrographic RedshiftsRedshifts •“The present relationship of your sun and its associated planets, while disclosing many relative and absolute motions in space, tends to convey the impression to astronomic observers that you are comparatively stationary in space, and that the surrounding starry clusters and streams are engaged in outward flight at ever-increasing velocities as your calculations proceed outward in space. But such is not the case.” Page-134 Line-1 Para-1 •“… this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” Page-134 Line-15 •“But the greatest of all such distortions arises because the vast universes of outer space in the realms next to the domains of the seven superuniverses seem to be revolving in a direction opposite to that of the grand universe. That is, these myriads of nebulae and their accompanying suns and spheres are at the present time revolving clockwise about the central creation. The seven superuniverses revolve about Paradise in a counterclockwise direction.” Page-134 Para-4 Y (North) Doppler Shift, dS/dt,dS/dt, Doppler Shift, the relative due to Alternating speed of the outer space object with respect to the Rotation position to Earth. Rotating Outer Outer space Space Zone object with combined angular velocity ω R S

θ Center of D Earth X (East) Rotation

Angle θ = ωt, t = time, ωR, RŠ D, ω = angular velocity, Max dS/dt= ± dS/dt = Doppler shift ωD, R D velocity SpaceSpace MotionMotion andand ExpansionExpansion

ƒ Space moves independently of the matter it contains. (1980’s “adjusted” Big Bang Cosmology) • “When the universes expand and contract, the material masses in pervaded space alternately move against and with the pull of Paradise gravity. The work that is done in moving the material energy mass of creation is space work but not power-energy work.” Page-134 Line-11 Para-2 • “Space is, from the human viewpoint, nothing--negative; it exists only as related to something positive and nonspatial. Space is, however, real. It contains and conditions motion. It even moves. Space motions may be roughly classified as follows: 1. Primary motion--space respiration, the motion of space itself. 2. Secondary motion--the alternate directional swings of the successive space levels. 3. Relative motions--relative in the sense that they are not evaluated with Paradise as a base point. Primary and secondary motions are absolute, motion in relation to unmoving Paradise. 4. Compensatory or correlating movement designed to co-ordinate all other motions.” Page-133 Line-33 Para-7 The Existence and Universe Location of Paradise • “Paradise is the actually motionless nucleus of the relatively quiescent zones existing between pervaded and unpervaded space. Geographically these zones appear to be a relative extension of Paradise, but there probably is some motion in them. We know very little about them, but we observe that these zones of lessened space motion separate pervaded and unpervaded space. Similar zones once existed between the levels of pervaded space, but these are now less quiescent.” Page-124 Line-19 Para-4 • “Space does not exist on any of the surfaces of Paradise. … Space does not touch Paradise; only the quiescent midspace zones come in contact with the central Isle.” (Page-124 Para-3) This fixed reference frame has a “universe location but no position in space.” Page-7 Para-4 • These quiescent zones of space exist both within each ultimate unit of matter (quantum) and also macroscopically between the moving galactic space zones. “The ultimaton, the first measurable form of energy, has Paradise as its nucleus.” Page-467 Para-5 Local and Paradise Gravity

• Ultimate units have a common nucleus – Paradise. “The ultimatons are not subject to local gravity, the interplay of material attraction, but they are fully obedient to absolute or Paradise gravity, to the trend, the swing, of the universal and eternal circle of the universe of universes. Ultimatonic energy does not obey the linear or direct gravity attraction of near-by or remote material masses, but it does ever swing true to the circuit of the great ellipse of the far-flung creation.” Page-465 Para-2 • “Universal Gravity. All forms of force-energy--material, mindal, or spiritual--are alike subject to those grasps, those universal presences, which we call gravity. Page-131 Line-34 Para-5 • “These four circuits are not related to the nether Paradise force center; they are neither force, energy, nor power circuits. They are absolute presence circuits and like God are independent of time and space.” Page-131 Line-44 Para-6 The Maturation of Space Potency into Matter • “The force organizers initiate those changes and institute those modifications of space-force which eventuate in energy; the power directors transmute energy into matter; thus the material worlds are born.” Page-468 Para-2 • “Primary Master Force Organizers are the manipulators of the primordial or basic space-forces of the Unqualified Absolute; they are nebulae creators. They are the living instigators of the energy cyclones of space and the early organizers and directionizers of these gigantic manifestations. These force organizers transmute primordial force (pre-energy not responsive to direct Paradise gravity) into primary or puissant energy, energy transmuting from the exclusive grasp of the Unqualified Absolute to the gravity grasp of the Isle of Paradise. They are thereupon succeeded by the associate force organizers, who continue the process of energy transmutation from the primary through the secondary or gravity-energy stage. Page-329 Line-19 Para-3 100 Ultimatons = 1 Electron

Non-moving midspace zones surrounding pervaded space Ultimatons

ƒ100 ultimatons (blue) generate 100 octaves of wavelike energy. ƒEach blue diameter is 1/2 that of the next larger diameter. ƒ3 primary and 7 mixed intermediate diameters exist within each octave allowing for intermediate energy levels - colors or tones. ƒWhite Background is a “force blanket” of energy, capable of very quick (faster than light) quantum wavelike reactions. Wavelike Manifestations • “The quantity of energy taken in or given out when electronic or other positions are shifted is always a "quantum" or some multiple thereof, but the vibratory or wavelike behavior of such units of energy is wholly determined by the dimensions of the material structures concerned. Such wavelike energy ripples are 860 times the diameters of the ultimatons, electrons, atoms, or other units thus performing.” Page-474 Line-15 Para-4 • “The excitation of the content of space produces a wavelike reaction to the passage of rapidly moving particles of matter, just as the passage of a ship through water initiates waves of varying amplitude and interval.” Page-476 Line-4 Para-1 • Wavelike Manifestations, perfectly synchronized with electronic velocity and ultimatonic revolutions, are a “space-force reaction of the Unqualified Absolute”. Universe reactions “appear between an act and its consequences” (proved by quantum mechanical experiments and J. Bell’s Theorem in 1964). AA RotatingRotating UniverseUniverse -- EinsteinEinstein andand GödelGödel • Einstein’s universe: • “Principle of Relativity”: There is no way to say that one object is really at rest and the other is really moving with constant velocity. • The speed of light is constant in all such moving frames • Gödel’s universes: Everything rotates around every position! • The Urantia Book: • The speed of light is constant and E = mc2, but • All energy rotates around the same Center! • The universe has a non-moving geographic Center; there IS a unique position in the universe! Contradicts Einstein’s “principle of relativity”. Solar System Origin

• “Today, your sun has achieved relative stability, but its eleven and one-half year sunspot cycles betray that it was a variable star in its youth. In the early days of your sun the continued contraction and consequent gradual increase of temperature initiated tremendous convulsions on its surface. These titanic heaves required three and one-half days to complete a cycle of varying brightness. This variable state, this periodic pulsation, rendered your sun highly responsive to certain outside influences which were to be shortly encountered.” Page-655 Line-32 Para-8 • “As the Angona system drew nearer, the solar extrusions grew larger and larger; more and more matter was drawn from the sun to become independent circulating bodies in surrounding space. This situation developed for about five hundred thousand years until Angona made its closest approach to the sun; whereupon the sun, in conjunction with one of its periodic internal convulsions, experienced a partial disruption; from opposite sides and simultaneously, enormous volumes of matter were disgorged. From the Angona side there was drawn out a vast column of solar gases, rather pointed at both ends and markedly bulging at the center, which became permanently detached from the immediate gravity control of the sun.” Page-656 Line-10 Para-2 Solar System Origin (2)

Evidence for the passing “dark island” scenario - an alternate, now discarded theory: • Retrograde (reverse) orbits prove the solar system has foreign objects; therefore a collision occurred • Average plane of orbits of planets is 5+% off the plane of sun’s equator in the plane defined by the line of Angona’s approach. This would not be true in a strictly condensation model • Extremely elongated orbit of recently discovered planetoid, Sedna, corroborates such a passing heavy object • Three outer planets of Angona captured by sun Solar Internal Temperature and Energy Sources •“The internal temperature of many of the suns, even your own, is much higher than is commonly believed.” “The surface temperature of your sun is almost 6,000 degrees, but it rapidly increases as the interior is penetrated until it attains the unbelievable height of about 35,000,000 degrees in the central regions. (All of these temperatures refer to your Fahrenheit scale.)” Page-463 Para-1 and Para- 2 •“…the sources of solar energy, named in the order of their importance, are: 1. Annihilation of atoms and, eventually, of electrons, …” Page-463 Para-3 •“You might try to visualize 35,000,000 degrees of heat, in association with certain gravity pressures, as the electronic boiling point. Under such pressure and at such temperature all atoms are degraded and broken up into their electronic and other ancestral components; even the electrons and other associations of ultimatons may be broken up, but the suns are not able to degrade the ultimatons.” Page-463 Para-5 TeachableTeachable MindMind -- NecessaryNecessary forfor EvolutionaryEvolutionary LifeLife

“Physics and chemistry alone cannot explain how a human being evolved out of the primeval protoplasm of the early seas. The ability to learn, memory and differential response to environment, is the endowment of mind. The laws of physics are not responsive to training; they are immutable and unchanging. The reactions of chemistry are not modified by education; they are uniform and dependable. Aside from the presence of the Unqualified Absolute, electrical and chemical reactions are predictable. But mind can profit from experience, can learn from reactive habits of behavior in response to repetition of stimuli.” Page-738 Line-1 Para-1

‘In the later evolution of mortal creatures the Life Carrier Sons provide the physical body, fabricated out of the existing organized material of the realm, while the Universe Spirit contributes the "breath of life.” ’ Page-376 Para-2 Soon-Coming Validation

• Scientists only respect confirmed predictions. • Without rather spectacular scientific predictions most scientists would never entertain the possibility of an actual communication from “outer space” in the form of a published book.

•Discovery of Atlantis - the First Garden of Eden Soon-Coming Validation (p.2)

• Scientists will say: • There are several (four) outer space “rings of galaxies” (outer space zones) (<5 years) • The Andromeda Galaxy is “closer than we thought” (by a factor of 3). (On May 30, 2005 scientists announced: “The Andromeda Galaxy is three times bigger than we thought”.) • Spectrographic reinterpretation of Hubble’s Law - the redshift to distance linear relationship - does not imply “big bang”. • Overthrow of the big bang cosmology (<15 years) by a rotating universe (<20 years) • Discovery of a world of non-breathing, (electrically powered ?) humanoids “in close proximity” to Earth (Jupiter’s Ganymede, the largest moon in the solar system?) The Future

• Time and Space. Time as the moving image of eternity; space as the fleeting shadow (projection) of Paradise realities • Circular simultaneity of experience replacing the linear “flow of events” • The Bestowal of Life - design of life recognized • The Seven Master Spirits and their Seven Different Superuniverses recognized • The Supreme Being - the unity of the universe known • Supreme and Ultimate experience in eternity known • The Spirit Nucleus - that there is One is known TimeTime andand SpaceSpace

• “It is helpful to man's cosmic orientation to attain all possible comprehension of Deity's relation to the cosmos. While absolute Deity is eternal in nature, the Gods are related to time as an experience in eternity. In the evolutionary universes eternity is temporal everlastingness--the everlasting now.” Page-1295 Line-2 Para-1 • Time is the “moving image of eternity” and space is the “reflected shadow” (projection) of Paradise realities. • “Mankind is slow to perceive that, in all that is personal, matter is the skeleton of morontia, and that both are the reflected shadow of enduring spirit reality. How long before you will regard time as the moving image of eternity and space as the fleeting shadow of Paradise realities?” Page-2021 Para-2 CircularCircular SimultaneitySimultaneity

• From Jesus in The Urantia Book, we read, “Animals do not sense time as does man, and even to man, because of his sectional and circumscribed view, time appears as a succession of events; but as man ascends, as he progresses inward, the enlarging view of this event procession is such that it is discerned more and more in its wholeness. That which formerly appeared as a succession of events then will be viewed as a whole and perfectly related cycle; in this way will circular simultaneity increasingly displace the onetime consciousness of the linear sequence of events.” Page-1439 Line-19 Para-3 TheThe BestowalBestowal ofof EnergyEnergy andand LifeLife

• “Subsequent to even still greater progress and further discoveries, after Urantia has advanced immeasurably in comparison with present knowledge, though you should gain control of the energy revolutions of the electrical units of matter to the extent of modifying their physical manifestations--even after all such possible progress, forever will scientists be powerless to create one atom of matter or to originate one flash of energy or ever to add to matter that which we call life.” Page-468 Line-4 Para-1 • “The force organizers initiate those changes and institute those modifications of space-force which eventuate in energy; the power directors transmute energy into matter; thus the material worlds are born. The Life Carriers initiate those processes in dead matter which we call life, material life. The Morontia Power Supervisors likewise perform throughout the transition realms between the material and the spiritual worlds. The higher spirit Creators inaugurate similar processes in divine forms of energy, and there ensue the higher spirit forms of intelligent life.” Page-468 Line-11 Para-2 SevenSeven AbsolutesAbsolutes ofof InfinityInfinity

• The Seven Absolutes of Infinity, the “premise of reality” • Spiritual-mindal-physical, personal-nonpersonal, potential-actual, … all distinctions are therein contained • The Seven Master Spirits - seven different superuniverses • The 49 Reflective Spirits and Majeston – chief of Reflectivity • The Supreme Being - Supreme and Ultimate experience – the Gods are related to time as an experience in eternity • “Matter and spirit and the state intervening between them are three interrelated and interassociated levels of the true unity of the real universe. Regardless of how divergent the universe phenomena of fact and value may appear to be, they are, after all, unified in the Supreme.” Page-1477 Line-23 Para-4 TheThe SpiritSpirit NucleusNucleus

• “Mortal man has a spirit nucleus. The mind is a personal-energy system existing around a divine spirit nucleus and functioning in a material environment. Such a living relationship of personal mind and spirit constitutes the universe potential of eternal personality.” Page-142 Line-1 Para-1 • “Reality of material existence attaches to unrecognized energy as well as to visible matter. When the energies of the universe are so slowed down that they acquire the requisite degree of motion, then under favorable conditions, these same energies become mass. And forget not, the mind which can alone perceive the presence of apparent realities is itself also real. And the fundamental cause of this universe of energy-mass, mind, and spirit, is eternal--it exists and consists in the nature and reactions of the Universal Father and his absolute co-ordinates.” Page-1477 Line-27 Para-5 References • [Aus04] Charles F. Austerberry, In “Evolution of modern cosmology: A brief history”, Dept. of Biology, Creighton University, http://puffin.creighton.edu/Austerberry/SRP420/SRP420_2004/Cosmology.html • [Bar98] Tomasz Barszczak, “Super-Kamiokande detector”, U. of California Irvine, 1998, http://www.ps.uci.edu/~superk/neutrino.html • [Cor82] William R. Corliss, “The Rims Of Galaxies Spin Too Fast”, Science Frontiers #19, JAN-FEB 1982, http://www.science-frontiers.com/sf019/sf019p03.htm • [Göd49] Kurt Gödel, “An Example of a New Type of Cosmological Solutions of Einstein’s Field Equations of Gravitation”, Reviews of Modern Physics, Vol 21, Number 3, July, 1949. • [Har03] Richard Harter, “Piltdown Man”, 2003, http://home.tiac.net/~cri_a/piltdown/piltdown.html#introduction • [Hug05] Patrick Hughes, “On the Shoulders of Giants”, NASA Earth Observatory, 2005, http://earthobservatory.nasa.gov/Library/Giants/Wegener/ • [Inf05] http://www.infoplease.com/ipa/A0762175.html • [Mul00] Larry Mullins with Dr. Meredith Sprunger, A History of the Urantia Papers, Penumbra Press, Boulder, Co., 2000. • [Orf01] Emilio Orfei, Editor, “Review of Pathology of the Liver”, Department of Pathology, Loyola University of Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Apr 10, 2001. http://www.meddean.luc.edu/lumen/MedEd/orfpath/repair.htm • [Rod05] Rodrigo Ibata, Observatoire Astronomique de Strasbourg in France, Reuters News Release, May 30, 2005, http://www.cnn.com/2005/TECH/space/05/30/space.andromeda.reut/ ReferencesReferences (2)(2) • [Rot99] Carl A. Rotter, Department of Physics, University of Dallas, 1999. http://www.as.wvu.edu/coll03/phys/www/rotter/phys201/2_Matter_Space_Time/Ex panding.html • [Sco05] “Redshift”, Donald E. Scott, http://www.electric-cosmos.org/arp.htm, Important Web site for the alternative red shifts • [Sci90] Science Frontiers #67, JAN-FEB 1990. © 1990-2000 William R. Corliss, http://www.science-frontiers.com/sf067/sf067a08.htm • [Svi96] Egils Sviestins, “Rotating Universes and Time Traveling”, http://www.ettnet.se/~egils/essay/essay.html • [Tal02] Stefan Tallqvist, “The electron model”, 2002 http://www.vtt.fi/tte/samba/staff/st/electron.html • [Wag96] Ben Waggoner, “Alfred Wegener (1880-1930)”, University of California, Berkeley, Museum of Paleontology, http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/history/wegener.html • [Wei05] Anne Weil, “Plate Tectonics: The Rocky History of an Idea”, the University of California Berkeley Museum of Paleontology, 2005, http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/geology/techist.html • [Wik05] “Galaxy”, Wikipedia, 2005 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galaxy • [Wor97] World Book Encyclopedia. Chicago: World Book, 1997: 205. The Coming Scientific Validation of the Urantia Book Philip Calabrese

1. Introduction Although The Urantia Book was first published in 1955, already by 1942 it was “fixed” and by 1946 the final versions of the 1st edition plates were in the vault of printer RR Donnelley & Sons of Chicago, ready to produce 10,000 copies. [Mul00] Without fanfare the book was published and copies sent to prominent people of the time. The reaction was a resounding sound of one hand clapping. And so it has been pretty much ever since except for a few people here and there from all over the world who have found a real value, a great value, even an immense value in the pages of what we recognize to be the “Fifth Epochal Revelation” of scientific facts and spiritual truth to our world, Urantia.

Was The Urantia Book written by human beings? Imagine some people cooperating in the endeavor of quietly putting the Urantia Papers together.

That isn’t a laptop computer they are bending over. It’s a typewriter since there were no computers at that time. Their research team was charged to find the best human writers in astronomy, geology, paleontology, chemistry, physics, biology, botany, and other any other field you can think of, and then selectively use their ideas and sometimes even their phrasing but to avoid all of their blunders.

2. Evidence of Superhuman Authorship How could anyone ever scientifically come to the conclusion that a book has superhuman authorship? There is a way. Many contemporary scientists have imagined that the first extra- terrestrial communication would come from some similar civilization in the universe. Therefore they imagined establishing communication, for example, using the ratio of the length of the circumference of any circle to its radius – the non-repeating, non-algebraic (transcendental) number π.

But another possibility has been overlooked, that we would be contacted by superhuman life, be reintroduced to communication with the universe after a long severing of communication due to a rebellion in this part of the local universe, yes the Lucifer Rebellion. That possibility seems to have completely eluded most human scientists. The Urantia Book is primary evidence that we have indeed been recently visited by superhumans, who must be responsible for the existence of the Urantia Book on the planet.

2.1 Potentially discrediting pitfall avoided. A good example of the Urantia Book’s uncanny ability to avoid pitfalls is the Piltdown man double fossil hoax. As told by Wayne Jackson [Jac01]:

“In December of 1912, Charles Dawson, an amateur archaeologist, and Sir Arthur Smith Woodward of the British Museum of Natural History, announced that they had discovered a man-like skull in a pit near Piltdown, England. Along with the skull was a jawbone that appeared to be very ape-like except for the teeth, which were more flattened, as would be expected in humans. …”

When a second fossil Piltdown II later appeared in 1917 almost all scientists in the field were fooled including earlier skeptics Henry F. Osborn and William Gregory. According to master source-book sleuth and superhuman authorship skeptic Matthew Block [Blo05] it was Osborn who was the main source for the Urantia Book’s material on prehistoric man.

According to the University of California Museum of Paleontology “With few exceptions nobody suggested that the finds were a hoax until the very end.” [Har03] That didn’t come until 1953 at an international conference. Even as late as 1947 the fossils were still generally believed to be real. Over the years hundreds of scholarly articles were written about “Piltdown Man”.

“Eventually, it was discovered that the teeth had been ground down artificially to appear human and that it had been a sloppy job at that. Abrasion marks were still evident, the surfaces were flattened at different angles, etc. Moreover, as a result of chemical tests, it was determined that the jawbone had been stained chemically with potassium bichromate and iron salts for the purpose of making it appear ancient. …” [Jac01]

Consider now that had the authors of the Urantia Book swallowed this fraudulent “Piltdown Man” - “Eanthropus dawsoni” - that one blunder would have completely discredited the Urantia Book as divine revelation. It would have been the proverbial “smoking gun” of evidence to conclude that the Urantia Book was itself a fraud, humanly written.

But instead, while acknowledging and describing Neanderthal, Cro-Magnon, Java and Heidelberg Man, and even while affirming evolutionary theory’s main lines of thought, The Urantia Book nevertheless flatly states that no such “missing link” fossil will be found because none exists. The reference follows:

“Although the evolution of vegetable life can be traced into animal life, and though there have been found graduated series of plants and animals which progressively lead up from the most simple to the most complex and advanced organisms, you will not be able to find such connecting links between the great divisions of the animal kingdom nor between the highest of the prehuman animal types and the dawn men of the human races. These so-called "missing links" will forever remain missing, for the simple reason that they never existed.” [Page-669 Line-24 Para-4]

Between 1917 and 1953 only a very few scientists (< 2%) still questioned the Piltdown “missing link” fossils and the most prominent of them swallowed the double hoax. But while affirming most other elements of evolution, the Urantia Book authors chose to positively deny the existence of the “missing link”, a very minority position at the time rather than the majority opinion of their main source, Henry F. Osborn.

The Urantia Book might have conveniently ignored “Missing link man”, as many did, but virtually none who accepted evolution at the time flatly expressed what is in the Urantia Book already in 1946 and earlier, that there is no such missing link and that none will ever be found. The probability of randomly taking this position before 1946 is less than 1/50 to be generous about it. 2.2 Unpopular Positions and Scientific Predictions Confirmed. Many unpopular scientific positions including predictions that might have discredited the Urantia Book have already been corroborated by subsequent scientific progress. a) Pangaea and Continental Drift. Pangaea (“all lands”) was Alfred Wegener’s 1920’s theory of a single continent that broke apart and whose pieces “drifted” apart to form the present continental arrangement. At the time the orthodox theory to explain similar rock deposits and species of life on opposite shores of continents was somehow with hypothetical land bridges that once connected far away continents.

As pointed out by T. Bishop [Bis82] “Reaction to Wegener's theory was almost uniformly hostile, and often exceptionally harsh and scathing”

The University of California Museum of Paleontology writes: “Alfred Wegener (1880-1930). In 1929, about the time Wegener's ideas began to be dismissed, Arthur Holmes elaborated on one of Wegener's many hypotheses; the idea that the mantle undergoes thermal convection.” “Not until the 1960's did Holmes' idea receive any attention.” [Wei05].

But already by 1946 and earlier, and by 1955 at the latest the Urantia Book was on record saying: “750,000,000 years ago the first breaks in the continental land mass began as the great north-and- south cracking, which later admitted the ocean waters and prepared the way for the west-ward drift of the continents of North and South America, including Greenland. The long east-and-west cleavage separated Africa from Europe and severed the land masses of Australia, the Pacific Islands, and Antarctica from the Asiatic continent.” Page-663 Line-3 Para-1

Only a few geologists (< 5%) defended Wegener’s theory of continental drift until the 1960’s. It was largely rejected by 1929 due to Wegener’s offering too many implausible mechanisms to explain the “drift”. By the time he and Holmes suggested something like continents floating on liquid rock, they were ignored. Only later in the late 1950’s and 60’s was “continental drift” vindicated. b) Plate Tectonics. Continents float on liquid rock; this allowed “continental drift”; collisions cause mountains; shifting now causes earthquakes – all these are now accepted facts but were just unpopular conjectures when the Urantia Book said:

“The outer crust was about forty miles thick. This outer shell was supported by, and rested directly upon, a molten sea of basalt of varying thickness, a mobile layer of molten lava held under high pressure but always tending to flow hither and yon in equalization of shifting planetary pressures, thereby tending to stabilize the earth's crust. Even today the continents continue to float upon this non-crystallized cushiony sea of molten basalt. Were it not for this protective condition, the more severe earthquakes would literally shake the world to pieces. Earthquakes are caused by sliding and shifting of the solid outer crust and not by volcanoes.” Page-668 Line-27 Para-6 & 7 Notice that this “shifting” suggests that the “solid outer crust” can rub up against itself, and shift, something we now know occurs on a moving fault line.

We recently learned something at most hinted at in The Urantia Book - a mid-Atlantic ridge from which over time the ocean floor slowly moves up and spreads out in both directions. This movement or flow appears to have been the specific cause of the westward drift of the American continents.

“The land was periodically going up and down due to the shifting sea level occasioned by activities on the ocean bottoms.” Page-681 Line-28 Para-6 c) Mountain formation. Concerning the western American mountain ranges, the Urantia Book Says: “Near the close of the preceding geologic period much of the continental land was up above water, although as yet there were no mountain peaks. But as the continental land drift continued, it met with the first great obstruction on the deep floor of the Pacific. This contention of geologic forces gave impetus to the formation of the whole vast north and south mountain range extending from Alaska down through Mexico to Cape Horn. Page-689 Line-4 Para-1

Wegener had offered such a scenario to explain the western range of mountains in North and South America. This has now been substantiated and greatly elaborated with knowledge that the Urantia Book did not reveal at the time. One might say that the account could now benefit from revision in view of new scientific information learned since 1955.

Had the Urantia Book authors chosen a basically erroneous account, then that would have discredited it. The probability of randomly choosing Wegener’s position and randomly choosing the proper mechanism of continental drift is much less than 1/20. Lack of a detailed description here is not a disqualifier of super-human authorship.

So randomly choosing correctly in both “Piltdown” and “Wegener” is less than (1/50)(1/20)=1/1000. Factor in another 1/2 for mountain formation, and the probability is 1/2000. You see where this is leading. A sequence of likely pitfalls and unpopular positions and other positions can hardly ALL turn out well without superhuman authorship. Therefore the Urantia Book had superhuman authors. More support for this estimate follows. d) Injury Repair Cell Proliferation. “Many features of human life afford abundant evidence that the phenomenon of mortal existence was intelligently planned, that organic evolution is not a mere cosmic accident. When a living cell is injured, it possesses the ability to elaborate certain chemical substances which are empowered so to stimulate and activate the neighboring normal cells that they immediately begin the secretion of certain substances which facilitate healing processes in the wound; and at the same time these normal and uninjured cells begin to proliferate-- they actually start to work creating new cells to replace any fellow cells which may have been destroyed by the accident. Page-735 Line-7 Para-2

In affirming that “creative design” did have a part in evolution, the Urantia Book offers as an example how an injury causes cells to secrete chemicals that cause nearby healthy cells to start proliferating to repair the injury. This mechanism is just now being described, but our scientists only suspect that the blood carries such repair chemicals. For instance in discussing repair of liver cells in 2001 Dr. Emilio Orfei [Orf01], Department of Pathology, Loyola University of Chicago writes

“Reaction to Injury: Repair. The hepatocyte has a florid regenerative potential. In experimental partial resection in the rat, the remaining liver tissue starts to regenerate within a few hours. In 14- 15 hours DNA replication is seen. In 20-21 hours mitoses appear. In 32 hours mitoses are at the pick. In 2 weeks the remaining liver tissue has reached the weight that had before resection. Cell division takes place in the periportal zone. In pathological conditions, dead liver cells are replaced by proliferation of surviving liver cells. Hepatocytes, Kupffer cells, endothelium, bile ducts, vessels, all proliferate.”

“The factor(s) stimulating proliferation of remaining hepatocytes are not known. T[h]ey may be humoral. Indeed: 1) blood from a partially hepatectomized animal induces a proliferative response in the liver of a non- operated animal. …”

The Urantia Book also mentions that these chemicals could be used to improve treatment for injuries and to control certain dangerous diseases - cancer. Only a few intrepid medical researchers are just now exploring such approaches to cancer treatment.

Do you think maybe that the medical profession could find “immense value” in the cosmic instructions and scientific assertions of the Urantia Book? What is the probability of some medical paper correctly describing this back 1955? Virtually zero has to be the answer because the inflammation reaction and injury repair mechanism was totally unknown back at that time. [Pri05] If we assign another 1/50 to the probability of there being some human description before 1955 chosen by the authors that was correct, that brings the probability we’ve been estimating to less than (1/2000)(1/50) = 1/100000, one out of a hundred thousand, and we’re just getting started. More evidence will be offered below but first let us consider the “limitations of revelation”. Are we expecting too much from the Urantia Book’s cosmology?

2.3 The Limitations of Revelation. Some readers, and even supposed believers, claim over and over again that most of the Urantia Book’s science is already outdated - merely transient early 20th century cosmology. The numerous differences between contemporary science and the Urantia Book’s cosmology they see as “errors on the face” of the Urantia Book evident after “a few short years”. Since the cosmology of The Urantia Book is “not inspired”, since the Revelators were not permitted to reveal “unearned” or pre-mature knowledge, how factual and how valuable are its cosmological discourses?

These questions are being asked over and over again by certain writers who then answer their own questions by quoting a few favorite paragraphs that seem to imply that the Revelators were not permitted to give us accurate far-reaching cosmic instruction. Nothing could be further from the truth. Consider this statement by the relevant Melchizedek, which should always be quoted in this context: “Truth may be but relatively inspired, even though revelation is invariably a spiritual phenomenon. While statements with reference to cosmology are never inspired, such revelations are of immense value in that they at least transiently clarify knowledge by: 1. The reduction of confusion by the authoritative elimination of error. 2. The co-ordination of known or about-to-be-known facts and observations.

3. The restoration of important bits of lost knowledge concerning epochal transactions in the distant past. 4. The supplying of information which will fill in vital missing gaps in otherwise earned knowledge. 5. Presenting cosmic data in such a manner as to illuminate the spiritual teachings contained in the accompanying revelation.” Page-1109 Line-40 Para-7

Here the writer attempts to carefully qualify the previously described ‘limitations of revelation’ by allowing that the Urantia Book can nevertheless be of “immense value” by temporarily clarifying cosmic knowledge via the accomplishment of the five items above.

But these five immensely valuable items have just begun to occur. Presently very few scientists take the Urantia Book seriously, let alone authoritative, so scientific confusion has not yet been reduced by an authoritative elimination of errors; co-ordination of about to be known facts is just now happening and will continue; lost knowledge about past epochal events is just now being further demonstrated; missing gaps supplied by the Urantia Book are still to be considered by most scientists; and finally cosmic data has yet to be accepted by many scientists as a basis for the accompanying spiritual revelation. We are still quite early, but the times are upon us when many more of these things will be fulfilled.

“Mortal man is passing through a great age of expanding horizons and enlarging concepts on Urantia, and his cosmic philosophy must accelerate in evolution to keep pace with the expansion of the intellectual arena of human thought.” Page-1146 Line-22 Para-5

At this time our human cosmic philosophy needs some divine revelation to make adequate progress. This is when we need some help with our thinking about these matters, and the Urantia Book is the universe’s response! It is the long sought communication we’ve been hoping for, but it is much more than we have been hoping for. Yet, considering the plight of our world of wars and rumors of wars, surely if there is a Universe out there, they will send us a life-savor seeing how we are all in danger each day of drowning in a self-made morass of nuclear destruction and suicide bombing.

2.4 Astronomic Predictions Fulfilled (or Partially). Already much has been fulfilled. Many significant scientific predictions have already been confirmed.

a) “No less than 375 million new galaxies”. New cosmic maps of the whole universe are now confirming the bold cosmic predictions made by the Urantia Book before 1955:

Speaking about our astronomical observations, The Urantia Book says, “…with photographic technique the larger telescopes penetrate far beyond the borders of the grand universe into the domains of outer space, where untold universes are in process of organization. And there are yet other millions of universes beyond the range of your present instruments.” “In the not-distant future, new telescopes will reveal to the wondering gaze of Urantian astronomers no less than 375 million new galaxies in the remote stretches of outer space.” Page-130, Para-5 & Para-6

About 1990 with the publication of early deep space photos our scientific estimates of the number of galaxies changed from “5 to 10 million” to “at least 50 to 100 million”. By 1997 World Book was saying "Studies of distant space with optical and radio telescopes indicate that there may be about 100 billion galaxies in the universe." [Wor97]

My how quickly scientific estimates change without hardly a look back or an admission of error in the enthusiasm of “new results”, which are just as proudly asserted with the same certainty as the previous beliefs. The Urantia Book has to live with what it said in 1955, and it beat the galactic science of 1986! b) “Walls” of Galaxies Separated by “Voids”. Before 1986 almost all contemporary astronomers and cosmologists fully expected to see a random distribution of galaxies in the universe as a whole. That was the prediction of our best non-Urantia Book reading cosmologists, consistent with their so-called “big bang cosmology”. With 30 or 40 years of hindsight over the Urantia Book, they still were wrong and the Urantia Book is right. What does that say about whose cosmology is obsolete? Consider the following report in Science Frontiers:

“The discovery of the Great Wall of galaxies and the regular clumping of galactic matter has greatly surprised astronomers, who have been emphasizing how uniformly distributed galactic matter should [be] -- according to theory, at least. Now, D.C. Koo, at the University of California at Santa Cruz, says, "The regularity is just mind-boggling." M. Davis, an astrophysicist at Berkeley, admits that if the distribution of galaxies is truly so regular, "...it is safe to say we understand less than zero about the early universe." (Wilford, John Noble; "Unexpected Order in Universe Confuses Scientists," Pittsburgh Post Gazette, May 28, 1990. Cr. E.D.Fegert)” [Sci90] “And from the University of Tennessee we read: “The first maps, published in 1986, were a great surprise to the astrophysicists. They had expected to find relative uniformity above the scale of the already-familiar galaxy clusters. Instead, the first surveys showed--and subsequent surveys have confirmed--that great clusters of galaxies are arranged in thin sheets or long filaments. The longest sheet detected, called the "Great Wall," extends hundreds of millions of light years across the maps.” [Nor05] These maps were first published by Margaret Geller and John Huchra [Huc01].

On the other hand, the 1955 Urantia Book authors predicted the future observation of a “vast procession of galaxies” bounded by relatively empty zones of space:

“You may visualize the first outer space level, where untold universes are now in process of formation, as a vast procession of galaxies swinging around Paradise, bounded above and below by the midspace zones of quiescence and bounded on the inner and outer margins by relatively quiet space zones.” (Page-125 Para-1)

“The relatively quiet zones between the space levels, such as the one separating the seven superuniverses from the first outer space level, are enormous elliptical regions of quiescent space activities. These zones separate the vast galaxies which race around Paradise in orderly procession.” (Page-125 Line-6)

“The Outer Space Levels. Far out in space, at an enormous distance from the seven inhabited superuniverses, there are assembling vast and unbelievably stupendous circuits of force and materializing energies. Between the energy circuits of the seven superuniverses and this gigantic outer belt of force activity, there is a space zone of comparative quiet, which varies in width but averages about four hundred thousand light-years. These space zones are free from star dust-- cosmic fog.” (Page-129 Line-45 )

“… the vast universes of outer space in the realms next to the domains of the seven superuniverses seem to be revolving in a direction opposite to that of the grand universe. That is, these myriads of nebulae and their accompanying suns and spheres are at the present time revolving clockwise about the central creation. The seven superuniverses revolve about Paradise in a counterclockwise direction. It appears that the second outer universe of galaxies, like the seven superuniverses, revolves counter-clockwise about Paradise. And the astronomic observers of Uversa think they detect evidence of revolutionary movements in a third outer belt of far-distant space which are beginning to exhibit directional tendencies of a clockwise nature.” Page-134 Line-28 Para-4

The Dept. Physics & Astronomy at University of Tennessee in its Stars, Galaxies, and Cosmology lecture notes in Astronomy writing a “The Great Wall” writes

“Redshift surveys have revealed the largest structures yet observed in the Universe. The prominent concentration of galaxies running diagonally across the northern (that is, upper) portion of the adjacent image has been termed the Great Wall. It appears that (Center of Galactic Ring) * It covers at least 85 Mpc in declination and 215 Mpc in right ascension. It is likely to be even larger because it is obscured by dust in the plane of our galaxy on one end and hasn't yet been mapped on the other. * It is less than 7 Mpc thick. * There is a corresponding structure in the southern sky termed the Southern Wall. Because neither the Northern Wall nor the Southern Wall have been mapped fully, it is even possible that the two join each other in the parts of the sky that have not been examined yet and are part of one much larger structure.”

“Preliminary deep space redshift surveys along narrow pencils of direction indicate a periodic structure suggesting that there may be additional Great Wall type structures out there, but we have insufficient information at this point to map them extensively.” [Ten05]. One Mpc = 3.26 million light years. See [Gel93 ] for picture.

These are striking initial confirmations of the very kinds of large-scale galactic structures that the Urantia Book predicted before 1955. But our most prominent contemporary cosmologists prior to recent observations predicted random distributions of galaxies consistent with their “Big Bang” theory of an exploding universe, a theory upon which they have built their reputations and research programs.

These folks will not easily give up their theory of an exploding universe, which is also how they conclude the age of the universe to be less than 15 billion years. They have and will continue to offer a sequence of possible defenses as new information continues to disagree with their theory. Already many claim that the background radiation proves the Big Bang explosion occurred, but there are other possible explanations for the background radiation, including perhaps diffuse matter throughout pervaded space equivalent to 1 electron per cubic inch.

An earlier example of this running adjustment of the Big Bang theory concerns hydrogen: “The relative amounts of hydrogen and helium (and much smaller amounts of deuterium and lithium) in the universe are not in good agreement with those predicted by the Standard Model, unless it is modified by an auxiliary hypothesis called “inflation”, which proposes that the universe expanded at a velocity beyond the speed of light for a short time. Alan Guth, a particle accelerator physicist at Stanford, proposed the inflation hypothesis in 1979.” See The American Physical Society [APS99], National Center for Supercomputing Applications [NCS95], for more information on these “walls”. c) Huge Redshifts. Before they were observed the Urantia Book predicted huge redshifts equivalent to recessional speeds of “more than thirty thousand miles a second”, but it also instructs that this does not mean the universe is flying apart.

“The present relationship of your sun and its associated planets, while disclosing many relative and absolute motions in space, tends to convey the impression to astronomic observers that you are comparatively stationary in space, and that the surrounding starry clusters and streams are engaged in outward flight at ever-increasing velocities as your calculations proceed outward in space. But such is not the case.” Page-134 Line-1 Para-1

“Although your spectroscopic estimations of astronomic velocities are fairly reliable when applied to the starry realms belonging to your superuniverse and its associate superuniverses, such reckonings with reference to the realms of outer space are wholly unreliable. Spectral lines are displaced from the normal towards the violet by an approaching star; likewise these lines are displaced towards the red by a receding star. Many influences interpose to make it appear that the recessional velocity of the external universes increases at the rate of more than one hundred miles a second for every million light-years increase in distance. By this method of reckoning, subsequent to the perfection of more powerful telescopes, it will appear that these far-distant systems are in flight from this part of the universe at the unbelievable rate of more than thirty thousand miles a second. But this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” Page-134 Line-15 Para-3

Notice in the following table of data [Rot99] provided by Allan Sandage at Mt. Wilson and Las Campanas Observatories that the Hydra galaxy is now estimated to be receding from us at more than 30,000 miles/sec, just as the Urantia Book predicted such would be seen after larger telescopes were built. The recessional speed of Hydra is listed as 61,000 km/sec = (61,000 /1.609) miles/sec = 37,900 miles/sec, which is more than 1/5 the speed of light!

Galaxy Distance from Earth Speed (km/s) (Millions of Light Years- MLY) Milky Way 0 0 Virgo 78 1200 Ursa Major 980 15000 Corona Borealis 1400 21600 Bootes 2500 39000 Hydra 4000 61000 Perseus 350 5400 Hercules 650 10000 Ursa Major II 2700 41000 d) Dark Matter Holds the Universe Together. That dark matter holds luminous bodies together was first noticed in 1970’s. Wikipedia [Wik05], the free encyclopedia tells us, “In the 1970s it was realized that the total visible mass of galaxies (from stars and gas) does not properly account for the speed of the rotating gas, thus leading to the postulation of dark matter.” Similarly, Austerberry [Aus04] says, “The rotation of stars in our galaxy is inconsistent with the gravitational effects predicted for detectable masses in the galaxy. The same anomaly appears in galaxies other than our own. Where is the missing matter? … ”

But already in 1955 The Urantia Book was saying to anyone willing to read it: “The Dark Islands of Space. These are the dead suns and other large aggregations of matter devoid of light and heat. The dark islands are sometimes enormous in mass and exert a powerful influence in universe equilibrium and energy manipulation. The density of some of these large masses is well-nigh unbelievable. And this great concentration of mass enables these dark islands to function as powerful balance wheels, holding large neighboring systems in effective leash. They hold the gravity balance of power in many constellations; many physical systems which would otherwise speedily dive to destruction in near-by suns are held securely in the gravity grasp of these guardian dark islands. It is because of this function that we can locate them accurately. We have measured the gravity pull of the luminous bodies, and we can therefore calculate the exact size and location of the dark islands of space which so effectively function to hold a given system steady in its course.” Page-173 Line-3 Para-1

2.5 Neutrinos. There are many other examples of scientific statements in the Urantia Book that exhibit superhuman knowledge, too numerous to list. Another example is the existence and character of tiny charge-less particles – the so-called neutrinos.

While W. Pauli predicted neutrinos in 1931 and E. Fermi incorporated them into his 1934 theory of atomic decay, they were not actually observed until 1959. [Bar98]

The Urantia Book boldly affirms their existence as “certain small uncharged particles” and their role: “The integrity of the nucleus is maintained by the reciprocal cohering function of the mesotron, which is able to hold charged and uncharged particles together because of superior force-mass power and by the further function of causing protons and neutrons constantly to change places.” Page-479 Line-9 Para-2

“The presence and function of the mesotron also explains another atomic riddle. When atoms perform radioactively, they emit far more energy than would be expected. This excess of radiation is derived from the breaking up of the mesotron "energy carrier," which thereby becomes a mere electron. The mesotronic disintegration is also accompanied by the emission of certain small uncharged particles.” (Mesotrons are now called mesons.) Page-479 Line-21 Para-3

The Urantia Book said in 1955 that neutrinos are held by the “superior force-mass power” of the mesotron and that all energy particles have mass and proceed in straight processional lines. “Energy, whether as light or in other forms, in its flight through space moves straight forward. The actual particles of material existence traverse space like a fusillade. They go in a straight and unbroken line or procession except as they are acted on by superior forces, and except as they ever obey the linear-gravity pull inherent in material mass and the circular-gravity presence of the Isle of Paradise.” Page-461 Line-9 Para-2

But only in 1998 did our scientists discover that neutrinos have mass, and it has upset their “Standard theory”. “A Weighty Discovery in Particle Physics. In June 1998, an international team of Japanese and U.S. physicists unveiled strong evidence that elusive subatomic particles known as neutrinos have mass (or weight). These findings run counter to the standard model of particle physics—the basic theory about the structure of matter—which holds that these electrically neutral, weakly interacting particles have no mass. The discovery means that existing theoretical models of matter must now be revised to include neutrinos with mass.” [Inf05]

2.6 Probability of Human Authorship. While taking all of these unpopular or completely prophetic scientific positions with still no clearly obvious scientific blunders (unlike old science texts and human authors), what is the probability of such a sequence due to correct guesses? What is the probability of a human astronomer in 1955 predicting “no less than 375 million galaxies” in the far reaches of outer space when at the time a few hundred were known and as late as 1985 the estimate was 5 to 10 million? Let’s say 1/100 to be generous. Factor in the probability of predicting the large-scale structures now being seen - the “walls” separated by great “voids” - which until 1987 our scientists expected to be distributed randomly and sparsely. That’s another very low probability event, another 1/100 at best. Then there are the predictions of the huge redshifts now seen and the prediction of dark matter being a balance wheel for luminous bodies, which has now been observed as well. Each of those two have perhaps 1/5 probability to be generous, or 1/25 together. So all four together have probability less than (1/100)(1/100)(1/25) = 1/250,000. Successfully guessing these four and the earlier four with 1/100000 probability yields 1/25,000,000,000 or less than 1 chance in 25 billion.

Some of these may be larger and some smaller than estimated, but they each contribute more or less to make a very small probability of occurrence given The Urantia Book was written by humans. Therefore on statistical grounds I infer that super-humans must have written the Urantia Book and none of these predictions were random or lucky guesses.

These predictions have not been “cherry-picked” while other misses ignored. They have been chosen because they have been subsequently established by human science. Examples that are still open to question due to unreliable data have been left for a later date of evaluation. Some of them such as the time of light travel from Andromeda will come up as part of cosmic instruction from superhumans.

2.7 Scientific Credibility. If The Urantia Book is what it purports to be then the present lack of contemporary scientific interest will not always be the case. What would make scientists sit up and take notice of this “communication from outer space”, this revelatory gift from higher universe life? Only scientific evidence in a book of philosophy can impress a real scientist of the book’s worth when discussing the scientific aspects of the cosmos, not some re-warmed 20th century science ill- suited for the presentation of the spiritual truths of the next 1000 years. No, The Urantia Book must present truly impressive, albeit transient, science alongside of ageless spiritual truth.

The Urantia Book does make many such predictions and when they are scientifically observed they will be a mighty powerful attraction to scientists and others to take The Urantia Book seriously. So far that hasn’t happened, but even now events are gathering for such a spectacular corroboration in the recent explorations in the eastern Mediterranean for Plato’s Atlantis, which due to Robert Sarmast, we now know was also the Garden of Eden. (I know of one famous scientist and there are probably many other “closet UB readers” among professional scientists, who read and utilize the book, but who for obvious reasons prefer to keep that their secret.) But what will happen if Robert’s next expedition brings up sensational evidence just where The Urantia Book says it is? Will most scientists ignore that too? We may soon see. When will prominent scientists publicly give The Urantia Book credit for its scientific predictions?

My own personal favorite in this category is the sensational prediction that there is a non-breathing form of life on a sphere in close proximity to our world. As such we might be looking for the wrong kind of life in our solar system, entertaining too narrow a concept of life. If The Urantia Book is what it says it is, then there must be such a world in close proximity. Some readers think that implies the world must be in our solar system, but I suppose being within easy communication range, like a few light years away, might also be in close proximity in astronomical terms because we could become aware of each other by interstellar communication. Even that would be exciting. More on this later.

Why believe The Urantia Book’s science? Certainly it is not only because The Urantia Book states many spiritual truths. Rather, The Urantia Book’s science must stand on its own as well, at least for a while, during these times when it has yet to be taken seriously by most of the world. The real reason that I believe in the science of The Urantia Book and the authenticity of The Urantia Book as divine revelation to our world is because of its humanly improbable avoidance of error and the meandering convergence over the years of contemporary science to positions taken by the Urantia Book authors.

Summary of Evidence of Superhuman Knowledge. a) Not referencing paleontology fossils later found to be frauds while mentioning most others and asserting that no “missing link” fossil (nickname for the fraudulent fossil) would be found, b). Describing Pangaea, continental drift on molten basalt, and formation of mountains, c) Describing the injury repair chemistry, d) Predicting the existence and large-scale ring shapes of hundreds of millions of star systems, then unknown and unexpected before 1987, e). Predicting the extent of the “Big Bang” cosmic redshifts observed by contemporary science, even while saying that the supposed rapid expansion is due to many factors of error, f) Even before the problem of rapidly spinning galaxies was noticed predicting that dark matter keeps the rapidly spinning galaxies from flying apart and prevents many bodies from plunging into nearby stars, and g) Affirming the existence (before actual discovery) of Neutrinos, including that they have mass.

3. Instruction in Science and Cosmology Still to be Received by Urantia Scientists Given that super-humans wrote the Urantia Book, what were they trying to accomplish? As listed before the authors of the Urantia Book provided “instruction in cosmology” in order to facilitate the human understanding of the accompanying spiritual revelation. The authors were also permitted to reveal some information not otherwise mandated.

3.1 Huge Spectrographic Redshifts Due to “Numerous Factors of Error”.

a) Greatest Spectrographic Distortion. “But the greatest of all such distortions arises because the vast universes of outer space in the realms next to the domains of the seven superuniverses seem to be revolving in a direction opposite to that of the grand universe. That is, these myriads of nebulae and their accompanying suns and spheres are at the present time revolving clockwise about the central creation. The seven superuniverses revolve about Paradise in a counterclockwise direction.” Page-134 Para-4

Being a mathematician, I decided to investigate this possibility analytically. I was able to prove an interesting result. Apparently, such a situation as The Urantia Book describes with galaxies proceeding in orderly fashion in the first outer space zone adds up to a constant red (or blue) shift (depending on the angle of observation) to any object whose distance from the postulated center of rotation is greater than earth’s distance to that center of rotation. (That constant turns out to be the distance from earth to the center of rotation times the difference between the angular velocities of the Earth versus the first outer space object. See [Cal05A] for details.

Looking in directions relatively close to the plane of the Milky Way but far away from its center, no matter how far into an almost uniformly spinning ring of galaxies in the first outer space zone, the maximum redshift on one side would be larger by a constant while on the other side the maximum blue shift would be larger by the same amount. Other angles of observation have intermediate red or blue shifts. A test of this conjecture would involve observing this difference in the frequency shifts in the distant galaxies in the direction of Galactic latitudes on opposite edges of the Milky Way.

“From the outermost system of inhabited worlds to the center of the superuniverse is a trifle less than two hundred and fifty thousand light-years.” (32:2.11) Page-168 Line-6 Para-2

b) Galaxies Not Really Flying Apart - No Big Bang. While predicting the huge redshifts the Urantia Book also instructs: “But this apparent speed of recession is not real; it results from numerous factors of error embracing angles of observation and other time-space distortions.” Page-134 Para-3

Since the redshift is linear with distance, the huge redshifts might be due to the existence of some “reddening influence” in the intervening space. This is the “tired light” theory of redshift, but the light from distant galaxies looks just as clear as that from nearby ones, which presumably would not be the case were the light being changed. Therefore this possibility is downgraded. [Bal] “Time- space distortions” could easily include “tired light”, but it also allows for other distortions like unknown rotational motions and angles of observation. Only a very few poorly-funded and mostly ignored astronomers are courageous enough (and independent enough) to dispute the receding motion interpretation of the huge redshifts of the external galaxies - those beyond the so-called local group of galaxies, which The Urantia Book calls the seven superuniverses. One such astronomer is Halton Arp, who was Hubble’s assistant. Apparently Arp has evidence of gravitationally connected objects in close proximity but with very different redshifts. [Sco05]

Charles Austerberry [Aus04], Creighton University, outlines the history of the universe according to the Standard Model, Big Bang theory as follows:

“t = 0 a singularity 15 b. yrs. Ago - Universe began from a "singularity" The 4 (or 3) basic forces emerge. Before a millionth of a second, fundamental particles emerge & stabilize. Radiation (light and radio waves, and so forth) cannot move far. The universe is quite foggy (opaque) mostly due to the free electrons. Before a thousandth of a second, protons and neutrons form. In a few minutes, primal nuclei form. It takes almost a million years (at least 300,000 )for the universe to cool to 3,000 degrees Kelvin, enough for atoms to form (mostly hydrogen and helium). The universe's opacity dropped abruptly. 10-14 b. yrs. ago - primal stars emerge; giant galaxies evolve; heavier elements are formed in stars, and in supernova explosions. 4.5 b. yrs ago - our sun, planets, & earth are born 4 b. yrs ago - the first prokaryotic cells emerge 2 b. yrs ago - the first eukaryotic cells emerge 5 m. yrs ago - hominids evolve 200,000 yrs ago - archaic Homo sapiens 40,000 yrs ago - modern Homo sapiens” [Aus04]

Hubble’s constant H0 is estimated to be 72 km/s for each Mpc distance from earth. 1 Mpc = 3.086*1019 km, and 1 yr = 3.16*107 seconds.

Therefore the age of the universe = 1/ H0 = 13.6 billion years. [Dod05]

As a scientist and a religionist I can only say that I find this story even harder to believe than the creation story in the Book of Genesis.

c) Galactic Rotations Imparted by Living Force Organizers. The Urantia Book instructs that nebular revolutions are added by living force organizers not simply the result of evolution. This answers the nagging question in cosmology and physics of where all the spin in the universe came from. Here the nebular mother of our sun is described:

“875,000,000,000 years ago the enormous Andronover nebula number 876,926 was duly initiated. Only the presence of the force organizer and the liaison staff was required to inaugurate the energy whirl which eventually grew into this vast cyclone of space. Subsequent to the initiation of such nebular revolutions, the living force organizers simply withdraw at right angles to the plane of the revolutionary disk, and from that time forward, the inherent qualities of energy insure the progressive and orderly evolution of such a new physical system.” Page-652 Line-9 Para-2

3.2 Motion of Space Versus Motion of Matter in Space. The Big Bang idea forced contemporary scientists to imagine how the distant galaxies could so quickly start sending light toward us almost 15 billion years ago from a place in space so far away from the “singularity” in space. Their answer is that at first the space itself was quickly moving out there, and that could happen effectively at apparently faster than light speed, almost instantaneously. One might respond ‘in what reference frame does the space move, compared to what? It’s as though all space just blinks into existence in one instant. But The Urantia Book is way ahead of our scientists on this idea of space motion:

“Space is, from the human viewpoint, nothing--negative; it exists only as related to something positive and nonspatial. Space is, however, real. It contains and conditions motion. It even moves. Space motions may be roughly classified as follows: 1. Primary motion--space respiration, the motion of space itself. 2. Secondary motion--the alternate directional swings of the successive space levels.

3. Relative motions--relative in the sense that they are not evaluated with Paradise as a base point. Primary and secondary motions are absolute, motion in relation to unmoving Paradise.

4. Compensatory or correlating movement designed to co-ordinate all other motions.” Page-133 Line-33 Para-7 “When the universes expand and contract, the material masses in pervaded space alternately move against and with the pull of Paradise gravity. The work that is done in moving the material energy mass of creation is space work but not power-energy work.” Page-134 Line-11 Para-2

By contrast contemporary cosmology measures motion in terms of the average redshift of intergalactic hydrogen. “We now use 21 cm emission from neutral atomic Hydrogen to map the motion of the disk.” [Str05]

3.3 The Existence and Universe Location of a Focal Singularity in the Topology of Space - Paradise. Not only does The Urantia Book describe space motion it also defines a non-moving reference frame in terms of which space motion can be measured, something that contemporary cosmologists can hardly do because they admit no such fixed reference frame to measure the motion of space as a whole. According to The Urantia Book this fixed reference frame is the center of rotation of the whole universe, a place called Paradise:

“Paradise is the actually motionless nucleus of the relatively quiescent zones existing between pervaded and unpervaded space. Geographically these zones appear to be a relative extension of Paradise, but there probably is some motion in them. We know very little about them, but we observe that these zones of lessened space motion separate pervaded and unpervaded space. Similar zones once existed between the levels of pervaded space, but these are now less quiescent.” Page-124 Line-19 Para-4

“Space does not exist on any of the surfaces of Paradise. … Space does not touch Paradise; only the quiescent midspace zones come in contact with the central Isle.” [Page-124 Para-3] This fixed reference frame has a “universe location but no position in space.” [Page-7 Para-4] These quiescent zones of space exist both within each ultimate unit of matter (quantum) and also macroscopically between the moving galactic space zones. “The ultimaton, the first measurable form of energy, has Paradise as its nucleus.” Page-467 Para-5. These ultimatons also swing around Paradise macroscopically. Paradise is the “the most gigantic organized body of cosmic reality in all the master universe”. Page-118 Line-3 Para-1

3.4 Local and Paradise Gravity. Ultimate units have a common nucleus – Paradise. “The ultimatons are not subject to local gravity, the interplay of material attraction, but they are fully obedient to absolute or Paradise gravity, to the trend, the swing, of the universal and eternal circle of the universe of universes. Ultimatonic energy does not obey the linear or direct gravity attraction of near-by or remote material masses, but it does ever swing true to the circuit of the great ellipse of the far-flung creation.” Page-465 Para-2

“Universal Gravity. All forms of force-energy--material, mindal, or spiritual--are alike subject to those grasps, those universal presences, which we call gravity.” Page-131 Line-34 Para-5 “These four circuits are not related to the nether Paradise force center; they are neither force, energy, nor power circuits. They are absolute presence circuits and like God are independent of time and space.” Page-131 Line-44 Para-6

3.5 The Maturation of Space Potency into Matter. “It is indeed difficult to find suitable words in the English language whereby to designate and wherewith to describe the various levels of force and energy--physical, mindal, or spiritual. These narratives cannot altogether follow your accepted definitions of force, energy, and power. There is such paucity of language that we must use these terms in multiple meanings. In this paper, for example, the word energy is used to denote all phases and forms of phenomenal motion, action, and potential, while force is applied to the pregravity, and power to the postgravity, stages of energy.” Page-469 Line-3 Para-1 a) Ultimatons. “The force organizers initiate those changes and institute those modifications of space-force which eventuate in energy; the power directors transmute energy into matter; thus the material worlds are born.” Page-468 Para-2

Not only does The Urantia Book describe the initiation of nebular rotations, it explicitly rejects contemporary definitions of force, energy and power declaring that we need more language. The Urantia Book describes the maturation of the space potency of the Unqualified Absolute (pervading all space) by two orders of living “force organizers” through stages from primordial force, through emergent energy, and finally to the assembly of ultimate material units and atomic systems. All of this is still to be discovered. Skeptics may hold that these are unproved, or that “there is no evidence” of them but not that they are re-warmed 20th century cosmology.

“Primary Master Force Organizers are the manipulators of the primordial or basic space-forces of the Unqualified Absolute; they are nebulae creators. They are the living instigators of the energy cyclones of space and the early organizers and directionizers of these gigantic manifestations. These force organizers transmute primordial force (pre-energy not responsive to direct Paradise gravity) into primary or puissant energy, energy transmuting from the exclusive grasp of the Unqualified Absolute to the gravity grasp of the Isle of Paradise. They are thereupon succeeded by the associate force organizers, who continue the process of energy transmutation from the primary through the secondary or gravity-energy stage. Page-329 Line-19 Para-3 b) Constructing Electrons from Ultimatons. In an early paper presented in 1973 I offered an idea of what an ultimatum looks like, how 100 concentrically arranged ultimatons make up an electron as I had gleaned from my reading of the Urantia Book. Since then Stefan Tallqvist [Tal02] has offered an alternative concept for how 100 ultimatons might aggregate into an electron as a compact stacked arrangement.

However, “The ultimatons are not subject to local gravity, the interplay of material attraction, but they are fully obedient to absolute or Paradise gravity, to the trend, the swing, of the universal and eternal circle of the universe of universes. Ultimatonic energy does not obey the linear or direct gravity attraction of near-by or remote material masses, but it does ever swing true to the circuit of the great ellipse of the far-flung creation. Page-465 Line-11 Para-2

“Ultimatons do not describe orbits or whirl about in circuits within the electrons, but they do spread or cluster in accordance with their axial revolutionary velocities, thus determining the differential electronic dimensions. This same ultimatonic velocity of axial revolution also determines the negative or positive reactions of the several types of electronic units. The entire segregation and grouping of electronic matter, together with the electric differentiation of negative and positive bodies of energy-matter, result from these various functions of the component ultimatonic interassociation.” Page-476 Line-42

Since ultimatons do not describe orbits and are not attracted by near-by matter but respond only to Paradise “circular” gravity, I conceived the 100 ultimatons of an electron arranged concentrically, with Paradise as their common nucleus. This still seems to me to be the right way. However, it may be easier to think of the 100 concentric spheres as 100 concentric donut-shaped rings of rotating space around a common Paradise center of gravity. The rings can slip past each other in 3 dimensions without collision, and by flipping motions can also be a sphere of rotating space. It also seems right to alternate the direction of rotations so that the energy is more balanced and can potentially be explosive.

While commenting on the waves always associated with the individuation of an ultimaton The Urantia Book makes it clear that an ultimaton is a “minute sphere”, not a wave: “The assembly of energy into the minute spheres of the ultimatons occasions vibrations in the content of space which are discernible and measurable. And long before physicists ever discover the ultimaton, they will undoubtedly detect the phenomena of these rays as they shower in upon Urantia. These short and powerful rays represent the initial activity of the ultimatons as they are slowed down to that point where they veer towards the electronic organization of matter.” Paper-42 Section-5 Para-2

“In the superuniverse of Orvonton there are one hundred octaves of wave energy. Of these one hundred groups of energy manifestations, sixty-four are wholly or partially recognized on Urantia. The sun's rays constitute four octaves in the superuniverse scale, the visible rays embracing a single octave, number forty-six in this series. The ultraviolet group comes next, while ten octaves up are the X rays, followed by the gamma rays of radium. Thirty-two octaves above the visible light of the sun are the outer-space energy rays so frequently commingled with their associated highly energized minute particles of matter. Next downward from visible sunlight appear the infrared rays, and thirty octaves below are the radio transmission group.” Page-474 Line-25 Para-6

Since there are 100 octaves of wave energy in the superuniverse and 100 ultimatons in an electron and ultimatonic motions result in waves of different length, but always 860 times the diameter of the particle, I imagine that the 100 concentric ultimatons give rise to 100 octaves of wave energy, and that the ultimatons can attain discrete energy levels between those octaves to expand or contract into, thus giving rise to waves of intermediate length and energy within the octave.

“Matter--energy--for they are but diverse manifestations of the same cosmic reality, as a universe phenomenon is inherent in the Universal Father. "In him all things consist." Matter may appear to manifest inherent energy and to exhibit self-contained powers, but the lines of gravity involved in the energies concerned in all these physical phenomena are derived from, and are dependent on, Paradise. The ultimaton, the first measurable form of energy, has Paradise as its nucleus.” Page-467 Line-26 Para-5

3.6 Wavelike Manifestations. Another area of confusion for Urantia scientists is the issue in quantum mechanics of “wave-particle duality”. In the late 1800’s Clark Maxwell unified electrodynamics with his famous equations that implied that light was always measured to have the same speed in a vacuum no matter the motions of the light emitting objects. Then Max Plank found the need to postulate a quantum for a property called “action”. Albert Einstein used this idea to show that light behaved like quanta in the photoelectric affect. Since then there has been almost continuous controversy about whether light is one or the other, or both a particle and a wave – a “wavicle”.

Later in the 20th century John Bell [Bel1964] proved that experiments already done proved that a measurement of either particle of a pair of widely separated but somehow “entangled particles” affects the state of the other particle at faster than light speeds. This is the “spooky action at a distance” that Einstein railed against to no avail.

The interpretation of these phenomena is still an active controversy in quantum mechanics to this day. It is often confused with the indeterminacy principle of quantum mechanics, which is that any measurement of the position of a particle changes its velocity and vice versa; therefore the position and velocity cannot be directly measured beyond a certain precision. This principle is affirmed by The Urantia Book: “It is impossible accurately to determine, simultaneously, the exact location and the velocity of a moving object; any attempt at measurement of either inevitably involves change in the other.” (Page-737 Line-2 Para-1.) However, this is a problem having to do with the conditions for measurement of position versus velocity, which partially conflict. This indeterminacy can be incorporated into quantum logic by using Boolean fractions to represent conditional quantum measurements and events. [Cal05]

The Urantia Book also throws light onto the “entangled particles”, “wave-particle duality” phenomena of quantum mechanics: “Primordial-force behavior does give rise to phenomena which are in many ways analogous to your postulated ether. Space is not empty; the spheres of all space whirl and plunge on through a vast ocean of outspread force-energy; neither is the space content of an atom empty. Nevertheless there is no ether, and the very absence of this hypothetical ether enables the inhabited planet to escape falling into the sun and the encircling electron to resist falling into the nucleus.” Page-476 Line-7 Para-2

“The excitation of the content of space produces a wavelike reaction to the passage of rapidly moving particles of matter, just as the passage of a ship through water initiates waves of varying amplitude and interval.” Page-476 Line-4 Para-1

The interelectronic space of an atom is not empty. Throughout an atom this interelectronic space is activated by wavelike manifestations which are perfectly synchronized with electronic velocity and ultimatonic revolutions. This force is not wholly dominated by your recognized laws of positive and negative attraction; its behavior is therefore sometimes unpredictable. This unnamed influence seems to be a space-force reaction of the Unqualified Absolute. Page-478 Line-46 Para-7

“The quantity of energy taken in or given out when electronic or other positions are shifted is always a "quantum" or some multiple thereof, but the vibratory or wavelike behavior of such units of energy is wholly determined by the dimensions of the material structures concerned. Such wavelike energy ripples are 860 times the diameters of the ultimatons, electrons, atoms, or other units thus performing.” Page-474 Line-15 Para-4

“The so-called ether is merely a collective name to designate a group of force and energy activities occurring in space. Ultimatons, electrons, and other mass aggregations of energy are uniform particles of matter, and in their transit through space they really proceed in direct lines. Light and all other forms of recognizable energy manifestations consist of a succession of definite energy particles which proceed in direct lines except as modified by gravity and other intervening forces. That these processions of energy due to the resistance of the undifferentiated force blanket of all space, the hypothetical ether, and to the intergravity tension of the associated aggregations of matter. The spacing of the particle-intervals of matter, together with the initial velocity of the energy beams, establishes the undulatory appearance of many forms of energy-matter.” Page-475 Line-38 Para-2

So the Urantia Book says that matter is composed of particles, not waves, but that waves are always generated in the unrecognized force content of space, apparently at faster than light speed. “Human beings are only just beginning to realize that the reactions of existence appear between acts and their consequences.” Page-951 Para-6 3.7 G$del’s “Rotating Universe” Solutions to Einstein’s Field Equations. In the early 20th century scientists were trying hard to interpret the famous Mickleson-Morley interferometer light experiments [Nav04], which looked for evidence of a medium in which light vibrated using the Earth’s motion around the sun. Unlike sound waves, light did not appear to be carried by some medium, some “ether” that did the vibrating and which would serve a fixed reference frame. In 1905 Albert Einstein published his first paper on “special relativity “, which started from scratch concerning the measurement of time and space in relatively moving reference frames.

Einstein based his theory on just two principles: “1) The laws by which the states of physical systems undergo change are not affected, whether these changes of state be referred to the one or the other of two systems of coordinates in uniform translatory (sic) motion. 2) Any ray of light moves in the ‘stationary’ system of co-ordinates with the determined velocity c, whether the ray be emitted by a stationary or a moving body.” [Ein05]

The first law implies that there is no preferred reference frame because they all give the same physical laws. There is no way to say that one object is really at rest and other moving. It could be the other way. Or they are both moving with respect to some other reference frame.

The second law was the experimentally verified fact that speed of light will be the same value when measured in either of two reference frames that are moving with constant velocity with respect to one another.

The Urantia Book seems to affirm the second law but definitely not the first. The Urantia Book affirms the famous equation E = mc2 proved by Einstein in a second short paper in 1905: “The increase of mass in matter is equal to the increase of energy divided by the square of the velocity of light.” [Page-474 Line-1] But it does not follow Einstein’s “principle of relativity”, which holds that there is no fixed reference frame. Instead, The Urantia Book affirms that there is such a fixed reference frame. The Urantia Book points to a “focus of space” that is not in space but located at the limiting surface of the relatively non-moving midspace zones existing between the zones of matter-pervaded space. These midspace zones converge on a non-moving non-spatial location, which can be taken as the fixed frame of reference for the universe. Even the motion of space can be measured relative to this fixed reference frame.

Einstein knew that there were other solutions to his equations that had a center, but he specifically discarded them on the grounds of aesthetics. However another scientist, a mathematical one, the great logician Kurt G$del, as part of a tribute to his friend Einstein, produced a paper [G$d49] showing that there was a class of “rotating universe” solutions to Einstein’s general field equations for his “relativity theory”.

These rotating universe solutions to Einstein’s equations have a peculiar characteristic, everything rotates, and because of the insistence that all positions are equivalent to each other as reference frames, the universe rotates about every position! [Svi96]

Now this sounds suspiciously like The Urantia Book’s claim that everything rotates around Paradise, not just macroscopically, but microscopically as well. By identifying all of the positions around which the universe rotates as being a single fixed place, Paradise becomes the “most gigantic organized body of cosmic reality in all the master universe”. [Page-118 Para-1] If everything rotates around the “focus of space” then Einstein’s equations can be satisfied with a Center. And if light is emitted from this non-moving focus within matter then it will not be affected by the motion of the emitting body.

3.8 Solar System Origin. The contemporary theory of the solar system’s birth starts with a rotating gaseous nebula, which then contracted by gravity, increased its spin, and evolved into the sun and planets. While allowing for this type of solar system birth, the Urantia Book makes a strong case for an alternate but now mostly discarded theory:

“Gravity-explosion Planets. When a sun is born of a spiral or of a barred nebula, not infrequently it is thrown out a considerable distance. Such a sun is highly gaseous, and subsequently, after it has somewhat cooled and condensed, it may chance to swing near some enormous mass of matter, a gigantic sun or a dark island of space. Such an approach may not be near enough to result in collision but still near enough to allow the gravity pull of the greater body to start tidal convulsions in the lesser, thus initiating a series of tidal upheavals which occur simultaneously on opposite sides of the convulsed sun. At their height these explosive eruptions produce a series of varying-sized aggregations of matter which may be projected beyond the gravity-reclamation zone of the erupting sun, thus becoming stabilized in orbits of their own around one of the two bodies concerned in this episode. Later on the larger collections of matter unite and gradually draw the smaller bodies to themselves. In this way many of the solid planets of the lesser systems are brought into existence. Your own solar system had just such an origin.” Page-170 Line-29 Para-6

Scientists are presently reluctant to accept such an origin because 99% of the angular momentum calculated for our solar system seems to reside in the spinning planets rather than in the sun, and that fact is taken as counter to the “passing star” theory, as it is called. They also dispute the possibility of drawing off sufficient matter from the sun by a near pass. This assertion seems unfounded because a tidal disruption of the sun could have fragmented it completely; therefore a partial disruption could have separated a lesser amount from the main solar body.

On the other hand, the Urantia Book states that retrograde motion as observed (and confirmed) in our solar system in some of the moons of Saturn and Jupiter never occurs unless foreign bodies have been introduced into the system. That appears to be a mathematically verifiable assertion, but I have not found mention of it anywhere else. Other evidence cited is that the average plane of orbits of the planets is more than 5% off the plane of our sun’s equator. Instead it is in the plane defined by the line of Angona’s approach.

The extremely elongated orbit of the new planetoid, Sedna, corroborates such a passing heavy object theory. (“a passing star” is now being offered by contemporary scientists to explain how Sedna got such an elongated orbit!) The Urantia Book also says there were three outer planets of Angona captured by our sun with the help of the sun’s nebular mother. Existence of such “foreign matter” has still to be determined, but there is such variation in the character of the solar system bodies that it is not hard to believe. Yet I never read this idea anywhere other than in the Urantia Book.

“Today, your sun has achieved relative stability, but its eleven and one-half year sunspot cycles betray that it was a variable star in its youth. In the early days of your sun the continued contraction and consequent gradual increase of temperature initiated tremendous convulsions on its surface. These titanic heaves required three and one-half days to complete a cycle of varying brightness. This variable state, this periodic pulsation, rendered your sun highly responsive to certain outside influences which were to be shortly encountered.” Page-655 Line-32 Para-8

The scientific jury is still out on the solar system origin, but the Urantia Book poses a scenario that deserves further examination. The Urantia Book asserts that our sun was then a variable star with a 3.5-day period and that the 11.5-year sun spot cycle is a remnant of that state. Variable stars are known to expand and contract periodically making them brighter or less bright accordingly. Add a passing dark gravity body that caused a “partial disruption”, that is, pulled the sun apart by tidal- gravity action. Page-656 Line-10 Para-2

During the maximum expansion period our then variable sun disgorged a huge column of mass on the near side and equal amounts of material on the other side thereby perhaps ridding itself of the angular momentum found now in the large planets and thereby avoiding complete fragmentation. In effect, by stretching out planetary arms the sun was able to reduce its angular momentum like a ballet dancer slows her spinning by stretching out her arms. The sun was thus able to avoid complete disruption, and the “arms” could immediately start circling the sun. The result is a more stable star with much less angular momentum than before, which is now represented in the swing of the planets around the sun and in their orbital spins. This scenario still fits the evidence.

“As the Angona system drew nearer, the solar extrusions grew larger and larger; more and more matter was drawn from the sun to become independent circulating bodies in surrounding space. This situation developed for about five hundred thousand years until Angona made its closest approach to the sun; whereupon the sun, in conjunction with one of its periodic internal convulsions, experienced a partial disruption; from opposite sides and simultaneously, enormous volumes of matter were disgorged. From the Angona side there was drawn out a vast column of solar gases, rather pointed at both ends and markedly bulging at the center, which became permanently detached from the immediate gravity control of the sun.” Page-656 Line-10 Para-2

“The nucleus of the physical system to which your sun and its associated planets belong is the center of the onetime Andronover nebula. This former spiral nebula was slightly distorted by the gravity disruptions associated with the events which were attendant upon the birth of your solar system, and which were occasioned by the near approach of a large neighboring nebula. This near collision changed Andronover into a somewhat globular aggregation but did not wholly destroy the two-way procession of the suns and their associated physical groups. Your solar system now occupies a fairly central position in one of the arms of this distorted spiral, situated about halfway from the center out towards the edge of the star stream.” Page-168 Line-6 Para-2

3.9 Solar Internal Temperature and Energy Sources. The Urantia Book states that the internal temperature of the sun is much higher than is presently thought and indicates that we are missing the most important energy source of the sun. (That might explain why our scientists have been observing only 1/3 as many neutrinos as they expect to account for the sun’s energy expenditures. However in 2002 additional experiments have shone that electron neutrinos change into another type of neutrino en route from the sun and that total is consistent with theory.)

“The internal temperature of many of the suns, even your own, is much higher than is commonly believed.” [Page-463 Para-1] “The surface temperature of your sun is almost 6,000 degrees, but it rapidly increases as the interior is penetrated until it attains the unbelievable height of about 35,000,000 degrees in the central regions. (All of these temperatures refer to your Fahrenheit scale.) “ [Page-463 Para-2] “… the sources of solar energy, named in the order of their importance, are: 1. Annihilation of atoms and, eventually, of electrons, …” Only second does The Urantia Book list “Transmutation of elements, including the radioactive group of energies thus liberated.” Page-463 Para-3

“You might try to visualize 35,000,000 degrees of heat, in association with certain gravity pressures, as the electronic boiling point. Under such pressure and at such temperature all atoms are degraded and broken up into their electronic and other ancestral components; even the electrons and other associations of ultimatons may be broken up, but the suns are not able to degrade the ultimatons.” Page-463 Line-32 Para-5

3.10 Physics and Chemistry Alone Cannot Evolve into Life. “Physics and chemistry alone cannot explain how a human being evolved out of the primeval protoplasm of the early seas. The ability to learn, memory and differential response to environment, is the endowment of mind. The laws of physics are not responsive to training; they are immutable and unchanging. The reactions of chemistry are not modified by education; they are uniform and dependable. Aside from the presence of the Unqualified Absolute, electrical and chemical reactions are predictable. But mind can profit from experience, can learn from reactive habits of behavior in response to repetition of stimuli. Page-738 Line-1 Para-1

This cosmic instruction should not really be necessary, but we are bombarded by mechanists who use their minds to deny that mind and life is anything more than matter and energy. They seek to teach computers how to learn like humans and even attain consciousness; they fail to notice that teachable mind is more than physics and chemistry.

‘In the later evolution of mortal creatures the Life Carrier Sons provide the physical body, fabricated out of the existing organized material of the realm, while the Universe Spirit contributes the "breath of life.” ’ Page-376 Para-2

4. Soon-Coming Scientific Validation of the Urantia Book’s Cosmology. If The Urantia Book is what it purports to be then the present lack of contemporary scientific interest will not always be the case. What would make scientists sit up and take notice of this “communication from outer space”, this revelatory gift from higher universe life? Only scientific evidence in a book of philosophy can impress a real scientist of the book’s worth when discussing the scientific aspects of the cosmos, not some re-warmed 20th century science ill-suited for the presentation of the spiritual truths of the next 1000 years. No, The Urantia Book must present truly impressive, albeit transient, science alongside of ageless truth.

The Urantia Book has made many predictions and when they are scientifically observed that will be a mighty powerful attraction to scientists and others to take The Urantia Book seriously, and not just scientifically.

However without a very spectacular prediction most scientists will never entertain the possibility of an actual communication from higher order beings via a published book. Scientists respect confirmed predictions. But typically they wouldn’t take a serious look at a “book of revelation” without some very dramatic fulfilled prediction.

So far that hasn’t happened, but even now events are gathering for such a spectacular corroboration. I refer to the recent explorations in the eastern Mediterranean for Plato’s Atlantis, which due to research scientist Robert Sarmast, we now know was also the first Garden of Eden! That is quite a nice “co-ordination of known or about-to-be-known facts and observations”. What will happen if Robert’s next expedition brings up sensational evidence just where The Urantia Book says it is? Will scientists ignore that too? We may soon see. (I know of one, and there may be many other “closet UB readers” among professional scientists, who read and utilize the book, but who for obvious reasons prefer to keep that their secret.)

My own personal candidate in this category is the Urantia Book’s prediction that there is a rare type of non-breathing humanoid life on a sphere in close proximity to our world. [ As such we might be looking for the wrong kind of life in our solar system, entertaining too narrow a concept of life. If The Urantia Book is what it says it is, then there must be such a world in close proximity. Some people think that implies the world must be in our solar system, but I suppose being within easy communication range, like a few light years away, might also be in close proximity in astronomical terms because we could become aware of each other by interstellar communication. Even that would be exciting.

Why believe The Urantia Book’s science? Certainly it is not only because The Urantia Book states many spiritual truths. Rather, The Urantia Book’s science must stand on its own as well, at least for a while, during these times when it has yet to be taken seriously by most of the world. The real reason that I believe in the science of The Urantia Book and the authenticity of The Urantia Book as divine revelation to our world is because of its humanly improbable avoidance of error and the meandering convergence over the years of contemporary science to positions taken by the Urantia Book authors.

4.1 Discovery of Atlantis - the First Garden of Eden. Already Robert Sarmast [Sar03] has made on-site discoveries a mile under water near Cyprus. Expect more headlines at any time.

4.2 The Andromeda Galaxy is “Closer than Scientists Thought”. The Andromeda galaxy being visible with the naked eye was designated M31 by Edwin Hubble. Unlike so many other galaxies found by Hubble, it is blue shifted.

a) Distance Measurements. Many people, especially skeptics, but some believers as well, have pointed to The Urantia Book’s statement about the time of light travel from Andromeda being “almost one million years” [Page-170 Para-1] as an error on the face of the cosmology. They assume that the current distance estimate of 2.7 light years is accurate and reliable enough to base further conclusions on it even conclusions about the motivation of the superhuman authors for putting into the Urantia Book what they supposedly knew to be inaccurate! Skeptics have pointed to it as strong evidence of human authorship.

However, the accuracy of distance measurements to celestial objects is still a controversial topic in the scientific community. “While it is well established that M31 is about 15-16 times further away than the Large Magellanic Cloud (LMC), the absolute value of this measure is still uncertain, and in current sources, usually given between 2.4 and 2.9 million light-years - a consequence of the uncertainty in the LMC distance and thus the overall intergalactic distance scale. E.g., the semi- recent correction from data by ESA's astrometrical satellite Hipparcos has pushed this value up by more than 10 percent, from about 2.4-2.5 to the about 2.9 million light-years we use here.” [SED98]

One of the most dependable methods to estimate relative distance utilizes so-called variable stars. These stars expand and contract in regular periods. The longer the period and expansion the brighter the star becomes. Shorter period variable stars are dimmer in all phases than longer period ones. For instance, stars in the LMG are all about the same distance from us and those with equal periods are observed to have equal luminosity. Therefore by determining the period of such a variable star its relative distance can be estimated using the inverse square law. If a star with the same period as another star is 4 times dimmer, then it must be twice as far away as the brighter star.

Although this is an accurate measure of relative distances, the accuracy of the calibration of this technique is still uncertain and unreliable. That is, we have an accurate measuring stick with the Cepheid variable stars but we still don’t know with much reliability the length of the distance unit on our measuring stick. Consequently we know more accurately that the Andromeda galaxy is about 15 to 16 times as far away as the LMG than we know the actual distance to LMG.

The reason for this is that there are no variable stars close enough on which we can do some relatively accurate and independent parallax distance measurements. If we could independently and reliably measure the distance to even one of these variable stars then we would have a reliable estimate of the actual distance associated with that period and so all periods. But the LMC is too far away to measure distances by the parallax method.

In the parallax method the earth’s orbit around our sun functions as the base of a narrow triangle with the target star at the far away vertex. Seeing the shift of the target against the background stars allows an estimate of the angle between the viewpoints. Unfortunately other methods must be used to estimate the distance to LMG but they too have reliability problems.

In “Astronomy and the Superuniverse”, Troy Bishop [Bis82], documents with references that astronomy has calculated the distance to Andromeda, in 1907 at 19 light years, by stellar parallax in 1911 at over 1600 light years, by observation of novae in the mid-1920's at 800,000 light years, by Cepheid variables in the mid-1950's at 2.7 million light years. See Isaac Asimov’s The Universe From Flat Earth to Black Holes--and Beyond, Walker and Company, New York, 1980, for an account of the early evolution of our Andromeda distance measurements. Recently the distance estimate to Andromeda was changed upward again by 10% due to slight refinements in another distance measuring method used to calibrate the measuring stick. The bottom line is that as scientists we still do not know for sure what unit of distance is on our variable star measuring stick. In this context adjusting by a factor of 3 would not be shocking. There is always a ready explanation making everything reasonable!

But considering such variability even in recent measurements, the actual light from Andromeda still might take “almost 1 million years” to reach Urantia as The Urantia Book says, not from 2.4 to 2.9 million years as presently estimated by our science. Our scientists are still learning about large-scale motions that will change subsequent estimates. The Urantia Book is attempting to provide some cosmic instruction, but most of our scientists don’t yet think it is worth reading. Extra-terrestrial, super-human instruction on science and cosmology by way of The Urantia Book is not yet on the agenda of our scientists. b) News on Size of Andromeda. On Monday, May 30 2005, while I was preparing this paper, Reuters released the news from astronomers that the Andromeda galaxy “just got bigger -- three times bigger”. A sprinkle of stars once thought to be part of the central halo were measured to be moving in a way only consistent with their being part of the main arms of the circling star cloud. That means the diameter of the disk is 3 times what was thought last year.

"This giant disk discovery will be very hard to reconcile with computer simulations of forming galaxies. You just don't get giant rotating disks from the accretion of small galaxy fragments," Rodrigo Ibata [Rod05] said in a statement. No, you get them from the initiating actions of living force organizers as detailed earlier.

“The seven superuniverses are still growing; the periphery of each is gradually expanding; new nebulae are constantly being stabilized and organized; and some of the nebulae which Urantian astronomers regard as extragalactic are actually on the fringe of Orvonton and are traveling along with us. Page-130 Para-6

If in 2005 the estimated size of Andromeda can be discovered to be in error by a factor of three, is it hard to believe that there can be a similar error in the estimates of the distance to Andromeda? In deed, if Andromeda is actually 3 times closer than thought, that would mean it is 3 times smaller in each dimension than was thought, which would make the size estimate back shift again. But that is the nature of science, to correct its previous errors with the scientific method – the technique of experiment. A mathematical scientist conducts his experiments purely in the mind.

4.3 The Fourth and Last Outer Space Zone. Expect to hear about four distinct rings, “walls” or concentric rings of galaxies separated by relative empty space. These huge rings of billions of galaxies will also be found to be rotating in alternating directions. The center of these common rotations will be found to be the same center around which travel the “local group”, the 7 great super-galactic elongated elliptical arms of the grand universe circling the same macroscopic Center.

“The Quartan Space Level. This, the final and largest corps, consists of 24,010 Master Architects, and if our former conjectures are valid, it must be related to the fourth and last of the ever- increasing-sized universes of outer space.” Page-351 Line-17 Para-4 These Master Architects are eternal beings working on the ultimate (transcendental) level of reality, prior to all finite beginnings and after all finite endings, thereby joining the finite realms with the eternal realms of eternal Havona. Unifying all of this finite reality with eternal reality is the transcendental job of the Supreme Being and numerous Associates. These outer space universes were begun prior to the present “Local Group” (Grand Universe) of galaxies, not in a Big Bang explosion.

4.4 Spectrographic reinterpretation of the distance & redshift linear relationship.

Numerous “factors of error” in present day spectrographic interpretations will be identified. Look for errors due to: Earth’s angles of observation, Newly recognized rotations within our local group of galaxies (and associated Doppler shift corrections), alternating rotation of the local group (grand universe) and the first outer space zone of galaxies (the largest distortion), and still other space influences that shift light toward the red. The overall picture of the Master Universe of Central Paradise, Surrounding eternal Havona, 7 finite time-space Superuniverses (the local group), and four outer space zones full of billions of galaxies.

Beyond matter there is midspace, and beyond midspace there is the concept periphery of the mind, and beyond mind we are face to face with the Spirit of the Persons of the Eternal Son and our Paradise Father.

4.5 Overthrow of the big bang cosmology. Along with the overthrow of the Big Bang we will hear that the universe is ‘smaller than we thought’, and what seemed like rapid expansion now looks like orderly rotation, not explosive expansion.

“The successive space levels of the master universe constitute the major divisions of pervaded space--total creation, organized and partially inhabited or yet to be organized and inhabited. If the master universe were not a series of elliptical space levels of lessened resistance to motion, alternating with zones of relative quiescence, we conceive that some of the cosmic energies would be observed to shoot off on an infinite range, off on a straight-line path into trackless space; but we never find force, energy, or matter thus behaving; ever they whirl, always swinging onward in the tracks of the great space circuits.” Page-128 Line-34 Para-6

4.6 Discovery of non-breathing, electrically powered humanoids “in close proximity” to Earth

The Urantia Book predicts a non-breathing, intelligent race of people on a sphere close to Earth. Judging by characteristics of such worlds, Ganymede, Jupiter’s largest satellite in the solar system, is a candidate to be the world of the non-breathers. It is also possible that our moon harbors such a race still unnoticed by our still cursory exploration, but this seems less likely than Ganymede.

“Life on the worlds of the nonbreathers is radically different from what it is on Urantia. The nonbreathers do not eat food or drink water as do the Urantia races. The reactions of the nervous system, the heat-regulating mechanism, and the metabolism of these specialized peoples are radically different from such functions of Urantia mortals. Almost every act of living, aside from reproduction, differs, and even the methods of procreation are somewhat different.” Page-563 Line-43 Para-7

“You would be more than interested in the planetary conduct of this type of mortal because such a race of beings inhabits a sphere in close proximity to Urantia.” Page-564 Line-10 Para-2

Ganymede is a moon of Jupiter, the largest moon in our solar system with a diameter of 5,262 km (3,280 miles). It has no known atmosphere.

“The Galileo orbiter's first flyby of Ganymede discovered that Ganymede has its own magnetosphere field embedded inside Jupiter's huge one. This is probably generated in a similar fashion to the Earth's: as a result of motion of conducting material in the interior. It is thought that this conductive material may be a layer of liquid water with a high salt concentration, or it may originate in Ganymede's metallic core. Ganymede is the only moon known to have a magnetosphere.” [WikJ05]

It seems likely that energy intake for non-breathers is similar to the electrical energy intake of the humanoid midwayers elsewhere described. In 1990 Joe Pope [Pop90] published evidence of Ganymede being the likely sphere of the non-breathers.

4.7 Summary. So the soon-coming scientific verifications are:

a) Discovery of Atlantis- the First Garden of Eden (<2 years) b) The Andromeda galaxy is closer than once thought and light from there requires “almost one million years”, not almost 3 million years as is presently believed (<10 years) c) Forth and last outer space zone (<10 years) d) Spectrographic reinterpretation of the distance-redshift linear relationship (<10 yrs) e) Overthrow of “big bang” cosmology; universe is ‘smaller than we thought’ (<15 years) f) Discovery of non-breathing, electrically powered humanoids “in close proximity” to Earth – Ganymede, Jupiter’s satellite largest in the solar system, is candidate (Anytime we look for them, the sooner the better.)

5. The Future. The Urantia Book has much to say about the far distant future, not only the immediate future. Some revelatory information was mandated, and some lost knowledge is resurrected.

Scientists must reminded that not only religion has unproved assumptions: “All divisions of human thought are predicated on certain assumptions which are accepted, though unproved, by the constitutive reality sensitivity of the mind endowment of man. Science starts out on its vaunted career of reasoning by assuming the reality of three things: matter, motion, and life. Religion starts out with the assumption of the validity of three things: mind, spirit, and the universe–the Supreme Being.” Page-1139 Para-3

5.1 Time and Space. “It is helpful to man's cosmic orientation to attain all possible comprehension of Deity's relation to the cosmos. While absolute Deity is eternal in nature, the Gods are related to time as an experience in eternity. In the evolutionary universes eternity is temporal everlastingness-- the everlasting now.” Page-1295 Line-2 Para-1

Time is the “moving image of eternity” and space is the “reflected shadow” (projection) of Paradise realities. “Mankind is slow to perceive that, in all that is personal, matter is the skeleton of morontia, and that both are the reflected shadow of enduring spirit reality. How long before you will regard time as the moving image of eternity and space as the fleeting shadow of Paradise realities?” Page-2021 Para-2

“Throughout the first centuries of the Christian propaganda, the idea of the kingdom of heaven was tremendously influenced by the then rapidly spreading notions of Greek idealism, the idea of the natural as the shadow of the spiritual--the temporal as the time shadow of the eternal.” Page-1864 Line-8 Para-2

“Human personality is the time-space image-shadow cast by the divine Creator personality. And no actuality can ever be adequately comprehended by an examination of its shadow. Shadows should be interpreted in terms of the true substance.” Page-29 Line-44 Para-8

“The brighter the shining of the spiritualized personality (the Father in the universe, the fragment of potential spirit personality in the individual creature), the greater the shadow cast by the intervening mind upon its material investment. In time, man's body is just as real as mind or spirit, but in death, both mind (identity) and spirit survive while the body does not. A cosmic reality can be nonexistent in personality experience. And so your Greek figure of speech-- the material as the shadow of the more real spirit substance--does have a philosophic significance.” Page-141 Line-4 Para-1

If the universe is circular, ever moving around motionless Paradise at the focus of space, ever moving around Paradise in microscopic and macroscopic ways, then the motions we see may just be reflected images of time-less sequentiality on the space-less surfaces of Paradise.

The topology of matter and space is such that there is a (potentially dense) set of foci at the limit of the midspace zones existing within, between, and completely enveloping all moving matter. All of these midspace zones converge on a timeless, spaceless realm – Paradise, at the center of Infinity.

Although the midspace zones are potentially infinite, beyond the boundaries of matter-pervaded space they too end. But like Paradise the Unqualified Absolute and Universal Absolute have no limits. 5.2 Circular Simultaneity. An experience of circular simultaneity will replace the one-time linear “flow of events”. We all recognize that time is more than a moving point; our experience of time always includes an interval of it, a fragment of the never-beginning, never-ending eternal “now”.

“Time, space, and experience constitute barriers to creature concept; and yet, without time, apart from space, and except for experience, no creature could achieve even a limited comprehension of universe reality. Without time sensitivity, no evolutionary creature could possibly perceive the relations of sequence. Without space perception, no creature could fathom the relations of simultaneity. Without experience, no evolutionary creature could even exist; only the Seven Absolutes of Infinity really transcend experience, and even these may be experiential in certain phases. Page-1173 Line-30 Para-4

From Jesus in the Urantia Book, we read, “Animals do not sense time as does man, and even to man, because of his sectional and circumscribed view, time appears as a succession of events; but as man ascends, as he progresses inward, the enlarging view of this event procession is such that it is discerned more and more in its wholeness. That which formerly appeared as a succession of events then will be viewed as a whole and perfectly related cycle; in this way will circular simultaneity increasingly displace the onetime consciousness of the linear sequence of events.” Page-1439 Line- 19 Para-3

How you may ask can we ever imagine that time is not linear? Is it not true that the past is different from the future? Yes, it is different. For instance, we can change the future but not the past by deciding to act in the present. But every “moment” is already a time interval of longer or shorter duration. The theoretically infinitesimal instant has zero duration and the union of all such zero duration instants still has zero duration. There must be something more to a “time line” than points with no length.

Time always comes in intervals that include “now”, the eternally present. Without fragmentation, a time interval includes both the infinite past and also the infinite future. These time intervals also convey logical sequentiality, something that can also be conveyed by “circular simultaneity”.

“Time comes by virtue of motion.” Motion is more basic than time; all measurements of time are done by counting relative motions. One day is one revolution (motion) of the earth on its axis. Time is therefore the experience of periodic motion, and motion appears to be the change of an object from one of position in space to another. Motion in space has logical meaning, but that meaning can be gleaned without the necessity of linear motion.

The Absolutes of Infinity. “The seven prime relationships within the I AM eternalize as the Seven Absolutes of Infinity. But though we may portray reality origins and infinity differentiation by a sequential narrative, in fact all seven Absolutes are unqualifiedly and co-ordinately eternal. It may be necessary for mortal minds to conceive of their beginnings, but always should this conception be overshadowed by the realization that the seven Absolutes had no beginning; they are eternal and as such have always been. The seven Absolutes are the premise of reality.” Page-1155 Line-26 Para-1 Time gives us the intricacies of sequentiality and space gives us the relationships of simultaneity, but they are inseparable in wholeness of human experience.

5.3 The Bestowal of Life. “The force organizers initiate those changes and institute those modifications of space-force which eventuate in energy; the power directors transmute energy into matter; thus the material worlds are born. The Life Carriers initiate those processes in dead matter which we call life, material life. The Morontia Power Supervisors likewise perform throughout the transition realms between the material and the spiritual worlds. The higher spirit Creators inaugurate similar processes in divine forms of energy, and there ensue the higher spirit forms of intelligent life. Page-468 Line-11 Para-2

5.4 The Seven Master Spirits and their Seven Different Superuniverses. “Early in the projection of the superuniverse scheme of creation, the Master Spirits joined with the ancestral Trinity in the cocreation of the forty-nine Reflective Spirits, and concomitantly the Supreme Being functioned creatively as the culminator of the conjoined acts of the Paradise Trinity and the creative children of Paradise Deity. Majeston appeared and ever since has focalized the cosmic presence of the Supreme Mind, while the Master Spirits continue as source-centers for the far-flung ministry of the cosmic mind.” Page-1272 Line-11 Para-2

Each Master spirit has his own superuniverse. We belong to the 7th Superuniverse, Orvonton, while the whole 5th superuniverse among the seven is devoted to the power control beings. “Master Spirit Number Five. This divine personality who exquisitely blends the character of the Universal Father and the Infinite Spirit is the adviser of that enormous group of beings known as the power directors, power centers, and physical controllers. This Spirit also fosters all personalities taking origin in the Father and the Conjoint Actor. In the councils of the Seven Master Spirits, when the Father-Spirit attitude is in question, it is always Master Spirit Number Five who speaks. Page-187 Line-32 Para-4

5.5 The Spirit Nucleus. “Mortal man has a spirit nucleus. The mind is a personal-energy system existing around a divine spirit nucleus and functioning in a material environment. Such a living relationship of personal mind and spirit constitutes the universe potential of eternal personality.” Page-142 Line-1 Para-1 6. References

[APS99] American Physical Society, A Century of Physics Timeline, “The Great Wall of galaxies is found”, http://timeline.aps.org/APS/Timeline/Middle.cfm?EventID=150

[Aus04] Charles F. Austerberry, In “Evolution of modern cosmology: A brief history”, Dept. of Biology, Creighton University, http://puffin.creighton.edu/Austerberry/SRP420/SRP420_2004/Cosmology.html

[Bal05] “Redshifts and the Hubble Law”, Paul Ballard, The Heretical Press, Feb 3, 2005, http://www.heretical.com/science/redshift.html

[Bar98] Tomasz Barszczak, “Super-Kamiokande detector”, U. of California Irvine, 1998, http://www.ps.uci.edu/~superk/neutrino.html

[Bis82] Troy R. Bishop, “Astronomy and the Superuniverse”, http://www.starspring.com/ascender/astron/astron.html

[Blo05] Personal e-mail communication from Mathew Block in 2005

[Cal05] Philip Calabrese, “Toward a More Natural Expression of Quantum Logic with Boolean Fractions”, J. of Philosophical Logic, accepted for publication, 2005

[Cal05A] Philip Calabrese, “Doppler Shifts Due to Alternating Rotations”, 2005

[Dod05] “The Hubble Constant (H0) and the Age of the Universe”, Lecture Notes, Ana V. Dodgen, Department of Physics, California State University, Stanislaus, 2005, http://physics.csustan.edu/Ana/hubblconst.htm

[Ein05] “On the Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies”, Albert Einstein, Annalen der Physik. 17:891, 1905, reprinted in The Principle of Relativity, translated by W. Perrett and G.B. Jeffery, Dover Publications, Inc., 1952. http://www.fourmilab.ch/etexts/einstein/specrel/www/

[Gel93] (Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, 1993. Northern data (top)--Margaret Geller and John Huchra, Southern data (bottom)--Luiz da Costa et al. Quoted in Cosmology, a Research Briefing, National Academy of Sciences.) http://csep10.phys.utk.edu/astr162/lect/gclusters/soapbubbles-large.gif

[G$d49] “An Example of a New Type of Cosmological Solutions of Einstein’s Field Equations of Gravitation”, Kurt G$del, Reviews of Modern Physics, Vol. 21, Number 3, July, 1949.

[Har03] “Piltdown Man”, Richard Harter, November 16, 2003, URL = http://home.tiac.net/~cri_a/piltdown/piltdown.html#introduction

[Huc01] “The CfA Redshift Survey”, John Huchra, Harvard University, http://cfa- www.harvard.edu/~huchra/zcat/ [Inf05] http://www.infoplease.com/ipa/A0762175.html

[Jac01] “Frauds in Science”, Wayne Jackson, Christian Courier: Archives, October 3, 2001. http://www.christiancourier.com/archives/scienceFrauds.htm

[Mul00] Larry Mullins with Dr. Meredith Sprunger, A History of the Urantia Papers, Penumbra Press, Boulder, Co., 2000. (Appendix 4 is Merritt Horn’s exhaustive “Changes in the text of Urantia Foundation’s printings of The Urantia Book”.)

[Nav04] “Michelson Interferometer”, Carl R. Nave, Department of Physics and Astronomy, Georgia State University, http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/phyopt/michel.html

[NCS95 ] “Science for the Millennium”, National Center for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA), http://archive.ncsa.uiuc.edu/Cyberia/Expo/cosmos_nav.html

[Nor05] “Walls within Voids”, Michael Norman, NCSA/Univ. of Illinois. http://archive.ncsa.uiuc.edu/Cyberia/Cosmos/WallsVoids.html#SheetsVoids

[Orf01] “Review of Pathology of the Liver”, Edited by Dr. Emilio Orfei, Department of Pathology, Loyola University of Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Apr 10, 2001. http://www.meddean.luc.edu/lumen/MedEd/orfpath/repair.htm

[Pop90] Joe Pope, Notes, 1990, e-mail communications to Norm Du Val, personal e-mail from Norm Du Val, 2005

[Pri05] Dr. Richard Prince, ER physician, personal communication, 2005.

[Rot99] Carl A. Rotter, Department of Physics, University of Dallas, 1999. http://www.as.wvu.edu/coll03/phys/www/rotter/phys201/2_Matter_Space_Time/Expanding.html

[Rod05] Rodrigo Ibata, Observatoire Astronomique de Strasbourg in France, Reuters News Release, May 30, 2005, http://www.cnn.com/2005/TECH/space/05/30/space.andromeda.reut/

[Sar03] Discovery of Atlantis, Robert Sarmast, Origin Press, 2003, www.discoveryofatlantis.com

[Sci90] Science Frontiers #67, JAN-FEB 1990. © 1990-2000 William R. Corliss, http://www.science-frontiers.com/sf067/sf067a08.htm

[Sco05] “Redshift”, Donald E. Scott, http://www.electric-cosmos.org/arp.htm, Important Web site for the alternative redshifts

[SED98] University of Arizona, Students for the Exploration and Development of Space (SEDS), 1998, http://www.seds.org/messier/m/m031.html.

[Str05] Nick Strobel, “The Milky Way and Other Galaxies”, University of Washington, Astronomy, 17 Nov 95, http://www.maa.mhn.de/Scholar/galaxies.html

[Svi96] Egils Sviestins, “Rotating Universes and Time Traveling”, http://www.ettnet.se/~egils/essay/essay.html

[Tal02] Stefan Tallqvist, “The electron model”, 2002 http://www.vtt.fi/tte/samba/staff/st/electron.html

[Ten05] “Lecture notes in Astronomy”, Dept. Physics & Astronomy, University of Tennessee, http://csep10.phys.utk.edu/astr162/lect/gclusters/gwall.html

[Wag96] “Alfred Wegener (1880-1930)”, Ben Waggoner, University of California, Berkeley, Museum of Paleontology. http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/history/wegener.html

[Wei05] “Plate Tectonics: The Rocky History of an Idea “, Anne Weil, the University of California Berkeley Museum of Paleontology, http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/geology/techist.html

[Wik05] “Galaxy”, Wikipedia, 2005 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galaxy

[WikJ05] “Ganymede (moon)”, Wikipedia, June 2005, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ganymede_(moon)

[Wor97] World Book Encyclopedia. Chicago: World Book, 1997: 205. Return to Home Page

DYNAMICS OF THE ULTIMATON

Stuart R. Kerr, III March 12, 1992

Nearly all the matter contained in the known universe may be fundamentally different from the atoms that allow stars to shine. Invisible "dark matter", as it is commonly called, may be generating ten times the gravitational force than the visible stars alone can account for. It has been calculated that the exterior arms of a spiraling galaxy, such as our own Milky Way, should be moving more slowly than those moving within the body of the galaxy. There are fewer stars in the in the outer galaxial arms, and consequentially less gravitational mass. However, the observed rotation of the outer stars of over 150 observed galaxies is surprisingly fast.

Estimates are that galaxies must have from 5 to 10 times the mass of their shining stars to account for these observed speeds of rotation. The estimated gravity generated by the even more massive galaxy clusters, those compact aggregations of individual galaxies, indicates the presence of dark matter 10 to 20 times the mass of the visible matter. Both reckoned accounts point to a substantial discrepancy regarding "observed" and "predicted" matter content in the cosmos.

There have been put forth by the scientific community many proposals that attempt to account for this missing mass. In order for so-called "brown dwarves" - cool, dim stars one-tenth to one-hundredth the mass of our sun - to account for the extra mass necessary to generate observed gravitational forces, 1000 of these imperceptible stars would be necessary for each visible star (about 100 trillion per galaxy). Along the same line of reasoning, billions of "black holes" - intense vortices of gravity arising from the collapse of massive hydrogen stars - are estimated per galaxy as necessary to account for the missing mass. These black holes, which are likely the "dark gravity bodies" referred to in The Urantia Book, gravitationally ensnare surrounding space-matter which, in turn, is expected to produce abundant emissions of X-rays. But, so far, extensive X-ray searches of the heavens have not conclusively identified any black holes.

The elusive family of neutrinos, an assemblage of sub-atomic particles whose presence in the cosmos is considered pervasive and whose masses are only conjectured, have been taken to account for the excessive gravity in galaxies. These mysterious neutrinos are expected in most theoretical models of particle physics, such as the Grand Unification Theory (GUT), that comprehensively attempt to interrelate all universe forces and manifestations of matter into one unified whole, operating within one fundamental principle of cosmic reality. Neutrinos have been virtually undetectable except for the infinitesimal gravitational force they exert on atoms; they are conjectured to possess an extremely tiny mass. Because the energy of a neutrino is so small and the margin of error in measurement so great, various approaches to measuring this mass have proven inconclusive.

Neutrino masses play an important role in the theories of astrophysics and cosmology. The best laboratory determination for the upper bounds on the neutrinos are uncertain, but experimentation decidedly indicates a restrictively minute mass. The best astrophysical and cosmological bounds are even more restrictive. In 1985, John J. Simpson of the University of Guelf in Ontario was the first to report the possible presence of a heavy neutrino with a calculated mass of 17 kilo-electron-volts (keV). The mass of an electron is 511 keV, and the electron itself is surmised to be founded on smaller sub-electronic particle components; the hypothetical electron neutrino is one such constituent. Simpson's particle, a "heavy" neutrino, is determined to be electrically neutral and to be weakly interactive with ordinary matter. This same particle description is used by The Urantia Book to describe inter- associations of the ultimaton as they position themselves intra-electronically within the electron.

The Urantia Book tells us that what we would designate as "empty space", actually contains approximately the equivalent mass of about 100 ultimatons, the mass of one electron, in every cubic inch. On a cosmological scale, this ultimatonic mass adds up to be of considerable magnitude; the gravitational effect on the physical universe would be expansively immense.

The question becomes, then: Are ultimatons and neutrinos one and the same reality? If not, are they in any fashion related to one another? Now, we are told that ultimatons are not subject to linear gravity as are atoms and electrons; at least this is true for unassociated ultimatons. This lack of linear gravity response is also characteristic of unattached and uncharged organizations of sub-electronic energy particles. However, when pre-electronic matter becomes activated by X-rays and other powerful energy sources, it becomes slightly gravity responsive. Otherwise, unassociated ultimatons respond only to the circular gravity pull of Paradise; they are held in the universal space drift, forever swinging through pervaded space in the exact gigantic outlines of Paradise,

In the creation of matter as we know it, ultimatons are slowed down through many phases of physical activity before they attain the revolutionary-energy (spin) prerequisites to electronic organization. Linear gravity begins to become operative with this progressive development towards the electronic organization of matter; mass response to linear gravity becomes operative.

Functioning by inherent mutual attraction, ultimatons cluster according to their axial revolutionary velocities and these revolutions determine the negative and positive natures of several types of electronic units. Aggregating clusters of ultimatons, the primal physical units of material existence, collect in groups of one hundred to make up the constitution of an electron. There are never more nor less than one hundred ultimatons in the typical electron. Any variation of this number less than one hundred results in the loss of typical electron identity, bringing into existence one of "ten modified forms" of the electron assembly.

Temperature extremes, both hot and cold, exert a great influence on the ultimaton in the realm of energy and matter evolution. Low temperatures, along with other cosmic influences, promote certain forms of electronic construction and atomic assembly; high temperature and pressure, such as exists with certain internal solar states, initiate the onset of atomic breakup and material disintegration.

''Under such pressure and at such temperature all atoms are degraded and broken up into their electronic and other ancestral components; even the electrons and their associations of ultimatons may be broken up, but the suns are not able to degrade the ultimatons" [[UB 463:5] There are no cosmic conditions of heat or pressure which are capable of converting ultimatons back into their primal ancestry of emergent energy.

It may be the combination of these peculiarities connected with the unusual properties of the ultimaton that have made its direct discovery so elusive. The lone unassociated ultimaton as well as its various sub-electronic combinations that comprise the existence of the ten revealed modified forms of the electron, are truly existent at the very doorstep of emergent physical reality. They become manifest within that shadowy transition zone that separates the pure energy of nascent cosmic force from the phenomena of physical matter in all of its universe power. These various ultimatonic associations, as disclosed within The Urantia Book, might provide a correlated basis for three currently investigated members of the neutrino family, a proposed fourth neutrino, and possibly another six undiscovered neutrino manifestations. Their someday discovery might well bring the scientific community to the very brink of knowable physical (emerged) reality.

Mankind would then reach the true and final particle foundation on which all other particle manifestations, including the neutrinos, are built. This search would conceivably lead to the discovery of the ultimate "monad" whose primal reality can only have Paradise, the source of all energies and the source of that from which all materialization is derived, as its most primal nucleus.

A Service of The Urantia Book Fellowship Astronomy and the Superuniverse Page 1 of 7

* Astronomy and the Superuniverse

(C) 1982 Troy R. Bishop

A galaxy is an enormous group of stars, planets, nebulae, and other celestial bodies traveling as a unit through the realms of space. The URANTIA Book has a lot to say about the structure of our galaxy, not all of it in agreement with the current teachings of astronomy. Since the writing of The URANTIA Book, almost fifty years ago, science has come into agreement on some originally contested points.

The URANTIA Book teaches that in the creation there are exactly seven inhabited galaxies, to which it refers as superuniverses. The seven superuniverses swing one after another around the Isle of Paradise, the center of all things, in a great ellipse lying in the plane of creation. Surrounding the superuniverse space level, farther out but still in the plane of creation, are the outer space levels, four concentric rings of evolving energy: future universes in the making (1).

Galactic outlines

Science describes the galaxy as: 1) a central, bulging nucleus of undetermined radius surrounded by 2) a flat, elliptical galactic plane about fifty thousand light years in radius and several hundred light years thick, which in turn is surrounded by 3) a spherical halo of fifteen-thousand-light-year radius consisting of a light sprinkling of luminous bodies. Turning to The URANTIA Book, the galaxy is described as a vast plane, an elongated-circular grouping of bodies whose number decreases away from the chief plane of our material universe (2), a description that could accommodate science's current but ever-changing picture. Most of the luminous bodies visible to the naked eye are in our galaxy, say both astronomy and The URANTIA Book (3).

The first disagreement involves the Milky Way, a vast disk of stars seen edgewise in the night sky as a thick, white line. To astronomers, the Milky Way is the galaxy; to The URANTIA Book, the Milky Way is the central nucleus of the galaxy (4). The galaxy rotates about its center, say astronomy and The URANTIA Book. Astronomy places this center some thirty thousand light years away in the central galactic bulge, in the direction of the constellation Sagittarius. According to The URANTIA Book, it's two hundred thousand light years from us (from our system capital), somewhere in the central plane of the Milky Way (5).

Fifty thousand light years is the distance from the center of the galaxy to its outermost edge, say the astronomers. Actually, says The URANTIA Book, the distance is two hundred fifty thousand light years (it could be even more) (6). This is the distance from the galactic center to the outermost system of inhabited worlds, a distance The URANTIA Book says will increase as creation continues: the galaxy is growing larger (7). http://www.starspring.com/ascender/astron/astron.html 2/4/99 Astronomy and the Superuniverse Page 2 of 7

Sagittarius checkpoint

Ten huge physical systems called major sectors whirling about the galactic center--a great sun cluster--constitute the galaxy, according to The URANTIA Book. (It would seem, in view of the flatness of the galaxy, that these orbits would be parallel to the galactic plane.) Each major sector consists of one hundred minor sectors orbiting the respective major sector center, a minor sector consisting of exactly one hundred local universes--star clouds, offspring of one or more nebulae-- orbiting the minor sector center (8). Above the local universe level, administrative units coincide with physical systems; at the local universe level and below, a single administrative unit can encompass several physical systems (9). Administratively, a local universe has one hundred constellations, a constellation one hundred local systems, a local system up to one thousand inhabited or inhabitable planets not counting planets settled in light and life (10).

Physically, our planet lies halfway out in one of the arms of the former nebula that gave it birth. Working upward in physical concept, our PLANET orbits the SUN, which orbits the FORMER NEBULAR CENTER, which orbits the LOCAL UNIVERSE CENTER, which orbits the MINOR SECTOR CENTER, which orbits the MAJOR SECTOR CENTER, which orbits PARADISE, which is the CENTER OF ALL THINGS (11). These multiple motions, says The URANTIA Book, are a source of confusion for our planet-bound astronomers (12).

The constellation Sagittarius contains an important astronomical center point, according to both astronomy and The URANTIA Book, but one far different in the two teachings. Astronomy teaches that the entire galaxy is centered, and rotates about, a point located 30,000 light years from Urantia in the direction of Sagittarius. The URANTIA Book, however, teaches that the center in Sagittarius is our minor sector center, orbital point of the one hundred local universes in our minor sector (13). (As previously mentioned, The URANTIA Book places the galaxy's center some 200,000 light years from Urantia). Misinterpretation of the significance of the rotation point in Sagittarius must be a source of profound distortion in astronomy's picture of the galaxy. Theoretically, both views could agree, in terms of direction only, if the galactic center and minor sector center should happen to be in temporary alignment with respect to our current observational position.

Measuring distances

The four methods in use today for measuring astronomical distances are parallax observation of the proper motion of nearby objects, comparison of apparent luminosity and spectral type, observation of Cepheid variables, and observation of the Doppler frequency shift to deduce radial velocity.

The Cepheid variables method is accurate, says The URANTIA Book, but only up to about a million light years (14). Used primarily to measure distances to distant galaxies, this method must be introducing errors into astronomical measurements and theories. Astronomy might not be realizing the potential accuracy of this method even at smaller distances. Using the method of Cepheid variables, astronomers calculate the distance to the galaxy Andromeda as 2.7 million light years, where The URANTIA Book teaches that light from this galaxy takes almost a million years to reach us--another way (to our current understanding) of saying that Andromeda is just under one million light years away (15). A major difficulty in comparing astronomical figures from The URANTIA Book with those from astronomy is the impossibility of obtaining final figures from astronomy. On earth, a distance measured as a mile will likely remain at least approximately a mile. But astronomy has calculated the distance to Andromeda, for example, as follows: in 1907 as 19 light years (16) by stellar parallax--in http://www.starspring.com/ascender/astron/astron.html 2/4/99 Astronomy and the Superuniverse Page 3 of 7

1911 as a minimum of 1600 light years (17) by observation of novae--in the mid-1920's as 800,000 light years (18) by Cepheid variables--and in the mid-1950's as 2.7 million light years (19) by changing the Cepheid variables scale to suit the expectations of astronomers. Tomorrow's figures are yet to come.

The Doppler technique, which determines the radial velocity of a luminous object by the apparent shift of its color due to motion (more violet for approaching objects, redder for receding objects), receives good grades from The URANTIA Book, but only when used on objects in the superuniverse space level. The URANTIA Book teaches that this method is greatly in error when applied to objects in the outer space regions for several reasons, the most important being the rotation of the outer space rings (in alternate directions between successive rings), which can cause the mistaken impression that bodies in the outer space levels are traveling through space at fantastically high speeds (20). No further explanation is given, but it would seem from this that the rotating space in the outer space levels carries the bodies in the outer space levels with it, making it appear that these bodies are traveling through space, at tremendously high velocities, instead of with space (see reference to de Sitter's concepts of space below). The URANTIA Book refers to space as a positive reality; particular nascent forces, from which energy and matter are woven (21).

Through the red shift, astronomers have observed these apparent (and primarily receding) velocities of objects in the outer space levels. This has led some to the idea of The Big Bang, a primordial explosion that supposedly occurred when all the matter (or pre-matter) in existence was in a tiny ball. The results of that explosion, according to the theory of The Big Bang, are the galaxies, in headlong flight away from each other and the site of the explosion. Some astronomers have gone further, to visualize a future slowing down of the expanding cosmos, its reversal of direction and picking up of speed toward the point of the original explosion, and the final compacting together again of the entire creation into a basketball-sized tombstone of reality, all the worlds, all the hopes, dreams, and possibilities of all the living creatures of all space and time--squashed. This is wrong, according to The URANTIA Book, which teaches space respiration, a gentle expansion and contraction of space itself in a two-billion-year cycle of moderate motion not interfering with the continuation of life or the development of the universe (22). The idea that space itself is expanding was suggested in 1917 by Dutch astronomer Willem de Sitter in a dynamic version of Einstein's static universe of curved space. In de Sitter's universe, the curvature of space is constantly decreasing (light would travel in an expanding spiral), resulting in an expansion of space and the apparent moving apart of objects at rest in space--in effect, movement with space but not through space (23) (see discussion on red shift above).

Developments

Doctor Bart J. Bok, an authority on the Milky Way, has recently described a new view of the Milky Way, where the Milky Way includes a new component, the corona, an unseen domain of matter-- perhaps dust and gas--and is far more extensive than the previously accepted radius of fifty thousand light years (24). This concept begins in some ways to approach the URANTIA Book description of the galaxy; but it also redefines the term Milky Way always to designate the entire galaxy, a possible source of future confusion for readers of The URANTIA Book, which teaches that the Milky Way (old definition) is only the nucleus of the galaxy. URANTIA Book readers might do well to replace this newly ambiguous term with two terms in future discussions: for example, Visual Milky Way or Original Milky Way (old meaning, as used in The URANTIA Book) in contrast to Milky Way Galaxy (new meaning, now becoming accepted by science).

http://www.starspring.com/ascender/astron/astron.html 2/4/99 Astronomy and the Superuniverse Page 4 of 7

At the writing of The URANTIA Book, in 1934, the URANTIA Revelators said that improved observing devices would soon reveal many new objects to us and expand our ideas of the size of the galaxy (25). This is happening now. They also taught that objects then considered outside the galaxy would subsequently be recognized as inside the galaxy (26). They flatly contradicted then- contemporary astronomy by saying that the Magellanic Cloud is a part of our galaxy (using their now- familiar device of wording the improvement over contemporary scientific knowledge in language artfully crafted to be acceptable both before and after the newer scientific discoveries) (27). It wasn't until 1974 that astronomers began to wonder if the galaxy might be larger than previously thought (28) and Einasto, of Estonia, put forward the idea that the Large and Small Clouds of Magellan are a part of our galaxy (29).

ABOVE LEFT: THE CONSTELLATION SAGITTARIUS, looking toward the supposed center of the Milky Way Galaxy.

ABOVE RIGHT: THE LARGE MAGELLANIC CLOUD, only recently recognized by science as a part of the Milky Way Galaxy.

Now, almost fifty years after The URANTIA Book was written, Doctor Bok writes of astronomy's new view of the galaxy (as first put forth by einasto) that the galaxy includes:

"the two small nearby galaxies called the Large and Small Clouds of Magellan and a number of dwarf spheroidal galaxies, of which seven are now known."

One of the dwarf spheroidal galaxies of which he writes lies some 450,000 light years from the center of the Milky Way. Another, the dwarf galaxy Carina, is thought to be 325,000 light years from the center of the Milky Way (30). This is a dramatic change from the fifty-thousand-mile radius that astronomy would have used to judge The URANTIA Book at the time when it was written.

(NOTE: Could the seven dwarf spheroidal galaxies mentioned above be connected with the ten major sectors of the galaxy? The URANTIA Book teaches that at the time of its writing our astronomers had roughly identified eight of the galaxy's ten major sectors (31), but does not indicate whether or not they were recognized as being within our galaxy--a remote possibility in view of the then underestimation of the size of the galaxy. We were told that the major sectors would be recognized as huge and reasonably symmetrical star clusters) (32).

About differences

http://www.starspring.com/ascender/astron/astron.html 2/4/99 Astronomy and the Superuniverse Page 5 of 7

The URANTIA Book is a spiritual revelation, whose spiritual teachings and presentations of history and destiny will never be found to be in error (33). Its scientific statements, however, are in terms of the knowledge of the people originally receiving them. As scientific knowledge advances, these statements will be seen to be in error (34). But not every disagreement between science and The URANTIA Book is automatically such an instance. For example: In the few months between the writing of this article and its pre-publication review, the local library replaced its fourth edition (copyright 1977) of the encyclopedia used as the primary source volume of the article (35) with a fifth edition of the same publication (copyright this year--1982). So much confusion resulted in the review that a fourth edition had to be located. Just under "Galaxy," for example, the fifth edition had: 1) added the galactic corona to the galaxy; 2) disowned the 50,000 light year radius of the galaxy published in the fourth edition and replaced it with a radius of at least 325,000 light years, the difference between disagreement or agreement with The URANTIA Book; and 3) inserted a 5000- light-year-radius by 3000-light-year-thickness figure for the central galactic bulge where the fourth edition had written that no figure was available. Under "Star Cloud," the fifth edition read exactly the same as the fourth, except that it omitted one sentence: a statement that the Large and Small Clouds of Magellan are not in our galaxy--again, the difference between disagreement or agreement with The URANTIA Book.

It would seem wise to hesitate before condemning scientific statements in The URANTIA Book solely on the basis of apparent disagreement with the current but changing views of science. Science is a tool. Like other tools, it can be used erroneously, especially if its limitations are not recognized by those who use it. The fact that science often expresses its findings in numbers commands an air of exactness, even though its numbers are often wrong. Doctor Lewis Thomas, Chancellor of the Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center in New York, has addressed this problem of the inability of scientists and laymen to appreciate the true nature of science, in the following words:

"The endeavor is not, as is sometimes thought, a way of building up a solid, indestructible body of immutable truth, fact laid precisely upon fact in the manner of twigs in an ant hill. Science is not like this at all: it keeps changing, shifting, revising, discovering that it was wrong and then heaving itself explosively apart to redesign everything . . . . Ordinarily scientists do not talk this way about their trade, because there is always in the air the feeling that this time we have it right, this time we are about to come into possession of a finished science knowing almost everything about everything" (36).

Doctor Thomas' observation is borne out, and URANTIA Book readers supported in delaying judgement on discrepancies between the astronomical teachings of science and The URANTIA Book, in the experience of astronomer Doctor Bart Bok (and his colleagues), who writes:

"I remember the mid-1970's as a time when I and my fellow watchers were notably self- assured. The broad outlines of the galaxy seemed reasonably well established . . . . We did not suspect it would soon be necessary to revise the radius of the Milky Way upward by a factor of three or more and to increase its mass by as much as a factor of 10 . . . " (37).

* * *

* The photo at the top of the page is of the Andromeda Nebula. (ok)

References http://www.starspring.com/ascender/astron/astron.html 2/4/99 Astronomy and the Superuniverse Page 6 of 7

URANTIA Foundation, The URANTIA Book, publ. by URANTIA Foundation, Chicago, IL, 1955

Bart J. Bok, "The Milky Way Galaxy," Scientific American (March, 1981)

Lewis Thomas, "On the Uncertainty of Science," Harvard Magazine (September-October 1980)

Isaac Asimov, The Universe From Flat Earth to Black Holes--and Beyond, Walker and Compay, New York, 1980

McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of Science & Technology, 4th ed.

Footnotes 1. UB, pp 1:5,6; 128:1-131:4; 164:4-165:5; 167:4-168:last (ok) 2. UB, pp 167:4-6 (ok) 3. UB, pp 167:4; 130:5 (ok) 4. UB, pp 167:4 (ok) 5. UB, pp 359:last; 168:9 (ok) 6. UB, pp 359:8-360:1 (ok) 7. UB, pp 131:1; 129:6 (ok) 8. UB, pp 165:last-167:2; 455:3; 359:8 (ok) 9. UB, pp 455:2-3; 359:1 (ok) 10. UB, pp 166:3-5; 167:1-2 (ok) 11. UB, pp 168:4-10 (ok) 12. UB, pp 168:3 (ok) 13. UB, pp 168:1; 168:7,8; 455:4; 166:6; 167:3 (ok) 14. UB, pp 459:5 (ok) 15. UB, pp 170:1 (ok) 16. Azimov, pp 84 (ok) 17. Azimov, pp 90 (ok) 18. Azimov, pp 92 (ok) 19. Azimov, pp 203-207 (ok) 20. UB, pp134:3-4; 129:last-130:2 (ok) 21. UB, pp 1439:5; 126:1-4; 467:3 (ok) (ok) 23. Azimov, pp 192-193 (ok) 24. Bok, pp 92-120 (ok) 25. UB, pp 130:last-131:1 (ok) 26. UB, pp 130:last-131:1 (ok) (ok) 28. Bok, pp 94 (ok) 29. Bok, pp 94 (ok) 30. Bok, pp 92-93 (ok) 31. UB, pp 167:last (ok) (ok) 33. UB, pp 1109:3-4 (ok) 34. UB, pp 1109:3-4 (ok) 35. McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of . . . (ok) http://www.starspring.com/ascender/astron/astron.html 2/4/99